JP2022111391A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of improving an amusement of a player.

SOLUTION: A game machine is configured so that, swollen parts 524L, 524R are formed on side surfaces 526L, 526R where game balls which flow down a game area roll, when left and right wing members 520L, 520R are opened. The respective swollen parts 524L, 524R are formed on different positions in a direction where is orthogonal to a direction where game balls roll along planes of the side surfaces 526L, 526R. Therefore, when game balls are sent to one of the left and right wing members 520L, 520R, the swollen parts 524L, 524R can send the game balls to the swollen part 524L, 524R of the other wing member 520L, 520R. Therefore, the game balls can be suppressed from rolling and passing through the side surfaces 526L, 526R.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 26

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine, comprising a ball entrance into which a game ball can be entered, and a guide member having a guide surface for guiding the game ball to the ball entrance and formed to be displaceable. Gaming machines are known. Examples of the guide member include a pair of feather members having a guide surface that guides the game ball to the ball entrance, is disposed across the ball entrance, and is rotatably pivoted at the base end side. Patent Literature 1 discloses a technique in which a first groove is provided on the entire guide surface of one blade member and a second groove is provided on the entire guide surface of the other blade member.

JP-A-2003-164598

However, the gaming machine described above has a problem that the game ball cannot be sufficiently biased.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of biasing a game ball.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has a ball entrance into which a game ball can be entered, and a guide surface for guiding the game ball to the ball entrance and is formed displaceably. The guide member comprises a pair of protruding portions protruding from the guide surface and formed so as to come into contact with a game ball rolling on the guide surface; A pair of protruding portions are arranged at different positions in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the guide member is formed as a pair of feather members disposed on both sides of the ball entrance and rotatably supported at the proximal end side. , By rotating the pair of feather members in a direction in which the tip side approaches or separates, a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass or an open state in which the game ball can pass is formed, and the pair of projecting portions , projecting from the respective guide surfaces of the pair of wing members, wherein the projecting portion of one wing member and the projecting portion of the other wing member of the pair of wing members are aligned with the guide surfaces The positions are varied in the direction orthogonal to the direction along which the game balls are guided.

A gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the protruding portion protrudes from the guide surface at a position closer to the base end side than the tip end side of the feather member.

According to the game machine of claim 1, the game ball can be biased.

According to the game machine of claim 2, in addition to the effects of the game machine of claim 1, the game ball can be biased.

According to the game machine of claim 3, in addition to the effects of the game machine of claim 2, it is possible to smoothly enter the ball into the ball entrance.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an exploded perspective front view of the game board. It is a perspective front view of an operation unit. 4 is an exploded perspective front view of the operation unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; (a) is a front view of the winning opening unit, and (b) is a back view of the winning opening unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of the prize winning opening unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the prize winning opening unit. 4 is an exploded perspective view of a base member and a first electric accessory; FIG. It is an exploded perspective front view of a drive unit. (a) and (b) are side views of a drive unit and a first electric accessory. (a) and (b) are front views of a drive unit and a first electric accessory. 10(a) and 10(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500 along line XVII-XVII in FIG. 10(a). (a) and (b) are front views of the prize winning unit. (a) and (b) are side views of a first electric accessory and a drive unit. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit along line XXa-XXa of FIG. 18(a), and FIG. 20(b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit along line XXb-XXb of FIG. 18(b). be. (a) and (b) are side views of a first electric accessory and a drive unit. (a) is a partially enlarged side view of the drive unit in range XXIIa of FIG. 21(a), and (b) is a partially enlarged side view of the drive unit in range XXIIb of FIG. 21(b). (a) is a front perspective view of the left wing member, and (b) is a front perspective view of the right wing member. (a) is a front view of the winning opening unit, and (b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along line XXIVb-XXIVb of FIG. 24(a). (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit. (a) is a top view of the winning opening unit, and (b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along line XXVIIb-XXVIIb of FIG. 27(a). 27(a) and 27(b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit in range XXVIII of FIG. 27(b). 3 is a partially enlarged view of the game board in range XXIX of FIG. 2; FIG. (a) is a front view of the decorative design display device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the decorative design display device taken along line XXXb-XXXb of FIG. 30(a). It is an exploded perspective front view of a decorative pattern display device. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the decorative pattern display device. (a) is a front view with the inner reel deployed, and (b) is a front view with the outer reel deployed. FIG. 31 is a cross-sectional view of the decorative design display device taken along line XXXIV-XXXIV of FIG. 30(a); 35 is a partially enlarged view of the decorative design display device in range XXXV of FIG. 34; FIG. (a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member taken along line XXXVIb-XXXVIb of FIG. 36(a). It is a front view of a segment display device. 1 is an exploded view of a segment display device; FIG. (a) is a front view of a vertical displacement unit, and (b) is a side view of the vertical displacement unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective front view of the vertical displacement unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective rear view of the vertical displacement unit; (a) is a front view of the second segment unit, and (b) is a rear view of the second segment unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective front view of a second segment unit; FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective rear view of the second segment unit; FIG. 42B is a cross-sectional view of the second segment unit taken along line XLV-XLV in FIG. 42(a); It is a side view of a base member. FIG. 43 is a cross-sectional view of the second segment unit taken along line XLVII-XLVII in FIG. 42(a); It is a front view of a vertical displacement unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective front view of the vertical displacement unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective rear view of the vertical displacement unit; (a) is a front view of a displacement member, and (b) is a side view of the displacement member. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective front view of a displacement member; FIG. 51(a) is a cross-sectional view of the displacement member taken along line LIII-LIII of FIG. 51(a); It is a front view of a displacement member. It is a front view of a segment display device and a decorative pattern display device. It is a schematic diagram of a segment display device and a decorative pattern display device. (a) to (c) are front views of the vertical displacement unit. (a) is a side view of the vertical displacement unit, and (b) is a sectional view of the vertical displacement unit along line LVIIIb-LVIIIb of FIG. 57(a). (a) is a side view of the vertical displacement unit, and (b) is a sectional view of the vertical displacement unit along line LVIIIb-LVIIIb of FIG. 57(a). (a) is a side view of the vertical displacement unit, and (b) is a sectional view of the vertical displacement unit along line LVIIIb-LVIIIb of FIG. 57(a). It is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit. It is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit. It is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit. 64(a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member in the second embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member taken along line LXIVb-LXIVb of FIG. 64(a). It is a sectional view of a decorative design display device in a 3rd embodiment. (a) is a partially enlarged view of the outer reel unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the outer reel unit taken along line LXVIb-LXVIb of FIG. 66(a). It is a sectional view of a decorative design display device in a 4th embodiment. (a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member taken along line LXVIIIb-LXVIIIb of FIG. 68(a). It is a sectional view of a decorative design display device in a 5th embodiment. (a) is a partially enlarged view of an annular member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the annular member taken along line LXXb-LXXb of FIG. 70(a). It is a sectional view of a decorative design display device in a 6th embodiment. (a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member taken along line LXXIIb-LXXIIb of FIG. 72(a). (a) is a partially enlarged view of the outer reel unit, and (b) is a sectional view of the outer reel unit taken along line LXXIIIb-LXXIIIb of FIG. 73(a). (a) is a front view of a rotating member in a seventh embodiment, and (b) is a side view of the rotating member. (a) to (c) are side views of a drive unit and a first electric accessory. (a) to (c) are front views of a drive unit and a first electric accessory. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit. FIG. 21 is an exploded perspective front view of a drive unit in an eighth embodiment; (a) and (b) are side views of a first electric accessory and a drive unit. (a) and (b) are front views of a first electric accessory and a drive unit. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit. FIG. 21 is an exploded perspective front view of a drive unit in a ninth embodiment; (a) and (b) are side views of a first electric accessory and a drive unit. (a) and (b) are front views of a first electric accessory and a drive unit. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit. (a) is a front view of a displacement member in a tenth embodiment, and (b) is a side view of the displacement member. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective front view of a displacement member; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of a vertical displacement unit; 91 (a) and (b) are partially enlarged views of the vertical displacement unit in the range XCI of FIG. 90. FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit in the eleventh embodiment; It is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit. It is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit. 95(a) is a top view of the winning opening unit in the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along line XCVb-XCVb of FIG. 95(a). 96(a) is a top view of the winning opening unit in the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along line XCVIb-XCVIb of FIG. 96(a). (a) is a perspective front view of a left wing member in a fourteenth embodiment, and (b) is a perspective front view of a right wing member. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the prize-winning unit, (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the left wing member taken along line XCVIIIb-XCVIIIb in FIG. 98(a), and (c) is FIG. 98(b). is a schematic cross-sectional view of the right wing member taken along line XCVIIIc-XCVIIIc of FIG. (a) is a partially enlarged view of the game board in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board along line XCIXb-XCIXb in FIG. (a) is a partially enlarged view of the game board, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board taken along line Cb-Cb in FIG. 100(a). (a) is a front view of the first electric accessory and the drive unit in the sixteenth embodiment, and (b) is a cross section of the first electric accessory and the drive unit 8530 along line CIb-CIb of FIG. 101(a). FIG. 101(c) is a cross-sectional view of the first electric accessory and drive unit taken along line CIc-CIc of FIG. 101(b); (a) and (b) are side views of a first electric accessory and a drive unit according to the seventeenth embodiment. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit. 105(a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member in the eighteenth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member taken along line CVb-CVb of FIG. 105(a). (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of a decorative design display device according to an eighteenth embodiment.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, referring to FIGS. 1 to 63, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 2 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 2 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 2. and an inner frame 4 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 2 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 4, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided serves as an opening and closing axis. A frame 4 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 4 from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 4 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1). 5 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported toward the front side so that they can be opened and closed. The locking of the inner frame 4 and the locking of the front door 5 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front door 5 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 5c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses 8 is arranged on the back side of the front door 5, and the front side of the pachinko machine 10 can be visually recognized through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

An upper tray 17 for storing balls projects forward from the front door 5 and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . This frame button 22 can be used, for example, to change the aspect of the effect displayed on the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 (see FIG. 2), or to change the content of the Super Reach effect. operated by a person.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front door 5 (for example, at corners). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illumination parts 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window part 5c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and each of the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or flashing of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, an indicator lamp 34 is provided at the upper left portion of the front door 5 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The indicator lamp 34 has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and is capable of indicating whether prize balls are being dispensed and when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front door 5 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right side electric decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 5c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, ie, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 which is cut into a substantially square shape in a front view. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). attached to the back side of the The base plate 60 is made of wood by pasting together thin plate materials, and is formed so that various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 cannot be seen from the front side of the base plate 60 by the player. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side.

The central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5c of the front door 5 (see FIG. 1). Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

An outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 77 is placed inside the outer rail 77. An arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 76 and 77 and a resin-made outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a prize-winning opening, etc. area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 76 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B provided with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged in the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 140.例文帳に追加Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball enters the second winning hole 140, the first The pattern display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability, the time saving mode, or the normal mode by the lighting state, or whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state by the lighting state. Whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state, and the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates the round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and depending on the combination of the emission colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

Incidentally, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a prize is won in either the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 140.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 4R probability variable jackpot, and a 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. .

Here, the “15R probability variable jackpot” is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the “4R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and a time-saving state during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special game state It is the state of The high-probability state (during variable probability) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of winning a second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 140 . "Low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains as it is, only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second winning port 140 It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is likely to win a prize. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it means that the game is in a state of neither variable probability nor time reduction (state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the second pattern winning probability is increased).

During the probability change or the time reduction, not only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, but also the time during which the first electric accessory 520 attached to the second prize winning opening 140 is opened is changed, which is longer than during normal. Time is set. When the first electric accessory 520 is in the open state (open state), compared to the case where the first electric accessory 520 is in the closed state (closed state), to the second winning port 140 The ball will be in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 140, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the first electric accessory 520 associated with the second winning opening 140 during the probability change or during the time saving, or in addition to changing the opening time, one hit may be changed to increase the number of times that the first electric accessory 520 is opened in . In addition, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the first electric role product 520 associated with the second winning opening 140 is opened and the first electric role product 520 is opened once. At least one of the number of times 520 opens may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time in which the first electric accessory 520 attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened and the number of times the first electric accessory 520 is opened per hit are not changed. Only the winning probability of the second symbol may be changed so as to be increased as compared with the normal state.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, with the winning of either the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140 (start winning) as a trigger, the third A second pattern display device (not shown) composed of a segment display device 600 and a decorative pattern display device 800 that perform variable display of patterns, and an LED that variably displays the second pattern triggered by the passage of the ball through the first through gate 66 ) are provided.

A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 . The segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 can be visually recognized from the opening opened in the center of the center frame 86 .

In the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. , decorative display and displacement operation according to the display of the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B. Instead of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800, for example, a liquid crystal display may be used to display the game state.

The second symbol display device alternately displays a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the first through gate 66. This is to perform a variable display that lights up. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the first electric role product 520 associated with the second winning hole 140 It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the variable probability or during the time reduction than during the normal game state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability variation and the time reduction, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during normal times. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player more chances to open the first electric accessory 520 of the second winning opening 140 . Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 140 during the probability variation and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, other methods such as increasing the probability of winning, increasing the opening time and the number of openings of the first electric accessory 520 for one hit, etc. The second winning opening during the probability change or time reduction When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the ball to 140, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during the variable probability or during the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and one winning The opening time and the number of openings of the first electric accessory 520 may be constant regardless of the game state.

The first through gate 66 is attached to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display unit 80 . The first through gate 66 is configured so that a part of the balls flowing down the game board among the balls launched to the game board can pass through. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the first through gate 66 is suspended up to four times in total, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and the second symbol suspension lamp (not shown) is displayed. ) is also illuminated. Four second design reservation lamps are provided for the maximum number of reservations, and are arranged symmetrically below the segment display device 600 and the decorative design display device 800 .

The variable display of the second pattern may be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 may be used. Similarly, the segment display device 600 and a part of the decorative pattern display device 800 may light up the second symbol reservation lamp. Also, the maximum number of held balls for passage of the ball through the first through gate 66 is not limited to 4, and may be set to 3 or less or 5 or more times (e.g., 8 times). . Also, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Also, the mounting position of the through gate is not limited to the right and left sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be below the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning hole 64 through which balls can win is arranged. When a ball enters the first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the first winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the right side of the first prize winning port 64 in front view, a second prize winning port 140 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball enters the second winning hole 140, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 ( 4), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the first symbol display device 37B.

Also, the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 140 are also one of the prize winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 140 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 140 are different numbers, for example, the number of balls to the first prize winning port 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a wins a prize may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second prize winning port 140 may be five.

A first electric accessory 520 is attached to the second prize winning port 140 . The first electric accessory 520 is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the first electric accessory 520 is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 140. there is On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the first through gate 66, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the first electric accessory 520 is displayed. It becomes an open state (expanded state), and the state is such that the ball can easily enter the second winning port 140 .

As described above, during the variable probability and during the time saving, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so in the variable display of the second symbol "○ , and the number of times the first electric accessory 520 is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the first electric accessory 520 is opened is also longer during the variable probability or the shorter working hours than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning port 140 during the variable probability or the shorter working hours compared to the normal time.

Here, when the ball enters the first prize winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second prize winning port 140, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of the 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning port 140 than when the ball enters the first winning port 64. is set. On the other hand, the first prize winning port 64 does not have the first electric accessory 520 like the second prize winning port 140, and is in a state where balls can always win prizes.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessory attached to the second prize winning port 140 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second prize winning port 140. Then, a ball is shot so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by winning the first prize-winning port 64, many chances of a big winning lottery are obtained, and a big win is achieved. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 520 attached to the second winning opening 140 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning opening 140 is won. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is shot toward the second prize winning opening 140 so that the ball passes through the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “right hitting”), and is passed through the first through gate 66. It is more advantageous for the player to open the first electric accessory 520 by pressing and aiming for a 15R probability variable jackpot by winning the second prize winning port 140.例文帳に追加

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment shoots balls to the player according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the probability is variable, the time is short, or the game is normal). It is possible to change the way of hitting to "left hitting" and "right hitting". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

A variable prize winning device 65 is provided on the right side of the first prize winning port 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific prize winning port (large open port) 65a is provided in the substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of either the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 140 results in a jackpot, the jackpot is stopped after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is lit so as to become a symbol, and the stop symbol corresponding to the big win is displayed on the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800 to indicate the occurrence of the big win. be After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Specifically, the variable prize winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific prize winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. and The specific prize winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to enter the specific prize winning port 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state are formed. It operates to alternate between states.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. You may make it form as a state. In addition, the number of specific winning holes 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged. It may be on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 .

An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided through the first out hole 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The first out port 71 is arranged below the first winning port 64 .

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

Main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, display controller 114, payout controller 111, launch controller 112, power supply 115, and card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100-104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover unopenably by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side of the case rail 132; ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main controller 110, the MPU 201 controls the pachinko machine 10 such as the jackpot lottery, the setting of the display in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800, and the lottery of the display results in the second pattern display device. perform the main processing of

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected. to send.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 .

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effects. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like. Other devices 228 include drive motors KM1, KM2, and KM3.

Sound lamp control device 113, based on the various commands received from the main control device 110 (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.), determines the display mode of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800, has been determined The display mode is notified to the display control device 114 by a command (variation pattern command for display, stop type command for display, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the mode displayed on the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800. or to change the contents of the effect at the time of super reach to the display controller 114. When the displayed mode is changed, in order to display the decoration corresponding to the changed displayed mode on the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800, the information on the changed displayed mode is included. A back image change command is sent to the display controller 114 . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image displayed on the segment display device 600 and the decorative design display device 800 . The display control device 114 displays various decorations on the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

Also, the audio lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display contents of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, according to the display content of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800, the audio corresponding to the display content is output from the audio output device 226 Also, it controls the lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 corresponding to the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113, the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800, and based on the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 It controls the display such as the variable effect of the third pattern. Moreover, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 and the audio from the audio output device 226 output can be matched.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, a schematic configuration of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective front view of the game board 13. FIG. Note that FIG. 13 shows a state in which the winning port unit 500 is disassembled from the game board 13 .

As shown in FIG. 5, the prize winning unit 500 is a game board formed by partitioning two rails 76 and 77 planted on the front surface of the game board 13 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails. It is inserted from the front side into an opening 13a formed below the region. A detailed configuration of the prize winning unit 500 will be described later.

Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 9. FIG. FIG. 6 is a perspective front view of the operation unit 300. FIG. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective front view of the operation unit 300. FIG. 8 and 9 are front views of the operation unit 300. FIG.

8 shows a state in which the displacement members 670 arranged in a pair above and below the segment display device 600 are respectively retracted to both upper and lower sides, in FIG. A state in which the provided displacement member 670 protrudes to the upper and lower central positions is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the operation unit 300 includes a box-shaped rear case 400, and the interior space of the rear case 400 contains a decorative pattern display device 800, a segment display device 600, and a decorative unit 700. is accommodated.

The rear case 400 includes a bottom wall portion 401 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and an outer wall portion 402 that stands upright from the outer edges of four sides of the bottom wall portion 401 toward the front. It is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open. A rectangular opening 401a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 401, and the segment display device 600 is arranged from the rear side of the rear case 400 through the opening 401a.

Three decorative pattern display devices 800 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction in the opening 401a of the bottom wall portion 401 of the rear case 400. As shown in FIG. The decorative pattern display device 800 is provided with an inner reel unit 810 and an outer reel unit 820 (see FIG. 31) that rotate and displace in the vertical direction. It is configured so that the player can visually recognize the manner in which the symbols fluctuate (rotate). A detailed description of the decorative pattern display device 800 will be given later.

The segment display device 600 is arranged on the bottom wall portion 401 of the rear case 400 and covers the decorative pattern display device 800 . A predetermined gap is formed between the opposing base members 660 (see FIG. 49) of the decorative pattern display device 800, and by disposing the decorative pattern display device 800 in the gap, , the decorative pattern display device 800 can be visually recognized.

Further, the segment display device 600 is provided with a displacement member 670 (see FIG. 49) that can be displaced in front of the gap between the facing base members 660 described above. By displacing it forward, it is possible to form an effect form in which the decorative symbol display device 800 cannot be visually recognized from the player side. A detailed description of the segment display device 600 will be given later.

The decorative units 700 are formed in a horizontally long rectangular box shape when viewed from the front, and are arranged in pairs above and below the segment display device 600 . The decoration unit 700 is made of a transparent resin material and has a shape that imitates the logo, title, etc. of the pachinko machine 10 . In addition, an LED board that emits light is disposed inside the decoration unit 700 so as to be able to emit light to the player side.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 10 to 29, a detailed description of the prize winning port unit 500 will be given. First, with reference to FIGS. 10 to 13, the configuration of the winning opening unit 500 will be described.

10(a) is a front view of the prize winning unit 500, and FIG. 10(b) is a rear view of the prize winning unit 500. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective front view of the winning opening unit 500, and FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective rear view of the winning opening unit 500. FIG. 13 is an exploded perspective view of the base member 510 and the first electric accessory 520. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 10 to 13, the prize winning unit 500 includes a base member 510 arranged on the front surface of the game board 13 (see FIG. 5) and a rotatable shaft inside the base member 510. It mainly includes a first electric accessory 520 to be supported and a drive unit 530 for applying a driving force to the first electric accessory 520 .

The base member 510 is formed by fastening a front base 511 arranged on the front side and a rear base 512 arranged at a predetermined interval from the front base 511 .

The front base 511 is formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and is formed of a transparent resin material. The front base 511 includes a first projecting portion 511a projecting rearward from the upper end of the central portion in the horizontal direction, a second projecting portion 511b projecting rearward from the lower end of the central portion in the horizontal direction, and the second projecting portion 511b. 511b and a third protrusion 511c that protrudes at a position separated by a predetermined gap in the left-right direction.

Also. The front base 511 is arranged at a position where the front surface thereof can be visually recognized from the player side, and a pattern is formed on the front surface side by unevenness.

The first protruding portion 511a is attached to the rear base 512 when the first electric accessory 520, which will be described later, is in a closed state (a state in which the tips of the feather members 520L and 520R are positioned above the rotation shaft (shaft member JB1)). It is a plate member for preventing the game ball from being thrown into the formed second winning hole 140 .

That is, the first projecting portion 511a is formed in the upper portion between the pair of feather members 520L and 520R facing each other in the closed state, and the distance between the first electric accessory 520 and the first projecting portion 511a is equal to the diameter of the game ball. is set smaller than

Further, the upper surface of the first projecting portion 511a is formed so as to be inclined downward from a substantially central position in the left-right direction toward both left and right end portions. As a result, the game ball thrown to the upper portion of the first projecting portion 511a can roll on its upper surface and drop (flow down) downward.

The second protruding portion 511b is formed to protrude from the rear side of the front base 511 in a horizontally long rectangular shape, and the position of the upper end surface in the vertical direction is lower than the bottom surface of the second prize winning opening 140 of the rear base 512. set. The second protruding portion 511b includes a standing portion 511b1 standing in front of the second prize winning opening 140 of the rear base 512, engaging portions 511b2 protruding from both left and right ends of the standing portion 511b1, and a bottom portion. It is mainly formed with a recessed portion 511b3 that is recessed in the .

A base member 511f including an LED for emitting light is arranged on the second projecting portion 511b below the standing portion 511b1. The LEDs of the base member 511f are arranged so as to emit light upward. Therefore, the surroundings of the second prize winning opening 140 can be illuminated by the LED.

The standing portion 511b1 is formed to stand upward from the upper end of the second protruding portion 511b, and two of them are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and the leading ends of the standing portions 511b1 are connected to each other. The upright portion 511b1 is formed so that its upper surface is inclined downward toward the second winning opening 140 (back side), and the vertical position of the end on the second winning opening 140 side is the second winning opening 140. is set to a height that coincides with the bottom of the Therefore, the game ball thrown to the upper portion of the standing portion 511b1 can roll toward the second winning hole 140 side. Therefore, the game ball thrown to the upper part of the erected portion 511b1 can enter the second winning hole 140. As shown in FIG.

In addition, the connection portion of the standing portions 511b1 arranged side by side is formed in a shape in which the central position in the circumferential direction is recessed downward. As a result, the game ball thrown to the upper portion of the standing portion 511b1 can be easily retained at the central position in the left-right direction of the standing portion 511b1. Therefore, the rolling direction of the game ball thrown to the upper portion of the standing portion 511b1 can be quickly switched to the second winning hole 140 side. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game ball thrown to the upper part of the standing portion 511b1 from colliding with the game ball thrown later and being pushed out, and the game ball is easily made to enter the second winning hole 140. can.

The engaging portions 511b2 are portions that engage left and right feather members 520L and 520R, which will be described later, and project from both left and right sides of the base end portion of the standing portion 511b1 toward the center of the shaft support portion 511d, which will be described later.

The recessed portion 511b3 is a recess for forming a space for inserting a driver when fastening the front base 511 and the rear base 512 together. Thereby, the screw can be inserted through the through-hole 511b4 that is formed through the side surface of the recessed portion 511b3 on the back side.

The third projecting portion 511c is a plate member that rolls the game ball in the first out port 71 formed in the back base 512, and is formed in two places on the back base 512 with the second winning port 140 interposed therebetween. They are formed adjacent to both laterally outer sides of the 1-out port 71 . In other words, the third projecting portion 511c is formed at a position separated in the horizontal direction by the dimension of the second projecting portion 511b and the first out port 71 in the horizontal direction.

The bottom surfaces of the third protruding portions 511c are inclined downward toward the respective adjacent first outlets 71 (toward the center of the front base 511 in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 10(a))), The lowest position is set higher than the bottom surface of the first out port 71 . Therefore, the game ball thrown to the upper part of the 3rd protrusion part 511c can be rolled toward the 1st out port 71, and can be made to enter the 1st out port 71. FIG.

The shaft supporting portion 511d is formed so as to protrude from the back side of the front base 511 in an annular shape, and two shaft supporting portions 511d are formed at the same height in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 10(a)) with the standing portion 511b1 interposed therebetween. . The inner diameter of the shaft support portion 511d is formed to be larger than the diameter of the shaft member JB1, which will be described later. Therefore, the shaft member JB1 can be inserted inside the shaft support portion 511d.

The rear base 512 is formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body that is larger than the front base 511 in front view. Therefore, the player can directly see the front surface of the rear base 512 that does not overlap the front base 511 in the front-rear direction.

In addition, since the front base 511 is made of a transparent material, the rear base 512 can be seen through the front base 511 in the portion where the front base 511 overlaps in front. Furthermore, the player can visually recognize game balls thrown between the rear base 512 and the front base 511 through the front base 511 .

The rear base 512 includes a first prize winning port 64 formed at the upper end of the front side, a second prize winning port 140 formed below the first prize winning port 64, and formed on both sides of the second prize winning port 140. and a general winning hole 63 formed above the first out hole 71 on the right side in front view.

The first prize winning opening 64 is recessed downward from the upper end portion of the front base 511 in the lateral direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 10(a)) at a substantially central position, and protrudes in both the front and rear directions along the recessed edge portion. It is formed. In addition, the projecting tip on the front side (the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 10A) is closed by a plate member.

The concave shape of the first winning hole 64 is formed with a size that allows a game ball to pass through the inside thereof, and the bottom surface (the inner surface on the lower side in the direction of gravity) is inclined toward the back side. Thereby, the game ball entering the first winning hole 64 can be thrown to the back side of the game board 13. - 特許庁

The second prize winning port 140 is formed through the first prize winning port 64 on the lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 10(a)). The second prize winning opening 140 is formed in a square shape having a dimension larger than the diameter of the game ball when viewed from the front. Therefore, the game ball can be thrown to the back side of the game board 13 through the second winning hole 140.例文帳に追加In addition, the second prize winning port 140 includes recesses 140a recessed on the left and right inner side surfaces.

The recess 140a is curved around the axis of the shaft hole 512a. Thereby, projections 523L and 523R of left and right blade members 520L and 520R, which will be described later, can be accommodated inside. That is, inside the second winning hole 140, the game ball is allowed to pass through, and the protrusions 523L and 523R are inserted therethrough.

The shaft holes 512a are recessed from the front side to the back side on both left and right sides of the second prize winning opening 140 of the back base 512 . The shaft hole 512a is a groove for inserting therein a shaft member JB1, which will be described later, and is formed in a circular shape with a diameter larger than the diameter of the shaft member JB1.

The first out port 71 is formed through both left and right sides of the second prize winning port 140 . The first out port 71 is a hole for collecting game balls that have flowed down the game area formed on the front surface of the game board 13. The first out port 71 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a width in the vertical direction (lateral direction). The size is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the first outlet 71 is formed such that its bottom surface (the inner surface on the lower side in the direction of gravity) is inclined toward the back side. Therefore, the game ball entering the first out port 71 can be thrown to the back side of the game board 13. - 特許庁

The first outlet 71 is formed with a guide wall 512b that connects with the bottom surface and protrudes toward the front side. The guide wall 512b is a member for receiving a game ball flowing down the game area on its upper surface and throwing the ball to the first out port 71, and its upper surface is formed so as to slope downward toward the back side.

In addition, a plurality of ribs extending in the front-rear direction are arranged side by side on the bottom surface (lower surface) of the guide wall 512b. Thereby, the rigidity of the guide wall 512b can be improved. As a result, it is possible to prevent the guide wall 512b from being damaged when the game ball flowing down the game area collides with the upper surface of the guide wall 512b.

The fastening between the front base 511 and the rear base 512 is performed by the above-described through hole 511b4 and a fastening hole 512c formed through the rear base 512 at a position corresponding to the through hole 511b4. That is, in a state in which the front base 511 and the rear base 512 are combined in the front-rear direction, a screwdriver is inserted into the concave portion 511b3 from the lower side of the front base 511, and the screw is fastened to the fastening hole 512c through the through hole 511b4. can be done by

The first electric accessory 520 is formed as one unit of a left wing member 520L arranged on the left side of the second prize winning opening 140 in front view and a right wing member 520R arranged on the right side in front view.

The left wing member 520L and the right wing member 520R are different only in the positions of bulging portions 524L and 524R, which will be described later. Except for the projecting portions 524L and 524R, only the left wing member 520L will be described, and the detailed description of the right wing member 520R will be omitted.

The left wing member 520L and the right wing member 520R are driven by a solenoid 531 of the drive unit 530, which will be described later. It can be displaced between a second state (open state) in which the corner portion on the far side from the through hole 521L is displaced to a position spaced outward in the left-right direction of the second prize winning opening 140, and the first state unless otherwise specified. shall be explained. Also, in the first state, the side surfaces of the left and right feather members 520L and 520R facing each other will be described with reference numerals of side surfaces 526L and 526R.

The left wing member 520L is formed in a generally triangular shape in a front view, and is formed in a dimension larger than the diameter of the game ball in the front-rear direction. The left wing member 520L has a through hole 521L penetrating in the front-rear direction at the lower end portion in the direction of gravity, a recess 522L recessed from the front side to the back side around the through hole 521L, and a back surface from the vicinity of the through hole 521L. a protrusion 523L protruding to the side, a recessed portion 525L recessed in the radial direction of the through-hole 521L on the end face of the through-hole 521L, a bulging portion 524L protruding from the side surface 526L, and the interior of the through-hole 521L. It mainly includes a shaft member JB1 that is inserted into the . A detailed description of the bulging portion 524L will be given later.

The shaft member JB1 is a columnar rod member made of a metal material. The shaft member JB1 is a shaft that rotatably holds the left and right feather members 520L and 520R, and has an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 521L.

Further, the axial length of the shaft member JB1 is substantially the same as or slightly shorter than the separation distance from the recessed front end surface of the shaft hole 512a to the rear side of the front base 511. As shown in FIG. Therefore, when assembling the front base 511 and the rear base 512, one end of the shaft member JB1 (the end on the rear base 512 side) is inserted into the shaft hole 512a, and the other end (the end on the front base 511 side) is inserted into the shaft hole 512a. ) inside the shaft support portion 511d, the shaft member JB1 can be held between the front base 511 and the rear base 512. As shown in FIG.

The dimension of the left wing member 520L in the front-rear direction is set to be smaller than the dimension of the distance between the front base 511 and the rear base 512 facing each other. Therefore, when the front base 511 and the rear base 512 are assembled, by inserting the shaft member JB1 into the through hole 521L, the feather member 520L can be rotatably held between the front base 511 and the rear base 512. .

The recessed portion 522L is recessed from the front side around the axis of the through hole 521L, and the dimension of the recessed portion is set smaller than the projection distance of the shaft support portion 511d. Also, the distance dimension from the axis of the through hole 521L of the recess 522L to the inner peripheral surface is set to be larger than the radial dimension from the axis of the shaft support portion 511d to the outer peripheral surface.

Therefore, when the blade member 520L is arranged between the front base 511 and the rear base 512, the front surface of the blade member 520L and the rear surface of the front base 511 can be prevented from coming into contact with each other, and the blade member 520L and the front surface can be prevented from contacting each other. The contact portion with the base 511 can be the recessed portion 522L and the pivot portion 511d. Therefore, the blade member 520L and the front base 511 can be partially grounded. As a result, when the blade member 520L is rotated by driving a solenoid 531, which will be described later, the resistance acting on the blade member 520L can be reduced, making it easier to rotate the blade member 520L.

In addition, since the shaft support portion 511d can be accommodated inside the recess 522L, the distance between the front base 511 and the rear base 512 facing each other can be reduced. As a result, the distance dimension in the front-rear direction of the winning opening unit 500 can be reduced.

Here, conventionally, there has been a game machine in which the shaft member JB1 is internally fitted into the through hole 521L of the feather member 520L.

However, in the conventional game machine, since the shaft member JB1 is fitted into the through hole 521L, when the feather member 520L is damaged, it is necessary to replace the feather member 520L and the shaft member JB1 when replacing parts. be. Therefore, there is a problem that the parts cost is high.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the shaft member JB1 is only inserted into the through hole 521L formed in the feather member 520L, and the feather member 520L and the shaft member JB1 are separated into the winning opening unit 500. can be arranged. Therefore, when the feather member 520L is damaged, only the feather member 520L can be replaced. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in component cost.

Further, as described above, the fastening of the front base 511 to the rear base 512 can be performed from the front side of the front base 511 . Therefore, when the feather member 520L is damaged, the front base 511 can be removed from the back base 512 while the prize winning unit 500 is attached to the game board 13.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to easily replace the parts of the feather member 520L.

That is, when the front base 511 is removed from the rear side of the rear base 512, it is necessary to remove the winning slot unit 500 from the game board 13 and then remove the front base 511 from the rear base 512. Since it is formed to be removable from the side, the front base 511 can be easily removed. As a result, it is possible to easily replace the parts of the feather member 520L.

Here, if the front base 511 is made removable from the front side of the rear base 512, the heads of the screws or the like that fasten the front base 511 and the rear base 512 can be visually recognized from the player side (front side), and the player can , the player's interest may be spoiled by visually recognizing the head of the screw that fastens the front base 511 and the rear base 512 .

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the fastening between the front base 511 and the rear base 512 is performed using the space of the concave portion 511b3 formed in the front base 511 . That is, by obliquely inserting a screwdriver into the concave portion 511b3 from the lower side of the front base 511, a screw can be fastened to the fastening hole 512c through the through hole 511b4. Therefore, even when the front base 511 is located on the front side of the through hole 511b4, the front base 511 and the rear base 512 can be fastened by inserting a screwdriver obliquely into the recessed portion 511b3. Therefore, the head of the screw or the like that fastens the front base 511 and the rear base 512 can be made difficult to see from the player's side (front side). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being spoiled by visually recognizing the head of the screw that fastens the front base 511 and the rear base 512 .

Also, usually, the decorative symbol display device 800 and the segment display device 600 that can be visually recognized through an opening formed in the center of the game board 13 are set at the eye level of the player. Therefore, the prize-winning unit 500 is arranged below the line-of-sight height of the player. As a result, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the heads of the screws that fasten the front base 511 and the rear base 512, and the player can visually recognize the heads of the screws that fasten the front base 511 and the rear base 512. can be suppressed from being damaged.

Since the front base 511 is made of a transparent resin material, the screw heads can be seen through the front base 511. However, as described above, the front base 511 has unevenness on the front side. Since the pattern is formed, light can be emitted in other directions due to the difference in the thickness of the plate. This obscures the screw heads that are visible through the front base 511 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest.

A detailed description of the drive unit 530 will now be provided with reference to FIGS. 14-16. 14 is an exploded perspective front view of the drive unit 530. FIG. 15(a) and 15(b) are side views of the drive unit 530 and the first electric accessory 520. FIG. 16(a) and 16(b) are front views of the drive unit 530 and the first electric accessory 520. FIG.

15(a) and 16(a) show the first electric accessory 520 in the first state, and FIGS. 15(b) and 16(b) show the first electric A state in which the accessory 520 is positioned in the second state is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 14, the drive unit 530 includes a solenoid 531, a sliding member 532 connected to the solenoid 531, a rotating member 533 connected to the sliding member 532, the rotating member 533 and the sliding member. It mainly comprises a first case member 534 in which the member 532 is displaceably arranged, and a second case member 536 attached to the rear side of the first case member 534 .

The solenoid 531 includes a main body portion 531a that has an electric wire inside and generates an electromagnetic force when electric power flows through the electric wire, a movable body 531b that is slidably disposed inside the main body portion, and the movable body. and an engaging portion 531c attached to the tip of the .

The main body portion 531a is formed in a prism shape elongated in the front-rear direction, and an electric wire is arranged inside. A concave portion is formed on the front side of the main body portion 531a, and a movable body 531b formed in a cylindrical shape is disposed inside the concave portion.

The movable body 531b is made of a metal material, and can slide to the rear side (inside the body 531a) by generating an electromagnetic force when electric power is applied to the wires of the body 531a.

The engaging portion 531c is attached to the end of the movable body 531b opposite to the body portion 531a. The engaging portion 531c is formed in the shape of a disk having an outer diameter larger than that of the movable body 531b, and is arranged so that its axis is substantially collinear with the axis of the movable body 531b.

The engaging portion 531c is inserted into an engaging groove 532a2 of the sliding member 532, which will be described later. As a result, the sliding member 532 can be displaced in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 15(a)) as the movable body 531b is displaced.

The sliding member 532 is formed in a substantially E-shape when viewed from above, and includes a connecting portion 532a extending in the left-right direction and two first sliding members 532a projecting from the left and right ends of the connecting portion 532a toward the front side. It mainly includes a protrusion 532b and a second protrusion 532c located between the two first protrusions 532b and protruding on the front side.

The sliding member 532 is formed so that the lateral dimension of the connecting portion 532a is smaller than the lateral dimension of the inner circumferential surface of the first case member 534, which will be described later. Thereby, the sliding member 532 can be accommodated and arranged inside the first case member 534 .

The connecting portion 532a is formed on both sides of the proximal end of the second protrusion 532c, a recess 532a1 recessed on the back side, an engaging groove 532a2 recessed from the top side connected to the front side of the recess 532a1, and the second projection 532c. The cut portion 532a3 is mainly provided with the cut portion 532a3.

As described above, the recessed portion 532a1 is a recess that prevents the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 from coming into contact with the connecting portion 532a when the engaging portion 531c of the solenoid 531 is inserted into the engaging groove 532a2. That is, the concave portion 532a1 is formed in an arcuate shape whose concave surface is larger than the outer diameter of the movable body 531b. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 from coming into contact with the connecting portion 532a.

The engagement groove 532a2 is formed so as to be connected to the front side of the recess 532a1, and the depth of the recess in the direction of gravity from the upper surface side is set larger than the diameter of the engagement portion 531c. The engagement groove 532a2 has a lateral width larger than the diameter of the engaging portion 531c and a longitudinal width substantially equal to or engaged with the longitudinal thickness of the engaging portion 531c. It is formed larger than the thickness dimension in the front-rear direction of the portion 531c. Therefore, the engaging portion 531c can be inserted inside the engaging groove 532a2.

The cut portion 532a3 is a cut for facilitating elastic deformation of the sliding member 532 when connecting the first projection 532b described later to the rotating member 533. It is formed on both sides and cut toward the rear side.

The first projection 532b has an engagement hole 532d penetrating in the left-right direction. 532 d of engagement holes are formed in the shape of an elongated hole elongated in the front-back direction. It is mainly formed with a recessed second opening 532d2. A detailed description of the first opening 532d1 and the second opening 532d2 will be given later.

The engagement hole 532d is set so that the vertical width of the central portion in the front-rear direction (the portion other than the first opening 532d1 and the second opening 532d2) is larger than the vertical width of the projection 533b of the rotating member 533, which will be described later. be done. Thereby, the projection 533b can be arranged inside the engaging hole 532d.

The second protrusion 532c is formed between the two first protrusions 532b as described above and protrudes toward the front side. In addition, the second projection 532c has an upright wall 532c1 erected downward on the distal end side opposite to the connecting portion 532a. A detailed description of the standing wall 532c1 will be given later.

The rotary member 533 is formed by arranging two plate-like bodies that are substantially L-shaped in a side view side by side with a predetermined width therebetween in the left-right direction, and is formed by connecting the opposed portions on one end side thereof with a connecting portion 533a. be. The gap between the two plate-shaped bodies of the rotating member 533 is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball can pass through the inside of the rotating member 533 (between the two plate-shaped bodies facing each other).

In addition, the width dimension of the rotating member 533 in the left-right direction (the dimension between the outer surfaces of the two plate-like bodies facing each other) is set smaller than the dimension between the inner facing sides of the two first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 532. be. As a result, the rotating member 533 can be arranged between the opposing first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 532 .

The rotating member 533 includes a rotating shaft 533c that protrudes to both sides in the left-right direction from a bent portion that is substantially L-shaped when viewed from the side; It is mainly formed with a driving portion 533d that is recessed at the tip of the other end of the L shape.

The rotating shaft 533c is formed to protrude from both the left and right outer sides of the rotating member 533, and the distance dimension between the protruding end surfaces thereof is set substantially equal to the width dimension of the first case member 534 in the left-right direction. Also, the projection dimension of the rotating shaft 533c is set larger than the thickness dimension of the first case member 534 in the left-right direction. Therefore, by receiving the rotating shaft 533c inside a recessed portion 534a of the first case member 534, which will be described later, and by assembling the second case member 535 to the first case member 534, the rotating member 533 can be configured as the first case member 534 and the second case member 534. 2 It can be held in a rotatable state with respect to the case member 535 .

The protrusions 533b are formed to protrude from both left and right outer sides of the rotating member 533, and the distance between the protruding tip surfaces of the protrusions 533b is equal to the distance between the left and right outer side surfaces of the two first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 532. It is set to be approximately the same as the dimension. Also, the projection dimension of the projection 533b is set larger than the width dimension of the first projection 532b in the horizontal direction. Therefore, by inserting the projection 533b into the engaging hole 532d of the first projection 532b, the sliding member 532 and the rotating member 533 can be connected.

The connection between the sliding member 532 and the rotating member 533 can be performed by elastically deforming the two first projections 532b of the sliding member 532 to the left and right to widen the space between the two first projections 532b. can. In this case, as described above, the cut portion 532a3 is formed in the sliding member 532, so that the space between the two first projections 532b can be easily widened. As a result, the rotary member 533 and the sliding member 532 can be easily connected.

Further, the distance dimension between the opposing inner side surfaces of the first case member 534 in the left-right direction is substantially the same as the distance dimension between the opposing outer side surfaces of the first protrusions 532b, or the outer side surfaces of the first protrusions 532b are opposed to each other. It is set slightly larger than the distance dimension between them. Accordingly, in a state in which the rotating member 533 and the sliding member 532 are arranged inside the first case member 534, it is possible to suppress elastic deformation of the first protrusion 532b outward in the left-right direction. As a result, disconnection between the rotating member 533 and the sliding member 532 can be suppressed.

The driving portion 533d is formed by recessing from the front side toward the back side. The driving portion 533d can accommodate the projections 523L and 523R of the feather member 520L inside. That is, the driving portion 533d is set to have a dimension larger in the vertical direction than the protrusions 523L and 523R. By housing the protrusions 523L and 523R in the driving portion 533d, the first electric accessory 520 can be displaced between the first state and the second state as the driving portion 533d is displaced. A detailed description of the displacement of the first electric accessory 520 will be given later.

The first case member 534 is formed to have a substantially square shape with an open interior when viewed from the front, and is formed to extend in the front-rear direction. The first case member 534 has a cutout formed on the lower side of the back side, and the second case member 535 can be arranged in the cutout portion.

The first case member 534 mainly includes a concave portion 534a recessed on the front side in the notch portion on the back side, and a standing portion 534b erected on the bottom surface on the inner peripheral side.

As described above, the recess 534a is a recess for accommodating the rotating shaft 533c of the rotating member 533 inside, and is recessed to have a shape larger than the diameter of the rotating shaft 533c. Therefore, by assembling the second case member 535 to the first case member 534 with the rotating shaft 533 c housed inside, the rotating member 533 can be arranged inside the first case member 534 .

The erected portion 534b is formed such that the lower inner peripheral surface of the second prize winning opening 140 of the back base 512 and the erected leading end surface thereof are set at the same height, and the erected portion 534b extends toward the back side and is inclined downward. be done. As a result, in a state where the drive unit 530 is arranged on the back surface of the back base 512, the game ball entering the second winning hole 140 can be thrown to the second case member 535 by rolling the upper surface of the standing portion 534b. .

The second case member 535 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed with a predetermined thickness on the back side. The second case member 535 is provided with a through hole 535a penetrating therethrough in the vertical direction.

The through hole 535a has an inner diameter larger than the diameter of the game ball. You can throw the ball downwards through As a result, the game ball that has flowed down the game area and entered the second winning hole 140 can be recovered.

Next, displacement of the first electric accessory 520 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 15A and 16A, when the first electric accessory 520 is in the first state, the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is arranged around the movable body 531b. At the same time, the urging force of an urging spring (not shown) interposed between the body portion 531a and the connecting portion 532a protrudes toward the front side (left side in FIG. 15(a)).

In this case, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533 is positioned on the rear side of the engagement hole 532d (the side of the second opening 532d2). Further, the center of gravity of the rotating member 533 in a side view is positioned between the driving portion 533d and the rotating shaft 533c. In other words, the rotating member 533 is constantly applied with a rotating force around the rotating shaft 533c in the direction of pushing down the driving portion 533d.

Therefore, even when the projection 533b of the rotating member 533 is located on the back side of the engagement hole 532d (the side of the second opening 533d2), the projection 533b is positioned inside the second opening 533d2 (below the engagement hole 532d (see FIG. 15(a)). ) underside)) can stagnate above it without being guided by it.

Further, since the driving portion 533d is pushed downward, the protrusions 523L and 523R of the left and right feather members 520L and 520R accommodated inside the driving portion 533d are pushed downward. As a result, the left and right feather members 520L and 520R are placed in a state (first state (see FIG. 16A)) in which the corners on the far side from the through holes 521L and 521R are located above the through holes 521L and 521R. be.

As shown in FIGS. 15B and 16B, when power is applied to the main body 531a of the solenoid 531, the electromagnetic force generated in the main body 531a pulls the movable body 531b into the main body 531a. be

Therefore, with the displacement of the movable body 531b, the sliding member 532 connected to the tip side of the movable body 531b is slid rearward (to the right in FIG. 15(b)). As described above, the rotating member 533 is always in a state in which a rotating force is applied around the rotating shaft 533c in the direction of pushing down the driving portion 533d. The protrusion 533b accommodated inside the second opening 533d2 slides inside without being caught by the base end portion of the second opening 533d2.

The protrusion 533b that slides inside the second opening 533d2 abuts on the end of the engagement hole 532d on the front side (first opening 532d1 side) at the displacement end position of the movable body 531b, (b) to the right); In this case, the protrusion 533b can be accommodated inside the first opening 532d1 because the protrusion 533b is rotationally displaced about the rotation shaft 533c. That is, the first opening 532d1 is formed in a shape corresponding to the displacement of the protrusion 533b.

Further, since the rotating member 533 rotates around the rotating shaft 533c, the driving portion 533d can be displaced upward (upward in FIG. 15(b)). As a result, the feather member 520L is rotated about the axes of the through holes 521L and 521R, and the corners on the far side from the through holes 521L and 521R are displaced left and right (the second state (see FIG. 16(b)). ) See))).

On the other hand, the transition from the second state to the first state is performed by cutting off the power supply to the body portion 531a of the solenoid 531. FIG. As a result, the electromagnetic force generated in the body portion 531a disappears, so that the biasing spring (not shown) disposed around the movable body 531b and interposed between the body portion 531a and the connecting portion 532a is activated. The biasing force causes the movable body 531b to protrude toward the front side (left side in FIG. 15(a)). As a result, the first electric accessory 520 can be displaced to the position of the first state.

As described above, since the first opening 532d1 is formed in a shape corresponding to the displacement of the projection 533b, the depth of the recess toward the lower side in the direction of gravity (the lower side in FIG. 15(b)) of the first opening 532d1 is It is formed deeper toward the rear side (the right side in FIG. 15(b)).

As a result, when displacing the first electric accessory 520 from the second state to the first state, the base end portion of the first opening 532d1 collides with the projection 533b of the rotating member 533, and the projection 533b moves in the direction of gravity. can be easily displaced.

Next, referring to FIG. 17, the operation of the second projection 532c will be described. 17(a) and 17(b) are cross-sectional views of the prize winning port unit 500 along line XVII-XVII in FIG. 10(a). 17(a) shows the first electric accessory 520 in the first state, and FIG. 17(b) shows the state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state. .

As shown in FIG. 17(a), when the first electric accessory 520 is placed in the first state, the far corners of the through holes 521L and 521R of the left and right feather members 520L and 520R are aligned with the first protrusions 511a. placed in the vicinity. Thereby, when the first electric accessory 520 is in the first state, it is possible to suppress the game ball from flowing down between the left and right feather members 520L and 520R facing each other.

Further, as described above, the solenoid 531 is in a state in which the movable body 531b protrudes from the inside of the body portion 531a. Therefore, the sliding member 532 connected to the movable body 531b (engagement portion 531c) is positioned on the front side (left side in FIG. 17A). That is, the erected wall 532c1 of the second projection 532c is arranged near the second winning opening 140. As shown in FIG.

In this case, the distance dimension from the upright tip of the upright wall 532c1 (the lower end in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 17A)) to the upper end face of the upright portion 534b formed in the first case member 534 L1 is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

As a result, even if the first electric accessory 520 is damaged and the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is projected forward, the game ball can flow between the left and right feather members 520L and 520R. In this case, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the second winning hole 140 and rolling. That is, the game ball rolling on the standing portion 534b of the first case member 534 is caused to collide with the standing wall 532c1 of the sliding member 532, thereby stopping the rolling of the game ball. As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is damaged, even if the player continues playing the game, it is possible to prevent the store from being disadvantaged.

In this embodiment, a sensor device SE1 for detecting that a game ball has entered the second winning hole 140 is arranged in the second case member 535 along the game ball flow-down path. Therefore, in order to detect that the game ball has passed through the inside of the second winning hole 140, it is necessary to roll the game ball up to the second case member 535. Therefore, by stopping the rolling of the game ball inside the first case member 534 , it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from detecting that the game ball has entered the second winning hole 140 .

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 17(b), when the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state, the far corners of the through holes 521L and 521R of the left and right feather members 520L and 520R are more inclined than in the first state. is also separated from the first projecting portion 511a, and the separated distance is made larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the game area can be received by the side surfaces 526L, 526R of the left and right feather members 520L, 520R and rolled to the second winning hole 140. - 特許庁That is, when the first electric accessory 520 is set to the second state, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second winning hole 140 .

Further, as described above, the solenoid 531 is in a state in which the movable body 531b is pulled inside the main body 531a. Therefore, the sliding member 532 connected to the movable body 531b (engagement portion 531c) is positioned on the rear side (right side in FIG. 17(b)). That is, the erected wall 532c1 of the second projection 532c is arranged at a position farther from the second winning opening 140 than in the first state.

In this case, the distance dimension from the upright tip of the upright wall 532c1 (the lower end in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 17B)) to the upper end surface of the upright portion 534b formed in the first case member 534 L2 is set larger than the diameter of the game ball.

As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state, the left and right feather members 520L and 520R are displaced so that the game ball flowing down the game area is easily entered into the second winning hole 140. At the same time, the game ball entering the second winning hole 140 can be thrown to the second case member 535 by rolling the standing portion 534b formed in the first case member 534.

Furthermore, the displacement direction of the standing wall 532c1 can be slidably displaced in a direction substantially coinciding with the rolling direction of the game ball entered into the second winning hole 140, so that the feather member 520L, When the 520R is damaged (or due to fraud) and released, the game ball that collides with the standing wall 532c1 and stops is pushed out in the direction opposite to the rolling direction due to the displacement of the standing wall 532c1. can be suppressed. As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is opened by driving the solenoid 531 to allow the game ball to enter the second prize winning port 140, clogging of the game ball in the second prize winning port 140 is suppressed. can. As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is opened, the game ball can be smoothly guided to the inside of the second winning hole.

Next, the case where the first electric accessory 520 is displaced from the first state to the second state due to the player's cheating will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19. FIG. 18(a) and 18(b) are front views of the winning opening unit 500. FIG. 19(a) and 19(b) are side views of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530. FIG.

In addition, in FIGS. 18A and 18B, the front base 511 is shown transparently for easy understanding. 19(a) shows the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530 in the first state, and FIG. 19(b) shows the case where only the first electric accessory 520 is displaced from the first state. is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, when only the first electric accessory 520 in the first state is forcibly displaced to the second state due to the player's cheating. Then, the projections 523L, 523R of the left and right feather members 520L, 520R are displaced inside the second opening 532d2 of the engaging hole 532d. That is, since spaces are formed in which the projections 523L and 523R can be displaced, it is possible to suppress damage to the first electric accessory 520 when the first electric accessory 520 is forcibly displaced.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 20(a) and 11(b), the displacement of the standing portion 523c1 when the first electric accessory 520 is displaced due to the player's cheating will be described. 20(a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 along the line XXa-XXa of FIG. 18(a), and FIG. 20(b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 along the line XXb-XXb of FIG. 18(b). is a cross-sectional view of.

As shown in FIGS. 20(a) and 20(b), when the first electric accessory 520 in the first state is forcibly rotated by the player's urging action, the solenoid of the drive unit 530 The positions of 531 and sliding member 532 are not displaced, and only the first electric accessory 520 and rotating member 533 are rotationally displaced.

As described above, when the first electric accessory 520 is positioned in the first state, from the upright tip of the upright wall 532c1 (the bottom end in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 20(a))) to the first The distance dimension L1 to the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b formed in the one case member 534 is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

Here, conventionally, a second winning hole 140 formed so that a game ball can enter, a pair of feather members 520L and 520R arranged across the second winning hole 140, and a pair of feather members Driving means (solenoid 531) for opening or closing by applying driving force to 520L and 520R, and when the pair of feather members 520L and 520R are opened by the driving force of the driving means (solenoid 531), the second winning opening 140 When the pair of feather members 520L and 520R are closed by the driving force of the drive means (solenoid 531) while the game ball is placed in the allowable position to allow the game ball to enter the second winning port 140, the game ball enters the second winning port 140. A gaming machine is known that includes a regulating means arranged at a regulating position for regulating a ball.

However, in the conventional game machine described above, since the displacement of the restricting means is not restricted, for example, the pair of feather members 520L and 520R are forcibly opened from the outside, and then the restricting means is displaced from the restricted position to the allowable position. Therefore, there is a problem that the effect of regulating illegal entry of game balls into the second winning hole 140 is insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the standing wall 532c1 is maintained at the restricted position when the pair of feather members 520L and 520R are closed or when the pair of feather members 520L and 520R are opened from the outside. Since the vertical wall 532c1 is formed to be flexible, it is possible to suppress the upright wall 532c1 from being displaced to the permissible position. Therefore, illegal entry of a game ball into the second winning hole 140 can be easily regulated.

That is, in a state in which the pair of feather members 520L and 520R are closed or a state in which the pair of feather members 520L and 520R are opened from the outside, the sliding member 532 is operated to move the standing tip of the standing wall 532c1 (gravitational force). The distance dimension L3 from the direction lower side (the end of FIG. 20(b) lower side) to the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b formed in the first case member 534 is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball. . Therefore, even if the first electric accessory 520 is allowed to throw the game ball to the second prize winning port 140 due to the player's fraudulent act, the game ball enters the second prize winning port 140 and rolls. can be suppressed. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the standing portion 534b of the first case member 534 collides with the standing wall 532c1 of the sliding member 532, and the rolling of the game ball can be stopped. As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is put into the second state (the game ball can be thrown to the second winning port 140) by the player's fraudulent act, the game ball is illegally sent to the second winning port 140. It is easy to regulate being entered.

Also, in this case, the standing wall 532c1 that prevents the game ball from entering the second winning hole 140 can be formed continuously with the sliding member 532 that displaces the pair of feather members 520L and 520R. A separate member for regulating illegal entry of a ball into the winning hole 140 is not required. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced by that amount, so an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22, the case where the second projection 532c is further pushed into the rear side when the first electric accessory 520 is brought into the second state by the player's cheating will be described. . 21(a) and 21(b) are side views of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530. FIG. 22(a) is a partially enlarged side view of drive unit 530 in range XXIIa of FIG. 21(a), and FIG. 22(b) is a partially enlarged side view of drive unit 530 in range XXIIb of FIG. 21(b). It is a diagram.

As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, a protrusion 532d3 is formed inside the second opening 532d2 so as to protrude from the inner surface on the front side (left side in FIG. 22(a)). A notch portion 533b1 is formed in the projection 533b of the rotating member 533 by cutting the outer peripheral surface in a side view.

The protrusion 532d3 and the notch 533b1 are formed in a shape corresponding to their outer diameters. That is, the projecting shape of the projection 532d3 and the cut shape of the notch portion 533b1 in side view are substantially the same.

Therefore, from the state shown in FIGS. 21(a) and 22(a) in which only the first electric accessory 520 is put into the second state due to fraud, the standing wall 532c1 (sliding member 532) is pushed toward the rear side. Then, the protrusion 532d3 is accommodated inside the notch portion 533b1, and the displacement of the erected wall 532c1 (sliding member 532) toward the rear side is restricted. As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is put into the second state due to the player's cheating, the game ball enters the second winning hole 140, and the standing portion 534b of the first case member 534 It can be suppressed that the ball is thrown by rolling.

Further, in the present embodiment, one of the side surfaces of the protrusion 532d3 is formed so as to incline upward toward the back side (see FIG. 22(a)). This makes it difficult for the projection 532d3 to come out of the notch 533b1 when the projection 532d3 is inserted inside the notch 533b1.

That is, since the side surface of the protrusion 532d3 is inclined upward toward the back side, the standing wall 532c1 (sliding member 532) is further inclined toward the back side while the protrusion 532d3 is inserted into the notch 532b1. The direction of the force acting on the contact surface between the projection 532d3 and the notch 532b1 when a pushing force acts on the projection 532d3 can be the direction in which the projection 532d3 enters the inside of the notch 532b1. Therefore, when the protrusion 532d3 is inserted inside the notch 533b1, the protrusion 532d3 can be made difficult to escape from the notch 533b1. As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is put into the second state due to the player's cheating, the game ball enters the second winning hole 140 and pushes the standing portion 534b of the first case member 534. Rolling and throwing can be reliably suppressed.

In other words, a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving means (solenoid 531) to the pair of blade members 520L and 520R is provided. b)) and the closing slide position (the position shown in FIG. 17(a)), and the sliding member 532 is slid to the open slide position for opening rotation. a rotating member 533 rotated to the position to open the pair of blade members 520L and 520R and to be rotated to the closing rotation position by sliding displacement of the sliding member 532 to the closing slide position to close the pair of blade members 520L and 520R; A standing wall 532c1 is disposed on the sliding member 532, and when the sliding member 532 is slid to the open slide position, the standing wall 532c1 is placed at the allowable position and the sliding member 532 is closed. When the vertical wall 532c1 is slid to the slide position, the vertical wall 532c1 is placed at the regulated position. By engaging with the sliding member 532, the sliding displacement of the sliding member 532 to the open slide position is regulated, so that the game ball is illegally entered into the second winning hole 140. can be done easily.

That is, when the closed pair of feather members 520L and 520R are illegally opened from the outside, the rotating member 533 rotates to the open rotating position while the sliding member 532 is arranged at the closing slide position. be done. In such a state, the rotating member 533 and the sliding member 532 are engaged with each other, thereby restricting the sliding displacement of the sliding member 532 to the open slide position. can be suppressed from being illegally forcibly displaced from the outside to the allowable position). As a result, after the pair of feather members 520L and 520R are forcibly opened from the outside, even if the game ball is passed through between the pair of feather members 520L and 520R, the game ball enters the second winning hole 140. Playing the ball can be regulated by a regulating means.

Further, one of the sliding member 532 and the rotating member 533 has an engaging hole 532d extending therefrom and a protrusion 533b protruding from the other. The sliding displacement of the member 532 is transmitted to rotate the rotating member 533, and the projection 533b is engaged with the inner wall surface of the engaging hole 532d, thereby restricting the sliding displacement of the sliding member 532 to the open slide position. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the regulation to be lifted while achieving miniaturization.

That is, means for restricting the sliding displacement of the sliding member 532 to the open slide position by utilizing the engagement hole 532d and the projection 533b for transmitting the sliding displacement of the sliding member 532 to the rotating member 533 to rotate it. Since it is not necessary to separately provide such means at another location, it is possible to reduce the size accordingly. In addition, by adopting a structure in which the projection 533b is engaged with the inner wall surface of the engagement hole 532d, unauthorized access to the engagement portion from the outside can be made difficult, and the regulation (engagement) can be released accordingly. It can be difficult.

Next, the bulging portions 524L and 524R of the left and right blade members 520L and 520R will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24. FIG. FIG. 23(a) is a front perspective view of the left wing member 520L, and FIG. 23(b) is a front perspective view of the right wing member 520R. 24(a) is a front view of the prize winning unit 500, and FIG. 24(b) is a sectional view of the prize winning port unit 500 taken along the line XXIVb-XXIVb of FIG. 24(a).

23(a) and 23(b), the left and right direction when viewed obliquely is reversed between FIG. 23(a) and FIG. 23(b). In addition, in FIG. 24(a), the front base 511 is shown transparently. Furthermore, in FIG. 24(b), the front base 511 that was seen transparent in FIG. 24(a) is illustrated as being opaque. In addition, in FIG. 24(b), the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the side surfaces 526L and 526R is indicated by the two-dot chain line together with the symbol of the virtual line KS1. Furthermore, the front direction of the imaginary line KS1 is illustrated by arrow F, and the back direction is illustrated by arrow B. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the bulging portion 524L formed on the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L is formed at the end on the through hole 521L side, and is formed on the front side (FIG. 24(b) arrow F side). On the other hand, the bulging portion 524R formed on the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R is formed at the end on the through-hole 521R side, and is continuous with the end face on the rear side (arrow B side in FIG. 24(b)). be done.

That is, the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L and the bulging portion 524R of the right wing member 520R are formed at different positions in the longitudinal direction (see FIG. 24(b)).

Further, the side surfaces 526L, 526R are formed with first regions that are continuous from the tip end side to the base end side of the feather members 520L, 520R, and are sized so as not to contact the game balls guided in the first regions. Bulging portions 524L and 524R are formed, and the first regions of side surfaces 526L and 526R of one blade member (one of the blade members 520L and 520R) of the pair of blade members 520L and 520R and the other blade are formed. The first regions of the side surfaces 526L and 526R of the member (the other of the feather members 520L and 520R) are arranged at different positions in the direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surfaces 526L and 526R. be.

In addition, the end portion of the bulging portion 524L on the far side from the through hole 521L is inclined toward the through hole 521L from the front side (lower side in FIG. 24(b)) to the rear side (upper side in FIG. 24(b)). formed by On the other hand, the bulging portion 524R is formed such that the end portion on the far side from the through hole 521R is inclined toward the through hole 521R side from the back side toward the front side.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26, the case where the game ball is thrown to the side surfaces 526L, 526R of the left and right feather members 520L, 520R will be described. 25(a) and 25(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. FIG. 26(a) and 26(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. FIG.

25(a), 25(b), 26(a) and 26(b) correspond to the sectional view of the prize winning port unit 500 in Fig. 24(b). 25(a) and 25(b), transition states of the game ball when the game ball is thrown from both sides of the first electric accessory 520 are illustrated in order. FIGS. 26(a) and 26(b) sequentially illustrate the transition states of the game ball when the game ball is thrown only to the left wing member 520L.

As shown in FIGS. 25(a) and 25(b), when the game ball is thrown to both sides of the first electric accessory 520, it rolls on the side surfaces 526L and 526R of the left and right feather members 520L and 520R. The game ball to be played can be rolled to different positions in the front-rear direction by the bulging portions 524L and 524R.

More specifically, as described above, the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L is formed so as to be connected to the end face on the front side. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L rolls on the side surface 526L while contacting the bulging portion 524L, thereby rolling to the back side.

In this case, the end of the bulging portion 524L on the far side from the through hole 521L extends toward the through hole 521L from the front side (lower side in FIG. 25(b)) to the rear side (upper side in FIG. 25(b)). Since it is formed to be inclined, when the game ball rolling on the side surface 526L comes into contact with the bulging portion 524L, it is possible to prevent the game ball from stopping due to increased resistance in the rolling direction.

On the other hand, the bulging portion 524R of the right wing member 520R is formed so as to be connected to the end face on the back side. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R rolls on the side surface 526R while contacting the bulging portion 524R, thereby rolling toward the front side.

In this case, the end of the bulging portion 524R on the far side from the through hole 521R extends from the rear side (upper side in FIG. 25(b)) toward the front side (lower side in FIG. 25(b)) toward the through hole 521R. Since it is formed to be inclined, when the game ball rolling on the side surface 526R comes into contact with the bulging portion 524R, it is possible to prevent the rolling of the game ball from being stopped due to an increase in resistance in the rolling direction.

Therefore, while the game ball rolling on the left wing member 520L side can be moved to the rear side, the game ball rolling on the right wing member 520R side can be moved to the front side. As a result, when the game balls are thrown from both the left and right sides, it is possible to prevent the game balls thrown from the left and right from colliding head-on.

Here, conventionally, it has a ball entrance (second winning hole 140) formed so that a game ball can enter, and a guide surface (side surfaces 526L, 526R) that guides the game ball to the ball entrance and is displaceable. A gaming machine is known that includes a guide member (first electric accessory 520) that can be formed. As the guide member, for example, a pair of feather members (feather members 520L, 520R ) are exemplified.

In addition, a first groove is provided on the entire guide surface (side surfaces 526L, 526R) of one blade member (one of the blade members 520L, 520R), and the guide surface (side surfaces 526L, 526R) of the other blade member is provided. A technique is disclosed in which a second groove is provided on each of the entire surfaces of the . According to this technique, since the first groove and the second groove are inclined in different directions, the guide surfaces (side surfaces 526L, 526R) of one blade member (one of the blade members 520L, 520R) And even if the game balls are guided (rolled) on the guide surfaces (side surfaces 526L, 526R) of one of the wing members (the other of the wing members 520L, 520R) at the same time, the game balls are guided (rolled) in different directions ( One side is the glass plate side and the other side is the game board side). Therefore, each game ball can enter the second winning hole 140 smoothly.

However, the conventional technique described above has a problem that the game ball cannot be sufficiently biased. In addition, the game ball entering from one side of the guide member (one of the feather members 520L and 520R) passes through the guide surface (side surfaces 526L and 526R) and passes through the other side of the guide member (one of the feather members 520L and 520R). In this case, the game ball is not entered into the ball entrance (second prize winning entrance 140), which impairs the interest of the player.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the first electric accessory 520 is a pair of bulging portions that protrude from the side surfaces 526L and 526R and are formed to be able to come into contact with the game balls rolling on the side surfaces 526L and 526R. 524L, 524R, and the pair of bulging portions 524L, 524R are arranged at different positions in the direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surfaces 526L, 526R. By bringing the game ball guided (rolled) into contact with the bulging portions 524L and 524R, the game ball can be reliably biased. As a result, the ball can be smoothly entered into the entrance.

In addition, the pair of bulging portions 524L, 524R are arranged at different positions in a direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surfaces 526L, 526R, so that the pair of feather members 520L, 520R A game ball entering from one side can be brought into contact with the bulging portions 524L and 524R. Therefore, the game ball entering from one side of the pair of feather members 520L and 520R (one of the feather members 520L and 520R) passes through the pair of feather members 520L and 520R (to the other of the feather members 520L and 520R). can be suppressed. As a result, the game ball is made to enter the ball entrance, and the interest of the player can be improved.

Further, the first electric accessory 520 is formed as a pair of feather members 520L, 520R arranged on both sides of the second prize winning port 140 and rotatably supported at the proximal end side, and a pair of bulging portions 524L, 524R. are projected from the side surfaces 526L and 526R of the pair of blade members 520L and 520R, respectively, and the bulge portions 524L and 524R of one blade member 520L and 520R of the pair of blade members 520L and 520R and the other blade member Since the bulging portions 524L and 524R in 520L and 520R are arranged in different positions in a direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surfaces 526L and 526R, the side surfaces 526L and 526R are guided (rolled). By bringing the game ball to be moved into contact with the bulging portions 524L and 524R, the game ball can be reliably biased. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enter the ball into the second winning hole 140 and to suppress ball clogging.

In addition, the bulging portions 524L, 524R of the wing members 520L, 520R on one side and the bulging portions 524L, 524R of the wing members 520L, 520R on the other side are arranged along the side surfaces 526L, 526R in the direction in which the game ball is guided (wings By arranging the positions of the members 520L and 520R in different positions in a direction orthogonal to the direction from the tip side to the base end side of the members 520L and 520R, the game ball that has entered the side surfaces 526L and 526R of one feather member 520L and 520R When reaching the side surfaces 5.26L, 526R of the feather members 520L, 520R, the game ball can be brought into contact with the bulging portions 524L, 524R of the other feather members 520L, 520R. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the game ball that has entered the side surfaces 526L and 526R of one feather member 520L and 520R from passing through the side surfaces 526L and 526R of the other feather member. As a result, the game ball is made to enter the second winning hole 140, and the interest of the player can be improved.

In other words, the left and right feather members 520L, 520R are formed with the bulging portions 524L, 524R at different positions in the front-rear direction, respectively, so that the game ball rolling from the left and right can be rolled at different positions in the front-rear direction. can be moved. Therefore, when the game ball is thrown from both the left and right sides, it is possible to prevent the game balls thrown from the left and right from colliding head-on. As a result, it is possible to suppress the time it takes for the game ball to enter the second winning hole 140 .

That is, by making the collision positions of the game balls different in the front-rear direction on the left and right, as shown in FIG. 25(b) upper side). On the other hand, the game ball on the right side, which has been brought to the front side, tends to rebound to the front side (lower side in FIG. 25(b)) due to the collision.

Therefore, one (in the present embodiment, rolling the left wing member 520L) game ball can be easily entered into the second winning hole 140, and the other game ball is bounced back to the front side, so that a collision It is possible to suppress the game ball from being too far away from the second winning hole 140 when the game ball is played. Therefore, it is possible to speed up the entry of the second game ball into the second winning hole 140 later. As a result, when the game balls are thrown to the left and right sides of the first electric accessory 520, the time required for the game balls on both sides to enter the second prize winning opening 140 can be shortened, and the progress of the game can be made smooth. can proceed.

In addition, since the bulging portions 524L and 524R protrude from the side surfaces 526L and 526R at positions closer to the proximal side (through hole 521 side) than the tip side of the feather members 520L and 520R, they are guided to the side surfaces 526L and 526R. A rolling area can be secured until the game ball to be played contacts the bulging portions 524L and 524R. Therefore, the decrease in rolling speed of the game ball can be suppressed accordingly, and the ball can enter the second winning hole 140 smoothly.

Furthermore, the bulging portions 524L and 524R protrude from the side surfaces 526L and 526R at positions closer to the proximal side than the tip side of the blade members 520L and 520R, so that the bulging portions 524L and 524R are abutted and biased. It is possible to prevent the course of the game ball from returning to the course before deviation until it reaches the front of the ball entrance (end of the guide surface). That is, it is possible to easily throw the game ball from the side surfaces 526L, 526R to the ball entrance in the biased state.

In addition, as described above, the side surfaces 526L and 526R are formed with the first regions that are continuous from the tip side to the base end side of the feather members 520L and 520R, and the game balls guided in the first regions do not come into contact with each other. Since the bulging portions 524L and 524R are formed with the size of It can be avoided, and the ball can be smoothly entered into the second winning hole 140.例文帳に追加

In this case, the first region of the side surface 526L, 526R of one of the pair of feather members 520L, 520R (one of the feather members 520L, 520R) and the other feather member (either of the feather members 520L, 520R) or the other) and the first regions of the side surfaces 526L and 526R are arranged in different positions in a direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surfaces 526L and 526R, so that one feather member (feather The game ball simultaneously guides the first areas of the side surfaces 526L and 526R of the member 520L and 520R) and the side surfaces 526L and 526R of the other feather member (the other of the feather members 520L and 520R). Even when (rolling), the game balls can be biased in mutually different directions, and the balls can enter the second winning hole 140 smoothly.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 26(a) and 26(b), when the game ball is thrown to one of the left and right feather members 520L and 520R, the other left and right feather members 520L and 520R By bringing the game ball into contact with the bulging part 524L or the bulging part 524R, the game ball rolls on the side surfaces 526L, 526R of the other left and right feather members 520L, 520R and is suppressed from falling from the tip. can.

More specifically, as described above, the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L is formed so as to be connected to the end face on the front side. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L rolls on the side surface 526L while contacting the bulging portion 524L, thereby rolling to the back side. As a result, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L can be moved toward the bulging portion 524R formed in the right wing member 520R.

In other words, the bulging portions 524L and 524R formed on the left and right wing members 520L and 520R are formed at different positions in the front-rear direction. The game ball rolling to the winning opening side can be rolled (pulled) to a position coinciding in the longitudinal direction with the bulging portions 524L and 524R formed on either the left wing member 520L or the right wing member 520R. .

Therefore, when the game ball rolls on the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L, the game ball is rolled to the back side (pulled together), and substantially coincides with the bulging portion 524R of the right wing member 520R in the front-rear direction. can be positioned. On the other hand, when the game ball rolls on the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R, the game ball rolls (pulls) to the front side and substantially coincides with the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L in the front-rear direction. can be positioned.

As a result, when the rolling speed of the game ball rolling on either the side surface 526L or the side surface 526R is fast, the game ball is prevented from riding on the side surfaces 526L, 526R of the other left wing member 520L or the right wing member 520R. can be suppressed.

Here, in the conventional winning port unit 500, since the side surfaces 526L and 526R of the first electric role object 520 are formed as smooth surfaces, a game ball thrown from one of the first electric role objects 520 is thrown from the other side. There is a problem that the ball rides on the feather members 520L and 520R and is thrown from the tip of the other feather member 520L and 520R to the flowing area.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the bulging portions 524L and 524R are formed at different positions in the front-rear direction on the first electric accessory 520, so that the game ball rolling from one feather member is It can be rolled to a position substantially coinciding with the bulging portions 524L and 524R formed on the other blade member in the front-rear direction. Therefore, by making the game ball rolling on one of the feather members 520L and 520R collide with the bulging portions 524L and 524R of the other feather member 520L and 520R, the game ball rolls on the side surfaces 526L and 526L of the other feather member 520L and 520R. It is possible to prevent the ball from running on the 526R and being thrown from the tips of the feather members 520L and 520R to the game area.

Next, the concave portion 525L and the engaging portion 511b2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. FIG. 27(a) is a top view of the winning opening unit 500, and FIG. 27(b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 along line XXVIIb-XXVIIb of FIG. 27(a). Figures 28(a) and 28(b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500 in the range XXVIII of Figure 27(b). 28(a) shows the first electric accessory 520 in the first state, and FIG. 28(b) shows the state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state.

As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the engaging portions 511b2 formed on the second projecting portion 511b of the front base 511 are arranged inside the concave portions 525L and 525R of the left and right feather members 520L and 520R, respectively. .

In the first state, the engaging portion 511b2 and the ends of the recessed portions 525L and 525R on the side of the bulging portions 524L and 524R (side surfaces 526L and 526R) are in contact (see FIG. 28A). In the second state, the engaging portion 511b2 and the ends of the recessed portions 525L and 525R opposite to the bulging portions 524L and 524R (side surfaces 526L and 526R) are in contact with each other.

That is, when the first electric accessory 520 is displaced from the first state to the second state or from the second state to the first state, the engaging portion 511b2 contacts the ends of the concave portions 525L and 525R. By doing so, the amount of displacement can be regulated.

Furthermore, in the first state, the rotational force acting around the axis of the through holes 521L and 521R causes the corners far from the through holes 521L and 521R of the feather members 520L and 520R to move toward the second winning opening 140 due to their own weight. direction of rotation. Therefore, when the engaging portion 511b2 and the ends of the recessed portions 525L and 525R on the bulging portions 524L and 524R (side surfaces 526L and 526R) come into contact with each other, the feather members 520L and 520R rotate under their own weight. can be suppressed, and the feather members 520L and 520R can be held in the first state.

In addition, in the first state, the ends of the bulging portions 524L and 524R (side surfaces 526L and 526R) of the recessed portions 525L and 525R are brought into contact with the engaging portion 511b2. The side surfaces of 524L and 524R can be brought into contact with the engaging portion 511b2. Therefore, since the rigidity of the abutting portions can be increased by the amount of the bulging portions 524L and 524R, it is possible to prevent the blade members 520L and 520R from coming into contact with the engaging portion 511b2 and being damaged.

That is, in this embodiment, the base member 510 that rotatably supports the blade members 520L and 520R is provided, and the base member 510 contacts the blade members 520L and 520R to rotate the blade members 520L and 520R. Since the regulating engaging portion 511b2 is provided and the bulging portions 524L and 524R of the feather members 520L and 520R are brought into contact with the engaging portion 511b2 of the base member 510, damage to the feather members 520L and 520R can be suppressed. That is, since the bulging portions 524L and 524R are portions protruding from the blade members 520L and 520R (side surfaces 526L and 526R), the portions of the blade members 520L and 520R whose rigidity is relatively high are replaced by the base member 510. Since it can be used as a stopper to be brought into contact with the engaging portion 511b2, damage to the feather members 520L and 520R can be suppressed accordingly.

Furthermore, the bulging portions 524L and 524R have side surfaces substantially flush with the proximal side surfaces of the blade members 520L and 520R, and in the closed state, substantially flush with the proximal side surfaces of the blade members 520L and 520R. Since the side surfaces of the bulging portions 524L and 524R formed on one side are in contact with at least the engaging portion 511b2 of the base member 510, the portion (the bulging portion 524L) far from the rotation shaft (through holes 521L and 521R) , 524R) can be brought into contact with the engaging portion 511b2 of the base member 510, the reaction force input from the engaging portion 511b2 to the feather members 520L and 520R can be reduced. Therefore, damage to the feather members 520L and 520R can be suppressed. Further, for example, the engaging portion 511b2 of the base member 510 is separated from the second winning opening 140 as compared with the case where the projecting tip surfaces of the bulging portions 524L and 524R are brought into contact with the engaging portion 511b2 of the base member 510. , and a space that serves as a flow path to the second winning port 140 can be secured. In addition to the side surfaces of the bulging portions 524L and 524R, the proximal side surfaces of the feather members 520L and 520R may also be brought into contact with the engaging portion 511b2 of the base member 510 . In this case, the surface pressure can be reduced, and damage to the feather members 520L and 520R can be further suppressed.

When the feather members 520L and 520R are closed, the bulging portions 524L and 524R are arranged below the standing portion 511b1 formed on the front base 511 (lower in FIG. 28(a)). In other words, the erected portion 511b1 is arranged between the opposing bulging portions 524L and 524R.

Here, the pair of feather members 520L and 520R are arranged at positions where the facing distance between the side surfaces 526L and 526R in the closed state is larger than the diameter of the game ball so as not to sandwich the game ball. In this case, if the bulging portions 524L and 524R project from the side surfaces 526L and 526R, the projection height of the bulging portions 524L and 524R is increased so that the game ball is not caught between the bulging portions 524L and 524R. The pair of feather members 520L and 520R need to be spaced apart further, and the space required for arranging the pair of feather members 520L and 520R increases.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the erected portion 511b1 is positioned between the opposed bulging portions 524L and 524R in the closed state, and the pair of feather members 520L and 520R are arranged so that the bulging portion 524L is positioned as viewed in the direction of the rotation shaft. , 524R are not formed, the interval between the side surfaces 526L and 526R is made larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the interval between the bulging portions 524L and 524R is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. The space required for arranging the pair of feather members 520L and 520R can be suppressed.

That is, even if the pair of feather members 520L and 520R begin to close (even if they start to shift to the closed state) while the game ball is being guided (rolled) on the side surfaces 526L and 526R, the bulging portions 524L and 524L By locating the standing portion 511b1 between the facing portions 524R, it is possible to discharge the game ball from the facing portion between the expanded portions 524L and 524R and prevent the game ball from being caught between the expanded portions 524L and 524R. . The game ball ejected from between the opposing bulging portions 524L and 524R by the standing portion 511b1 is positioned between the opposing sides 526L and 526R in the area where the bulging portions 524L and 524R are not formed, Since the facing distance at such a position is made larger than the diameter of the game ball, the game ball is not caught (see FIG. 27(a)). As a result, the facing interval between the bulging portions 524L and 524R can be made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the space required for disposing the pair of feather members 520L and 520R can be suppressed. In other words, the pair of feather members 520L, 520R can be arranged in a space equivalent to the space required for arrangement of conventional products that do not protrude the bulging portions 524L, 524R from the side surfaces 526L, 526R.

On the other hand, in the second state, the rotational force acting around the axis of the through holes 521L521R rotates the corners of the blade members 520L, 520R far from the through holes 521L, 521R downward in the gravity direction due to their own weight. be done. Therefore, by abutting the engaging portion 511b2 and the ends of the bulging portions 524L, 524R (side surfaces 526L, 526R) of the recessed portions 525L, 525R on the opposite side, the feather members 520L, 520R are moved by their own weight. Rotation can be suppressed, and the feather members 520L and 520R can be held in the second state.

Therefore, the restriction of displacement of the feather members 520L and 520R can be performed at locations other than the driving portion 533d and the protrusions 523L and 523R described above, so that damage to the driving portion 533d and the protrusions 523L and 523R can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the size of the rotating member 533 because there is no need to increase the size of the parts in order to increase the rigidity of the rotating member 533 . As a result, the size of the drive unit 530 can be reduced.

In the open state, the upper surface of the standing portion 511b1 is positioned below the lower ends of the side surfaces 526L and 526R in the direction of gravity and above the lower end of the second prize winning opening 140 in the direction of gravity. The game ball guided to 526R can be thrown to the upper surface of the standing portion 511b1, and by rolling the upper surface of the standing portion 511b1, the ball can enter the second winning hole 140 (FIG. 28(b)). )reference).

Furthermore, as described above, the base member 511f including an LED that emits light toward the feather members 520L and 520R (the second winning opening 140) is arranged on the second projecting portion 511b. As shown in FIG. 28(a), in the first state, the concave portions 525L and 525R are positioned downward in the direction of gravity. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED of the base member 511f can be easily made incident on the inside of the feather members 520L and 520R.

That is, by irradiating the recessed portions of the recessed portions 525L and 525R with the light of the LED, it is possible to suppress the reflection of the light of the LED on the outer surfaces of the feather members 520L and 520R. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for light to enter the interior of the feather members 520L and 520R. Therefore, it is possible to increase the amount of light emitted from the inside of the feather members 520L and 520R to the player side. As a result, the feather members 520L and 520R can be easily visually recognized by the player even when the front base 511 made of a transparent material is interposed.

Further, when the feather members 520L and 520R are in the second state shown in FIG. 28(b), the concave portions 525L and 525R are positioned substantially at the same position in the vertical direction of the through holes 521L and 521R. . Therefore, the game ball thrown to the front side of the second winning hole 140 can be easily illuminated by the LED of the base member 511f.

That is, the recessed portions of the recessed portions 525L and 525R are positioned substantially at the same position in the vertical direction of the through holes 521L and 521R, so that the gap between the opposed first electric accessories 520 can be increased. . Therefore, the game ball thrown to the front side of the second winning hole can be easily illuminated by the LED of the base member 511f. As a result, the player can easily see the game ball entering the second winning hole 140 even through the front base 511 made of a transparent material.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the manner in which the winning opening unit 500 is arranged on the game board 13 will be described. FIG. 29 is a partially enlarged view of the game board 13 in the range XXIX of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 29, the prize winning unit 500 is arranged with a predetermined gap from the inner edge of the inner rail 76 .

Inside the lower end portion of the inner rail 76, a first out port 71 is formed for recovering game balls flowing down the conventional game area. Therefore, the lower end portion of the inner rail 76 is formed with a curved portion 76a curved with a curvature larger than the curvature of the entire inner rail 76 in order to facilitate gathering of game balls.

Therefore, the gap between the prize winning port unit 500 and the inner rail 76 is increased at the lower end portion of the inner reel (the portion where the curved portion 76a is formed). As described above, the fastening between the front base 511 and the back base 512 of the prize winning opening unit 500 is performed by obliquely inserting a screwdriver or the like into the concave portion 511b3 from below the front base 511 .

The through-hole 511b4 is formed in the second protruding portion 511b that is formed substantially in the center of the front base 511 in the left-right direction. Therefore, the through hole 511b4 can be positioned above the curved portion 76a (upper in FIG. 29). Therefore, when inserting a driver or the like obliquely into the recessed portion 511b3 from below the front base 511, the gap between the winning opening unit 500 formed by the curved portion 76a can be used, so that the front base can be inserted from the front side of the game board 13. 511 can be easily detached from the rear base 512.例文帳に追加

In addition, since the inner rail 76 makes it difficult for the player to see the inside of the recessed portion 511b3, the player's interest is reduced when the player sees the screw or the like that fastens the front base 511 and the rear base 512. can be suppressed.

Next, the decorative design display device 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 36. FIG.

First, the configuration of the decorative pattern display device 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 33. FIG. 30(a) is a front view of the decorative design display device 800, and FIG. 30(b) is a cross-sectional view of the decorative design display device 800 along line XXXb-XXXb of FIG. 30(a). 31 is an exploded perspective front view of the decorative design display device 800, and FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective rear view of the decorative design display device 800. FIG. 33(a) is a front view with the inner reel 811 deployed, and FIG. 33(b) is a front view with the outer reel 821 deployed.

As shown in FIGS. 30 to 33, the decorative pattern display device 800 includes a rotatable inner reel unit 810, an outer reel unit 820 accommodating part of the inner reel unit 810, and an inner reel unit 810. and an accommodation unit 880 that accommodates the outer reel unit 820 therein; a drive motor KM1 that is attached to the accommodation unit 880 and drives the inner reel unit 810 to rotate; It mainly includes a driving motor KM2 for rotational driving and a backlight unit 830 disposed inside the inner reel unit 810. As shown in FIG.

The inner reel unit 810 includes a substantially cylindrical inner reel 811 penetrating left and right, a rotating member 812 disposed on one end side of the opening of the inner reel 811 (left side in FIG. 30(a)), and an annular member 813 arranged on the other end side of the opening (on the right side in FIG. 30(a)).

The inner reel 811 is formed by winding a strip-shaped sheet made of transparent resin along the circumferential direction. As shown in FIG. 33(a), the inner reel 811 has its longitudinal direction oriented vertically, and decorative patterns are arranged at regular intervals. The inner reels 811 of the three decorative pattern display devices 800 arranged side by side have different decorative patterns.

The rotating member 812 includes a hub 812a formed in a substantially disk shape, a rim 812b formed in a substantially annular shape having a larger diameter than the hub 812a, and connecting the outer peripheral surface of the hub 812a and the inner peripheral surface of the rim 812b. It is formed primarily with spokes 812c that engage.

The hub 812a and the rim 812b have their respective axes formed in the same straight line, and are arranged at different positions in the axial direction. Therefore, the spokes 812c are axially inclined toward the radially outer side of the hub 812a.

The rim 812 b is a portion to which one end side of the inner reel 811 is attached on its outer peripheral surface, and is formed to have an outer diameter substantially equal to the inner diameter of the inner reel 811 . In other words, the circumferential dimension of the outer peripheral portion of the rim 812b is set substantially equal to the longitudinal dimension of the unfolded inner reel 811 . Therefore, the inner reel 811 can be disposed (attached) to the outer peripheral surface of the rim 812b without gaps.

The hub 812a is arranged inside the inner reel 811 . That is, the spokes 812c that connect the hub 812a and the rim 812b are formed so as to incline toward the other end of the opening of the inner reel 811 (annular member 813, which will be described later) as they go radially inward. This allows the hub 812 a to be arranged inside the inner reel 811 . The spokes 812c are formed from a plurality of rod-shaped bodies extending from the rim 812b to the hub 812a, and have inner openings 812c1 that open between adjacent spokes 812c in the circumferential direction.

The position of the hub 812a in the axial direction is substantially the same as the center position of the inner reel 811 in the left-right direction. Thereby, a space on the side of the annular member 813 can be secured from the hub 812a. A driving motor KM1 that imparts rotational driving force to the inner reel unit 810 is connected to the hub 812a.

The drive motor KM1 has a thickness dimension in the axial direction of the inner reel 811 that is approximately half the axial dimension of the inner reel 811 . As described above, the hub 812a is located at substantially the same position in the axial direction as the center position of the inner reel 811 in the left-right direction. Since the space is formed, most of the drive motor KM1 can be arranged inside the inner reel 811 . As a result, the dimensions of the inner reel unit 810 and the drive motor KM1 in the lateral direction (the axial direction of the inner reel 811) can be reduced.

Further, the drive motor KM1 has a rotary shaft arranged in a straight line coaxial with the shaft of the hub 812a. That is, the shaft of the hub 812a is connected to the rotation shaft of the drive motor KM1. As described above, since the axis of the hub 812a and the axis of the rim 812b are arranged on the same straight line, the inner reel 811 can be rotated around the axis of the inner reel 811 by the rotation of the drive motor KM1. As a result, the pattern decorated on the inner reel 811 can be visually recognized by the player as being displaced in the vertical direction.

The annular member 813 is formed in an annular shape with an outer diameter substantially equal to the outer diameter of the rim 812b. The inner peripheral surface of the annular member 813 on the other end side of the opening of the inner reel 811 (the right side in FIG. 30(a)) is attached to the outer peripheral surface thereof.

Here, since the inner reel 811 is formed from a transparent resin sheet as described above, its rigidity is relatively low. Therefore, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotationally displaced, it may be deformed by the centrifugal force, wind pressure, etc. of the rotation, and the player may not be able to accurately recognize the patterns decorated around it.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the inner reel 811 has one end connected to the rim 812b of the rotating member 812 and the other end connected to the annular member 813, so that the inner reel unit 810 rotates. At that time, it becomes difficult to displace due to the centrifugal force and wind pressure. As a result, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotationally displaced, it is possible for the player to accurately recognize the pattern decorated around the inner reel 811 .

Also, since the inner reel 811 can be formed from a sheet, the load on the inner reel 811 can be reduced accordingly. Therefore, the load applied to the drive motor KM1 when rotating the inner reel unit 810 can be reduced. As a result, the rotation of the inner reel unit 810 can be started smoothly.

The outer reel unit 820 includes a cylindrical outer reel 821, a disk-shaped hub 823 having a smaller diameter than the outer reel 821, and one end of the opening of the outer reel 821 (Fig. 30(a)). ) and the spokes 822 connecting the inner peripheral surface of the left side) and the outer peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 .

The outer reel 821 has an inner diameter larger than the outer shape of the inner reel 811 and a width dimension in the axial direction larger than the axial dimension of the inner reel 811 . The inner reel 811 is made of a transparent resin material and has a predetermined thickness in the radial direction. The outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 is decorated with a pattern, and the description of the decoration mode will be given later.

The hub 823 has its axis arranged coaxially with the outer reel 821 and is arranged at a substantially central position in the axial direction of the outer reel 821 . Further, the hub 823 is connected with a driving motor KM2 that imparts rotational driving force to the outer reel unit 820 .

The spokes 822 are formed to be inclined in the axial direction of the outer reel 821 toward the radially outer side of the hub 823, so that the spokes 822 and one end side of the opening of the outer reel 821 (the left side in FIG. 30(a)) are inclined. A space can be formed between The spokes 822 are formed from a plurality of rod-shaped bodies extending from the hub 823 to the edge 824, and have openings 822a between adjacent spokes 822 in the circumferential direction.

The drive motor KM2 has a thickness dimension in the axial direction of the outer reel 821 that is approximately half the axial dimension of the outer reel 821 . As described above, the axial position of the hub 823 is substantially the same as the center of the outer reel 821 in the left-right direction. is formed, most of the drive motor KM2 can be arranged inside the outer reel 821. As a result, the dimensions of the outer reel unit 820 and the drive motor KM2 in the lateral direction (the axial direction of the outer reel 821) can be reduced.

The accommodation unit 880 is formed in a box-like body with an open front side, and can accommodate the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 therein. The housing unit 880 mainly includes a pair of left and right side wall portions 881, and an upper wall portion 882, a lower wall portion 883, and a rear wall portion 884 arranged at the edges between the pair of side wall portions 881 facing each other. It is formed.

The side wall portion 881 is formed of a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the side. lateral direction) is smaller than the outer diameter of the outer drum.

In the side wall portion 881, a drive motor KM2 for driving the outer reel unit 820 is arranged on the right side (inner surface) of the side wall portion 881 on the left side in front view (left side in FIG. 30(a)). A driving motor KM1 for driving the inner reel unit 810 is disposed on the left surface (inner surface) of the side wall portion 881 on the right side. That is, the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 are rotationally displaced with respect to the side wall portion 881 .

Further, the side wall portion 881 has a bulging portion 881 a that bulges in a curved shape corresponding to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 on the side surface on the front side. As a result, light emitted from a backlight unit 830 (to be described later) can be prevented from escaping from the left and right outer sides of the inner reel 811 .

Moreover, the side wall portion 881 is formed of a metal material. Thereby, the rigidity of the housing unit 880 can be increased. In addition, the heat generated inside the housing unit 880 can be discharged to the outside of the housing unit 880 by forming the housing unit 880 from a metal material that generally has a higher thermal conductivity than a resin material. As a result, it is possible to suppress breakage of components due to heat accumulation inside the housing unit 880 .

The upper wall portion 882 and the lower wall portion 883 are plate members that form the upper and lower side surfaces of the housing unit 880. The upper portion (FIG. 30(b) upper portion) of the side wall portion 881 and the lower portion (FIG. 30(b) bottom) edge and along each edge.

The width dimension of the upper wall portion 882 and the lower wall portion in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 30(a)) is formed smaller than the width dimension of the outer reel 821 in the left-right direction (axial direction). As a result, the distance dimension between the opposed side wall portions 881 can be ensured, and the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 can be arranged between the opposed sides.

In addition, a plurality of through holes are formed in the upper wall portion 882 and the lower wall portion 883 so as to penetrate in the radial direction with respect to the axis of the outer reel 821 . Thereby, the fluidity of air between the inside and the outside of the housing unit 880 can be enhanced. As a result, it is possible to prevent heat from accumulating inside the housing unit 880 and to prevent the parts from being damaged by the heat of the housing unit 880 .

The rear wall portion 884 is a plate member that forms the side surface of the accommodation unit 880 on the rear side, and is arranged along the edge of the side wall portion 881 on the rear side (the right side in FIG. 30(b)).

The rear wall portion 884 has an opening 884a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position that intersects the axis of the outer reel 821 in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 30(b)). and a standing portion 884b that is bent and erected toward the front side.

The width of the opening 884a in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 30(a)) is larger than the width of the outer reel 821 in the axial direction. This can prevent the outer reel 821 from colliding with the rear wall portion 884 when the outer reel 821 moves (rocks) in the front-rear direction due to the inertial force of the rotational motion, vibration, or the like.

That is, when the outer reel 821 is moved (swayed) in the front-rear direction due to the inertial force of the rotational motion, vibration, etc., a part of the rear side (the right side in FIG. 30(b)) of the outer reel 821 is opened 884a can be inserted inside the As a result, the outer reel 821 can be prevented from colliding with the rear wall portion 884 .

In addition, the opening 884a can increase air flow between the inside and the outside of the storage unit 880 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the heat from remaining inside the housing unit 880 and to prevent the parts from being damaged by the heat of the housing unit 880 .

Here, if an opening 884a larger than the axial width of the outer reel 821 is formed in the rear wall portion 884, the rigidity of the rear wall portions 884 on both sides of the opening 884a is reduced. As a result, the rear wall portion 884 may bend.

In this case, it is conceivable to increase the rigidity of the rear wall portions 884 on the left and right sides of the opening 884a by increasing the distance between the side wall portions 881 facing each other. There is a problem that the unit itself of the device 800 becomes large.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, standing portions 884b are formed on both left and right sides of the rear wall portion 884 at the position where the opening 884a is formed. Thereby, the rigidity of the rear wall portion 884 can be increased. As a result, bending of the rear wall portion 884 can be suppressed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the rear wall portion 884 is made of a metal material, and the distance dimension from the left and right ends of the opening 884a to the left and right ends of the rear wall portion 884 is sufficiently small. Therefore, it is possible to increase the rate of plastic deformation when forming the left and right ends of the rear wall portion 884 . As a result, rigidity can be increased.

The backlight unit 830 is a unit that emits light from the inside of the inner reel 811 so that the player can easily recognize the pattern of the inner reel 811 , and is arranged inside the front of the inner reel 811 .

The backlight unit 830 is formed in an arc shape when viewed from the side, and the axis of the arc is arranged coaxially with the axis of the inner reel 811 . Further, the axial width dimension of the backlight unit 830 is set to be substantially the same as the axial width dimension of the inner reel 811 .

In addition, the length dimension L4 in the circumferential direction of the backlight unit 830 on the inner reel 811 side is formed to have a length corresponding to three patterns to be decorated on the inner reel 811, which will be described later.

Further, the backlight unit 830 has three concave portions 831 arranged in parallel in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral surface thereof. Therefore, partition plates 832 are formed between the concave portions 831 so as to stand radially outward of the backlight unit 830 .

A base member 833 having an LED that emits light is disposed on the radially inner side surface of each concave portion 831 , and the LED can emit light outward in the radial direction of the backlight unit 830 .

Power can be supplied to each base member 833 independently, and the inner reel 811 can partially emit light. In this case, each base member 833 is arranged in an area (recessed portion 831) surrounded on four sides, so that the light emitted from the LED of the base member 833 enters the area on the front surface of the other base member 833. can be suppressed. Therefore, the inner reel 811 can be made easier to partially emit light.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, patterns to be decorated on the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 will be described. 33(a) is a front view with the inner reel 811 deployed, and FIG. 33(b) is a front view with the outer reel 821 deployed.

As shown in FIG. 33(a), the inner reel 811 is provided with a plurality of patterns drawn at regular intervals in the circumferential direction (vertical direction in FIG. 33). As described above, the circumferential dimension L5 of one pattern is set to one third of the circumferential dimension L4 of the backlight unit 830 (L5×3=L4).

In addition, the inner reel 811 is made of a material that can transmit light as a whole. In particular, the pattern portion (for example, the display of "7") has a higher light transmittance than the surrounding blank portion. Therefore, by irradiating light from the LED of the backlight unit 830 arranged inside the inner reel 811, the light of the LED can be transmitted through the inner reel 811 and the pattern portion can be highlighted. Therefore, if the LED of the backlight unit 830 is in a light-emitting state, the inner reel 811 is illuminated even if the inner reel 811 is not irradiated with outside light (light inside the store or light from other LEDs arranged in the pachinko machine 10). The pattern can be visually recognized by the player.

In this embodiment, 10 patterns of 5 types are continuously drawn in the circumferential direction, and up to 3 patterns can be visually recognized from the player side by the segment display device 600, which will be described later. As described above, each decorative pattern display device 800 is decorated with different patterns, and the player can see up to nine patterns.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 displays 3×3 symbols on the inner reel 811, thereby setting a total of 5 jackpot effective lines, 3 parallel in the horizontal direction and 2 crossed in the diagonal direction. be done. By stopping the inner reel 811 so that three "7" symbols are aligned on any of the activated lines, the player can be informed of the occurrence of a big win state.

As shown in FIG. 33(b), the outer reel 821 has a non-decorated surface 821a that is not decorated and a non-transmissive surface 821b that is decorated so as not to transmit light.

The non-decorated surface 821a is not decorated, so that light can be transmitted therethrough. That is, by forming the outer reel 821 from a transparent material (a transparent resin material in this embodiment), a non-decorative surface 821a that allows light to pass through is formed. In addition, the non-decorative surface 821a may be formed so as to be able to transmit light, and for example, it may be provided with a translucent decoration capable of transmitting light.

The decorative symbol display device 800 rotates the outer reel unit 820 to turn the non-decorative surface 821a toward the player, thereby allowing the player to visually recognize the symbols of the inner reel 811 arranged inside the outer reel 821. can. That is, the player can visually recognize the pattern of the inner reel 811 through the non-decorative surface 821a of the outer reel 821. FIG.

The non-transmissive surface 821b is made non-transmissive to light by applying a black decoration to the outer peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 33(b)). The non-transmissive surface 821b is formed such that its length in the circumferential direction (the length in the vertical direction in FIG. 33(b)) is equal to or greater than three patterns decorated on the inner reel 811. As shown in FIG.

As described above, in this embodiment, three symbols of the inner reel 811 can be displayed on the player side. Therefore, the length in the circumferential direction of the non-transmissive surface 821b is equal to or more than three patterns to be decorated on the inner reel 811, so that the outer reel unit 820 is rotated and the non-transmissive surface of the outer reel 821 is moved by the player. By arranging it on the side, the inner reel 811 can be made invisible from the player side.

In addition, the length in the circumferential direction of the non-transmitting surface 821b is not limited to three or more symbols decorated on the inner reel 811, and the decoration of the inner reel 811 can be made invisible from the player side. It is sufficient if the length is formed. That is, it is sufficient that the non-transmissive surface 821b is formed for the circumferential length of the inner reel 811 that can be visually recognized from the player side.

In addition, the non-transmissive surface 821b includes a transmissive area 821b1 that can partially transmit light, and a pattern 821b2 decorated with a pattern.

The transmissive region 821b1 is formed in a rectangular shape elongated in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 33) when viewed from the front. The transmissive area 821b1 is a part that performs 7-segment display by being combined with a segment display device 600, which will be described later, and can partially transmit light passing through the inner reel 811 to the player side. This can form part of a 7-segment display, which will be described later.

The pattern 821b2 is formed with a length in the circumferential direction corresponding to three patterns to be decorated on the inner reel 811, and each pattern 821b2 of each decorative pattern display device 800 is horizontally aligned in parallel with the outer reel. By stopping 821, the player can be taught that a jackpot condition has occurred.

Further, as described above, since the periphery of the pattern 821b2 is non-transmissive, it is possible to make the inner reel 811 invisible to the player. Therefore, it is possible to stop the symbols of the inner reel 811 on the effective line while providing an effect in which three symbols of the symbols 821b2 are aligned. Therefore, after the player gazes at the outer reel 821 by the rotating performance of the outer reel 821, the player can be made to gaze at the inner reel 811 almost simultaneously with the completion of the performance of the outer reel 821.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest.

Next, the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. FIG. FIG. 34 is a cross-sectional view of the decorative design display device 800 taken along line XXXIV-XXXIV of FIG. 30(a). FIG. 35 is a partially enlarged view of the decorative design display device 800 in the range XXXV of FIG. 36(a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member 812, and FIG. 36(b) is a sectional view of the rotating member 812 taken along line XXXVIb-XXXVIb of FIG. 36(a).

As shown in FIGS. 34 to 36, a predetermined gap is formed between the inner reel 811 of the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel 821 of the outer reel unit 820 facing each other. In addition, the distance between the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810 and the edge 824 projecting radially from one end of the opening of the outer reel 821 of the outer reel unit 820 (left side in FIG. 34) is a predetermined distance. A gap is formed.

A hub 812 a of the rotating member 812 is formed with a protrusion 812 a 1 protruding toward the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820 . The protrusions 812a1 are formed at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the hub 812a (in this embodiment, they are formed on extensions of the spokes 812c (see FIG. 36)). The protrusion 812a1 is formed in a mountain shape with both sides inclined in the circumferential direction of the hub 812a. Therefore, by rotating the inner reel unit 810, wind can be generated by the projection 812a1.

Here, conventionally, a rotatably formed first reel (outer reel unit 820) and a rotatably formed first reel (outer reel unit 820) are arranged substantially concentrically inside the first reel (outer reel unit 820). A gaming machine with a second reel (inner reel unit 810) (that is, with a double reel structure) is known. Also known is a technique for removing and cleaning dust adhering to the display surface of the reel by bringing a rotating brush into contact with the outer peripheral surface (display surface) of the reel and causing the rotating member to follow the rotation of the reel. there is

However, the double reel structure has the problem of being difficult to clean. That is, in the double reel structure, a space for disposing the rotating brush described above is provided between the outer reel (first reel (outer reel unit 820)) and the inner reel (second reel (inner reel unit 810)). cannot be secured, the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel and the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel (second reel) cannot be cleaned.

That is, since the opposing space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 is narrowly formed, in order to remove the dust that has entered and adhered to the opposing space, it is necessary to remove the decorative pattern display. Cleaning is difficult because the device 800 must be disassembled.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, the projection 812a1 can push out air to generate wind. The pushed air (wind) collides with the edge 824 of the opposing outer reel 821 and flows into the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 .

In this case, the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 facing each other is narrower than the space on the inner peripheral side of the edge 824 and the hub 812a. 824 and the space on the inner peripheral side of the hub 812a to the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 facing each other. As a result, dust (dust) sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and dust that is about to stick can be blown off. As a result, it is possible to prevent dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 .

That is, in this embodiment, the outer reel unit 820 includes a cylindrical outer reel 821 and an edge portion 824 projecting radially inward from one axial side of the outer reel 821. 810 includes an inner reel 811 which is formed in a cylindrical shape and whose outer surface faces the inner surface of the outer reel 821 at a predetermined interval; The hub 812a has an outer surface facing the inner surface of the edge portion 824 with a predetermined distance therebetween. The protrusion 812a1 is circumferentially displaced between the hub 812a and the outer surface of the hub 812a to generate wind pressure. be able to. As a result, dust can be removed by air flow, and the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral surface can be cleaned.

Here, if an opening is formed in at least one of the edge portion 824 or the hub 812a, or if a part of the circumferential direction is partially divided, the inner surface of the edge portion 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a are separated. The wind pressure generated by the displacement of the projection 812a1 in the circumferential direction escapes through the openings and the divided portions, weakening the wind pressure and causing the air between the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 to flow accordingly. difficult to let go.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the edge portion 824 and the hub 812a are formed in an annular shape when viewed in the axial direction and have surfaces that are continuous in the circumferential direction. The wind pressure generated by the protrusion 812a1 being displaced in the circumferential direction between the can be increased. Therefore, the air between the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 can be made to flow more easily. As a result, the wind pressure generated by the circumferential displacement of the protrusion 812a1 between the inner surface of the edge portion 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a is utilized to increase the pressure between the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811. can make it easier to flow the air.

In addition, the distance between the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810 and the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820 is partially narrowed in the circumferential direction of the inner reel 811 by the projection 812a1. Therefore, the projection 812a1 can easily change the atmospheric pressure between the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810 and the edge portion 824 of the outer reel unit 820 facing each other. Therefore, the change in atmospheric pressure can be used to facilitate the generation of wind, and the wind is caused to flow into the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 facing each other. Dust (dust) sticking to the outer peripheral surface or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and dust that is about to stick can be blown off. As a result, it is possible to prevent dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 .

More specifically, air has the property of flowing from high pressure to low pressure, and by narrowing the space between the protruding tip of the protrusion 812a1 and the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820, the pressure is partially increased. be able to. Therefore, the air pressure in the space between the opposing outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821, in which the change in air pressure is unlikely to occur, is increased by lower than the atmospheric pressure of As a result, the air can be easily sent to the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821, and the adhesion of dust to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 can be suppressed. can.

Furthermore, since the atmospheric pressure between the projecting tip of the projection 812a1 and the edge 824 can be increased, displacement (wobble) of the projection 812a1 toward the edge 824 or toward the projection 812a1 can be prevented. can be suppressed.

Further, since the outer opening 825 and the inner opening 812c1 are formed in the spokes 822 that support the edge 824 and the spokes 812c that support the hub 812a, the outer opening 825 and the inner opening 812c1 allow the outer opening 825 and the inner opening 812c1. Air between the inner surface of portion 824 and the outer surface of hub 812a can be exhausted to the outside (or air can be drawn from the outside between the inner surface of edge 824 and the outer surface of hub 812a). That is, the air flow resistance is reduced, and the air between the inner surface of the edge portion 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a can be easily flowed (outflow or inflow) accordingly. As a result, the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 are brought into contact with each other by utilizing the wind pressure generated by the circumferential displacement of the standing portion between the inner surface of the edge portion 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a. Allows air to flow easily.

Furthermore, a protrusion 812a1 is erected on the hub 812a (the crotch edge portion 824) of the inner reel unit 810 (or the outer reel unit 820), and the spokes 822 (or the spokes 812c) of the outer reel unit 820 (or the inner reel unit 810) are provided. Since at least the outer opening 825 (or the inner opening 812c1) is formed in the outer opening 825, the effect of reducing the flow resistance by sucking (or exhausting) air through the outer opening 825 can be easily exhibited. That is, when rotating one of the outer reel unit 820 and the inner reel unit 810 in which the protrusion 812a1 is erected, the other in which the outer opening 825 or the inner opening 812c1 is formed is stopped. , the air flow (exhaust or intake) resistance through the outer opening 825 or the inner opening 812c1 can be reduced.

The outer reel 821 is formed slightly radially outwardly inclined (expanded in diameter) from the edge portion 824 (one end) side to which the spokes 822 are connected toward the other end side. Therefore, it is possible to easily send the air that has flowed from one end side to the opposite end side between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the flow of air flowing between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 from being stopped. sticking can be suppressed.

Further, the radially outward inclination angle θ1 of the spokes 812c from the axis of the inner reel 811 is made larger than the radially outward inclination angle θ2 of the spokes 822 from the axis of the outer reel 821 (θ1>θ2). Therefore, when the spokes 812c and the spokes 822 are rotationally displaced to a position (for example, the position shown in FIG. 34) that overlaps in the axial direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 34), they face outward in the radial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 34). The dimension in between is increased.

Therefore, by rotationally displacing either one or both of the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820, the difference in distance between the spokes 812c and the spokes 822 facing each other causes the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 to rotate. It is possible to easily generate the wind toward the space facing the inner peripheral surface of the.

More specifically, the distance between the spokes 812 c and the spokes 822 facing each other increases toward the radially outer side of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 . Therefore, when the spokes 812c and the spokes 822 are rotationally displaced to a position where they overlap in the axial direction, the atmospheric pressure is higher between the spokes 812c and the spokes 822 in the radially inner portions of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821. made high.

As described above, air has the property of flowing from high pressure to low pressure. Therefore, it is possible to form an air flow from the radially inner portion toward the radially outer portion. That is, an air flow can be formed from the axial side of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 toward the side between the hub 812a and the edge portion 824 facing each other. Therefore, it is possible to easily supply air to the space between the opposing outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 . As a result, it is possible to prevent dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 .

In addition, since at least a part of the outer reel 821 of the outer reel unit 820 is formed to have optical transparency, and a plurality of patterns are arranged along the circumferential direction on the inner reel 811 of the inner reel unit 810, Via the outer reel unit 820, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the variation of the symbols accompanying the rotation of the inner reel unit 810. - 特許庁In this case, the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810 is provided with the projection 812a1. In the performance by rotating the outer reel unit 820 or the inner reel unit 810, the chances of cleaning the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 can be increased. That is, the double reel structure can be easily cleaned.

By rotating the inner reel unit 810, the timing of cleaning the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 is not operated by the player (the game ball is not launched into the game area). , preferably when the pachinko machine 10 is in a standby state. In this case, since the inner reel unit 810 is rotated at high speed to generate wind, the switching of the symbols of the inner reel 811 can attract the interest of the player.

Further, the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 may be cleaned while performing the effect of rotationally displacing the non-transmissive surface 821b of the outer reel 821 toward the player side. In this case, since the inner reel 811 is invisible to the player, cleaning can be performed without the player visually confirming the cleaning state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest. In addition, since it can be done during the game state, even when the game continues for a predetermined time, the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 can be cleaned. Therefore, it is possible to prevent dust such as dust from accumulating on the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 during the game.

Next, the segment display device 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 63. FIG. First, the configuration of the segment display device 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. 37 is a front view of the segment display device 600, and FIG. 38 is an exploded view of the segment display device 600. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the segment display device 600 includes a vertical displacement unit 600L arranged on the left side in front view, a vertical displacement unit 600R arranged on the right side in front view, and left and right vertical displacement units 600L. , 600R are arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction, and a connecting member 601 is fastened and fixed from the rear side.

Since the vertical displacement units 600L, 600C, and 600R have substantially the same configuration, only the vertical displacement unit 600L disposed on the left side in front view will be described below, and the vertical displacement units 600C and 600R will be described. A detailed explanation is omitted.

Next, the vertical displacement unit 600L will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41. FIG. FIG. 39(a) is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 600L, and FIG. 39(b) is a side view of the vertical displacement unit 600C. 40 is an exploded perspective front view of the vertical displacement unit 600L, and FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective rear view of the vertical displacement unit 600L.

40 and 41 illustrate a mode in which the first segment unit 610, the second segment unit 620, and the displacement unit 650 are disassembled.

As shown in FIGS. 39 to 41, the vertical displacement unit 600L includes a displacement unit 650 configured to be displaceable, and a first segment unit 610 and a second segment unit 620 arranged on the left and right sides of the displacement unit 650. is arranged with

The first segment unit 610 is a unit capable of displaying one segment in the horizontal direction, and the second segment unit 620 is a unit capable of displaying two segments in the horizontal direction. be. In addition, since the first segment unit 610 is formed only by halving the second segment unit 620 in the left-right direction, only the second segment unit 620 will be described below. A code is similarly assigned to the first segment unit 610 .

Each of the vertical displacement units 600L, 600C, and 600R is formed with a different arrangement of the first segment unit 610 and the second segment unit 620, and the vertical displacement unit 610C has the second segment unit 620 only on the right side in front view. The second segment unit 620 is arranged on the right side of the vertical displacement unit 610R in the front view.

Therefore, the vertical displacement unit 600L can display one segment on the left side when viewed from the front and two segments on the right side when viewed from the front. In addition, the vertical displacement unit 600C can display two segments only on the right side when viewed from the front. Furthermore, the vertical displacement unit 600L can display a single segment only on the right side when viewed from the front. That is, it is possible to adopt a mode in which one segment is formed on both left and right sides of each of the vertical displacement units 600L, 600C, and 600R.

Next, the second segment unit 620 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 44. FIG. 42(a) is a front view of the second segment unit 620, and FIG. 42(b) is a rear view of the second segment unit 620. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective front view of the second segment unit 620, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective rear view of the second segment unit 620. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 42 to 44, the second segment unit 620 includes a light transmission member 621 arranged on the front side, a partition member 622 arranged on the rear surface of the light transmission member 621, and a partition member 622 , a base member 624 disposed between the plurality of diffusion members 623, and reflection members 625 disposed on both sides of the base member 624. formed by

The light transmitting member 621 is made of a translucent light transmitting resin material through which light can pass. The light-transmitting member 621 mainly includes a light-transmitting portion 621a formed in an arcuate plate-like shape that protrudes toward the front side, and a planar portion 621b that is continuously formed above and below the light-transmitting portion 621a. be.

The light-transmitting portion 621a includes standing walls 621a1 standing on the back side from the left and right ends, fastening portions 621a2 projecting annularly from the top and bottom ends to the back side, and vertical direction at the center position on the front side. and a decorative portion 621a3 continuously recessed on the back side.

The erected walls 621a1 are erected from the left and right ends of the light transmitting portion 621a toward the back side. The dimension between the standing walls 621a1 facing each other is set to be substantially the same as the width dimension in the left-right direction of the partition member 622, which will be described later. Therefore, when the partition member 622 is arranged on the back side of the light transmitting portion 621a, the partition member 622 can be restricted from moving left and right.

The fastening portion 621a2 is a protrusion that forms a hole for fastening a reflecting member 625, which will be described later, with a screw, and is annularly projected from the back side of the light transmitting portion 621a. Therefore, the reflection member 625 can be fastened by screwing the tip of the screw into the inner edge of the fastening portion 621a2.

As described above, the decoration portion 621a3 is recessed continuously in the vertical direction at the center position of the light transmission portion 621a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the light transmitted through the left side in front view from being reflected inside the decorative portion 621a3 and emitted from the right side in front view. A detailed description of the light transmitted through the decorative portion 621a3 will be given later.

The plane portion 621b is a plate member for fastening with a base member 660 of a displacement unit 650, which will be described later. The plane portion 621b is formed in a plate-like body that has substantially the same shape as the base member 660 when viewed from the front. can do.

In addition, elastic pieces 621b1 projecting to the opposite side are formed on the flat portion 621b. The elastic pieces 621b1 are formed so as to protrude from opposite side surfaces of the pair of upper and lower flat portions 621b, and protrude in a curved shape that is convex toward the front side. In addition, the elastic piece 621b1 is formed in a curved shape with a radius smaller than that of the light transmitting portion 621a, and the protruding tip of the elastic piece 621b1 is the upper wall portion 882 or the lower wall of the decorative design display device 800 disposed inside the displacement unit 650. It is configured to be in contact with the portion 883 . Thereby, when the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 of the decorative symbol display device 800 are rotationally driven, the vibration of the decorative symbol display device 800 can be suppressed.

The partition member 622 is made of a resin material that does not easily transmit light, and is shaped like a curved plate when viewed from the side. The radius of the curved outer peripheral surface of the partition member 622 is set to be substantially the same as the radius of the inner peripheral surface of the light transmitting portion 621a, and the width in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 42) is the width in the vertical direction of the light transmitting portion 621a. is set smaller than Therefore, the outer peripheral surface of the partition member 622 can be placed in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the light transmitting portion 621a.

In front view, the partition member 622 has first recessed portions 622a recessed toward the center from both left and right (left and right in FIG. 42) and recessed toward the center from upper and lower (up and down in FIG. 42) end faces. It mainly includes a second recessed portion 622b provided and a projecting portion 622c projecting from the left-right central position on the back side.

Two first recessed portions 622a are formed on both sides of the left and right sides in the vertical direction. That is, four first recessed portions 622 a are formed in the partition member 622 .

The second recessed portion 622b is recessed from both upper and lower ends. The dimension between the opposed ends of the second recessed portion 622b is set to be substantially the same as the distance between the fastening portions 621a2 formed in the light transmitting member 621 in the vertical direction. Therefore, when the partition member 622 is arranged on the back side of the light transmission member 621, the vertical movement of the partition member 622 can be suppressed by inserting the fastening portion 621a2 inside the second concave portion 622b. .

The projecting portion 622c is formed at the center position of the partition member 622 in the left-right direction so as to extend in the vertical direction. In addition, the projecting portion 622c has a recessed portion 622c1 recessed in the projecting distal end surface thereof. The recessed portion 622c1 is formed so that the width dimension in the left-right direction is larger than the thickness dimension of the base member 624 described later. Therefore, when disposing the base member 624 in the partition member 622, the tip side of the base member 624 can be inserted inside the recess 622c1. As a result, when arranging the base member 624, the base member 624 can be positioned, and movement of the base member 624 in the left-right direction can be suppressed.

The diffusion member 623 is made of a cloudy resin material, and can diffuse the light that enters inside. The diffusion member 623 is formed in a curved plate shape when viewed from the side, and the radius of its outer peripheral portion (front side) is set substantially equal to the radius of the inner peripheral portion (back side) of the partition member 622 . Therefore, the diffusion member 623 can be placed on the rear side of the partition member 622 while being grounded.

Two diffusing members 623 are vertically arranged side by side, and two diffusing members 623 are horizontally spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance. That is, four diffusion members 623 are arranged on the rear side of the partition member 622 .

The width dimension of the diffusing member 623 in the left-right direction is set substantially equal to the dimension between the standing wall 621a1 of the light transmitting member 621 and the projecting portion 622c of the partition member 622 facing each other. As a result, when the diffusing member 623 is arranged on the rear side of the partition member 622, the diffusing member 623 can be prevented from moving to the left or right.

Further, the diffusion member 623 is formed with a projecting portion 623a projecting to the front side and a recessed portion 623b recessed on the rear side of the projecting portion 623a.

The protruding portion 623a is protrudingly formed at a position corresponding to the first recessed portion 622a of the partition member 622 disposed on the front side of the diffusion member 623, and is disposed in a state of being inserted inside the first recessed portion 622a. is set. As a result, when the diffusion member 623 is arranged on the back side of the partition member 622, the partition member 622 can be prevented from being displaced in the horizontal and vertical directions.

Also, the projection distance of the projecting portion 623 a is set smaller than the thickness dimension of the partition member 622 . That is, it is arranged in a state in which a predetermined gap is formed between the projecting tip surface of the projecting portion 623a and the rear surface of the light transmitting member 621 (see FIG. 45).

The recessed portion 623b is recessed in a shape slightly smaller than the front view shape of the projecting portion 623a on the side opposite to the projecting portion 623a (the rear side of the diffusion member 623). is formed. As a result, the plate thickness of the diffusion member 623 can be made substantially constant, and distortion when the diffusion member 623 is molded can be suppressed. In addition, the concave portion 623b is formed in a shape slightly smaller than the projecting portion 623a, so that the area of the rear side of the end portion of the projecting portion 623a can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to increase the amount of light incident on the diffusion member 623 from the LEDs 624a, which will be described later, at the ends of the projecting portions 623a. As a result, the form of the light visually recognized by the player through the diffusing member 623 can be made clearer, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest.

The base member 624 is formed of a crescent-shaped plate having a curved front side, and includes an LED 624a that emits light to the side surface. The radius of the arc of the base member 624 is set to be substantially the same as the radius of the recessed tip surface of the recess 622c1 formed in the partition member 622 . Therefore, when disposing the base member 624 on the rear surface of the partition member 622, the base member 624 is inserted into the recess 622c1 of the partition member 622, thereby suppressing the displacement of the base member 624 in the left-right direction. can.

A plurality of LEDs 624 a are arranged on both left and right side surfaces of the base member 624 , and their irradiation directions are perpendicular to the side surfaces of the base member 624 . That is, the irradiation direction of the light from the LED 624a is the horizontal direction. A detailed description of the irradiation of light from the LED 624a will be given later.

One reflecting member 625 is arranged on each of the left and right sides of the base member 624 . The reflecting member 625 is made of a white resin material and formed in an arcuate shape protruding toward the front side. Also, the radius of the arc of the reflecting member 625 is set to be substantially the same as the radius of the inner peripheral surface of the diffusing member 623 . As a result, when the reflecting member 625 is arranged on the rear side of the diffusing member 623, the reflecting member 625 and the diffusing member 623 can be grounded.

The reflecting member 625 is formed in a plate-like body that is separated from the base member 624 in the left-right direction from the back side to the front side, and has an inclined portion 625a that is inclined from the back side to the front side. A plurality of recessed portions 625b are formed in the front side of the body in a vertical direction, and wall portions 625c are formed to project toward the front side from the upper end portion, the lower end portion and the intermediate portion of the recessed portion 625b. formed by

The front side of the inclined portion 625 a is a reflecting surface 625 a 1 that reflects the light from the LED 624 a of the base member 624 toward the front side, and is formed at an angle of approximately 60 degrees with respect to the side surface of the base member 624 . As described above, the light irradiation direction of the LEDs 624a is perpendicular to the side surfaces of the base member 624. Therefore, the reflecting surfaces 625a1 are formed to be inclined with respect to the side surfaces of the base member 624, so that the LEDs 624a The light emitted from the can be reflected to the front side. The mode in which the light from the LED 624a travels will be described later.

The concave portion 625b is formed by concavely forming a convex curved shape on the back side. In addition, the concave portion 625b is formed at a position corresponding to the LED 624a of the base member 624, so that the amount of light from the LED 624a that is visually recognized by the player through the diffusion member 623 can be made uniform. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, progress of light emitted from the LED 624a of the second segment unit 620 will be described in detail. FIG. 45 is a cross-sectional view of the second segment unit 620 taken along line XLV-XLV in FIG. 42(a). In addition, in FIG. 45, a part of the mode of the light emitted from the LED 624a is illustrated by a chain double-dashed line. In addition, the outer shape of the decorative design display device 800 arranged on the left and right rear sides of the second segment unit 620 is illustrated by two-dot chain lines.

As shown in FIG. 45, the reflective surface 625a1 is inclined at an obtuse angle with respect to the side surface of the base member 624 (that is, the light emitted from the LED 624a intersects the reflective surface 625a1 at an acute angle). can be reflected in the outside direction. In this case, since the reflecting member 625 is formed of a plate member having a substantially constant thickness, the space on the side opposite to the reflecting surface 625a1 (the back side of the reflecting member 625) can be increased. Thereby, the end portion of the decorative pattern display device 800 can be arranged on the back side of the second segment unit 620 .

Here, a rotation (decorative pattern display device 800) that is rotatably formed and arranged side by side at a predetermined interval (decorative pattern display device 800), and at least one A decorative member (light-transmitting member 621) having a light-transmitting part, and a substrate (base member 624) disposed on the back side of the decorative member and having a plurality of light-emitting means (LEDs 624a) mounted thereon. A game machine is known in which a board is arranged in such a manner that the surface on which the means is mounted is substantially perpendicular to the back surface of the decorative member. According to this gaming machine, the decorative member not only shields the space between the spinning drums from the player, but also forms (displays) a pattern on the surface of the decorative member by the light of the light-emitting means that has passed through the decorative member. An effect can be performed in which the pattern of the decorative member is visually recognized by the player integrally with the pattern displayed on the outer peripheral surface of the spinning drum.

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the board is arranged so that the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is orthogonal to the back surface of the decorative member, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means is sufficiently transmitted to the back surface of the decorative member. Therefore, the pattern formed (displayed) by the light from the light emitting means cannot be made sufficiently large. Therefore, there is a problem that the performance effect is insufficient. On the other hand, if the pattern formed (displayed) by the light from the light-emitting means is kept small and the decorative member (area excluding the pattern) is enlarged, the sense of unity between the decorative member and the reel is impaired.

On the other hand, according to this embodiment, since the reflecting member 625 for reflecting the light emitted from the LED 624a to the back surface of the light transmitting member 621 is provided, the surface on which the LED 624a is mounted is perpendicular to the back surface of the light transmitting member 621. Even when the base member 624 is arranged in such a posture, it is possible to widen the irradiation range of the light emitted from the LED 624a to the rear surface of the light transmitting member 621 . Therefore, the pattern formed (displayed) by the light from the LED 624a can be enlarged accordingly, and the presentation effect can be enhanced. In addition, since the pattern formed (displayed) by the light of the LED 624a can be enlarged, the area excluding the pattern can be reduced, so that the light transmitting member 621 and the decorative pattern display device 800 can form a sense of unity.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 45, the light transmitting member 621 is located on the front side of the outer peripheral surface of the decorative design display device 800, and extends the outer edge to a position overlapping the outer peripheral surface of the decorative design display device 800 in a front view. Since it is formed to extend, the axial end face of the decorative pattern display device 800 can be easily shielded (difficult to be visually recognized) from the player. In addition, since the design of the light transmission member 621 formed (displayed) by the light emitted from the LED 624a and the design displayed on the outer peripheral surface of the decorative design display device 800 can be made closer, the light transmission member 621 and the decorative pattern display device 800 can easily form a sense of unity.

Further, the reflection member 625 connects the surface of the base member 624 on which the LEDs 624a are mounted and the back surface of the light transmission member 621, so that the area of the base member 624 on which the LEDs 624a are mounted and the pattern of the light transmission member 621 are formed. , and the back surface of the reflecting member 625 is inclined in a direction away from the axial end surface of the decorative design display device 800 as it goes from the light transmitting member 621 toward the base member 624, so that the light emitted from the LED 624a While securing the size of the pattern formed (displayed) by, the back surface of the light transmitting member 621 is brought close to the outer peripheral surface of the decorative pattern display device 800, and the decorative pattern display device 800 is positioned on the back surface of the light transmitting member 621. It can be made to enter the back side (the decorative design display device 800 can be brought close to the base member 624). As a result, the axial end face of the decorative pattern display device 800 can be easily shielded (difficult to be visually recognized) from the player, and a sense of unity between the light transmission member 621 and the decorative pattern display device 800 can be easily formed.

In addition, since the LEDs 624a are mounted on both one side surface and the other side surface of the base member 624, the light emitted from the LEDs 624a mounted on one side surface and the light emitted from the LEDs 624a mounted on the other side surface Different patterns can be independently formed (displayed) on the light transmission member 621 depending on the light emitted from the LED 624a.

In this case, the number of base members 624 arranged between the decorative pattern display devices 800 arranged side by side can be one. Therefore, since the space required for arranging the base member 624 can be reduced, the decorative pattern display device 800 is moved into the back of the light transmitting member 621 (the decorative pattern display device 800 is brought closer to the base member 624). can be made). As a result, the axial end face of the decorative pattern display device 800 can be easily shielded (difficult to be visually recognized) from the player, and a sense of unity between the light transmission member 621 and the decorative pattern display device 800 can be easily formed.

Furthermore, as described above, the reflective surface 625a1 is inclined at an obtuse angle with respect to the side surface of the base member 624 (that is, the light emitted from the LED 624a intersects the reflective surface 625a1 at an acute angle). can be reflected in the outside direction. As a result, the size of the reflecting member 625 can be reduced (compared to the case where the reflecting surface 625a1 is inclined at an acute angle with respect to the side surface of the base member 624). Therefore, the space on the back side of the second segment unit 620 can be secured accordingly. As a result, the second segment unit 620 and the decorative pattern display device 800 can be arranged close to each other, so that the sense of unity between the light transmission member 621 and the decorative pattern display device 800 can be easily formed.

Next, the relationship between the LED 624a and the recess 625b will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 and 47. FIG. 46 is a side view of base member 624. FIG. FIG. 47 is a cross-sectional view of the second segment unit 620 along line XLVII-XLVII in FIG. 42(a).

As shown in FIG. 46, the LED 624a is formed in a square shape when viewed from the side, and can irradiate light from the entire area of the square. The LEDs 624a are arranged at intervals of an inclination angle .theta.1 in the circumferential direction around an axis that is substantially the same as the curved axis on the front side of the base member 624. As shown in FIG. Thereby, the heat accumulated in the base member 624 due to the irradiation of the LED 624a can be dispersed. As a result, it is possible to suppress damage to the LEDs 624a due to partial heating of the base member 624 .

In this embodiment, eight LEDs 624a are distributed in the circumferential direction. Also, the LED 624 a is disposed in such a direction that one side of the square light emitting surface is aligned with the tangential direction of the curved shape of the base member 624 .

Here, conventionally, a substrate (base member 624) on which a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs 624a) are mounted and a transmitting member (light transmitting member 621) that transmits light emitted from the light emitting means are provided. A gaming machine is known in which a light transmitting portion 621a) of a transmitting member 621 is curved and a plurality of light emitting means are arranged along the curve of the transmitting member. In this case, the plurality of light emitting means are arranged at regular intervals when the transmissive member is viewed from the front. That is, they are equally spaced along the direction of a line segment (chord) connecting both ends of a curved line (arc) formed by a plurality of light emitting means. However, in the game machine described above, since the distance between adjacent light emitting means is narrow in some of the plurality of light emitting means, there is a problem that the distribution of heat emitted by the light emitting means is uneven. As a result, heat tends to concentrate on a part of the light emitting means, which tends to shorten the life of the light emitting means.

On the other hand, according to this embodiment, since the LEDs 624a are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction, the intervals between the LEDs 624a adjacent to each other can be made constant, and the heat generated by the LEDs 624a can be uniformly distributed. As a result, it is possible to prevent heat from concentrating on some of the LEDs 624a, thereby extending the life of each LED 624a.

As shown in FIG. 47, one concave portion 625b is formed on the back side (right side in FIG. 47) of each LED 624a. In addition, the separation distance X1 from one end (lower end) to the other end (upper end) in the vertical direction of one concave portion 625b is set to be the same.

Here, as described above, the LEDs 624a are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction at the inclination angle θ1. Therefore, the vertical interval between the LEDs 624a is narrower on the central side in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 46) than on the outer side in the vertical direction. Therefore, the amount of light reflected by the reflecting member 625 and irradiated to the player side increases toward the center in the vertical direction (the center side in the vertical direction becomes darker), and the light is uniformly visible to the player. I had a problem that I couldn't.

In other words, when a plurality of LEDs 624a are arranged at equal intervals (that is, at equal intervals in the circumferential direction) along the curvature of the light transmitting portion 621a, the plurality of LEDs 624a are arranged at unequal intervals when the light transmitting portion 621a is viewed from the front. will be arranged in That is, in the front view of the light transmitting portion 621a, a narrow area and a wide area are formed between the LEDs 624a. Therefore, the distribution of the amount of light becomes uneven along the arrangement direction of the plurality of LEDs 624a.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a reflecting member 625 for reflecting the light emitted from the LED 624a toward the light transmitting portion 621a is provided, and the reflecting member 625 includes a plurality of concave portions 625b partitioned corresponding to the plurality of LEDs 624a. , and the division widths of the light transmitting portions 621a of the plurality of recesses 625b in a front view are set to be substantially the same. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light along the arrangement direction of the plurality of LEDs 624a can be made uniform.

That is, since the separation distance X1 from one end side (lower end portion) to the other end side (upper end portion) in the vertical direction of one concave portion 625b is set to be the same, the illumination of one LED 624a causes the player to The area of the light emitted to the side can be substantially the same in the vertical direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the amount of light emitted toward the player from increasing toward the center in the vertical direction. As a result, the light can be uniformly viewed by the player.

In addition, since the light-emitting surface of the LED 624a is formed in a rectangular (square) shape when viewed from the front, it is possible to ensure the diffusion of light (light is emitted at a wider angle) than when the light-emitting surface is circular. ), the distribution of the amount of light can be made uniform in one concave portion 625b.

In addition, the light emitting surface means the front surface of the encapsulating resin that encloses the LED chip. Therefore, the light-emitting surface having a rectangular shape in front view means that the shape of the encapsulating resin (the shape of the internal space of the reflector surrounding the encapsulating resin in front view) is rectangular.

Furthermore, at least some of the plurality of LEDs 624a are arranged so that one side of the light emitting surface is aligned with the tangential direction of the curved shape of the light transmitting portion 621a. can be easily diffused uniformly along the curvature of the As a result, the distribution of the amount of light that is visually recognized through the light transmitting portion 621a can be made uniform.

Further, the concave portion 625b is formed as a curved surface that faces the back surface of the light transmitting portion 621a and is recessed on the side away from the back surface of the light transmitting portion 621a. , the base member 624 can be disposed in a posture orthogonal to the light transmitting portion 621a. That is, the degree of freedom in arranging the unit composed of the light transmission portion 621a, the base member 624 and the reflection member 625 can be increased. In this case, the concave portion 625b is arranged so as to surround the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the LED 624a from the direction perpendicular to the traveling direction of the light. can be uniformly incident on the As a result, the distribution of the amount of light that is visually recognized through the light transmitting portion 621a can be made uniform.

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the mode of light emitted by the LED 624a will be described. FIG. 48 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 600L. In FIG. 48, the light emitted by the LED 624a is indicated by a chain double-dashed line, and the reference numeral of the irradiation region SR1 is attached.

As shown in FIG. 48, by emitting light from the LED 624a, the first segment unit 610 is irradiated with light from two irradiation regions SR1 aligned in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 48). Further, the second segment unit 620 is irradiated with light from the irradiation regions SR1 arranged vertically and horizontally in 2×2. In addition, the irradiation region SR1 of the second segment unit 620 is formed on the left and right sides of the decorative portion 621a3 of the light transmitting member 621. As shown in FIG.

Therefore, both the left and right sides of the number can be displayed by the 7-segment display by the irradiation area SR1 of the first segment unit 610 and the left side of the irradiation area SR1 of the second segment unit 620. FIG. Note that the top, bottom, and center of numbers in the 7-segment display will be described later.

Next, the configuration of the displacement unit 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50. FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective front view of the vertical displacement unit 600L, and FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective rear view of the vertical displacement unit 600L. 49 and 50 show a disassembled state of the displacement unit 650 of the vertical displacement unit 600L.

As shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the displacement unit 650 includes a pair of left and right base members 660, a displacement member 670 pivotally supported by the base member 660 and rotationally displaceable, and a displacement member 670 provided on the base member 660. and a drive means 680 for transmitting the rotational drive of the drive motor KM3 to the displacement member 670.

The base member 660 is formed of a pair of right and left plate members having a space in the center larger than that of the decorative pattern display device 800 described above. The first segment unit 610 is arranged on the front side of the base member 660 on the left side in front view, and the second segment unit 620 is arranged on the front side of the base member 660 on the right side in front view. Note that the base members 660 are arranged upside down and left to right, and in this embodiment, only the left base member 660 in front view will be described, and the description of the left base member 660 in front view will be omitted.

The base member 660 is formed in a rectangular shape that is elongated in the vertical direction when viewed from the side, and has a protruding portion 661 that protrudes in a convex shape from the side surface on the front side to the front side. The base member 660 also includes a through hole 662 provided at one end (upper end) in the vertical direction, through which the shaft of the drive motor KM3 is inserted, and coupling holes 662 provided at both ends (lower end) in the vertical direction. An insertion hole 663 through which a rod 681 is inserted, a recess 664 in which a displacing member 670 (to be described later) is pivotally supported, a sliding groove 665 formed in an arc shape around the axis of the recess 664, and upper and lower sides of the recess 664. and an engaging portion 666 protruding into the venue.

The protruding portion 661 has a radius of the protruding tip set smaller than the radius of the inner peripheral surface of the reflecting member 625 described above, and its curved axis is set substantially on the same straight line as the curved axis of the reflecting member 625 . Therefore, when the first segment unit 610 and the second segment unit 620 are arranged on the base member 660, it is possible to suppress contact between the projecting portion 661 and the reflecting member 625, and the heat of the base member 624 is It is possible to suppress intrusion between the opposing base members 660 . As a result, the temperature of the decorative pattern display device 800 arranged inside the opposing base member 660 rises, and the drive motors KM1 and KM2 that drive the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 to rotate can be prevented from being broken.

The through hole 662 is a hole through which the shaft of the drive motor KM3 and a gear 682 connected to the shaft are inserted, and the inner diameter thereof is formed larger than the outer shape of the gear 682 and smaller than the main body of the drive motor KM3. set. Therefore, the driving motor KM3 can be arranged on the base member 660 while the gear 682 is connected to the driving motor KM3. In addition, the drive motor KM3 is attached to the base member 660 from the opposite side of the base member 660 arranged to face each other.

The through-holes 662 are holes into which connecting rods 681 of the driving means 680 described later are inserted, are formed larger than the external shape of the connecting rods 681 , and are formed at both upper and lower ends of the base member 660 .

The concave portion 664 is formed by recessing in a circular shape outward from the opposing side of the base member 660 . The concave portion 664 is formed slightly larger than the outer diameter of a connecting projection 671b of a displacement member 670, which will be described later. As a result, the connecting projection 671b can be inserted and arranged inside the recess 664 .

By inserting the connecting protrusion 671 b of the displacement member 670 into the sliding groove 665 , the displacement member 670 and the driving means 680 arranged outside the pair of base members 660 can be connected. Further, by inserting the connecting projection 671b into the sliding groove 665, the displacement of the displacement member 670 can be guided. Therefore, the displacement member 670 can be displaced smoothly.

The engaging portion 666 is formed on the opposing side of the base member 660 so that the tip thereof has a clearance larger than the diameter of the opposing side surface of the base member 660 and one end of the torsion spring SP1, which will be described later. As a result, one end of the torsion spring SP1 can be engaged with the engaging portion 666 .

The displacement members 670 are arranged in a pair of upper and lower parts in opposite directions. The displacement member 670 is formed of an extension member 671 whose one end is pivotally supported by the base member 660 and a decoration unit 672 connected to the other end of the extension member 671 .

The extension members 671 are formed in a substantially L-shaped plate shape and arranged in pairs in opposite directions. The extension member 671 has a shaft support hole 671a penetrating in the left-right direction at one end on the long side, a connecting projection 671b protruding left and right outward at a substantially central position in the longitudinal direction of the long side, and a shaft support hole 671a extending from the side surface of the long side. and an elastic member 671f made of an elastic material and arranged on the side surface of the extension member 671. As shown in FIG.

The shaft support hole 671a is a hole into which the collar C is inserted, and its inner diameter is formed larger than the outer diameter of the collar C. As shown in FIG. Therefore, by inserting the collar C into the shaft support hole 671a and fastening and fixing the collar C to the inside of the recess 664 of the base member 660 with screws, the displacement member 670 is rotatably connected to the base member 660. can.

Further, by arranging the shaft support holes 671a of the pair of displacement members 670 coaxially, and inserting the collar C into the shaft support holes 671a of the pair of displacement members 670 and fastening and fixing it to the base member 660, the upper and lower A displacement member 670 is coaxially rotatably arranged.

Further, the left and right extension members 671 are formed with a bulging portion 671a1 that bulges outward in the left-right direction around one shaft support hole 671a. The bulging portion 671 a 1 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the recess 664 of the base member 660 . The bulging portions 671 a 1 are arranged on the left and right outer sides of the pair of displacement members 670 .

That is, in the present embodiment, the bulging portion 671a1 is formed in the right shaft support hole 671a of the upper displacement member 670, so that the right shaft support hole 671a of the lower displacement member 670 is expanded. , is arranged inside the bulging portion 671a1. On the other hand, the left shaft support hole 671a has a bulging portion 671a1 formed in the left shaft support hole 671a of the lower displacement member 670, so that the left shaft support of the upper displacement member 670 is formed. The hole 671a is arranged inside the bulging portion 671a1 (see FIG. 49).

Accordingly, when disposing the displacement member 670 on the base member 660 , the collar C allows the bulging portion 671 a 1 to be inserted into the recess 664 . As a result, when a force acts in the radial direction of the shaft of the shaft support hole 671a of the displacement member 670, the outer peripheral surface of the bulging portion 671a1 and the inner peripheral surface of the recess 664 come into contact with each other. Damage to the collar C can be suppressed.

That is, in the present embodiment, the pair of displacement members 670 are coaxially arranged on the base member 660, so the axial length of the collar C is increased accordingly. Therefore, when a force acts on the rotating shaft of the displacement member 670 in the radial direction, a large force tends to act on the rotating shaft. For this reason, where the shaft support hole 671a or the collar C is likely to be damaged, the contact between the bulging portion 671a1 and the recessed portion 664 maintains the force acting on the rotating shaft of the displacement member 670 in the radial direction. can do. As a result, damage to the shaft support hole 671a or the collar C can be suppressed.

A through-hole 671d1 is formed in the projection 671d so as to extend through the extension member 671 in the longitudinal direction. The through-hole 671d1 is a hole through which torsion springs SP1 and SP2, which will be described later, are inserted therein, and is formed larger than the outer diameter of the torsion springs SP1 and SP2.

The elastic member 671f is arranged on the side surface of the extension member 671 on the side of the displacing member 670, which is arranged as a pair of upper and lower members to be described later, in the direction in which they approach each other. In addition, when the upper and lower extension members 671 are arranged at positions close to each other, the size is set so that the side surfaces of the elastic members 671f contact each other. This makes it possible to absorb the impact when the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670 are displaced to the adjacent positions.

The drive means 680 is means for transmitting the power of the drive motor KM3 to the displacement member 670. As shown in FIG. The drive means 680 includes a gear 682 connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM3, a large-diameter gear 683 meshing with the gear 682, and a rod-shaped body having one end connected to the side surface of the large-diameter gear 683 and the other end. A first link member 684 connected to the displacement member 670, a connecting rod 681 transmitting power to the opposite side via the base member 660, a cam member 685 connected to the connecting rod 681 and rotating, It mainly includes a second link member 686 formed in a rod-like body, one end of which is rotatably connected to the cam member 685 and the other end of which is connected to the displacement member 670 .

The gear 682 is connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM3 as described above, and is rotated by the rotation of the drive motor KM3.

The large-diameter gear 683 is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the side, and includes a gear surface 683a formed on a tooth surface that meshes with the gear 682, and a projection 683b that protrudes annularly from the side surface in the rotation axis direction. formed by Since the gear surface 683a meshes with the gear 682, the large-diameter gear 683 is rotated when the gear 682 is rotated. That is, it is rotated by the drive motor KM3 being rotationally driven.

The protrusion 683 b is formed to protrude in an annular shape, and its axis is arranged at a position different from the rotation axis of the large-diameter gear 683 . Therefore, when the large-diameter gear 683 is rotationally displaced, the projection 683b is rotationally displaced on a circle centered on the rotation axis.

The first link member 684 is formed in a rod-like body, and through holes 684a and 684b are formed in both ends thereof so as to penetrate in the left-right direction.

The insertion hole 684a is a hole into which the protrusion 683b of the large-diameter gear 683 is inserted, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the protrusion 683b. A protrusion 683b is inserted into the insertion hole 684a, and the tip of the protrusion 683b is fastened with a screw having a larger outer diameter of the head than the inner diameter of the insertion hole 684a. state can be connected.

The insertion hole 684b is a hole into which the connecting protrusion 671b of the displacement member 670 is inserted, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the connecting protrusion 671b. The connecting projection 671b is inserted into the insertion hole 684b, and the tip of the connecting projection 671b is fastened with a screw having a larger outer diameter of the head than the inner diameter of the insertion hole 684b, so that the first link member 684 can be rotated to the displacement member 670. can be connected in good condition.

Therefore, when the large-diameter gear 683 is rotated via the gear 682, the projection 683b is rotationally displaced about the rotational axis of the large-diameter gear 683 as the large-diameter gear 683 is rotated. The first link member 684, to which one end is connected, is displaced, and the displacement member 670, which is connected to the other end of the first link member 684, is displaced.

One end of the connecting rod 681 is inserted through an insertion hole 663 of a base member 660 arranged on the left side in front view, and is internally fitted to the rotating shaft portion of the large-diameter gear 683 . On the other hand, the other end of connecting rod 681 is connected to cam member 685 . Therefore, the rotational drive of the drive motor KM3 rotates the connecting rod 681 and the cam member 685. As shown in FIG.

The cam member 685 is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the side, and the connecting rod 681 is internally fitted to the shaft portion thereof. The cam member 685 also has a projection 685a that protrudes outward from its axial side surface in an annular shape. The protrusion 685 a is formed to protrude in an annular shape, and its axis is arranged at a position different from the rotation axis of the cam member 685 . Therefore, when the cam member 685 is rotationally displaced, the projection 685a is rotationally displaced on a circle centered on the rotation axis.

The second link member 686 is formed in the same shape as that of the first link member 684 that is left-right reversed. The second link member 686 has insertion holes 686a and 686b at both longitudinal ends thereof.

The insertion hole 686a is a hole into which the projection 685a of the cam member 685 is inserted, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the projection 685a. The protrusion 685a is inserted into the insertion hole 686a, and the tip of the protrusion 685a is fastened with a screw having a larger outer diameter of the head than the inner diameter of the insertion hole 686a. can be concatenated with

The insertion hole 686b is a hole into which the connecting projection 671b of the displacement member 670 is inserted, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the connecting projection 671b. The connecting projection 671b is inserted into the insertion hole 686b, and the tip of the connecting projection 671b is fastened with a screw having a larger outer diameter of the head than the inner diameter of the insertion hole 684b, so that the second link member 686 can be rotated to the displacement member 670. can be connected in good condition.

Therefore, when the cam member 685 is rotated via the connecting rod 681, the projection 685a is rotationally displaced around the rotational axis of the cam member 685 as the cam member 685 is rotationally displaced. The connected second link member 686 is displaced, and the displacement member 670 connected to the other end of the second link member 686 is displaced.

That is, the displacement member 670, the first link member 684 and the second link member 686 are displaced. Here, since the operation of the first link member 684 and the operation of the second link member 686 are synchronized via the connecting rod 681, tilting of the displacement member 670 during displacement can be suppressed. As a result, the displacement member 670 can be smoothly displaced.

A detailed description of displacement member 670 will now be provided with reference to FIGS. 51-53. 51(a) is a front view of the displacement member 670, and FIG. 51(b) is a side view of the displacement member 670. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective front view of the displacement member 670. FIG. FIG. 53 is a cross-sectional view of displacement member 670 taken along line LIII--LIII of 51(a).

The displacement member 670 is formed including the extension member 671 rotatably supported by the base member 660 and the decoration unit 672 connected to the extension member 671, as described above.

As shown in FIGS. 51 to 53, the extension member 671 has a plate-like connecting portion 671c on the short side (connecting side of the decorative unit 672). A stepped portion 671c1 that partially protrudes stepwise is formed on the surfaces of the extending members 671 arranged in a pair on the left and right sides, on which the connecting portions 671c face each other. The stepped portions 671c1 are alternately formed on the left and right, and the stepped portions 671c1 are engaged with each other with a predetermined gap therebetween. As a result, dimensional errors can be absorbed when the extension member 671 is molded.

The decoration unit 672 is a unit that includes an LED that emits light inside and that irradiates the player side with light. The decoration unit 672 includes a back cover 673 arranged on the back side, a front cover 676 covering the back cover 673 and arranged on the front side of the back cover 673 , the back cover 673 and the front cover 676 . and a diffusion member 675 and a lens member 677 disposed between the base member 674 and the front cover 676 .

The rear cover 673 is formed as a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and the connecting portion 671c of the extension member 671 is fastened to the rear side. Thereby, the decoration unit 672 and the extension member 671 can be fastened.

Further, the rear cover 673 is formed of a resin material that hardly transmits light (impermeable). The rear cover 673 includes a reflecting portion 673a recessed on the rear side at a position facing a diffusion member 675, which will be described later.

The reflecting portion 673a is formed along the lower edge of the back cover 673 in the left-right direction, and the inner surface thereof is coated with a white paint having a high light reflectance. As a result, the light irradiated to the inside of the reflecting portion 673a can be reflected inside the reflecting portion 673a and irradiated to the diffusion member 675 side.

The front cover 676 is formed to have substantially the same shape as the rear cover 673 when viewed from the front, and is arranged in a manner to cover the front side of the rear cover 673 . The front cover 676 is made of a resin material that can transmit light, and can emit light emitted from a first LED 674a and a second LED, which will be described later, to the front side (player side).

The base member 674 is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular plate-like body that is smaller than the back cover 673 when viewed from the front. On the front side of the base member 674 , a first LED 674 a is arranged side by side in the left-right direction on the lower edge of the base member 674 and emits light toward the diffusion member 675 . and a second LED 674b for illuminating.

The first LED 674a is arranged at a position facing the upper end portion of the diffusion member 675 and is arranged so as to emit light downward to the base member 674 . As a result, the light emitted from the first LED 674a can be prevented from entering the lens member 677, which will be described later. As a result, it becomes easier for the player to distinguish between the light emitted to the front side through the diffusing member 675 and the light emitted to the front side through the lens member 677, which impairs the interest of the player. can be suppressed.

The second LED 674b is arranged above the first LED 674a. Therefore, the light of the second LED 674b can be made incident on the lens member 677 arranged above the diffusion member 675 .

The diffusion member 675 is formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and is arranged at the lower end portion of the front cover 676 on the back side. The diffusion member 675 is made of a cloudy-white resin material capable of diffusing the incident light. As a result, the light emitted from the first LED 674a and incident on the diffusion member 675 can be diffused to make the light uniform and emitted to the front side (player side).

The lens member 677 is formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and is arranged at the upper end portion of the front cover 676 on the back side. The lens member 677 is made of a transparent resin material, and has a plurality of protrusions (not shown) formed on the back side thereof. This makes it easier for the light emitted from the second LED 674b to enter the interior through the projection on the rear surface side. As a result, even if the amount of light emitted from the second LED 674b is reduced, the light can be incident on the lens member 677, and the light can be emitted to the front side (player side) of the front cover 676.

Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the mode of light emitted from the first LED 674a to the front side (player side) of the front cover 676 will be described. 54 is a front view of displacement member 670. FIG. In FIG. 54, the area of the light emitted toward the player by the first LED 674a is indicated by a chain double-dashed line, and is indicated by the reference numeral of the illumination area SR2.

As shown in FIG. 54, the region of the light emitted to the player side by the first LED 674a has a rectangular shape elongated in the horizontal direction at the lower end of the decoration unit 672 (front cover 676). Since the displacement members 670 are arranged at the upper and lower ends of the vertical displacement unit 600L, the displacement members 670 form the irradiation regions SR2 at positions separated by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. Therefore, the upper and lower numbers can be displayed by the 7-segment display using the irradiation areas SR2 of the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670 .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56, the 7-segment display displayed by the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 will be described. FIG. 55 is a front view of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800. FIG. FIG. 56 is a schematic diagram of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800. FIG. 55 and 56 show a state in which the transmissive area 821b1 of the outer reel 821 is rotated toward the player, and the irradiation area SR1, the irradiation area SR2 and the transmissive area 821b1 are shown by two-dot chain lines. be.

As shown in FIG. 55, two irradiation regions SR1 formed by the first segment unit 610 and the second segment unit 620 of the segment display device 600 are arranged vertically, and six irradiation regions are arranged horizontally. state.

The irradiation area SR1 is formed as one set of four with the decorative pattern display device 800 interposed therebetween, and three sets of the sets are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. Between a pair of irradiation regions SR1, irradiation regions SR2 are arranged above and below, and a transmissive region 821b1 is arranged at a vertical middle position. Therefore, the seven irradiation areas SR1 and SR2 and the transmissive area 821b1 can display the number by the 7-segment display.

As described above, since three sets of four irradiation regions SR1 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, each set forms a seven-segment display. That is, three 7-segment displays are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction.

Therefore, the 7-segment displays arranged side by side in the left-right direction can be displayed with numbers as effective lines for the jackpot lottery of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, all the 7-segment displays can be made to display the segment "7"). ) Thereby, not only the big win display by the above-described decorative pattern display device 800 but also the big win display by the 7-segment display can be performed. As a result, it is possible to allow the player to visually recognize a plurality of display modes, thereby enhancing the interest of the player.

Here, since the light transmitting portions 621a of the first segment unit 610 and the second segment unit 620 of the segment display device 600 are curved in a convex shape toward the front side, the player can visually recognize the display of the seven segments. When the game is played, the display at the center in the vertical direction closer to the player becomes larger, and the display at both ends in the vertical direction farther from the player becomes smaller. Therefore, there is a problem that the number display by the 7 segments cannot be visually recognized clearly by the player.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, the 7-segment display is formed such that the width dimension in the horizontal direction is gradually increased from the vertical center position toward the upper and lower ends. As a result, the 7-segment display at the upper and lower ends and the upper and lower central positions can be made uniform as a whole. As a result, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the display of numbers by 7 segments clearly.

Furthermore, the 7-segment display formed on both the left and right sides is formed such that the central portion in the vertical direction is inclined toward the central side in the horizontal direction. As a result, the player can clearly view the 7-segment display formed on the left and right sides.

That is, the player's viewpoint is normally positioned at the center position of the pachinko machine 10 in the left-right direction. Also, the segment display device 600 is arranged at the center position of the pachinko machine 10 in the left-right direction. Therefore, the player's viewpoint is positioned in front of the seven segments displayed in the center. Therefore, the 7-segment display is visually recognized by the player in a curved manner due to the curved shapes of the light transmitting portions 621a of the first segment unit 610 and the second segment unit 620, as it is left and right away from the player's viewpoint. Since the center portion of the 7-segment display is inclined toward the center in the horizontal direction, the 7-segment display is less likely to be viewed in a curved manner from the player's viewpoint. As a result, the player can clearly see the 7-segment display.

Next, the displacement mode of the displacement member 670 will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60. FIG. 57(a) to G01(c) are front views of the vertical displacement unit 600L. 58(a), 59(a) and 60(a) are side views of the vertical displacement unit 600L, and FIGS. FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 600L taken along line LVIIIb-LVIIIb of (a);

57(a), 58(a), and 58(b) show a state in which the displacement member 670 is disposed in the retracted state, and FIGS. 57(b), 59(a), and 59 57(c), 60(a), and 60(b), the displacement member 670 is arranged in an overhanging state. The states are illustrated.

The retracted state of the displacement members 670 is a state in which the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670 are separated from each other, and the protruding state of the displacement members 670 is a state in which the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670 are displaced. A state in which the member 670 abuts at an intermediate position in the vertical direction, and the intermediate state of the displacement member 670 is a state in which the displacement member 670 is arranged between the retracted state and the extended state.

As shown in FIGS. 57(a) and 58, in the position where the displacement member 670 is in the retracted state, the displacement member 670 arranged at the upper side (upper side in FIG. 57) of the pair of upper and lower members is the first displacement member. By positioning the link member 684 and the second link member 686 upward, the decorative unit 672 is positioned upward with the shaft support hole 671a as the rotation axis.

In addition, the torsion spring SP1 inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 disposed above has an engagement position with the through hole 671d1 that is the base end portion on the other end side (the side inserted into the through hole 671d1). It is said that Therefore, the biasing force exerted by the torsion spring SP1 can be increased. As a result, the displacement member 670 can easily maintain the state in which the decoration unit 672 is arranged on the upper side in the direction of gravity.

On the other hand, the displacement member 670 arranged at the lower side (lower side in FIG. 57) of the pair of upper and lower members is arranged with the first link member 684 and the second link member 686 positioned downward, so that the shaft support hole 671a is displaced. The state is such that the decoration unit 672 is positioned downward as the rotating shaft.

In addition, the torsion spring SP2 inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 disposed below has a base end portion on the other end side (the side inserted into the through hole 671d1) that engages with the through hole 671d1. It is said that Therefore, the biasing force exerted by the torsion spring SP2 can be increased. As a result, the displacement member 670 can easily displace the decoration unit 672 upward in the gravity direction.

In the retracted state, an opening is formed between the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670 facing the decorative units 762, and the decorative pattern display device 800 arranged inside the vertical displacement unit 600L can be visually recognized. In this case, as described above, three symbols to be decorated on the inner reel 811 of the decorative symbol display device 800 can be displayed on the player side in the vertical direction.

From the state shown in FIGS. 57(a) and 58, when a rotational driving force is applied to the driving motor KM3, the large diameter gear 683 and the cam member 685 are rotated. As a result, the first link member 684 and the second link member 686 are displaced to the substantially central position in the vertical direction of the vertical displacement unit 600L. Therefore, the displacement member 670 connected to the insertion holes 684b and 686b of the first link member 684 and the second link member 686 is rotationally displaced about the shaft support hole 671a, resulting in the states shown in FIGS. 57(b) and 59. to the state shown in FIGS. 57(c) and 60.

As shown in FIGS. 57(b) and 59, when the displacement member 670 is displaced to the position of the intermediate state, the torsion spring SP1 inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 disposed above passes through. The engagement position with the hole 671d1 is the intermediate position on the other end side (the side inserted into the through hole 671d1). Therefore, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 can be increased by the amount of deformation of the torsion spring SP1, and the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 can be made smaller than the engagement position in the retracted state by the amount of changing the engagement position.

Similarly to the torsion spring SP2 inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 arranged on the lower side, the engagement position with the through hole 671d1 is the other end side (inserted into the through hole 671d1). side). Therefore, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 can be reduced by the amount of deformation of the torsion spring SP2, and the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 can be reduced by the amount of change in the engagement position.

In the intermediate state, an opening smaller than that in the retracted state is formed between the facing decoration units 762 of the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670, and the decorative pattern display device 800 arranged inside the vertical displacement unit 600L can be visually recognized. . In this case, one symbol to be decorated on the inner reel 811 of the decorative symbol display device 800 can be displayed on the player side.

Therefore, by displacing the displacement member 670 from the retracted state in which three symbols decorated on the inner reel 811 are displayed in the vertical direction to the intermediate state in which one symbol decorated on the inner reel 811 is displayed in the vertical direction. , a plurality of presentation modes can be formed, and the amusement of the player can be improved. In addition, by adopting a mode in which one figure side decorated on the inner reel 811 is displayed in the vertical direction, one symbol can be focused on by the player. Therefore, since it is possible to clarify the part to be noticed, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest.

As shown in FIGS. 57(c) and 60, when the displacement member 670 is displaced to the retracted position, the torsion spring SP1 inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 disposed above passes through. The position of engagement with the hole 671d1 is the tip position of the other end side (the side inserted into the through hole 671d1). Therefore, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 can be increased by the amount of deformation of the torsion spring SP1, and the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 can be made smaller than the engagement position in the intermediate state by the amount of changing the engagement position.

Similarly to the torsion spring SP1, the torsion spring SP2 inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 arranged on the lower side also has an engagement position with the through hole 671d1 that side). Therefore, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 can be increased by the amount of deformation of the torsion spring SP2, and the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 can be made smaller than the engagement position in the intermediate state by the amount of changing the engagement position.

That is, the urging forces of the torsion springs SP1 and SP2 can be made non-linear according to the displacement of the displacement member 670. FIG. Accordingly, depending on the displacement position of the displacement member 670, the necessary biasing force can be easily applied from the torsion springs SP1 and SP2. As a result, the energy required to drive the drive motor KM3 can be minimized.

In the overhanging state, the decoration unit 672 of the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670 is in contact with the vertical displacement unit 600L at the middle position in the vertical direction. In this case, the decorative unit 672 is arranged on the front side of the decorative design display device 800, and the display of the decorative design display device 800 can be made invisible from the player side (front side).

Therefore, by setting the displacement member 670 to the extended state, rotationally displacing the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820, and then displacing the displacement member 670 to the intermediate state or the retracted state, the symbols are arranged for the player ( It is possible to make it easier to have expectations. As a result, the interest of the player can be enhanced.

In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the displacement members 670 arranged in a pair on the upper and lower sides are displaced by the same amount. It is also possible to displace only one side of the displacement members 670 arranged in a pair up and down to the position of the intermediate state or the extended state.

Also, the maximum amount of displacement of the displacement members 670 arranged in a pair of upper and lower members is not set at the intermediate position, but can be displaced beyond the position shown in FIG. That is, it can be vertically displaced while the pair of displacement members 670 are in contact with each other.

Next, the operation of the vertical displacement unit 600L will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63. FIG. 61 to 63 are schematic diagrams of the vertical displacement unit 600L. 61 to 63, transition states of the displacement member 670 are illustrated in order.

61 to 63, the displacement member 670 arranged above the vertical displacement unit 600L and the drive means for driving the displacement member 670 are added with U at the end of the reference numerals, and the vertical displacement unit 600L The displacement member 670 disposed on the side and the driving means for driving the displacement member 670 will be described with D added to the end of the reference numerals.

As shown in FIG. 61, in the vertical displacement unit 600L, extension members 671 of the displacement member 670 are arranged on both left and right sides. The pair of extension members 671 are divided into a driven side to which the driving force of the driving motor KM3 is transmitted via the connecting rod 681 and a driving side to which the driving force of the driving motor KM3 is transmitted by the projection 683b of the large diameter gear 683. connected to each other.

As shown in FIG. 62, when the vertically arranged displacement members 670 are displaced, the side surfaces of the decoration units 672 are brought into contact with each other at the vertical center position of the vertical displacement unit 600L.

As shown in FIG. 63, by displacing both of the displacement members 670 in the same direction from the state shown in FIG. 62, the decoration units 672 can be vertically displaced while the sides of the decoration units 672 are in contact with each other. .

Here, the first displacement member (decorative unit 672U) and the first displacement member (decorative unit 672U) and the first displacement member (decoration unit 672U) and the first displacement member (decoration unit 672U) formed to be displaceable in the direction of approaching or separating from each other and displaceable in the same direction while the opposing sides are in contact with each other. A gaming machine with two displacement members (decoration unit 672D) is known. According to such a game machine, by bringing the first displacement member and the second displacement member close to the position where the opposing sides abut against each other, an object (for example, , a liquid crystal display device and a production member), and by displacing the first displacement member and the second displacement member in a direction away from each other, the shielding is released along with the displacement, and the object can be viewed. You can perform a production to do. Further, by displacing the first displacement member and the second displacement member in the same direction (for example, reciprocating displacement in one direction and the other direction) while the opposing sides are in contact with each other, the shielding of the target is maintained. , it is also possible to perform an effect before the shielding is released (an effect to focus on the action of releasing the shielding).

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, it is difficult to bring the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member into close contact due to dimensional tolerances and assembly tolerances of the constituent members. There is a problem that a gap may be formed in the If a gap is formed between the opposing sides, the player can visually recognize the object on the back side through the gap, and the presentation effect is hindered.

On the other hand, according to this embodiment, the base member 660 and the drive means 680U and the drive means 680D that displaceably support the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are provided on the base member 660, and the drive means 680U is supported. The facing side of the decoration unit 672D is biased toward one side of the facing side of the decoration unit 672U, and is opposite to the other side of the facing side of the decoration unit 672D that contacts one side of the facing side of the decoration unit 672U. Since the supporting mode of the driving means 680D is biased to one side, when the opposing sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are brought into contact with each other, the supporting mode of the driving means 680U and the supporting mode of the driving means 680D are displaced. They can be biased to opposite sides (sides rotated 180° around the center of one side and the other side of the opposing sides). As a result, the facing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and the formation of a gap between the facing sides can be suppressed (see FIG. 63).

In this embodiment, since the number of constituent members arranged differs between one side and the other side (both sides in the left-right direction), the driving forces transmitted to the left and right of the decoration unit 672 are different. , one's own rigid side (low side) can face the opponent's low rigid side (high side). Therefore, when the facing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are in contact with each other, the driving means 680U and the driving means 680D push (advance) the other on the side with high rigidity and move forward on the side with low rigidity. can form a state of accepting (retreating) the other party. As a result, the opposing sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

The driving means 680U includes a driving motor KM3U that generates a driving force, a pair of extension members 671U that connect the decoration unit 672U to the base member, and transmits the driving force of the driving motor KM3U to the pair of extension members 671U. The drive means 680D includes a drive motor KM3D that generates drive force and a pair of extensions that connect the decoration unit 672D to the base member 660. and a second link member 686D and a first link member 684D, which transmit the driving force of the drive motor KM3U to the pair of extension members 671U, respectively, and have different configurations. The opposing sides of the decoration unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and the formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

That is, when the opposing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are in contact with each other, the driving means 680U and the driving means 680D each operate, for example, on the side where the driving force is large or on the side where the driving force is transmitted first. It is possible to form a state in which the opponent is pushed (advance) and the opponent is accepted (retreat) on the side where the driving force is small or on the side where the transmission timing of the driving force is later. As a result, the opposing sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

The extension member 671U and the extension member 671D are formed to have substantially the same length, and one end side is connected to the decoration unit 672U or the decoration unit 672D, and the other end side rotates coaxially with the base member 660. Since the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are reciprocatingly moved in the same direction while their opposing sides are in contact with each other, the opposing sides are in contact with each other even when the deviation of the support mode is utilized. It is easy to maintain the contact state.

Furthermore, the extension member 671U or the extension member 671D is provided with an elastic member 671f made of a rubber-like elastic material. Since the body is interposed between the extension member 671U and the extension member 671D in an elastically compressed state, the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are reciprocated in the same direction while their opposing sides are in contact with each other. Even in the case of using the bias of the support mode, it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the opposing sides are in contact with each other.

Further, as described above, the driving means 680U includes a driving motor KM3U that generates a driving force, a pair of extending members 671U that are driven by the driving motor KM3U and connect the decoration unit 672U to the base member 660, and Equipped with two torsion springs SP1 that apply different urging forces to the pair of extension members 671U, the driving means 680D includes a driving motor KM3D that generates driving force and a decoration unit 672D that is driven by the driving motor KM3D. to the base member 660, and two torsion springs SP2 for applying different biasing forces to the pair of extension members 671D. The sides can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

That is, when the facing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are in contact with each other, the drive means 680U and the drive means 680D each push (advance) the other on the side where the biasing force is large, for example. A side with less power can form a state of accepting (retreating) the opponent. As a result, the opposing sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

Note that the two torsion springs SP1 may have the same configuration. In other words, the biasing forces applied to the pair of extension members 671U may be different because the positions at which the biasing forces are applied are different from each other or the amounts of elastic deformation are different from each other. The same is true for the two torsion springs SP2.

Further, the drive means 680U includes a drive motor KM3U that generates a driving force, a pair of extension members 671U that are driven by the drive motor KM3U and connect the decoration unit 672U to the base member 660, and a pair of extension members 671U. The driving means 680D includes a driving motor KM3D that generates a driving force and a driving motor KM3D that drives the decoration unit 672D to the base member. A pair of extension members 671D connected to 660 and a second biasing member that applies a biasing force to one of the pair of extension members 671D are provided. can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

That is, when the facing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are in contact with each other, each of the driving means 680U and the driving means 680D pushes (advances) the other on the side to which the biasing force is applied. , the side on which the biasing force is not applied can form a state of accepting (retreating) the opponent. As a result, the opposing sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

As described above, it is formed as a torsion spring, one leg is connected to the extension member 671U and the other leg is connected to the base member 660, and biases the decoration unit 672U toward the decoration unit 672D. Since the torsion spring SP1 is provided, when the decoration unit 672U is displaced in the direction of approaching the decoration unit 672D, the driving force of the drive motor KM3U required to rotate the extension member 671U is applied to the torsion spring SP1. It can be assisted by a biasing force. Therefore, for example, when the decoration unit 672U is displaced from the stop position to the abutment position where it abuts on the decoration unit 672D from the retracted position separated from the decoration unit 672D, the displacement can be started smoothly.

In this case, as the extension member 671U is rotated in the direction in which the decoration unit 672U approaches the decoration unit 672D, the connection position between one leg of the torsion spring SP1 and the extension member 671U or the connection position between the other leg of the torsion spring SP1 and the extension member 671U is rotated. Since at least one of the connection positions with the base member 660 is separated from the winding portion, the distance from the winding portion to the position where the force is applied increases, and the decoration unit 672U is attached in the direction of approaching the decoration unit 672D. power can be weakened. Therefore, for example, when the decoration unit 672U brought close to the decoration unit 672D is to be stopped, the displacement can be reliably stopped, so damage due to collision can be suppressed. Further, when the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are reciprocated in the same direction with their opposing sides in contact with each other, the driving force required for the reciprocation can be suppressed, so the displacement speed of the reciprocation can be increased. It is possible to improve the performance effect.

On the other hand, it is formed as a torsion spring, one leg is connected to the extension member 671D and the other leg is connected to the base member, and a torsional force is applied in a direction to bring the decoration unit 672D closer to the decoration unit 672U. Equipped with a spring SP2, as the extension member 671D rotates in the direction in which the decoration unit 672D approaches the decoration unit 672U, the connection position between one leg of the torsion spring SP2 and the extension member 671D or the other position of the torsion spring SP2 is changed. Since at least one of the connection positions between the leg and the base member is separated from the winding portion, the torsion spring SP2 exhibits the same effect as the torsion spring SP1. In particular, when the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are reciprocally displaced in the same direction while their opposing sides are in contact with each other, the driving force required for the reciprocating displacement can be suppressed, which is particularly effective. In addition, the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are arranged at the same height (positioned in the direction of gravity), and the position where they contact is the highest position (or the lowest position) in the direction of gravity, and the position where they are separated from each other. The configuration of the torsion spring SP1 and the torsion spring SP2 is particularly effective when the (retracted position) is the lowest position (or highest position) in the gravitational direction.

Since the decoration unit 672U is displaced upward in the gravitational direction to come close to the decoration unit 672D, the lower the decoration unit 672U is positioned in the gravity direction, the more the urging force in the direction of displacing the decoration unit 672U upward in the gravitational direction is applied. The biasing force in the direction of displacing the decoration unit 672U upward in the gravitational direction can be weakened as the decoration unit 672U is positioned upward in the gravitational direction.

Therefore, when displacing (raising) the decoration unit 672U from the stopped state upward in the direction of gravity, the displacement (raising) can be smoothly started, and when the raised decoration unit 672U is stopped, can reliably stop the displacement not only by the action of gravity but also by weakening the biasing force. As a result, damage due to collision with the decoration unit 672D can be suppressed. On the other hand, when stopping the decoration unit 672U that has been displaced (lowered) downward in the direction of gravity, the urging force is strengthened so that the urging force is made to oppose the action of gravity that attempts to continue the descent. can be done. As a result, it is possible to reliably stop the decoration unit 672U.

A torsion spring SP2, which is formed as a torsion spring, has one leg connected to the extension member 671D and the other leg connected to the base member 660, and imparts a biasing force in the direction of separating the decoration unit 672D from the decoration unit 672U. , and the decoration unit 672D is separated from the decoration unit 672U by displacement upward in the direction of gravity. The driving force of the drive motor KM3D required to rotate the extension member 671U can be assisted by the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 when the extension member 671U needs to be displaced (raised) against the . Therefore, the displacement can be performed smoothly.

In this case, as the extension member 671D is rotated in the direction in which the decoration unit 672D approaches the decoration unit 672U, the connection position between one leg of the torsion spring SP2 and the extension member 671D or the other leg of the torsion spring SP2 is connected. Since at least one of the connection positions with the base member 660 is separated from the winding portion, the distance from the winding portion to the position where the force is applied increases, and the direction in which the decoration unit 672D is separated from the decoration unit 672U (the direction of gravity) is increased. It is possible to weaken the urging force in the upward direction). Therefore, for example, when the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are reciprocally displaced in the same direction with their opposing sides in contact with each other, the driving force required for the reciprocating displacement can be suppressed. can be increased, and the production effect can be improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 64, a rotating member 2812 of the second embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment described above, the projection 812a1 formed on the rotating member 812 is formed in a chevron shape that slopes to both sides along the circumferential direction of the hub 812a. The formed protrusion 2812a is formed in a curved hemispherical shape. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the part same as 1st Embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 64(a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member 2812 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 64(b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member 2812 along line LXIVb-LXIVb of FIG. 64(a). Note that FIG. 64(a) corresponds to FIG. 36(a).

As shown in FIG. 64, the hub 812a of the rotating member 2812 is formed with a protrusion 2812a1 that protrudes toward the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820. As shown in FIG. The protrusions 2812a1 are formed at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the hub 812a.

The protrusion 2812a1 is curved in a bowl shape. As a result, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, air can be pushed out to generate wind. Also, the pushed air (wind) collides with the edge 824 of the opposing outer reel 821 to flow into the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel. As a result, dust (dust) sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and dust that is about to stick can be blown off. As a result, it is possible to prevent dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 .

Moreover, since the projection 2812a1 of the second embodiment is curved in a bowl shape, it can have higher rigidity than the projection 812a1 of the first embodiment. As a result, when the inner reel unit 810 or the outer reel unit 820 is driven to rotate and the tip of the protrusion 2812a1 comes into contact with the spoke 822 of the outer reel unit 820, the protrusion 2812a can be prevented from being damaged.

Next, an outer reel unit 820 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66. FIG. In the first embodiment, the projection 812a1 is formed on the rotating member 812, but in the second embodiment, the projection 3824a is formed on the edge 824. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

65 is a cross-sectional view of a decorative design display device 800 in the third embodiment, FIG. 66(a) is a partially enlarged view of an outer reel unit 820, and FIG. 66(b) is FIG. 66(a). is a cross-sectional view of the outer reel unit 820 along line LXVIb-LXVIb of FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66 , projections 3824 a projecting toward the rotating member 812 of the inner reel unit 810 are formed on edge portions 824 on extension lines of the spokes 3822 of the outer reel unit 820 . A protrusion 3824 a is formed at the outer (outer reel 821 side) end of each spoke 3822 .

The protrusion 3824a is formed in a shape in which both sides are inclined along the circumferential direction of the outer reel 821 . Therefore, by rotating the outer reel unit 820, air can be pushed out to generate wind. In addition, the pushed air (wind) collides with the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810 facing the inner reel unit 810, and flows into the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel. As a result, dust (dust) sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and dust that is about to stick can be blown off. As a result, it is possible to prevent dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 .

Next, a rotating member 4812 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. In the first embodiment described above, the projection 812a1 formed on the rotating member 812 is formed in a mountain shape with both sides inclined along the circumferential direction of the hub 812a. The protrusion 4812a formed on the 1 is inclined with respect to the radial direction of the hub 812a. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 67 is a cross-sectional view of a decorative design display device 800 according to the fourth embodiment, FIG. 68(a) is a partially enlarged view of a rotating member 4812, and FIG. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of a rotating member 4812 taken along line LXVIIIb-LXVIIIb;

As shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, the hub 812a of the rotating member 4812 is formed with a protrusion 4812a1 protruding toward the edge 824 of the outer reel unit. The protrusions 4812a1 are formed at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the hub 812a.

The protrusion 4812a1 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the side, and is formed so that its longitudinal direction intersects with the radial direction of the hub 812a. That is, the projection 4812a1 is formed to be inclined in the circumferential direction from the radially outer end portion of the hub 812a toward the radially inner end portion thereof. In addition, the direction of inclination is inclined toward the normal rotation direction of the inner reel unit 810 .

Therefore, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, air can be pushed out to generate wind. Also, the pushed air (wind) collides with the edge 824 of the opposing outer reel 821 and flows into the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 . As a result, dust (dust) sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and dust that is about to stick can be blown off. As a result, it is possible to prevent dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 .

In addition, the protrusion 4812a1 of the fourth embodiment is formed so as to be inclined in the circumferential direction from the radially outer end portion of the hub 812a toward the radially inner end portion thereof, and the direction of inclination thereof coincides with the normal rotation of the inner reel unit 810. Since it is on the direction side, the rotation of the inner reel unit 810 can easily generate wind. As a result, it is possible to prevent dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 .

That is, at least a part of the outer reel 821 of the outer reel unit 820 is formed to have a light transmittance, and a plurality of patterns are arranged along the circumferential direction on the inner reel 811 of the inner reel unit 810. Via the outer reel unit 820, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the variation of the symbols accompanying the rotation of the inner reel unit 810. - 特許庁In this case, the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810 is provided with the projection 4812a1. In the performance by rotating the outer reel unit 820 or the inner reel unit 810, the chances of cleaning the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 can be increased.

Next, the inner reel unit 5810 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. FIG. In the first embodiment described above, the spokes 812c of the inner reel unit 810 are formed in such a manner that they are inclined toward the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820 as they extend radially outward. , the spokes 5812c of the inner reel unit 5810 are formed in such a manner that the spokes 5812c of the inner reel unit 5810 are inclined to the side opposite to the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820 as they go radially outward. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 69 is a cross-sectional view of a decorative design display device 800 according to the fifth embodiment. 70(a) is a partially enlarged view of the annular member 813, and FIG. 70(b) is a cross-sectional view of the annular member 813 taken along line LXXb-LXXb of FIG. 70(a). It should be noted that the backlight unit 830 is removed from the decorative pattern display device 800 in the fifth embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, in the inner reel unit 5810 of the fifth embodiment, the spokes 812c of the rotating member 5812 are inclined to the side opposite to the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820 as they go radially outward. formed by Therefore, the inclination direction of the spokes 822 of the outer reel unit 820 and the inclination direction of the spokes 812c of the inner reel unit 810 are symmetrical.

A projection 5813a is formed on the surface of the annular member 813 of the inner reel unit 5810 facing the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820 (see FIG. 70). A plurality of protrusions 5813a are formed at regular intervals in the circumferential direction of the annular member 813 .

The protrusion 5813a is formed in a chevron shape that slopes to both sides along the circumferential direction of the annular member 813 . As a result, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, air can be pushed out to generate wind. Also, the pushed air (wind) collides with the edge 824 of the opposing outer reel 821 to flow into the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel. As a result, dust (dust) sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and dust that is about to stick can be blown off. As a result, it is possible to prevent dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 .

Here, when the spokes 822 of the outer reel unit 820 and the spokes 812c of the inner reel unit 810 are arranged on the left and right sides of the decorative pattern display device 800, the space between them (between the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820) Since air cannot be sufficiently sent to the space between the reel units 810 and 820, the drive motors KM1 and KM2 that drive the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 cannot be sufficiently cooled, and the drive motors KM1 and KM2 break down. I was afraid.

In contrast, in the fifth embodiment, the projection 5813a can generate an air flow that flows in between the opposing outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel. As a result, air can be easily drawn from both the left and right sides of the decorative pattern display device 800.例文帳に追加Therefore, air can be sent to the space between the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 . As a result, the drive motors KM1 and KM2 can be cooled, so that failure of the drive motors KM1 and KM2 can be suppressed.

Next, an inner reel unit 810 and an outer reel unit 820 of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 73. FIG. In the first embodiment, the projections 812a1 are formed only on the inner reel unit 810, but in the sixth embodiment, the projections 6812a1 and 6824a are formed on the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820. . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 71 is a cross-sectional view of a decorative design display device 800 according to the sixth embodiment. 72(a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member 6812, and FIG. 72(b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member 6812 along line LXXIIb-LXXIIb of FIG. 72(a). 73(a) is a partially enlarged view of the outer reel unit 820, and FIG. 73(b) is a sectional view of the outer reel unit 820 along line LXXIIIb-LXXIIIb of FIG. 73(a).

As shown in FIGS. 71 to 73, the hub 812a of the rotating member 6812 is formed with a projection 6812a1 projecting toward the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820. As shown in FIGS. The protrusions 2812a1 are formed at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the hub 812a. Also, the protrusion 6812a1 is formed in a mountain shape with both sides inclined along the circumferential direction of the hub 812a.

The edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820 is formed with a projection 6824a projecting toward the hub 812a of the rotating member 6812 . The protrusions 6824a are formed at regular intervals in the circumferential direction of the outer reel 821 . Also, the protrusion 6824a is formed in a mountain shape with both sides inclined along the circumferential direction of the outer reel 821 .

The protrusion 6812a1 is formed radially inward of the rotating member 6812 from the protrusion 6824a. As a result, when the inner reel unit 810 or the outer reel unit 820 is rotated, the projection 6812a1 can be prevented from colliding with the projection 6824a.

Therefore, when the inner reel unit 810 or the outer reel unit 820 is rotated, wind can be generated by the protrusions 6812a1 and 6824a. That is, wind can be generated by rotating either the inner reel unit 810 or the outer reel unit 820 .

Also, in this case, the air pushed out to either the protrusion 6812a1 or the protrusion 6824a can collide with the other of the protrusion 6812a1 or the protrusion 6824a, so that the air flow can be further restricted. Therefore, it is possible to speed up the flow of air flowing into the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel. As a result, dust (dust) sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and dust that is about to stick can be blown off. As a result, it is possible to prevent dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 .

That is, in the sixth embodiment, since the protrusions 8624a and 6812a are provided on the inner surface of the edge portion 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a at different positions in the radial direction, the outer reel unit 820 or the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, the protrusions 8624a and 6812a can be circumferentially displaced between the inner surface of the rim 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a to generate wind pressure. Therefore, in the performance by rotating the outer reel unit 820 or the inner reel unit 810, the chances of cleaning the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 can be increased.

An inclined surface is formed between the surfaces of the protrusion 6812a1 and the protrusion 6824a that face each other in the radial direction. This can reduce the air resistance when the air flows in the radial direction. As a result, it is possible to easily blow off the dust (dirt) sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and the dust that is about to stick.

Furthermore, the arrangement intervals of the projections 6812a1 in the circumferential direction and the arrangement intervals of the projections 6824a in the circumferential direction are different. As a result, the position where the protrusion 6812a1 and the protrusion 6824a overlap in the radial direction can be shifted. Therefore, the projections 6812a1 and the projections 6824a overlap in the radial direction, so that the positions at which the air is compressed can be divided into a plurality of positions. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rotation speed of the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 from being slowed down due to the protrusions 6812a1 and 6824a overlapping in the radial direction and the air being compressed.

Next, a rotation member 7533 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 77. FIG. In the first embodiment, the first electric accessory 520 is symmetrically driven in the same manner, but in the seventh embodiment, the left and right first electric accessories 520 are driven differently. be. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 74, a detailed description of the rotating member 7533 in the seventh embodiment will be given. 74(a) is a front view of the rotating member 7533 in the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 74(b) is a side view of the rotating member 7533. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 74, the rotating member 7533 is formed by arranging two plate-like bodies which are substantially L-shaped when viewed from the side side by side with a predetermined width in the left-right direction. is formed by connecting by In addition, the plate-shaped bodies arranged at both the left and right ends are arranged so that the bending angles of the substantially L-shaped bends in the side view shape are different on the left and right sides. In the seventh embodiment, the bending angle of the L-shaped plate formed on the left side in front view is set larger than the bending angle of the L-shaped plate formed on the right side in front view.

Therefore, the driving portions 7533d formed by being recessed on the other end side (the left side in FIG. 74(b)) of the rotating member 7533 are formed at different positions in the vertical direction on the left and right sides. In addition, the driving portion 7533d has a recessed width (vertical width on the left side of FIG. 74(b)) that is larger than the outer shape of the projection 523 formed on the first electric accessory 520, and the inside of the driving portion 7533d A projection 523 is slidably formed.

In addition, the width dimension of the rotating member 7533 in the left-right direction in the front view (the dimension between the outer surfaces of the two plate-like bodies facing each other) is smaller than the dimension between the inner facing sides of the two first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 532. set. As a result, the rotating member 533 can be arranged between the opposing first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 532 .

Also, in the front view, the rotation member 7533 is set so that the dimension between the left and right plate members facing each other is larger than the diameter of the game ball. This allows the game ball to pass through the inside of the rotating member 7533 (between the two plate members facing each other).

The rotating member 7533 includes a rotating shaft 533c that protrudes to both sides in the left-right direction from a bent portion that is approximately L-shaped when viewed from the side; It mainly includes a driving portion 7533d that is recessed at the tip of the other end of the L shape.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 75 to 76, the driving mode of the first electric accessory 520 of the seventh embodiment will be described. 75(a) to 75(c) are side views of the drive unit 530 and the first electric accessory 520. FIG. 76(a) to 76(c) are front views of the drive unit 530 and the first electric accessory 520. FIG.

75(a) and 76(a) show the first state of the first electric accessory 520, and FIGS. 75(c) and 76(c) show the second state of the first electric accessory 520. FIGS. 75(b) and 76(b) respectively illustrate states in which the first electric accessory 520 is positioned between the first state and the second state. 75 and 76 show a state in which the first case member 534 and the second case member 535 are transparent.

As shown in FIGS. 75(a) and 76(a), when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 protrudes from the inside of the main body 531a, the projection 533b of the rotary member 533 is positioned on the front side (FIG. 75(a)). left side) to position the driving portion 7533d downward. As a result, the projection 523 of the first electric accessory 520 is pushed downward, and the first electric accessory 520 is brought into the first state.

In this case, a gap is formed between the inner side of the right driving portion 7533d and the upper side of the projection 523R of the right wing member 520R (the upper side in FIG. 75(a)). This is because the center of gravity of the right wing member 520R is switched to the left side of the rotation axis (through hole 521R) in front view while the projection 523R is pushed down to a certain position by the driving portion 7533d to bring the right wing member 520R into the first state. , is formed by rotating the right wing member 520R to the first state by its own weight.

Also, a gap is formed between the inner side of the left driving portion 7533d and the lower side of the projection 523L of the left wing member 520L (the lower side in FIG. 75(a)).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 75(b) and 76(b), when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is pulled into the main body 531a, the projection 533b of the rotary member 533 is pulled toward the back side (FIG. 75(b)). ) to the right), and the driving portion 7533d is lifted upward. As a result, the first electric accessory 520 is rotated by pushing the projection 523 upward.

In this case, as described above, in the first state, a gap is formed between the inner side of the left driving portion 7533d and the lower side of the projection 523L of the left wing member 520L (lower side in FIG. 75(a)). , when the rotating member 533 is rotated (the driving portion 533d is lifted), the engagement between the left driving portion 7533d and the projection 523L is delayed by the gap. Therefore, the start of the displacement of the right blade member 520R to the second state is made earlier.

75(b) and 76(b), the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is further drawn into the main body 531a, and the rotary member 533 is rotated to the rotation end position. Therefore, the driving portion 7533d of the rotating member 533 is lifted upward, and the first electric accessory 520 is brought into the second state shown in FIGS. 76(c) and 76(c).

In this case, a gap is formed between the inner side of the left driving portion 7533d and the lower side of the projection 523R of the right wing member 520R (the lower side in FIG. 75(c)). This is because the center of gravity of the left wing member 520L is switched to the left side of the rotation shaft (through hole 521L) in the front view while the projection 523L is pushed up to a certain position by the driving portion 7533d to bring the left wing member 520L into the second state. , by rotating the left wing member 520L to the first state by its own weight.

Also, a gap is formed between the inner side of the right driving portion 7533d and the lower side of the projection 523R of the right wing member 520R (the lower side in FIG. 75(a)).

Therefore, when displacing the first electric accessory 520 from the first state to the second state, the right wing member 520R can be started first, and the left wing member 520L can be displaced to the second state. It can be after the right wing member 520R.

The displacement from the second state shown in FIGS. 75(c) and 76(c) to the first state shown in FIGS. 75(a) and 76(c) is the displacement from the above-described first state to the second state. Since it is only the opposite of , the detailed explanation is omitted.

Therefore, when displacing the first electric accessory 520 from the second state to the first state, the left wing member 520L can be started first, and the right wing member 520R can be displaced to the first state. It can precede the left wing member 520L.

Next, with reference to FIG. 77, the case where a game ball enters the winning hole unit 500 of the seventh embodiment will be described. 77(a) and 77(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. FIG.

77(a) and 77(b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 of FIG. 24(b). 77(a) and 77(b) show a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is being displaced from the second state to the first state.

As shown in FIGS. 77(a) and 77(b), when the first electric accessory 520 is displaced from the second state to the first state, the left wing member 520L is first started and , the displacement of the right wing member 520R to the first state is slower than that of the left wing member 520L.

That is, a state in which only the right wing member 520R of the first electric accessory 520 is opened can be instantaneously formed. At this time, when the game ball is entered from the right wing member 520R side, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R is moved to the front side (lower side in FIG. 77(a)) by the bulging portion 524R. be guided to Therefore, the game ball can be easily made to collide with the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L.

Since the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L is formed at the end on the front side, it is easy to bounce the game ball collided with the bulging portion 524L to the back side. Therefore, the game ball entered from the right wing member 520R can be easily entered into the second winning hole 140.例文帳に追加

That is, in the seventh embodiment, when displacing the first electric accessory 520 to the first state, the left wing member 520L on the side where the bulging portion 524L is formed on the front side and the right wing member 520R on the opposite side are displaced. By displacing after the left wing member 520L, a game ball entered during the displacement to the first state can be smoothly thrown to the second winning hole 140. - 特許庁

Further, in the seventh embodiment, the timing at which one of the pair of feather members 520L and 520R (one of the feather members 520L and 520R) is positioned to form the closed state and the other feather member (The other of the feather members 520L and 520R) is different from the timing at which it is arranged at the position forming the closed state, so it is difficult to pinch the game ball between the pair of feather members 520L and 520R (side surfaces 526L and 526R). , the interval between the pair of feather members 520L and 520R can be narrowed accordingly. Therefore, the space required for disposing the pair of feather members 520L and 520R can be suppressed.

Next, a rotating member 8533 of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 82. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the sliding member 532 is formed with the second protrusion 532c for restricting the entry of the game ball is described. A restricting second protrusion 8533e is formed. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 78, the configuration of the drive unit 8530 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 78 is an exploded perspective front view of the drive unit 8530 in the eighth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 78, the drive unit 8530 of the eighth embodiment includes a solenoid 531, a sliding member 8532 connected to the solenoid 531, a rotating member 8533 connected to the sliding member 8532, and a rotating member 8533 connected to the sliding member 8532. It mainly comprises a first case member 534 in which the member 8533 and the sliding member 8532 are displaceably arranged, and a second case member 536 attached to the rear side of the first case member 534. It is formed.

The sliding member 8532 is formed in a substantially E-shape when viewed from the top, and includes a connecting portion 532a extending in the left-right direction and two first sliding members 8532 protruding from the left and right ends of the connecting portion 532a toward the front side. It mainly includes a protrusion 532b and a third protrusion 532e located between the two first protrusions 532b and protruding on the front side.

The sliding member 8532 is formed such that the lateral dimension of the connecting portion 532a is smaller than the lateral dimension of the inner peripheral surface of the first case member 534 between the opposing sides. Thereby, the sliding member 8532 can be accommodated and arranged inside the first case member 534 .

The third protrusion 8532e is positioned above a connecting portion 533a of the rotating member 8533, which will be described later, so that it can restrict the rotational displacement of the rotating member 8533 when displacing the first electric accessory 520 to the second state. That is, the third protrusion 8532e has a lower end surface formed above the connecting portion 533a when the first electric accessory 520 is in the first state.

The rotating member 8533 is formed by arranging two plate-like bodies which are substantially L-shaped when viewed from the side, side by side with a predetermined width in the left-right direction, and is formed by connecting the opposite ends on one end side by a connecting portion 533a. be. The gap between the opposing two plate-like bodies of the rotating member 8533 is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. This allows the game ball to pass through the inside of the rotating member 8533 (between the two plate-like bodies facing each other).

In addition, the width dimension of the rotating member 8533 in the left-right direction (the dimension between the outer surfaces of the two plate-like bodies facing each other) is set smaller than the dimension between the inner facing sides of the two first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 8532. be. Thereby, the rotating member 8533 can be arranged between the first projections 532b of the sliding member 8532 facing each other.

The rotating member 8533 includes a rotating shaft 533c that protrudes to both sides in the left-right direction from a bent portion that is approximately L-shaped when viewed from the side; It mainly includes a drive portion 533d recessed at the tip of the other end of the L-shape and a second projection 8533e projecting from the center position in the left-right direction of the connecting portion 533a toward the front side. .

The second protrusion 8533e is formed in a rod shape extending toward the front side, and has an upright wall 8533e1 that is bent downward and erected at the tip of the protrusion. The erected wall 8533 e 1 is curved in a convex shape toward the front side when viewed from the side, and the curved axis is set coaxially with the axis of the rotating member 8533 .

Next, the operation of drive unit 530 will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81. FIG. 79(a) and 79(b) are side views of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530. FIG. 80(a) and 80(b) are front views of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530. FIG. 81(a) and 81(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. FIG.

79 and 80 show a state in which the first case member 534 and the second case member 535 are transparent. 79(a), 80(a) and 81(a), the state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the first state is shown in FIGS. 79(b), 80(b) and 81. (b) shows a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state. Furthermore, FIGS. 81(a) and 81(b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 79 to 81, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 protrudes from the main body 531a, the protrusion 533b of the rotary member 8533 is pushed forward (left side in FIG. 79(a)). , the driving portion 533d is positioned downward. As a result, the projection 523 of the first electric accessory 520 is pushed downward to enter the first state.

In addition, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 protrudes from the body portion 531a, the tip of the standing wall 8533e1 of the second projection 8533e is positioned downward. In this case, the distance dimension L6 (see FIG. 82(a)) from the tip of the standing wall 8533e1 to the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b of the first case member 534 is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the standing wall 8533 e 1 can prevent the game ball from rolling on the upper end surface of the standing portion 534 b and being thrown to the second case member 535 .

Furthermore, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 protrudes from the body portion 531a, the third projection 8532e of the sliding member 8532 is positioned above the connecting portion 533a of the rotating member 8533. As shown in FIG. Therefore, when the first electric accessory 520 is operated to be displaced to the second state, the rotation of the rotating member 8533 is restricted by the third projection 8532e.

In other words, a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving means (solenoid 531) to the pair of blade members 520L and 520R is provided. The sliding member 8532 is slidably displaced between the position shown in b)) and the closing slide position (the position shown in FIG. 79(a)), and the sliding displacement of the sliding member 8532 to the open slide position causes the opening rotation. position to open the pair of blade members 520L and 520R, and the sliding member 8532 is rotated to the closing rotation position by sliding displacement to the closing slide position so that the pair of blade members 520L and 520R can at least be closed. A standing wall 8533e1 is disposed on the rotating member 8533, and when the rotating member 8533 is rotated to the open rotation position, the standing wall 8533e1 is disposed at the allowable position and the rotating member 8533 is rotated to close. When rotated to the position, the erected wall 8533e1 is arranged at the regulated position, and when the sliding member 8532 is arranged at the closed slide position and the rotary member 8533 is arranged at the closed rotation position, it slides with the rotary member 8533. By being engaged with the member 8532, the rotation of the rotating member 8533 to the open rotation position is regulated, so that illegal entry of the game ball into the second winning hole can be easily regulated.

That is, from the state in which the pair of blade members 520L and 520R are closed, for example, the pair of blade members 520L and 520R are illegally forcibly opened from the outside, or by directly operating the rotary member 8533, the rotary member Even if an attempt is made to rotate the 8533 to the open position, the engagement of the rotating member 8533 and the sliding member 8532 restricts the rotation of the rotating member 8533 to the open rotating position. The position can be maintained (that is, the standing wall 8533e1 can be prevented from being illegally forcedly displaced to the allowable position from the outside). As a result, the standing wall 8533e1 can prevent the game ball from being illegally entered into the ball entrance.

Further, a third projection 8532e projecting from the sliding member 8532 (or the rotating member 8533), and a connecting portion 533a formed on the sliding member 8532 (or the rotating member 8533) so as to be able to engage with the third projection 8532e. , and the third projection 8532e protrudes along the direction of sliding displacement of the sliding member 8532, so that the sliding displacement of the sliding member 8532 is used to engage and engage the third projection 8532e and the connecting portion 533a. It is possible to switch between disengagement and disengagement, thereby simplifying the structure.

The engaging portion may be a surface (the other outer surface of the sliding member 8532 or the rotating member 8533) with which the third projection 8532e can come into contact, or a hole or recess into which the third projection 8532e can be inserted ( It may be a hole drilled in one of the sliding member 8532 or the rotating member 8533 or a concave portion provided therein. That is, it is sufficient that the rotation of the rotating member 8533 to the open rotation position can be restricted by the contact of the third projection 8532e with the connecting portion 533a. In this case, it is preferable that the connecting portion 533a be a hole or a concave portion. Since the third projection 8532e is inserted into the connecting portion 533a, the space required for arranging the third projection 8532e can be reduced, and the size can be reduced. This is because the third projection 8532e can be shielded from the outside, and unauthorized access to the third projection 8532e from the outside can be made difficult.

On the other hand, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is retracted into the main body 531a, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 8533 is retracted toward the rear side (right side in FIG. 79(b)), and the driving section 533d is moved upward. displaced. As a result, the first electric accessory 520 is brought into a second state in which the projection 533b is pushed upward.

In addition, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is retracted into the body portion 531a, the third projection 8532e of the sliding member 8532 is positioned on the rear side of the connecting portion 533a of the rotating member 8533. Therefore, the regulation of rotation of the rotating member 8533 is released. As a result, the first electric accessory 520 can be displaced by rotating the rotating member 8533 .

Therefore, when the driving portion 533d of the rotating member 8533 is rotated toward the open rotation position, the opening side contact portion 8533d1 that contacts and opens the pair of blade members 520L and 520R and rotates toward the closing rotation position. Since it is provided with the closing side contact portion 8533d2 that contacts and closes the pair of feather members 520L and 520R when it is closed, it is possible to suppress the pair of feather members 520L and 520R from being illegally forcibly opened from the outside. Unauthorized access to the member 8533 or the sliding member 8532 from the outside can be made difficult.

That is, when the pair of blade members 520L and 520R are displaced from the outside in the direction of forced opening, the closing side contact portion 8533d2 of the rotary member 8533 is pressed by the blade members 520L and 520R, and the rotary member 8533 is moved to the open rotation position. try to rotate it. In this case, according to the present invention, the engagement between the rotating member 8533 and the sliding member 8532 can restrict the rotation of the rotating member 8533 to the open rotation position, so that the displacement of the blade member is prevented by the closing side contact of the rotating member 8533. It can be regulated by the contact portion 8533d2. That is, it is possible to restrict the wing member from being displaced from the outside in the direction of forced opening. As a result, it is possible to prevent the pair of feather members 520L and 520R from being illegally forcibly opened from the outside, making it difficult to illegally access the rotating member 8533 or the sliding member 8532 from the outside.

When the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is pulled into the main body 531a, the rotating member 8533 is rotated to move the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b of the first case member 534 from the tip of the standing wall 8533e1. The distance dimension L7 to (see FIG. 82(b)) is made larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball that has entered the second winning hole 140 can be thrown to the second case member 535 by rolling the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b.

Next, with reference to FIG. 82, a case where the first electric accessory 520 is damaged will be described. 82(a) and 82(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. FIG. 82(a) and 82(b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 14(a) shows a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the first state, and FIG. 14(b) shows a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state. .

As shown in FIGS. 82(a) and 82(b), the protrusions 534L and 534R of the first electric role product 520 are broken from the proximal ends due to fraudulent activity, deterioration over time, etc., and the first electric role product 520 moves to the first position. When the state is changed to the second state, the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 protrudes from the body portion 531a, so that the tip of the standing wall 8533e1 of the second projection 8533e is positioned downward. be. Therefore, the standing wall 8533 e 1 can prevent the game ball from rolling on the upper end surface of the standing portion 534 b and being thrown to the second case member 535 .

Therefore, in a state in which the pair of feather members 520L and 520R are closed or in a state in which the pair of feather members 520L and 520R are opened from the outside, the arrangement of the standing wall 8533e1 is formed so as to be able to be maintained at the regulated position. It is possible to suppress the wall 8533e1 from being displaced to the permissible position. Therefore, illegal entry of a game ball into the second winning hole 140 can be easily regulated.

That is, in a state in which the pair of feather members 520L and 520R are closed or a state in which the pair of feather members 520L and 520R are opened from the outside, the sliding member 8532 is operated to move the standing tip of the standing wall 8533e1 (gravitational force). The distance dimension L6 from the direction lower side (the end of FIG. 20(b) lower side) to the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b formed in the first case member 534 is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball. . Therefore, even if the first electric accessory 520 is allowed to throw the game ball to the second prize winning port 140 due to the player's fraudulent act, the game ball enters the second prize winning port 140 and rolls. can be suppressed. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the standing portion 534b of the first case member 534 collides with the standing wall 8533e1 of the sliding member 8532, and the rolling of the game ball can be stopped. As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is put into the second state (the game ball can be thrown to the second winning port 140) by the player's fraudulent act, the game ball is illegally sent to the second winning port 140. It is easy to regulate being entered.

Also, in this case, the standing wall 8533e1 that makes it impossible to enter the game ball into the second winning hole 140 can be formed continuously with the sliding member 8532 that displaces the pair of feather members 520L and 520R. A separate member for regulating illegal entry of a ball into the winning hole 140 is not required. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced by that amount, so an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the eighth embodiment, the second projection 8533e that restricts the entry of the game ball and the third projection 8532e that suppresses the displacement of the second projection are integrated with the rotating member 8533 and the sliding member 8532. Since it is formed, the number of parts of the drive unit 8530 can be reduced. As a result, the manufacturing cost of drive unit 8530 can be reduced.

Next, a drive unit 9530 of the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 87. FIG. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is restricted from moving the first electric accessory 520 when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 protrudes from the main body 531a was described. The first electric accessory 520 is movable when the movable body 531b of 531 is projected from the main body 531a. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 83, the configuration of the drive unit 9530 in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 83 is an exploded perspective front view of the drive unit 9530 in the ninth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 83, a drive unit 8530 of the ninth embodiment includes a solenoid 531, a sliding member 8532 connected to the solenoid 531, a rotating member 9533 connected to the sliding member 8532, and a rotating member 9533 connected to the sliding member 8532. It mainly comprises a first case member 534 in which the member 9533 and the sliding member 8532 are displaceably arranged, and a second case member 536 attached to the rear side of the first case member 534. It is formed.

The rotating member 9533 is formed by arranging two plate-like bodies which are substantially L-shaped when viewed from the side, side by side with a predetermined width in the left-right direction, and is formed by connecting the opposed portions at one end with a connecting portion 533a. be. The gap between the opposing two plate-like bodies of the rotating member 9533 is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. This allows the game ball to pass through the inside of the rotating member 9533 (between the two plate-like bodies facing each other).

In addition, the width dimension of the rotating member 9533 in the left-right direction (the dimension between the outer surfaces of the two plate-like bodies opposed to each other) is set smaller than the dimension between the inner sides of the two first projections 532b of the sliding member 8532 opposed to each other. be. As a result, the rotating member 9533 can be arranged between the opposing first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 8532 .

The rotating member 9533 includes a rotating shaft 533c that protrudes to both sides in the left-right direction from a bent portion that is approximately L-shaped when viewed from the side; It mainly includes a projecting portion 9533d that projects to the front side at the tip of the other end of the L shape, and a second projection 8533e that projects to the front side from the central position in the left-right direction of the connecting portion 533a.

The projecting portion 9533d is formed so as to project from the end on the front side, and has a length that allows the projections 523L and 523R of the feather members 520L and 520R to abut on the side surface of the upper portion (the upper portion in FIG. 84(a)). is set to

Next, the operation of drive unit 530 will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 86. FIG. 84(a) and 84(b) are side views of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530. FIG. 85(a) and 85(b) are front views of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530. FIG. 86(a) and 86(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. FIG.

84 and 85 show a state in which the first case member 534 and the second case member 535 are transparent. 84(a), 85(a) and 86(a), the state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the first state is shown in FIGS. 84(b), 85(b) and 86. (b) shows a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state. Furthermore, FIGS. 86(a) and 86(b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 84 to 86, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 protrudes from the main body 531a, the protrusion 533b of the rotary member 8533 is pushed forward (left side in FIG. 84(a)). , the projecting portion 9533f is positioned downward. As a result, the projection 523 of the first electric accessory 520 is pushed downward to enter the first state.

In the ninth embodiment, an urging spring (not shown) is arranged on the rotating shaft of the first electric accessory 520, and the urging force of the urging spring causes the first electric accessory 520 to move to the first state side. An urging force for rotational displacement is always applied. Thereby, when the first electric accessory 520 is displaced to the second state by a force other than the driving of the solenoid 531 (for example, shaking of the pachinko machine), it is possible to prevent the first electric accessory 520 from remaining in the second state.

On the other hand, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is retracted into the main body 531a, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 8533 is retracted toward the rear side (the right side in FIG. 79(b)), and the protrusion 9533f is moved upward. is displaced to As a result, the first electric accessory 520 is brought into a second state in which the projection 533b is pushed upward.

In this case, the projecting portion 9533f and the projections 523L and 523R of the first electric accessory 520 are always in contact with each other, so that the first electric accessory 520 can be maintained in the second state.

In addition, by extending the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 from the second state from the main body portion 531a and displacing the protruding portion 9533f downward, the first electric accessory 520 is rotated by the biasing force of the biasing spring to the first position. It is displaced to the 1 state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the case where the first electric accessory 520 is illegally operated will be described. 87(a) and 87(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. FIG. 87(a) and 87(b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG. Also, FIG. 87(a) shows a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the first state, and FIG. 87(b) shows a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state. .

As shown in FIGS. 87(a) and 87(b), when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 protrudes from the main body 531a, the first electric accessory 520 is operated by the player's fraudulent act. When the state is changed from the first state to the second state, only the first electric accessory 520 is rotationally displaced.

Therefore, since the tip of the erected wall 8533e1 of the second projection 8533e is positioned downward, the game ball rolls on the upper end face of the erected portion 534b by the erected wall 8533e1, thereby moving the second case member. Throwing to 535 can be suppressed.

In this case (where the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 protrudes from the body portion 531a), the third projection 8532e of the sliding member 8532 is positioned above the connecting portion 533a of the rotating member 8533, as described above. . Therefore, the rotational displacement of the rotating member 8533 can be restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from operating the standing wall 8533e1. As a result, it is possible to prevent the store from being disadvantaged by the player's fraudulent act.

In addition, in the ninth embodiment, the second projection 8533e that restricts the entry of the game ball and the third projection 8532e that suppresses the displacement of the second projection are integrated with the rotating member 9533 and the sliding member 8532. Since it is formed, the number of parts of the drive unit 9530 can be reduced. As a result, the manufacturing cost of the drive unit 9530 can be reduced.

Furthermore, in the ninth embodiment, it is possible to prevent the first electric accessory 520 from being broken due to the player's cheating. As a result, it is possible to suppress losses on the side of the store due to fraudulent acts of the players.

That is, in the ninth embodiment, an urging spring that urges the pair of feather members 520L and 520R in the closing direction is provided, and the rotating member 9533 rotates the pair of feather members 520L and 520R toward the open rotation position. 520R, and when the rotating member 9533 is rotated toward the closed rotation position, the pair of blade members 520L and 520R are closed by the biasing force of the biasing spring. When the blade members 520L and 520R are illegally forcibly opened from the outside, the pair of blade members 520L and 520R are not brought into contact with the rotating member 9533, and the external force due to such forced opening is avoided from acting on the rotating member 9533. can. As a result, damage to the pair of feather members 520L, 520R, rotating member 9533, or sliding member 8532 can be suppressed.

As a biasing means for constantly applying a biasing force for rotationally displacing the first electric accessory 520 to the first state side, a spring (torsion) biases the pair of feather members 520L and 520R in the closing direction by elastic recovery force. Springs and coil springs) as well as magnets that urge the pair of feather members 520L and 520R in the closing direction with an attractive force are exemplified.

Next, the displacement member 10670 of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 91. FIG. In the first embodiment, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 is reduced (or increased) in a non-linear manner as the displacement member 670 is displaced. , the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 is changed. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

First, the configuration of the displacement member 10670 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89. FIG. 88(a) is a front view of the displacement member 10670 in the tenth embodiment, and FIG. 88(b) is a side view of the displacement member 10670. FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective front view of displacement member 10670. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 88 and 89, the displacement member 10670 of the tenth embodiment includes an extension member 671, an extension member 10671 arranged to face the extension member 671, and an extension member 10671. and a decoration unit 672 connected to the extension member 671, and a rotary member 10678 rotatably disposed on the extension member.

The extension member 10671 is formed in a substantially L-shape when viewed from the front, and has a shaft support hole 671a penetrating in the left-right direction when viewed from the front at the end on the long side, and protrudes left and right outward at a substantially central position on the long side in the longitudinal direction. and a rotary shaft 10671e formed so as to protrude from the connecting projection 671b toward the shaft support hole 671a.

The rotary member 10678 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the side, and is disposed on the extended member 10671 such that its longitudinal direction intersects the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal side of the extended member 10671 at a substantially right angle when viewed from the side.

The rotating member 10678 has a shaft support hole 10678a penetrating in the left-right direction, a through hole 10678b formed circumferentially through the shaft support hole 10671a of the extension member 10671 at one end in the longitudinal direction, and a through hole 10678b formed at the other end in the longitudinal direction. , and an inclined surface 10678c formed by notching the side surface of the .

The shaft support hole 10678a is a hole into which the rotating shaft 10671e of the extension member 10671 is inserted, and has an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the rotating shaft 10671e. Therefore, by inserting the rotating shaft 10671e into the shaft support hole 10677a and screwing it to the rotating shaft 10671e, the rotating member 10678 can be rotatably disposed on the extension member 10671.

The through hole 10678b is a hole into which the torsion spring SP2 is inserted, and is formed larger than the outer diameter of the torsion spring SP2.

90 and 91, the operation of rotating member 10678 will now be described. FIG. 90 is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 600L. 91(a) and 91(b) are partially enlarged views of the vertical displacement unit 600L in the range XCI of FIG. 90. FIG.

Note that FIG. 90 corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 58(b). 91(a) and 91(b) show the state when the displacement members 670 and 10670 are displaced. is shown.

As shown in FIG. 90, in the vertical displacement unit 600L of the tenth embodiment, a displacement member 670 is arranged on the upper side and a displacement member 10670 is arranged on the lower side. The axis of the support hole 671a is arranged coaxially. That is, in the first embodiment, the lower displacement member 670 of the pair of displacement members 670 arranged in the upside down direction is changed to the displacement member 10670 . The driving means for the displacement member 10670 is the same as the means for driving the displacement member 670 of the first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91, when the decorative units 672 of the displaceable members 670 and 10670 arranged vertically are displaced in a direction toward each other, the extension members 671 and 10671 are brought closer to each other.

In the state shown in FIG. 91(b) in which the side surfaces of the decorative unit 672 are in contact with each other, the inclined surface 10678c of the rotating member 10678 is in contact with the side surface of the extension member 671. As shown in FIG. As a result, the rotating member 10678 is rotated around the shaft support hole 10678a so that the inclined surface 10678c is substantially parallel to the side surface of the extension member 671 (in FIG. 91(b), the rotating member 10678 is supported counterclockwise about hole 10678a).

Accordingly, the through hole 10678b formed on the opposite side of the inclined surface 10678c and the pivot hole 10678a is similarly rotated. By displacing the position of the through-hole 10678b, the position where the through-hole 10678b engages with the torsion spring SP2 is changed.

In the ninth embodiment, the position of the through hole 10678b is displaced from the end side of the torsion spring SP2 to the base end side. Therefore, the biasing force acting on the displacement member 10670 from the torsion spring SP2 can be increased.

Therefore, when the side surfaces of the decoration unit 672 are brought into contact with each other, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 acting on the displacement member 10670 arranged below the vertical displacement unit 600L can be increased. As a result, when the displacement members 670 and 10670 are displaced while the side surfaces of the decoration unit 672 are in contact with each other, it is possible to prevent the side surfaces of the decoration unit 672 from contacting each other.

Further, since the extension member 10671 on which the rotating member 10678 is arranged is the driven side (the side operated via the connecting rod 681) of the driving means 680 for driving the displacement member 10670, it is driven by the driving motor KM3. When the driving force is smaller than that on the driving side (the side connected to the protrusion 683b of the large diameter gear 683), the displacement of the rotating member 10678 increases the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2, thereby increasing the driving force. It can make up for the lack of strength. As a result, it is possible to prevent the side surfaces of the decoration unit 672 from contacting each other.

Next, the vertical displacement unit 11600L of the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94. FIG. In the first embodiment, the displacement member 670 transmits driving force from both the left and right sides, but in the eleventh embodiment, the driving force is transmitted from only one side of the displacement member 11670 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

92 to 94, similarly to FIGS. 61 to 63, a displacement member 670 arranged on the upper side of the vertical displacement unit 600L and a driving means for driving the displacement member 670 are denoted by U at the end of their reference numerals. In addition, a displacement member 670 disposed below the vertical displacement unit 600L and a drive means for driving the displacement member 670 will be described with a D suffix.

The operation of the vertical displacement unit 11600L will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94. FIG. 92 to 94 are schematic diagrams of the vertical displacement unit 11600L in the eleventh embodiment. 92 to 94, transition states of the displacement member 11670 are illustrated in order.

As shown in FIG. 92, in the vertical displacement unit 11600L in the eleventh embodiment, the extension member 671 of the displacement member 11670 is arranged only on one side. That is, in the first embodiment, a pair of extension members 671 are arranged symmetrically on the displacement member 670, whereas in the eleventh embodiment, the extension members 671 are arranged on only one of them. be.

In the eleventh embodiment, the driving means 680 is formed only on the driving side (the side connected to the protrusion 683b of the large-diameter gear 683), and the extension member 671 is connected to the driving means on the driving side. Therefore, the extension members 671 of the displacement members 11670 arranged in a pair vertically in the vertical displacement unit 11600L are arranged in opposite directions.

As shown in FIG. 93, when the vertically arranged displacement members 11670 are displaced, the side surfaces of the decoration units 672 are brought into contact with each other at the vertical central position of the vertical displacement unit 11600L.

As shown in FIG. 94, by displacing both in the same direction from the state of FIG. 93, the side surfaces of the decoration units 672 can be displaced in the vertical direction while being in contact with each other.

In the case of the eleventh embodiment, since the extension member 671 of the displacement member 11670 is arranged on one side, the driving of the decoration unit 672 on the side opposite to the drive side is slowed down, and there is a possibility that a gap is formed between the two decoration units 672. However, since the extension members 671 are arranged on opposite sides in the vertical direction, the end of one decoration unit 672 on the side opposite to the drive side is pushed by the end of the other decoration unit 672 on the drive side. be able to. As a result, the formation of a gap between the two decoration units 672 can be suppressed.

In this case, it is preferable to delay the driving timing of the displacement member 11670 on the displacement direction side of the decoration unit 672 . By delaying the driving timing of the displacement member 11670 on the displacement direction side of the decoration unit 672, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the two decoration units 672. FIG.

More specifically, by advancing the driving timing of the displacement member 11670 on the side opposite to the displacement direction of the decoration unit 672, the decoration unit 672 driven first is driven later. The end opposite the drive side of 672 can be extruded. On the other hand, the end opposite to the driving side of the decoration unit 672 that is driven first comes into contact with the driving side end of the decoration unit 672 that is driven later with a stronger force. As a result, when displacing the two displacement members 11670 with the side surfaces of the decoration units 672 in contact with each other, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the two decoration units 672 .

Further, in the case of the eleventh embodiment, the extension member 671 of the displacement member 11670 is on one side, so that the displacement member 11670 (extension member 671) can be easily deformed. Therefore, by accelerating the driving timing of the displacement members 11670 on the side opposite to the displacement direction of the decoration unit 672, the displacement members 11670 (extending members 671) are deformed and the elastic force when the displacement returns can be used to suppress the formation of a gap between the two decoration units 672 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 95, a winning opening unit 500 of the twelfth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the front base 511 and the rear base 512 of the prize-winning unit 500 have a substantially constant thickness. partially modified. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 95(a) is a top view of the winning opening unit 500 in the twelfth embodiment, and FIG. 95(b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 along line XCVb-XCVb of FIG. 95(a). In addition, in FIG. 95(a), the front base 511 is shown transparently, and in FIG. 95(b), the front base 511 is shown opaquely. Also, in FIG. 95(b), the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the side surfaces 526L and 526R is indicated by the two-dot chain line together with the symbol of the virtual line KS1, as in FIG. 24(b). Furthermore, the front direction of the imaginary line KS1 is illustrated by arrow F, and the back direction is illustrated by arrow B. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 95, the front base 511 is formed to have partially different thicknesses in the front-rear direction (up-down direction in FIG. 95(b)) on the left and right sides of the second prize winning opening 140 . That is, the upper right portion of the second winning hole 140 is provided with a front-side bulging portion 12511f that bulges toward the back side.

In addition, the back base 512 is formed so that the thickness in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 95(b)) is partially different on the right and left sides of the second prize winning opening 140 . That is, the upper left portion of the second prize winning opening 140 is provided with a back side bulging portion 12512d that bulges to the back side.

The front-side swelling portion 12511f and the rear-side swelling portion 12512d are formed outside the displacement region of the pair of feather members 520L and 520R. This suppresses the collision between the pair of feather members 520L and 520R and the front-side swelling portion 12511f and the rear-side swelling portion 12512d.

In addition, the ends of the front-side bulging portion 12511f and the rear-side bulging portion 12512d are arranged so that their ends extend in the horizontal direction (Fig. direction) outside. As a result, the game ball which may flow down from the upstream side of the first electric accessory 520 and may be thrown to the side surfaces 526L and 526R is surely made to collide with the front-side swelling part 12511f and the back-side swelling part 12512d. can be done.

The front-side bulging portion 12511f is formed on the side surface facing the formation position of the bulging portion 524R of the right wing member 520R in the front-rear direction. In other words, the front-side swelling portion 12511f is formed on the side surface located in the front-rear direction opposite to the formation position of the swelling portion 524R in the front-rear direction.

On the other hand, the back-side bulging portion 12512d is formed on the side surface facing the formation position of the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L in the front-rear direction. In other words, the back-side swelling portion 12512d is formed on the side surface positioned in the front-rear direction opposite to the formation position of the swelling portion 524L in the front-rear direction.

As a result, the game ball flowing down the upper right side of the first electric accessory 520 can collide with the front-side swelling portion 12511f and be guided to the back side. Therefore, when the game ball flowing down the upper right side of the first electric accessory 520 is thrown to the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R, it can be moved to the rear side. As a result, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526R can easily collide with the bulging portion 524R.

On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the upper left side of the first electric accessory 520 can be made to collide with the back side bulging portion 12512d and can be guided to the front side. Therefore, when the game ball flowing down the upper left side of the first electric accessory 520 is thrown to the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L, it can be moved to the front side. As a result, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526L can easily collide with the bulging portion 524L.

Therefore, by bringing the game ball guided (rolled) along the guide surfaces (side surfaces 526L, 526R) into contact with the bulging portions 524L, 524R, the game ball can be reliably biased. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enter the ball into the second winning hole 140 and to suppress ball clogging.

Also, when the game ball that has entered the guide surface of one feather member (one of the feather members 520L and 520R) reaches the guide surface of one feather member (the other of the feather members 520L and 520R) , such a game ball can be brought into contact with the projecting portion of the other feather member. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the game ball that has entered the guide surface of one feather member (one of the feather members 520L and 520R) from passing through the guide surface of the other feather member. As a result, the game ball is made to enter the ball entrance, and the interest of the player can be improved.

Furthermore, in the twelfth embodiment, the game ball thrown by the feather members 520L and 520R collides with the front-side swelling portion 12511f and the back-side swelling portion 12512d, thereby slowing down the throwing speed. Therefore, the rolling speed of the game ball rolling on the side surfaces 526L, 526R of the feather members 520L, 520R can be slowed down. As a result, the impact when colliding with the bulging portions 524L and 524R can be reduced, and the damage of the feather members 520L and 520R can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 96, a winning opening unit 500 of the thirteenth embodiment will be described. The prize winning unit 500 of the thirteenth embodiment is formed with a projection projecting between the front base 511 and the rear base 512 of the first embodiment. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 96(a) is a top view of a winning opening unit 500 in the thirteenth embodiment, and FIG. 96(b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 taken along line XCVIb-XCVIb of FIG. 96(a). In addition, in FIG. 96(a), the front base 511 is shown transparently, and in FIG. 96(b), the front base 511 is shown opaquely. In addition, in FIG. 96(b), the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the side surfaces 526L and 526R is illustrated by the two-dot chain line together with the symbol of the imaginary line KS1 in the same manner as in FIG. 24(b). Furthermore, the front direction of the imaginary line KS1 is illustrated by arrow F, and the back direction is illustrated by arrow B. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 96, the front base 511 is formed with a protrusion 13511g projecting toward the rear base 512 on the left side of the second prize winning opening 140 . In addition, the rear base 512 is formed with a protrusion 13512e protruding toward the front base 511 on the right side of the second prize winning opening 140 .

The protrusions 13511g and 13512e are formed outside the displacement regions of the pair of feather members 520L and 520R. Thereby, collision between the pair of feather members 520L and 520R and the protrusions 13511g and 13512e is suppressed.

The protrusion 13511g is formed on the side surface of the right wing member 520R on the same side as the formation position of the bulging portion 524R in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, the protrusion 13512e is formed on the side surface facing the formation position of the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L in the front-rear direction.

As a result, the game ball flowing down the upper right side of the first electric accessory 520 can collide with the projection 13511g and be guided to the front side. Therefore, when the game ball flowing down the upper right side of the first electric accessory 520 is thrown to the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R, the game ball can be brought closer to the front side. As a result, when the game ball flowing down on the upper right side of the first electric accessory 520 is thrown to the side surface 526R, it is less likely to collide with the bulging portion 524R. As a result, damage to the feather member 520R can be suppressed.

Also, the game ball thrown from the right side of the first electric accessory 520 to the side surface 526R of the feather member 520R is thrown to the side surface 526R without colliding with the projection 13511g formed above the feather member 520R. . The game ball in this case can be guided to the rear side by colliding with the bulging portion 524R when rolling the side surface 526R.

On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the upper left side of the first electric accessory 520 can collide with the protrusion 13512e and can be guided to the rear side. Therefore, when the game ball flowing down the upper left side of the first electric accessory 520 is thrown to the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L, the game ball can be brought to the rear side. As a result, when the game ball flowing down the upper left side of the first electric accessory 520 is thrown to the side surface 526L, it can be made less likely to collide with the bulging portion 524L. As a result, damage to the feather member 520L can be suppressed.

Also, the game ball thrown from the left side of the first electric accessory 520 to the side surface 526L of the feather member 520L is thrown to the side surface 526L without colliding with the projection 13512e formed above the feather member 520L. . The game ball in this case can be guided to the front side by colliding with the bulging portion 524L when rolling the side surface 526L.

Therefore, by bringing the game ball guided (rolled) along the guide surfaces (side surfaces 526L, 526R) into contact with the bulging portions 524L, 524R, the game ball can be reliably biased. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enter the ball into the second winning hole 140 and to suppress ball clogging.

Also, when the game ball that has entered the guide surface of one feather member (one of the feather members 520L and 520R) reaches the guide surface of one feather member (the other of the feather members 520L and 520R) , such a game ball can be brought into contact with the projecting portion of the other feather member. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the game ball that has entered the guide surface of one feather member (one of the feather members 520L and 520R) from passing through the guide surface of the other feather member. As a result, the game ball is made to enter the ball entrance, and the interest of the player can be improved.

Furthermore, since the projections 13511g and 13512e can reduce the number of game balls that collide with the bulging portions 524L and 524R of the feather members 520L and 520R, the durability of the feather members 520L and 520R can be improved.

Next, feather members 14520L and 14520R (first variable device 14520) of the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. FIG. The feather members 14520L and 14520R of the fourteenth embodiment are formed so that the bulging portions 524L and 524R have different width dimensions in the front-rear direction from those of the first embodiment. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 97(a) is a perspective front view of the left wing member 520L in the fourteenth embodiment, and FIG. 97(b) is a perspective front view of the right wing member 520R. 98(a) is a cross-sectional view of the prize-winning unit 500, FIG. 98(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the left wing member 520L taken along line XCVIIIb-XCVIIIb in FIG. 98(a), and FIG. 98(c). ) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the right wing member 520R along line XCVIIIc-XCVIIIc in FIG. 98(b).

In addition, in FIGS. 97(a) and 97(b), the oblique direction in the left-right direction is shown in the opposite direction. Also, the cross-sectional view of FIG. 98(b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 24(b). In FIG. 98(a), as in FIG. 24(b), the rolling directions of the game balls rolling on the side surfaces 14526L and 14526R are indicated by two-dot chain lines together with the symbol of the virtual line KS1. Furthermore, the front direction of the imaginary line KS1 is illustrated by arrow F, and the back direction is illustrated by arrow B. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, the left wing member 14520L has a generally triangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a dimension larger than the diameter of the game ball in the front-rear direction. The left wing member 14520L has a through hole 521L penetrating in the front-rear direction at the lower end portion in the direction of gravity, a concave portion 522L recessed from the front side to the back side around the through hole 521L, and a rear side from the vicinity of the through hole 521L. a protrusion 523L protruding to the side, a recessed portion 525L recessed in the radial direction of the through hole 521L in the end face on the side of the through hole 521L, and the side faces of the pair of feather members 14520L and 14520R facing each other in the closed state. 14526L and a bulging portion 14524L protruding from the side surface 14526L.

The side surface 14526L includes an inclined surface 14526L1 that is inclined upward from the approximate center position in the front-rear direction toward the back side, and a smooth surface 14526L2 that is formed on the front side from the approximate center position in the front-rear direction.

The inclined surface 14526L1 is formed so as to be inclined downward from the rear surface side (the left side in FIG. 98(b)) toward the smooth surface 14526L2 side. As a result, among the game balls thrown to the side surface 14256L, the game balls thrown to the inclined surface 14526L1 can be guided toward the smooth surface 1452L2 by the downward inclination.

Also, the bulging portion 14524L is formed on the base end side of the inclined surface 14526L1 (the back side of the paper in FIG. 98(b)). The bulging portion 14524L is formed such that its width in the front-rear direction is smaller than half the width in the front-rear direction of the feather member 14520L. That is, the front-rear width of the bulging portion 15254L is made smaller than the front-rear width of the bulging portion 14524L.

As described above, of the game balls rolling on the side surface 14526L of the left wing member 14520L, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 14526L1 is rolled on the smooth surface 14526L2 side, so the game ball rolling on the side surface 14526L It is possible to reduce the probability that the ball will collide with the bulging portion 14524L.

On the other hand, the right wing member 14520R is formed in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed to have a dimension larger than the diameter of the game ball in the front-rear direction. The right wing member 14520R has a through hole 521R that penetrates the lower end portion in the direction of gravity in the front-rear direction, a concave portion 522L that is recessed from the front side to the back side around the through hole 521R, and a back side from the vicinity of the through hole 521R. a recessed portion 525R recessed in the axial direction of the through hole 521R in the end face on the side of the through hole 521R; and a bulging portion 14524R protruding from the side surface 14526R.

The side surface 14526R includes an inclined surface 14526R1 that is inclined upward from the approximately center position in the front-rear direction toward the rear side, and a smooth surface 14526R2 that is formed toward the front side from the approximately center position in the front-rear direction.

The inclined surface 14526R1 is formed so as to be inclined downward from the rear side (the right side in FIG. 98(c)) toward the smooth surface 14526R2. As a result, among the game balls thrown to the side surface 14256R, the game balls thrown to the inclined surface 14526R1 can be guided toward the smooth surface 1452R2 by the downward inclination.

Also, the bulging portion 14524R is formed on the base end side of the inclined surface 14526R1 (the back side of the paper in FIG. 98(b)). The bulging portion 14524L is formed such that its width in the front-rear direction is larger than half the width in the front-rear direction of the feather member 14520L. That is, the width of the inclined surface 14526R1 in the front-rear direction is larger than the width of the bulging portion 14524L in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the longitudinal width of the bulging portion 14524R of the right wing member 14520R is formed larger than the longitudinal width of the bulging portion 14524L of the left wing member 14520L.

As described above, among the game balls rolling on the side surface 14526R of the right wing member 14520R, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 14526R1 rolls on the smooth surface 14526R2 side, so the game ball rolling on the side surface 14526R It is possible to reduce the probability that the ball will collide with the bulging portion 14524R.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment is formed in a form in which game balls flow down from the left side of the first electric accessory 520 and are easily thrown to the side surfaces 526L and 526R of the feather members 520L and 520R in the open state. be. More specifically, in the pachinko machine 10, a first through gate 66 for opening a pair of feather members 520L and 520R is arranged on the left side of the center frame 86, and a game ball is passed through the center frame 86 during time saving and variable probability. It is configured to be launched towards the left. As a result, the game ball flowing down the game board 13 flows down the left side of the game board 13 as a whole, and is thrown from the left side of the first variable device 14520 (the pair of feather members 14520L, 14520R) to the side surfaces 14526L, 14526R. easier.

Therefore, compared to the right wing member 14520R, more game balls are thrown to the side surface 14526L of the left wing member 14520L, the wear of the swelling part 14524L of the left wing member 14520L is accelerated, and the left wing member 14520L is easily broken. there was a point

On the other hand, in the fourteenth embodiment, inclined surfaces 14526L1 and 14526R1 are formed on the side surfaces 14526L and 14526R, and bulged portions 14524L and 14524R are formed on the inclined surfaces 14526L1 and 14526R1, so that a large number of game balls are thrown. Since the bulging portions 14524L and 14524R are formed small in the front-rear direction, by reducing the probability that the game ball collides with the bulging portion 14524L of the feather member 14520L on the side where the ball is thrown more, the wear of the bulging portion 14524L is reduced. It can be suppressed to be done early. As a result, it is possible to prevent the feather members 14520L and 14520R on the side to which a large number of game balls are thrown from becoming fragile.

Next, the variable winning device 15065 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the pair of feather members 520L and 520R are formed with the bulging portions 524L and 524R has been described. be done. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

99(a) is a partially enlarged view of the game board 13 in the fifteenth embodiment, and FIG. 99(b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 along line XCIXb-XCIXb in FIG. 100(a) is a partially enlarged view of the game board 13, and FIG. 100(b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 taken along line Cb-Cb in FIG. 100(a).

99(a) and 100(a) correspond to the partially enlarged view of FIG. 99 shows the closed state of the variable winning device 15065, and FIG. 100 shows the open state of the variable winning device 15065. As shown in FIG. In addition, in FIG. 100(b), the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the side surface 15065a is illustrated by the two-dot chain line together with the symbol of the imaginary line KS1 in the same manner as in FIG. 24(b). Furthermore, the front direction of the imaginary line KS1 is illustrated by arrow F, and the back direction is illustrated by arrow B. As shown in FIG.

In addition, the closed state of the variable winning device 15065 means that the plane of the variable winning device 15065 formed in a plate state is positioned substantially parallel to the plane on the front side of the game board 13, and the game ball flowing down the game area is a specific winning state. This is a state in which a ball cannot be entered into the mouth (large open mouth) 65a. On the other hand, the open state of the variable winning device 15065 means that the plane of the variable winning device 15065 is positioned substantially perpendicular to the plane of the front side of the game board 13, and the game balls flowing down the game area ) 65a.

As shown in FIGS. 99 and 100, the variable prize winning device 15065 is formed in a plate-like body elongated in the left and right direction, and is arranged rotatably with respect to the game board 13 with one end on the back side as an axis. In addition, the variable winning device 15065 is connected to a driving device (not shown) on the back side, and by applying a driving force to the driving device, the variable winning device 15065 is displaced between a closed position and an open position. It is possible.

In addition, the variable winning device 15065 has two protrusions 15065b and 15065c protruding from the side surface 15065a on the upper surface side in the open state. Further, the side surfaces 15065a of the variable winning device 15065 are inclined downward from the left and right sides toward the center. As a result, the game ball thrown to the side surface 15065a rolls toward the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, and enters the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a.

The bulging portion 15065b is located on the left side of the specific prize winning opening (large open opening) 65a when viewed from the front, and is connected to the end face on the front side in the open state (state shown in FIG. 100(b)). The bulging portion 15065c is located on the right side of the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a when viewed from the front, and is formed to be connected to the end face on the back side in the alveolar state (state shown in FIG. 100(b)).

That is, the bulging portion 15065b and the bulging portion 15065c are formed on both left and right sides with the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a interposed therebetween, and are formed at different positions in the front-rear direction. As a result, when a game ball is thrown to both the left and right sides of the variable winning device 15065 in the open state, it is possible to prevent the game ball from colliding in front of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a and rebounding to both the left and right sides. .

More specifically, a game ball thrown to the left side of the side surface 15065a in front view collides with the bulging portion 15065b when rolling toward the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, and is guided to the rear side. be. On the other hand, the game ball thrown to the right side of the side surface 15065a in front view collides with the bulging portion 15065c when rolling toward the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a and is guided to the front side.

Therefore, the front-rear direction position of the game ball thrown from both the left and right sides of the side surface 15065a can be displaced by the bulging portion 15065b and the bulging portion 15065c. Therefore, when the game balls are thrown to the left and right sides of the side surface 15065a, and the left and right game balls collide in front of the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a, the rebound (rebound) direction can be set in the front-rear direction. can. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enter the game ball into the specific winning hole (large open hole) 65a.

In addition, when the game ball is thrown from one of the left and right sides of the side surface 15065a, the game ball collides with one of the bulging portion 15065b or the bulging portion 15065c to displace the position in the front-rear direction. The game ball can collide with the other of the swelling portion 15065b or the swelling portion 15065c when the front side of the ball rolls in the left-right direction. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball thrown from one side of the side surface 15065a from rolling in front of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a and exiting to the other side of the side surface 15065a.

A side surface 15065a of the variable prize winning device 15065 is formed to have a width equal to or larger than the width of the specific prize winning opening (large opening) 65a, and has a pair of swelling portions. 15065b and 15065c are arranged at positions sandwiching the ball entrance when viewed from the front, and are arranged at different positions in a direction orthogonal to the width direction (the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surface 15065a). Therefore, by bringing the game ball guided (rolled) along the side surface 15065a into contact with the bulging portions 15065b and 15065c, the game ball can be reliably biased. As a result, the ball can be smoothly entered into the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a.

Also, one bulging portion 15065b, 15065c and the other bulging portion 15065b, 15065c are positioned in a direction perpendicular to the width direction of the variable winning device 15065 (the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surface 15065a). By arranging them differently, when a game ball enters the side surface 15065a of the variable winning device 15065 from one side (or the other side) in the width direction, the game ball is pushed into either of the pair of bulging portions 15065b and 15065c. can be abutted on either side. Therefore, the game ball that has entered from one side (or the other side) in the width direction to the side surface 15065a of the variable winning device 15065 passes through the side surface 15065a of the variable winning device 15065 and flows out from the other side in the width direction of the side surface 15065a of the variable winning device 15065. can be suppressed. As a result, the game ball can be entered into the specific winning hole (large open hole) 65a to enhance the interest of the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 101, engagement between the sliding member 8532 and the rotating member 8533 in the sixteenth embodiment will be described. In the eighth embodiment, the engagement between the rotating member 8533 and the sliding member 8532 is made possible by the contact between the upper surface of the connecting portion 533a and the third projection 8532e. This is done by inserting the third projection 16532e into the recess of the portion 533a. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 101(a) is a front view of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 8530 in the sixteenth embodiment, and FIG. 101(b) is the first electric accessory along line CIb-CIb of FIG. 101(a). 101(c) is a cross-sectional view of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 8530 along line CIc-CIc in FIG. 101(b).

As shown in FIG. 101, the connecting portion 533a of the rotating member 8533 of the sixteenth embodiment is formed with a recessed portion 16533a1 recessed from the back side toward the front side at a substantially central position in the left-right direction. The recessed portion 16533a1 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the rear.

In addition, the third projection 16532e of the sliding member 8532 is formed so as to protrude at a position opposed to the recessed portion 16533a1 described above in the front-rear direction. The shape of the third projection 16532e when viewed from the front is a horizontally long rectangle slightly smaller than the concave portion 16533a1, and the tip thereof is tapered.

Thereby, when the pair of feather members 520L and 520R are closed, the third protrusion 16532e can be accommodated inside the concave portion 16533a1. As a result, the rotating member 8533 and the sliding member 8532 can be engaged.

In this case, since the recessed portion 16533a1 is used as the engaging portion, the space required for arranging the third projection 16532e can be reduced by the amount of the insertion of the third projection 16532e into the recessed portion 16533a1. In addition, by being inserted into the concave portion 16533a1, the third projection 16532e can be shielded from the outside, and unauthorized access to the third projection 16532e from the outside can be made difficult.

Next, the sliding member 15732 in the seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 104. FIG. In the above-described first embodiment, the standing wall 532c1 is positioned upstream of the sensor device SE1 arranged on the flow path of the game ball entering the second winning hole 140. In the seventeenth embodiment, a case where the standing wall 17532c1 is arranged downstream of the sensor device SE1 will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

First, the configuration of the sliding member 17532 will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 and 103. FIG. 102(a) and 102(b) are side views of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 17530 in the seventeenth embodiment. 103(a) and 103(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. FIG.

102, the first case member 534 and the second case member 535 are shown transparently. Also, in FIGS. 102(a) and 103(a), the first electric accessory 520 is in the closed state, and in FIGS. 102(b) and 102(b), the first electric accessory 520 is in the open state. Each state is illustrated. Also, FIGS. 102(a) and 102(b) correspond to the cross sections of FIGS. 17(a) and 17(b), respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 102 and 103, the sliding member 17532 in the seventeenth embodiment has an upright wall 17532c1 projecting from the lower side of the connecting portion 532a (lower side in FIG. 102(a)). The erected wall 17532c1 is provided with an erected wall 17532c1 whose tip is set at a position exceeding the lower end surface of the second case member 535 and whose tip is bent toward the front side.

The erected length of the erected wall 17532c1 toward the front side is such that when the first electric accessory 520 is closed, the upper and lower side surfaces are below the sensor device SE1 arranged in the second case member 535. Set to length located.

Further, an opening 17535b is formed through the second case member 535 in the vertical direction (see FIG. 103(a)). The second projection 17532c is arranged in a state of being inserted inside the opening 17535b.

Further, the opening width of the opening 17535b in the front-rear direction is set larger than the sliding width of the sliding member 17532 that slides in the front-rear direction (driving width of the solenoid 531). Thereby, the sliding member 17532 can be slid in the front-rear direction while the second projection 17532c is inserted inside the opening 17535b.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 103(a) and 103(b), when the first electric accessory 520 is closed, the standing wall 17532c1 is positioned downstream of the sensor device SE1 and the game is played. Ball penetration can be regulated. On the other hand, when the first electric accessory 520 is in the open state, the standing wall 17532c1 is arranged on the rear side of the opening of the sensor device SE1 (the hole for detecting the passage of the game ball). Thereby, when the first electric accessory 520 is in the open state, it is possible to insert the game ball.

Next, with reference to FIG. 104, the case where the first electric accessory is forced into the second state due to fraud by the player will be described. 104(a) and 104(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. FIG. 104(a) and 104(b) correspond to the cross sections of FIGS. 20(a) and 20(b), respectively. Also, FIG. 104(a) illustrates a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in a closed state, and FIG. 104(b) illustrates a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in an open state.

As shown in FIGS. 104(a) and 104(b), when the first electric accessory 520 is closed, the pair of feather members 520L and 520R are forcibly opened by the player's fraud. , When the first electric accessory 520 is in the open state, the front-rear position of the sliding member 17532 is the same as in the closed state, as in the first embodiment.

Therefore, when the first electric accessory 520 is forcibly opened, the standing wall 17532c1 is arranged downstream of the sensor device SE1. Therefore, the game ball entered from the second winning hole 140 is stagnated on the upper surface of the standing wall 17532c1.

In this case, the distance from the sensor device SE1 to the upper surface of the standing wall 17532c1 is set to a dimension that substantially matches the radius of the game ball. As a result, the game ball caught on the upper surface of the standing wall 17532c1 is always detected by the sensor device SE1. Therefore, when the sensor device SE1 detects the game ball for a predetermined time, the pachinko machine 10 can detect that the first electric accessory 520 has been illegally released. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from cheating and to notify the store manager of the player's cheating.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventeenth embodiment includes the sensor device SE1 for detecting a game ball entered into the second winning hole 140, and the upright wall 17532c1 is positioned downstream of the sensor device SE1. In addition, since the game ball is restricted at a position where it can be detected by the sensor device SE1, for example, when the feather members 520L and 520R are forcibly opened and the game ball illegally flows in from the ball entrance, the sensor device The state in which SE1 has detected the game ball can be continued. Therefore, by judging whether or not the detection by the sensor device SE1 has continued beyond a predetermined time, it is possible to detect that game balls have entered illegally.

Next, referring to FIG. 105, the rotating member 18812 of the eighteenth embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, the protrusion 2812a1 formed on the rotating member 2812 is formed at a constant radial distance from the axis of the hub 812a. They are formed at different radial spacings from the axis of 812a. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

105(a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member 18812 in the eighteenth embodiment, and FIG. 105(b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member 18812 along line CVb-CVb of FIG. 105(a).

As shown in FIG. 105, the hub 812a of the rotating member 18812 in the eighteenth embodiment has projections 18812a1 that protrude in a hemispherical shape toward the edge 824 side (see FIG. 35) of the outer reel unit 820 arranged oppositely. Have several.

The protrusions 18812a1 are formed with different radial distances from the axis of the adjacent protrusions 18812a and the hub 812a. As a result, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, the airflow generated by the first projection 18812a1 (located on the rotation side) is directed to the second projection 18812a1 (rotation rear side of the projection 18812a1). It can easily collide. Therefore, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, the airflow can be easily generated. As a result, air can be sent between the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 to clean the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 106, the relationship between the housing unit 880, the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 in the nineteenth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the side wall portion 881 of the housing unit 880 is formed in a plate-like shape, but the side wall portion 881 in the nineteenth embodiment is formed with a plurality of openings. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

106(a) and 12(b) are cross-sectional views of a decorative design display device 800 according to the nineteenth embodiment. 106(a) and 106(b) each illustrate a state in which the outer reel unit 820 is shifted (rotationally displaced). In addition, in FIG. 106(b), the opening 19881d formed in the side wall portion 881 is illustrated with a dashed line.

As shown in FIG. 106(a), a side wall portion 881 (see FIG. 30(a)) disposed on the left side of the decorative pattern display device 800 in front view is provided with a plurality of openings 19881d penetrating in the horizontal direction. be done.

The openings 19881d are formed at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction around the rotation shafts of the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 . The formation angle of the adjacent openings 19881d is set to be substantially the same as the formation angle of the spokes 812c of the inner reel unit 810 and the spokes 822 of the outer reel unit 820. In addition, the opening dimension of the opening 19881d in the circumferential direction is set smaller than the width dimension of the spokes 812c and 822 in the circumferential direction. As a result, as shown in FIG. 106(a), by rotating the outer reel unit 820 (or the inner reel unit 810) to a predetermined position, the spokes 822 (or the spokes 812c) can be arranged next to the opening 19881d. can. That is, the opening 19881d can be covered with the spokes 822 (or the spokes 812c) in a side view.

Thereby, it is possible to suppress the inflow of air from the opening 19812c when the inner reel unit 810 (or the outer reel unit 820) is rotated.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 106(b), by rotating the outer reel unit 820 (or inner reel unit 810) to a predetermined position, the spokes 822 (or spokes 812c) are arranged at circumferential positions different from the opening 19881d. be able to.

This allows air to flow in from the opening 19812c when the inner reel unit 810 (or the outer reel unit 820) is rotated. That is, by making the inflow path of air the shortest and reducing the air resistance, it is possible to make it easier for the air to flow into the decorative pattern display device 800 (accommodating unit 880).

Therefore, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated and other symbols decorated on the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 are visually recognized by the player, the inflow of air from the opening 19881 d is restricted so that the inner reel 811 can be seen. The display can be easily visually recognized by the player. On the other hand, when cleaning the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821, the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 are cleaned by allowing the intake air to flow in from the opening 19881d. can be done easily.

The present invention has been described above based on the above embodiments, but the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. can be easily guessed.

In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of another one or more embodiments.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the pair of left and right feather members 520L and 520R other than the bulging portions 524L and 524R are formed symmetrically, but the configuration is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the protrusions 523L and 523R of the blade members 520L and 520R may be formed on the rotating member 533 side so that the blade members 520L and 520R have the same shape. In this case, since the feather members 520L and 520R can be formed from the same parts, the production cost of the feather members 520L and 520R can be reduced by sharing the parts.

In the first embodiment, the case where the inclined portion 625a of the reflecting member 625 is formed on a smooth surface has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the inclined portion 625a may be curved so as to protrude toward the light transmission portion 621a. In this case, the light reflected by the inclined portion 625a can be easily dispersed, and the light can be uniformly incident on the rear surface of the light transmitting portion 621a. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light that is visually recognized through the light transmitting portion 621a can be made uniform.

In the above-described first and eleventh embodiments, as a mode in which the decorative member 752 is biased to one side, the number of components arranged is different, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one side and the other side (both sides of the decorative member) may have different rigidity (dimensions, materials, etc. of the constituent members), or the driving force transmitted between the one side and the other side (size, (transmission time, transmission timing, etc.) are different, the state of connection between components on one side and the other is different (for example, the number of connected parts, the amount of looseness of the connected parts, etc.), and the one side and the other side are different. The easiness of displacement to the other party (biasing force received from the biasing means, gravity, resistance during displacement (slide or rotation), etc.) may be different between the two, or a combination of these may be used.

As a result, when the support state is biased to one side by the rigidity of the constituent members, the drive means 680U and the drive means 680D shift their own high-rigidity side (low side) to the counterpart's low-rigidity side (high side). can face Therefore, when the opposing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are in contact with each other, the drive means 680U and the drive means 680D push (advance) the other on the side with high rigidity and move forward on the side with low rigidity. can form a state of accepting (retreating) the other party. As a result, the opposing sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

In the ninth embodiment, the case where the biasing spring displaces the first electric accessory 520 to the closed state has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by arranging a magnetic body inside the first electric accessory 520 and arranging a magnet on the front base 511 or the back base 512, the magnetic force of the magnet displaces the first electric accessory 520 to the closed state. It may be something that causes

In the above-described first and eleventh embodiments, the case in which the number of components provided is different as a mode in which the decorative member 752 is biased to one side has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, as a mode in which the first link member 684U and the second link member 686U (the second link member 686D and the first link member 684D) are configured differently from each other, the rigidity of the constituent members (the dimensions of the constituent members, the number of , materials, etc.), the state of connection between constituent members (for example, the number of connecting portions, the amount of looseness of the connecting portions, etc.) may be different, or a combination of these may be used. Due to these differences in configuration, the magnitude of the driving force to be transmitted and the timing of transmission are different, and the supporting modes of the driving means 680U and the driving means 680D are each biased to one side.

In the above-described first embodiment, the standing wall 532c1 is slidably formed inside the first case member 534, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 protrudes from the inside of the main body 531a, the standing wall 532c1 may protrude from the inside of the second prize winning opening 140 to the front side. In this case, it is possible to suppress the game ball from entering inside the second winning hole 140, so even if the feather members 520L and 520R are opened by fraud, the inside of the second winning hole 140 (upright It is possible to suppress the game ball from being stagnated in front of the wall 532c1. As a result, fraud by the player can be prevented.

In the twelfth and thirteenth embodiments, the game ball is guided in the front-rear direction by changing the shape of the side surface between the front base 511 and the rear base 512, but the present invention is not limited to this. .

For example, magnets may be arranged inside the front base 511 and the back base 512, and the game ball may be guided forward and backward by the attracting force of the magnets. Since this eliminates the need to narrow the space between the front base 511 and the rear base 512, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being sandwiched between the front base 511 and the rear base 512. In this case, it is preferable that the attracting force of the magnet is such that the game ball cannot be held on the attracting surface of the magnet. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being attracted to the side surfaces of the front base 511 and the rear base 512 .

In the above-described second and eighteenth embodiments, the hub 812a of the rotating member 18812 is provided with a plurality of projections 2812a1, 18812a1, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of recessed grooves may be formed in the side surface facing the edge 824 of the hub 812a. Also in this case, an airflow can be generated by the uneven shape of the grooves as in the second and eighteenth embodiments. As a result, air can be sent between the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 to clean the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 .

In the fifteenth embodiment, the case where the variable winning device 15065 is rotatably displaceable with respect to the game board 13 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the variable winning device 15065 can be slidably displaced in the front-rear direction with respect to the game board 13, and in the closed state, the variable winning device 15065 is immersed in the game board 13 and a game ball is inserted into the specific winning opening 65a. is disabled, and in the open state, the variable winning device 15065 projects to the front side of the game board 13 so that a game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall, so the game value as seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine due to separate handling of medals and balls.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Winning Port Unit 500 as an Example>
In a gaming machine comprising a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and a guide member having a guide surface for guiding the game ball to the ball entrance and formed to be displaceable, the guide member is a pair of protruding portions protruding from the guide surface and formed so as to contact a game ball rolling on the guide surface; A game machine A1 characterized in that the game machine A1 is arranged at different positions in a direction perpendicular to the guiding direction.

A game machine is known which has a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and a guide member which has a guide surface for guiding the game ball to the ball entrance and is formed to be displaceable. ing. Examples of the guide member include a pair of feather members having a guide surface that guides the game ball to the ball entrance, is disposed across the ball entrance, and is rotatably pivoted at the base end side. In this case, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-164598 discloses a technique in which a first groove is provided on the entire guide surface of one blade member and a second groove is provided on the entire guide surface of the other blade member. disclosed. According to this technique, since the first groove and the second groove are inclined in different directions, the game ball is simultaneously guided (rolled) on the guide surface of one blade member and the guide surface of the other blade member. Even when the game balls are moved, the game balls can be biased in different directions (one side is the glass plate side and the other side is the game board side). Therefore, each of these game balls can be smoothly entered into the ball entrance. However, the conventional technique described above has a problem that the game ball cannot be sufficiently biased. Also, a game ball entering from one side of the guide member may pass through the guide surface and pass through from the other side of the guide member. There was a problem that interest was lost.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, the guide member has a pair of protruding portions protruding from the guide surface and formed so as to be able to come into contact with the game ball rolling on the guide surface. Since the setting portions are arranged at different positions in a direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface, the game ball guided (rolled) on the guide surface is brought into contact with the projecting portion. By doing so, the game ball can be reliably biased. As a result, the ball can be smoothly entered into the entrance.

In addition, the pair of protruding portions are arranged at different positions in a direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface, so that the game ball entering from one side of the guide member is protruded. can be brought into contact with the part. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a game ball entering from one side of the guide member from passing through the guide member. As a result, the game ball is made to enter the ball entrance, and the interest of the player can be improved.

In the gaming machine A1, the guide member is formed as a pair of feather members arranged on both sides of the ball entrance and rotatably pivoted at the base end side, and the pair of feather members approach or separate at the tip end side. By rotating in the direction to allow the game ball to pass through, a closed state through which the game ball cannot pass or an open state through which the game ball can pass is formed. The projecting portion of one of the pair of feather members and the projecting portion of the other feather member are in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface. A game machine A2 characterized in that it is arranged in different positions.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effects of the game machine A1, the guide member is formed as a pair of feather members arranged on both sides of the ball entrance and rotatably supported at the proximal end side, and a pair of protrusions. The protruding portion protrudes from the guide surface of each of the pair of wing members, and the protruding portion of one wing member and the protruding portion of the other wing member of the pair of wing members extend along the guide surface. Since the game balls are arranged at different positions in the direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls are guided, the game balls guided (rolled) on the guide surfaces are brought into contact with the protruding portions, so that the game balls can be reliably moved. can be biased to As a result, it is possible to smoothly enter the ball into the ball entrance and to suppress ball clogging.

In addition, the projecting portion of one feather member and the projecting portion of the other feather member are orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface (the direction from the tip side to the base end side of the feather member). When a game ball entering the guide surface of one wing member reaches the guide surface of the other wing member, the game ball is moved to the other wing member. It can be brought into contact with the projecting portion. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a game ball that has entered the guide surface of one feather member from passing through the guide surface of the other feather member. As a result, the game ball is made to enter the ball entrance, and the interest of the player can be improved.

In the game machine A2, the projecting portion projects from the guide surface at a position closer to the base end side than the tip end side of the feather member.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects of the game machine A2, the protruding part protrudes from the guide surface at a position closer to the base end side than the tip end side of the wing member, so that it is guided by the guide surface. A rolling area can be secured before the game ball comes into contact with the protruding part. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the rolling speed of the game ball by that amount, so that the ball can enter the ball entrance smoothly.

In addition, since the protruding part protrudes from the protruding surface at a position closer to the base end side than the tip end side of the feather member, the course of the game ball that is biased by contacting the protruding part is changed to the ball entrance. It is possible to suppress returning to the course before the deviation until reaching the front of (end of the guide surface). In other words, the game ball can be easily thrown from the guide surface to the ball entrance while being biased.

In the game machine A2 or A3, the guide surface is formed with a first region that is continuous from the tip end side to the base end side of the feather member, and the game ball guided in the first region is not in contact. The projecting portion is formed with a size, and the first region of the guide surface of one blade member of the pair of blade members and the first region of the guide surface of the other blade member A game machine A4 characterized in that the game balls are arranged at different positions in a direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls are guided along the guide surface.

According to the game machine A4, in the game machine A2 or A3, the guide surface is formed with a first region that is continuous from the tip end side to the base end side of the wing member, and the game ball guided in the first region is unaffected. Since the protruding portion is formed with a size that allows contact, when the game ball that has entered the guide surface rolls in the first region, the rolling speed of the game ball can be prevented from decreasing, You can smoothly enter the ball into the entrance.

In this case, the first area of the guide surface of one of the pair of feather members and the first area of the guide surface of the other feather member are orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface. When the game balls are simultaneously guided (rolled) on the first area of the guide surface of one feather member and the first area of the guide surface of the other feather member, respectively However, the game balls can be biased in mutually different directions, and can be smoothly entered into the ball entrance.

Any one of the game machines A2 to A4, comprising a base member that rotatably supports the wing member, the base member comprising a restricting portion that contacts the wing member and restricts the rotation of the wing member, The game machine A5 is characterized in that the projecting portion of the feather member abuts against the regulating portion of the base member.

According to the game machine A5, any one of the game machines A2 to A4 includes a base member that rotatably supports the wing member, and the base member comes into contact with the wing member to regulate the rotation of the wing member. Since the regulating portion is provided and the projecting portion of the wing member abuts against the regulating portion of the base member, damage to the wing member can be suppressed. That is, since the projecting portion is a portion projecting from the wing member (guide surface), the portion of the wing member whose rigidity is relatively high can be used as a stopper for contacting the restricting portion of the base member. Damage to the feather member can be suppressed accordingly.

In the gaming machine A5, the projecting portion has a side surface that is substantially flush with the side surface of the base end of the feather member, and is substantially flush with the side surface of the base end of the feather member in the closed state. A gaming machine A6, wherein a side surface of the protruding portion to be formed is in contact with at least the restricting portion of the base member.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effects of the game machine A5, the side surface of the projecting portion is formed substantially flush with the side surface of the base end side of the wing member, and in the closed state, the side surface of the base end side of the wing member Since the side surface of the protruding portion formed substantially flush with the side surface of the base member abuts at least the restricting portion of the base member, the portion far from the rotation axis (side surface of the protruding portion) is the restricting portion of the base member. The reaction force input from the restricting portion to the blade member can be reduced by the amount that can be brought into contact with the blade member. Therefore, damage to the blade member can be suppressed. Further, for example, compared to the case where the protruding tip surface of the projecting portion is brought into contact with the restricting portion of the base member, the restricting portion of the base member can be separated from the ball entrance, and the flow to the ball entrance can be prevented. You can secure a space for the road. In addition to the side surface of the projecting portion, the proximal side surface of the feather member may also be brought into contact with the restricting portion of the base member. In this case, the contact pressure can be reduced, and damage to the blade member can be further suppressed.

In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A6, an intervening wall positioned between the opposing projecting portions in the closed state is provided, and the pair of feather members are configured so that the projecting portion is not formed when viewed in the rotation shaft direction. A gaming machine A7 characterized in that the facing interval of the guide surfaces in the area where the guide surface is positioned is set larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the facing interval of the projecting portion is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

Here, the pair of feather members are arranged at a position where the facing distance between the guide surfaces in the closed state is larger than the diameter of the game ball so as not to pinch the game ball. In this case, when the protruding portion is protruded from the guide surface, the pair of feather members are further spaced apart by the protruding height of the protruding portion so that the game ball is not caught between the protruding portions. As a result, the space required for arranging the pair of wing members increases.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A2 to A6, it is provided with an intervening wall positioned between the opposing protruding portions in the closed state, and the pair of feather members are connected to the rotating shaft. When viewed from the direction, the interval between the guide surfaces facing each other in the area where the projecting portion is not formed is made larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the interval between the projecting portions facing each other is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. The space required for arranging the pair of feather members can be suppressed.

That is, even if the pair of feather members begin to close (even if the transition to the closed state starts) in a state where the game ball is guided (rolled) on the guide surface, the intervening wall will remain between the opposed projecting portions. By positioning, the game ball can be ejected from between the projecting portions facing each other, and the game ball can be prevented from being caught between the projecting portions. A game ball ejected from between the opposing projecting portions by the intervening wall is positioned between the opposing guide surfaces in the area where the projecting portion is not formed. , the game ball is not caught. As a result, the distance between the projecting portions facing each other can be made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the space required for arranging the pair of feather members can be suppressed. In other words, the pair of feather members can be arranged in a space equivalent to the space required for arranging a conventional product that does not protrude from the guide surface.

In the game machine A7, in the open state, the upper surface of the intervening wall is positioned below the lower end of the guide surface in the direction of gravity and above the lower end of the ball entrance in the direction of gravity. Game machine A8.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effects of the game machine A7, in the open state, the upper surface of the intervening wall is positioned below the lower end of the guide surface in the direction of gravity and above the lower end of the ball entrance in the direction of gravity. Because of this position, a game ball guided by the guide surface can be thrown to the upper surface of the intervening wall, and can be made to enter the ball entrance by rolling the upper surface of the intervening wall.

In any one of the game machines A2 to A8, the timing at which one of the pair of feather members is arranged at the position forming the closed state and the other feather member is arranged at the position forming the closed state A gaming machine A9 characterized in that the timing to be played is different.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A2 to A8, the timing at which one of the pair of wing members is arranged at the position where the wing member forms the closed state and the other wing member Since the timing to be arranged at the position forming the closed state is different, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to be caught between the pair of feather members (guide surfaces), so that the opposing interval between the pair of feather members can be narrowed accordingly. Therefore, the space required for arranging the pair of feather members can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine A1, the guide member has a closed position in which the guide surface faces the ball entrance, thereby making it impossible for a game ball to enter the ball entrance, and a posture in which the guide surface faces upward. The guide surface of the guide member is formed to be rotatable between an open position and an open position that allows a game ball that projects toward the front side of the ball entrance and rolls on the guide surface to enter the ball entrance. The pair of projecting portions are formed to have a width equal to or greater than the width of the ball entrance, and the pair of projecting portions are disposed at positions sandwiching the ball entrance when viewed from the front. Also, the game machine A10 is arranged at different positions in a direction orthogonal to the width direction (the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface).

In the game machine A1, the guide member has a closed position in which the game ball is retracted below the ball entrance to prevent the game ball from entering the ball entrance, and a posture in which the guide surface is an upper surface. The guide surface of the guide member is slidably displaceable between an open position and an open position that allows game balls rolling on the guide surface to enter the ball entrance. The pair of protruding portions are formed to have a width equal to or larger than the width of the ball entry opening, and the pair of projecting portions are disposed at positions sandwiching the ball entry opening in a front view. , a gaming machine A11 characterized in that they are arranged at different positions in a direction perpendicular to the width direction (the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface).

According to the game machine A10 or A11, in addition to the effects of the game machine A1, the guide member has a guide surface with a width equal to or greater than the width of the ball entrance. The pair of protruding portions are arranged at positions across the ball entrance when viewed from the front, and are positioned in a direction orthogonal to the width direction (the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface). Since they are arranged differently, the game ball can be reliably biased by bringing the game ball guided (rolled) on the guide surface into contact with the projecting portion. As a result, the ball can be smoothly entered into the entrance.

In addition, one projecting portion and the other projecting portion are arranged at different positions in a direction orthogonal to the width direction of the guide member (the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface). When a game ball enters the guide surface of the guide member from one side (or the other side) in the width direction, the game ball can be brought into contact with either one of the pair of projecting portions. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a game ball that has entered the guide surface of the guide member from one side (or the other side) in the width direction from passing through the guide surface of the guide member and flowing out from the other side in the width direction of the guide surface of the guide member. As a result, the game ball is made to enter the ball entrance, and the interest of the player can be improved.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Winning Port Unit 500 as an Example>
A ball entrance into which a game ball can be entered, a pair of feather members arranged on both sides of the ball entrance, and driving means for applying a driving force to the pair of feather members to open or close them. Then, when the pair of feather members are opened by the driving force of the driving means, they are arranged in the allowable position for permitting entry of the game ball into the ball entrance, and the driving force of the driving means causes the pair of feather members to a regulating means arranged at a regulating position for regulating entry of a game ball into the ball entrance when the wing members are closed, wherein the pair of wing members is closed or the pair of wing members is closed; A gaming machine B1 characterized in that the regulating means is formed so as to be able to be maintained at the regulating position in a state in which the wing members are released from the outside.

Here, a ball entrance formed so that a game ball can be entered, a pair of feather members disposed on both sides of the ball entrance, and a driving force applied to the pair of feather members to open or close. When the pair of wing members are opened by the driving force of the driving means, they are arranged at the allowable position for allowing the entry of the game ball into the ball entrance, and the driving force of the driving means causes the pair of wing members to be opened. A gaming machine is known that includes a restricting means arranged at a restricting position for restricting entry of a game ball into a ball entrance when the member is closed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-172833).

According to this gaming machine, when the pair of feather members are released by the driving force of the driving means, the restricting means is arranged at the allowable position, so that the game ball that has passed between the pair of feather members is inserted into the entrance. You can enter the ball. On the other hand, when the pair of feather members are closed by the driving force of the driving means, the restricting means is placed at the restricting position, so that when the pair of feather members are forcibly opened from the outside, the game ball enters the ball entrance. You can regulate what is entered.

However, in the conventional game machine described above, since the displacement of the restricting means is not restricted, the restricting means can be displaced from the restricted position to the allowable position after forcibly releasing the pair of feather members from the outside. Therefore, there is a problem that the effect of regulating illegal entry of game balls into the ball entrance is insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, the arrangement of the regulating means can be maintained at the regulating position when the pair of wing members are closed or when the pair of wing members are opened from the outside. Displacement of the means to the permissible position can be suppressed. Therefore, illegal entry of game balls into the ball entrance can be easily regulated.

It should be noted that the restriction position for restricting the entry of the game ball into the entrance means that it is sufficient if the game ball is stopped at a predetermined position. That is, in the case of providing a ball entrance and a passage through which a game ball flowing in from the ball entrance passes, the regulating position (the position where the game ball is stopped) by the regulating means is positioned closer to the ball entrance than the ball entrance. It may be upstream or downstream of the ball entrance (that is, in the middle of the path flowing in from the ball entrance and passing through the passage). In the latter case, the regulating position by the regulating means may be upstream of the detecting means (detection sensor) disposed in the middle of the passage for detecting the passage of the game ball. It may be downstream of.

The game machine B1 includes a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the pair of blade members, and the transmission mechanism is slidably displaced between an open slide position and a closed slide position by the driving force of the driving means. and the slide transmission member is rotated to the open rotational position by sliding displacement to the open slide position to open the pair of blade members, and is closed by sliding displacement to the closed slide position of the slide transmission member. a rotation transmission member that is rotated to a rotation position to close the pair of blade members; the regulation means is disposed on the slide transmission member; When the means is placed at the allowable position and the slide transmission member is slidably displaced to the closed slide position, the regulating means is placed at the regulated position, and with the slide transmission member placed at the closed slide position, the When the rotation transmission member is arranged at the open rotation position, the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member are engaged to restrict the slide displacement of the slide transmission member to the open slide position. Gaming machine B2.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1, when the rotation transmission member is arranged at the open rotation position while the slide transmission member is arranged at the closed slide position, the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member are arranged. Since the slide displacement of the slide transmission member to the open slide position is regulated by the engagement of , it is possible to easily regulate that the game ball is illegally entered into the ball entrance.

That is, when the closed pair of feather members are illegally opened from the outside, the rotation transmission member is rotated to the open rotation position while the slide transmission member is arranged at the closed slide position. In this state, the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member are engaged to restrict the slide displacement of the slide transmission member to the open slide position. It is possible to suppress illegal forced displacement to the position from the outside). As a result, even if the pair of feather members are forcibly released from the outside and the game ball is passed through between the pair of feather members, the entry of the game ball into the ball entrance is restricted by the restricting means. can.

In the game machine B2, one of the slide transmission member and the rotation transmission member has a sliding groove extending therefrom and a sliding projection projecting from the other, and the sliding projection slides along the sliding groove. As a result, the slide displacement of the slide transmission member is transmitted to rotate the rotation transmission member, and the slide projection is engaged with the inner wall surface of the slide groove, thereby releasing the slide transmission member. A gaming machine B3 characterized in that sliding displacement to a sliding position is regulated.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effects of the game machine B2, one of the slide transmission member and the rotation transmission member is extended with a sliding groove and the other is provided with a sliding projection, and the sliding projection slides. By sliding along the drive groove, the slide displacement of the slide transmission member is transmitted to rotate the rotation transmission member. Since the sliding displacement of the member to the open slide position is restricted, it is possible to make it difficult to release the restriction while achieving a size reduction.

That is, means for restricting the slide displacement of the slide transmission member to the open slide position can be formed by utilizing the slide groove and the slide protrusion for transmitting the slide displacement of the slide transmission member to the rotation transmission member to rotate it. Since it is not necessary to separately provide such means at another location, it is possible to reduce the size accordingly. In addition, by adopting a structure in which the sliding projection is engaged with the inner wall surface of the sliding groove, unauthorized access to the engaging portion from the outside can be made difficult, and the regulation (engagement) can be canceled accordingly. It can be difficult.

The game machine B1 includes a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the pair of blade members, and the transmission mechanism is slidably displaced between an open slide position and a closed slide position by the driving force of the driving means. and the slide transmission member is rotated to the open rotational position by sliding displacement to the open slide position to open the pair of blade members, and is closed by sliding displacement to the closed slide position of the slide transmission member. a rotation transmission member that can be rotated to a rotation position to at least close the pair of blade members, wherein the restricting means is disposed on the rotation transmission member, and when the rotation transmission member is rotated to the open rotation position; When the regulating means is placed at the allowable position and the rotation transmission member is rotated to the closed rotation position, the regulating means is placed at the regulating position, and the slide transmission member is placed at the closed slide position and the rotation. In a state in which the transmission member is arranged at the closed rotation position, the rotation transmission member is engaged with the slide transmission member, thereby restricting rotation of the rotation transmission member to the open rotation position. Game machine B4 to play.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1, when the slide transmission member is arranged at the closed slide position and the rotation transmission member is arranged at the closed rotation position, the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member By being engaged, the rotation of the rotation transmission member to the open rotation position is restricted, so that illegal entrance of the game ball into the entrance can be easily restricted.

That is, from a state in which the pair of blade members are closed, for example, the pair of blade members are illegally forcibly opened from the outside, or the rotation transmission member is directly operated to rotate the rotation transmission member to the open position. Even if the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member are engaged with each other, the rotation of the rotation transmission member to the open rotation position is restricted. can be suppressed from being illegally forcibly displaced from the outside to the allowable position). As a result, the restricting means can restrict illegal entry of the game ball into the ball entrance.

In the gaming machine B4, a projecting portion projecting from one of the slide transmission member and the rotation transmission member, and an engaging portion formed on the other of the slide transmission member and the rotation transmission member so as to be able to engage with the projection. A gaming machine B5, wherein the protrusion protrudes along the direction of slide displacement of the slide transmission member.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects of the game machine B4, the projecting portion projecting from one of the slide transmission member and the rotation transmission member and the other of the slide transmission member and the rotation transmission member are engaged with the projection portion. and the protrusion protrudes along the direction of the slide displacement of the slide transmission member. and disengagement thereof can be switched, and the structure can be simplified.

The engaging portion may be a surface (the other outer surface of the slide transmission member or the rotation transmission member) with which the projection can come into contact, or a hole or recess (the slide transmission member or the rotation transmission member) into which the projection can be inserted. It may be a hole drilled in one of the members or a recess formed in one of the members. That is, it is sufficient that the rotation of the rotation transmission member to the open rotation position can be restricted by the contact of the protrusion with the engagement portion. In this case, it is preferable that the engagement portion be a hole or a recess. Since the projection is inserted into the engaging portion, the space required for arranging the projection can be reduced, and the size can be reduced. This is because it can be shielded from the outside and can make it difficult to illegally access such a protrusion from the outside.

In the game machine B4 or B5, the rotation transmission member includes an opening side contact portion that contacts and opens the pair of feather members when rotated toward the open rotation position, and a contact portion that rotates toward the closed rotation position. A game machine B6 characterized by comprising a closing side abutting portion that abuts against and closes the pair of feather members when the game machine B6 is closed.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects of the game machine B4 or B5, the rotation transmission member includes an open side contact portion that contacts and opens the pair of feather members when rotated toward the open rotation position. and a closing side abutting portion that abuts and closes the pair of blade members when rotated toward the closing rotation position, so that the pair of blade members can be prevented from being illegally forced open from the outside, Unauthorized access from the outside to the rotation transmission member or the slide transmission member can be made difficult.

That is, when the wing member is displaced from the outside in the direction of forced opening, the closing-side abutment portion of the rotation transmission member is pressed by the wing member, and the rotation transmission member tends to rotate toward the open rotation position. In this case, according to the present invention, the rotation of the rotation transmission member to the open rotation position can be restricted by the engagement between the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member. It can be regulated by the department. That is, it is possible to restrict the wing member from being displaced from the outside in the direction of forced opening. As a result, it is possible to prevent the pair of feather members from being illegally forcibly released from the outside, making it difficult to illegally access the rotation transmission member or the slide transmission member from the outside.

In game machine B4 or B5, biasing means for biasing the pair of blade members in the closing direction is provided, and the rotation transmission member contacts the pair of blade members when rotated toward the open rotation position. a game machine characterized by comprising an opening-side abutting portion for opening by pressing, wherein when the rotation transmission member is rotated toward the closing rotation position, the pair of feather members are closed by the biasing force of the biasing means. B7.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effects of the game machine B4 or B5, it is provided with biasing means for biasing the pair of feather members in the closing direction, and when the rotation transmission member is rotated toward the open rotation position is provided with an opening-side abutting portion for contacting and opening the pair of blade members, and when the rotation transmission member is rotated toward the closed rotation position, the pair of blade members are closed by the biasing force of the biasing means, When the pair of blade members are illegally forcibly released from the outside, the pair of blade members do not come into contact with the rotation transmission member, and the external force due to such forced release can be avoided from acting on the rotation transmission member. As a result, it is possible to suppress damage to the pair of blade members, the rotation transmission member, or the slide transmission member.

Examples of the urging means include a spring (torsion spring or coil spring) that urges the pair of wing members in the closing direction with an elastic recovery force, and a magnet that urges the pair of wing members in the closing direction with an attractive force. be done.

Any one of the game machines B1 to B7 is provided with detection means for detecting a game ball entered into the ball entrance, and the regulation position of the regulation means is located downstream of the detection means. A gaming machine B8 characterized by regulating a game ball at a position detectable by a detecting means.

According to the game machine B8, any one of the game machines B1 to B7 is provided with a detection means for detecting a game ball entered into the ball entrance, and the regulation position of the regulation means is downstream of the detection means. At the same time, since the game ball is regulated at a position where it can be detected by the detection means, for example, when the wing member is forcibly opened and the game ball illegally flows in from the ball entrance, the detection means detects the game ball. The state can be continued. Therefore, by judging whether or not the detection by the detection means has continued beyond a predetermined time, it is possible to detect that game balls have entered illegally.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Decorative Design Display Device 800 as an Example>
In a gaming machine comprising a rotatably formed first reel and a rotatably formed second reel disposed substantially concentrically inside the first reel, the first reel is a cylindrical reel. and a first side wall projecting radially inward from one axial side of the first outer peripheral wall. The second reel is cylindrically shaped and has an outer surface a second outer peripheral wall facing the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall at a predetermined interval, and projecting radially inward from one side in the axial direction of the second outer peripheral wall, the outer surface of which is the inner surface of the first side wall and a second side wall facing each other at a predetermined interval, and a standing portion is erected from at least one of the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall to the other side. Machine C1.

Here, a rotatably formed first reel and a second reel disposed substantially concentrically inside the first reel and rotatably formed are provided (that is, a double reel structure is employed). ) is known (for example, JP-A-2003-230693). Also known is a technique for removing and cleaning dust adhering to the display surface of the reel by bringing a rotating brush into contact with the outer peripheral surface (display surface) of the reel and causing the rotating member to follow the rotation of the reel. (for example, JP-A-2009-28241).

However, the double reel structure has the problem of being difficult to clean. That is, in the double reel structure, a space for disposing the above-mentioned rotating brush cannot be secured between the outer reel (first reel) and the inner reel (second reel). And the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel (second reel) cannot be cleaned.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the first reel has a first outer peripheral wall formed in a cylindrical shape and a first side wall projecting radially inward from one side of the first outer peripheral wall in the axial direction. a second outer peripheral wall formed in a cylindrical shape, the outer surface of which faces the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall at a predetermined interval; and a second side wall projecting inward and having an outer surface opposed to the inner surface of the first side wall at a predetermined interval, and extending from at least one of the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall to the other. Since the standing portion is erected, wind pressure is generated by displacing the standing portion in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall. Air can flow between the inner surface of the outer peripheral wall and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral wall. As a result, dust can be removed by air flow, and the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral wall can be cleaned. That is, the double reel structure can be easily cleaned.

In the game machine C1, the game machine C2 is characterized in that the first side wall and the second side wall are formed in an annular shape when viewed in the axial direction and have surfaces that are continuous in the circumferential direction.

Here, when at least one of the first side wall and the second side wall has an opening or is partially divided in the circumferential direction, the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall may be separated from each other. The wind pressure generated by the displacement of the standing portion in the circumferential direction escapes through the openings and the divided portions, weakening the wind pressure and correspondingly increasing the pressure between the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral wall. It becomes difficult to move the air between them.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C2, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1, the first side wall and the second side wall are formed in an annular shape when viewed in the axial direction and have surfaces that are continuous in the circumferential direction. , the wind pressure generated by displacing the standing portion in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall can be increased. Therefore, the air between the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral wall can be made to flow more easily. As a result, the inner surface of the first outer wall and the outer surface of the second outer wall are separated from each other by utilizing the wind pressure generated by the displacement of the standing portion in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the first outer wall and the outer surface of the second outer wall. The air between the outer surface can be easily made to flow.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the first reel is rotatably pivoted at its center and includes a first support wall that supports the first side wall, and the second reel is rotatably pivoted at its center. A gaming machine C3 comprising a second supporting wall that supports and supports the second side wall, wherein an opening is formed in at least one of the first supporting wall and the second supporting wall.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1 or C2, an opening is formed in at least one of the supporting wall that supports the first side wall or the second supporting wall that supports the second side wall. Through the opening, the air between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall is exhausted to the outside, or the air is introduced from the outside to between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall. can inhale. That is, the air flow resistance is reduced, and the air between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall can be made to flow (outflow or inflow) more easily. As a result, the inner surface of the first outer wall and the outer surface of the second outer wall are separated from each other by utilizing the wind pressure generated by the displacement of the standing portion in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the first outer wall and the outer surface of the second outer wall. The air between the outer surface can be easily made to flow.

In the gaming machine C3, when the standing portion is erected on the first side wall or the second side wall of one of the first reel or the second reel, the other of the first reel or the second reel A gaming machine C4 characterized in that at least the opening is formed in the first support wall or the second support wall.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C3, when the standing portion is erected on the first side wall or the second side wall of one of the first reel or the second reel, the first reel or the second reel Since the opening is formed at least in the other first support wall or the second support wall of the second reel, the effect of reducing the flow resistance by exhausting or sucking air through the opening can be easily exhibited. . That is, when one of the first reel and the second reel on which the erected portion is erected is rotated, the other reel on which the opening is formed is stopped, so that the air flow through the opening is stopped. Flow (exhaust or intake) resistance can be reduced.

In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the gaming machine is characterized in that the standing portions are erected on the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall at different positions in the radial direction. C5.

In the gaming machine C5, in any one of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the standing portions are erected on the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall at different positions in the radial direction. Alternatively, even when either of the second reels is rotated, wind pressure can be generated by circumferentially displacing the standing portion between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of cleaning the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral wall in the performance caused by the rotation of the first reel or the second reel.

In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, at least a part of the first outer peripheral wall of the first reel is formed to have a light transmissive property, and a plurality of symbols are formed on the second outer peripheral wall of the second reel. A gaming machine C6 characterized by being arranged along the circumferential direction and having the erected portion erected on the second side wall of the second reel.

According to the gaming machine C6, in any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, at least a part of the first outer peripheral wall of the first reel is formed to have light transmittance, and the second outer peripheral wall of the second reel is formed. Since a plurality of symbols are arranged in the circumferential direction, the player can visually recognize the variation of the symbols accompanying the rotation of the second reel through the first reel. In this case, the erected portion is erected on the second side wall of the second reel, that is, the erected portion is erected on the second side wall of the second reel that rotates more times than the first reel. , the chances of cleaning the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral wall can be increased in the performance by the rotation of the first reel or the second reel.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Segment Display Device 600 as an Example>
A substrate on which a plurality of light-emitting means are mounted, and a transparent member that transmits light emitted from the light-emitting means, the transparent member is formed in a curved shape, and the plurality of light-emitting means are connected to the transparent member. A gaming machine D1, wherein the plurality of light emitting means are arranged at approximately equal intervals in the circumferential direction in the gaming machine arranged along the curve.

Here, a substrate on which a plurality of light emitting means are mounted and a transmitting member that transmits light emitted from the light emitting means are provided, and the transmitting member is formed in a curved shape, and the plurality of light emitting means are formed by bending the transmitting member. A game machine arranged along is known (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2013-106672). In this case, the plurality of light emitting means are arranged at regular intervals when the transmissive member is viewed from the front. That is, they are equally spaced along the direction of a line segment (chord) connecting both ends of a curved line (arc) formed by a plurality of light emitting means. However, in the game machine described above, since the distance between adjacent light emitting means is narrow in some of the plurality of light emitting means, there is a problem that the distribution of heat emitted by the light emitting means is uneven. As a result, heat tends to concentrate on a part of the light emitting means, which tends to shorten the life of the light emitting means.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, since a plurality of light emitting means are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction, the distance between each light emitting means and the adjacent light emitting means can be made constant, and the heat emitted by the light emitting means can be distributed. can be equalized. As a result, it is possible to prevent heat from concentrating on a part of the light emitting means, and to extend the life of each light emitting means.

The game machine D1 includes a reflecting member that reflects the light emitted from the light emitting means toward the transmitting member, and the reflecting member includes a plurality of division surfaces that are divided corresponding to the plurality of light emitting means. , the game machine D2, wherein the division widths of the transparent members of the plurality of division surfaces are set to be substantially the same when viewed from the front.

Here, when a plurality of light emitting means are arranged at equal intervals (that is, at equal intervals in the circumferential direction) along the curvature of the transmissive member, the plurality of light emitting means are arranged at unequal intervals when the transmissive member is viewed from the front. The Rukoto. That is, when the transmissive member is viewed from the front, an area where the distance between the light emitting means is narrow and an area where the distance between the light emitting means is wide are formed. Therefore, the distribution of the amount of light becomes non-uniform along the direction in which the plurality of light emitting means are arranged.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, it has a reflecting member for reflecting the light emitted from the light emitting means toward the transmitting member, and the reflecting member corresponds to a plurality of light emitting means. Since a plurality of demarcation planes are provided, and the demarcation widths of the plurality of demarcation planes in the front view of the transparent member are set to be substantially the same, the light amount of each demarcation plane visually recognized in the front view of the transmission member is approximately can be the same. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light along the arrangement direction of the plurality of light emitting means can be made uniform.

The game machine D3 is characterized in that, in the game machine D2, the light emitting surface of the light emitting means is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effects of the game machine D2, the light emitting surface of the light emitting means is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front. Since diffusibility can be ensured (light can be emitted at a wider angle), the distribution of the amount of light can be made uniform in one section plane.

In addition, the light emitting surface means the front surface of the encapsulating resin that encloses the LED chip. Therefore, the light-emitting surface having a rectangular shape in front view means that the shape of the encapsulating resin (the shape of the internal space of the reflector surrounding the encapsulating resin in front view) is rectangular.

In the game machine D3, at least some of the plurality of light emitting means are arranged such that one side of the light emitting surface is arranged along a tangential direction of the curved shape of the transmission member.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D3, at least some of the plurality of light emitting means are arranged so that one side of the light emitting surface is oriented along the tangential direction of the curved shape of the transmissive member. The light emitted from the light emitting means can be easily diffused uniformly along the curvature of the transmissive member. As a result, it is possible to uniformize the distribution of the amount of light transmitted through the transmissive member and visually recognized.

In any one of the game machines D2 to D4, the partition surface is formed as a curved surface facing the rear surface of the transparent member and recessed on the side away from the rear surface of the transparent member, and the light emitting surface of the light emitting means is arranged to face the transparent member. The game machine D5 is characterized in that it faces the space between the member and the division surface.

According to the game machine D5, in any one of the game machines D2 to D4, the partition surface is formed as a curved surface that faces the rear surface of the transparent member and is recessed on the side away from the rear surface of the transparent member, and the light emitting surface of the light emitting means faces the space between the transmissive member and the partition plane, the substrate can be arranged in a posture orthogonal to the transmissive member. That is, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in arranging the unit composed of the transmissive member, the substrate and the reflective member. In this case, since the demarcation plane is arranged in such a manner as to surround the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the light emitting means in a direction perpendicular to the traveling direction of the light, the light reflected by the demarcation plane is directed to the back surface of the transmissive member. The light can be incident uniformly. As a result, it is possible to uniformize the distribution of the amount of light transmitted through the transmissive member and visually recognized.

In the gaming machine D5, the reflecting member has a connecting surface that is connected to the partition surface and faces the light emitting surface of the light emitting means, and the connecting surface projects toward the light emitting surface of the light emitting means. A game machine D6 characterized in that it is formed as a curved surface that becomes

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D5, the reflecting member has a continuous surface that is connected to the partition surface and faces the light emitting surface of the light emitting means. Since it is formed as a curved surface that is convex toward the light emitting surface of , the light reflected by the continuous surface can be uniformly incident on the rear surface of the transmissive member. As a result, it is possible to uniformize the distribution of the amount of light transmitted through the transmissive member and visually recognized.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Segment Display Device 600 as an Example>
a plurality of rotatably formed drums arranged side by side at predetermined intervals; and a decorative member disposed along between the plurality of drums and at least a portion of which is light-transmitting. a substrate disposed on the rear side of the decorative member and on which a plurality of light emitting means are mounted, wherein the substrate is arranged with the surface on which the light emitting means are mounted being substantially orthogonal to the rear surface of the decorative member; The game machine E1 is provided with a reflecting member for reflecting the light emitted from the light emitting means to the back surface of the decorative member.

Here, a plurality of rotating drums are formed rotatably and are arranged side by side at predetermined intervals; A decorative member and a substrate on which a plurality of light-emitting means are mounted are provided on the back side of the decorative member, and the substrate is arranged so that the surface on which the light-emitting means is mounted is substantially perpendicular to the back surface of the decorative member. A game machine provided with a game machine is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-5927). According to this gaming machine, the decorative member not only shields the space between the spinning drums from the player, but also forms (displays) a pattern on the surface of the decorative member by the light emitted by the light-emitting means transmitted through the decorative member. An effect can be performed in which the pattern of the decorative member is visually recognized by the player integrally with the pattern displayed on the outer peripheral surface of the spinning drum.

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the board is arranged so that the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is orthogonal to the back surface of the decorative member, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means is sufficiently transmitted to the back surface of the decorative member. Therefore, the pattern formed (displayed) by the light from the light emitting means cannot be made sufficiently large. Therefore, there is a problem that the performance effect is insufficient. On the other hand, if the pattern formed (displayed) by the light from the light-emitting means is kept small and the decorative member (area excluding the pattern) is enlarged, the sense of unity between the decorative member and the reel is impaired.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E1, since the reflecting member for reflecting the light emitted from the light emitting means to the back surface of the decorative member is provided, the posture in which the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is perpendicular to the back surface of the decorative member is adopted. Even in the case where the substrate is provided, it is possible to widen the irradiation range of the back surface of the decorative member with the light emitted from the light emitting means. Therefore, the pattern formed (displayed) by the light from the light emitting means can be enlarged accordingly, and the presentation effect can be enhanced. In addition, since the pattern formed (displayed) by the light from the light emitting means can be made larger, the area excluding the pattern can be made smaller, so that the decorative member and the reel can be united.

In the gaming machine E1, the decorative member is located on the front side of the outer peripheral surface of the spinning drum, and is formed by extending an outer edge to a position overlapping the outer peripheral surface of the spinning drum in a front view. Characterized game machine E2.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, the decorative member is positioned closer to the front than the outer peripheral surface of the spinning drum, and the outer edge extends to a position overlapping the outer peripheral surface of the spinning drum in a front view. Since it is formed to protrude, the axial end surface of the spinning drum can be easily shielded from the player (difficult to be visually recognized). In addition, since the design of the decorative member formed (displayed) by the light emitted from the light emitting means and the design displayed on the outer peripheral surface of the spinning drum can be brought closer, the decorative member and the spinning drum can be brought closer together. You can easily create a feeling.

In the game machine E2, the reflecting member connects the surface of the substrate on which the light emitting means is mounted and the back surface of the decorative member, so that the region of the substrate on which the light emitting means is mounted and the design of the decorative member are aligned. A gaming machine E3, wherein the rear surface of the reflecting member is inclined in a direction away from the axial end surface of the spinning drum as it goes from the decorative member toward the substrate.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2, the reflecting member connects the surface of the substrate on which the light emitting means is mounted and the back surface of the decorative member, thereby reducing the area of the substrate on which the light emitting means is mounted. and the region of the decorative member where the pattern is formed, and the back surface of the reflective member is inclined in a direction away from the axial end face of the drum as it goes from the decorative member toward the substrate, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means While ensuring the size of the pattern formed (displayed) by, the back surface of the decorative member is brought close to the outer peripheral surface of the drum, and the drum is inserted deep into the back surface of the decorative member (the drum is placed on the substrate can be brought close to). As a result, the axial end face of the spinning drum can be easily shielded from the player (difficult to be visually recognized), and a sense of unity between the decorative member and the spinning drum can be easily formed.

A gaming machine E4 in which the light emitting means are mounted on both one side and the other side of the board in the gaming machine E2 or E3.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effects of the game machine E2 or E3, since the light emitting means are mounted on both one side and the other side of the board, the light emission mounted on one side is Different patterns can be independently formed (displayed) on the decorative member by the light emitted from the means and the light emitted from the light emitting means mounted on the other side.

In this case, the number of substrates arranged between the drums arranged side by side can be reduced to one. Therefore, the space required for arranging the substrate can be reduced, so that the spinning drum can be inserted into the rear side of the back surface of the decorative member (bringing the spinning drum closer to the substrate). As a result, the axial end face of the spinning drum can be easily shielded from the player (difficult to be visually recognized), and a sense of unity between the decorative member and the spinning drum can be easily formed.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Segment Display Device 600 as an Example>
A game machine comprising a first displacement member and a second displacement member which are arranged oppositely and displaceable in directions of approaching or separating, respectively, and displaceable in the same direction with the opposing sides in contact with each other. a base member; and a first support mechanism and a second support mechanism that displaceably support the first displacement member and the second displacement member on the base member, respectively; The second displacement that is biased to one side of the opposing side of the first displacement member and is on the side opposite to the other side of the opposing side of the second displacement member that is in contact with one side of the opposing side of the first displacement member. A game machine F1 characterized in that the support mode of the second support mechanism is biased to one side of the opposed side of the member.

Here, a first displacement member and a second displacement member are provided so as to be opposed to each other and displaceable in directions of approaching or separating, respectively, and displaceable in the same direction with the opposing sides in contact with each other. A game machine with a game machine is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-106844). According to such a game machine, by bringing the first displacement member and the second displacement member close to the position where the opposing sides abut against each other, an object (for example, , a liquid crystal display device and a production member), and by displacing the first displacement member and the second displacement member in a direction away from each other, the shielding is released along with the displacement, and the object can be viewed. You can perform a production to do. Further, by displacing the first displacement member and the second displacement member in the same direction (for example, reciprocating displacement in one direction and the other direction) while the opposing sides are in contact with each other, the shielding of the target is maintained. , it is also possible to perform an effect before the shielding is released (an effect to focus on the action of releasing the shielding).

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, it is difficult to bring the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member into close contact due to dimensional tolerances and assembly tolerances of the constituent members. There is a problem that a gap may be formed in the If a gap is formed between the opposing sides, the player can visually recognize the object on the back side through the gap, and the presentation effect is hindered.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F1, the base member is provided with a first support mechanism and a second support mechanism that displaceably support the first displacement member and the second displacement member, respectively. The support mode of the mechanism is biased to one side of the opposing side of the first displacement member, and is opposite to the other side of the opposing side of the second displacement member that abuts on one side of the opposing side of the first displacement member. Since the support mode of the second support mechanism is biased toward one side of the opposing side of the second displacement member, when the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other, the first support mechanism The support mode and the support mode of the second support mechanism can be biased to opposite sides (sides rotated by 180° around the center of one side and the other side of the opposing sides). As a result, the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

Here, as a mode in which the support state is biased to one side, for example, one side and the other side have different rigidity of the constituent members (the dimensions of the constituent members, the number of arranged members, the material, etc.), and the one side and the other side have different rigidity. The driving force transmitted between the two sides (e.g., magnitude, transmission time, transmission timing, etc.) is different, and the state of connection between components on one side and the other (e.g., the number of connecting parts, the number of connecting parts, etc.) The amount of slamming, etc.) differs between one side and the other, and the easiness of displacement to the other side (biasing force received from biasing means, gravity, resistance during displacement (slide or rotation), etc.) is different. , a combination thereof, and the like.

Therefore, when the support state is biased to one side due to the rigidity of the constituent members, the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism align their own higher rigidity side (lower side) with the opponent's lower rigidity side (higher side). ). Therefore, when the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other, each of the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism pushes (advances) the other on the high-rigidity side, On the side with low rigidity, it is possible to form a state of accepting (retreating) the opponent. As a result, the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine F1, the first support mechanism includes first driving means for generating driving force, a pair of first connecting members for connecting the first displacement member to the base member, and the pair of first connecting members. a first one-side transmission member and a first other-side transmission member configured differently from each other for respectively transmitting the driving force of the first driving means to the second support mechanism; 2 driving means, a pair of second connecting members for connecting the second displacement member to the base member, and a configuration different from each other while transmitting the driving force of the second driving means to the pair of second connecting members, respectively. A game machine F2 characterized by comprising a second one-side transmission member and a second other-side transmission member.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effects of the game machine F1, the first support mechanism includes the first driving means for generating the driving force, and the pair of first connecting members for connecting the first displacement member to the base member. , a first one-side transmission member and a first other-side transmission member that transmit the driving force of the first driving means to the pair of first connecting members, respectively, and have different structures, the second support mechanism is a second driving means for generating a driving force; a pair of second connecting members for connecting the second displacement member to the base member; Since the second one-side transmission member and the second other-side transmission member having different configurations are provided, the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and a gap can be formed between the opposing sides. It can be suppressed from being formed.

That is, in a state where the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other, the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism each have, for example, a large driving force side and a driving force transmission timing. A state can be formed in which the forward side pushes the opponent (advance), and the side where the driving force is smaller or the driving force transmission timing is later receives the opponent (retreats). As a result, the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

Here, as a mode in which the first one-side transmission member and the first other-side transmission means (the second one-side transmission member and the second other-side transmission means) are configured differently from each other, for example, the rigidity of the constituent members (configuration Examples include those with different member dimensions, number of arrangements, materials, etc.), those with different connection states between constituent members (e.g., the number of connecting parts, the amount of looseness at the connecting parts, etc.), and those with a combination of these. be done. That is, the magnitude of the driving force to be transmitted and the transmission timing are different due to the difference in configuration, and the support modes of the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism are each biased to one side.

In the game machine F2, the first connecting member and the second connecting member are formed to have substantially the same length, one end side is connected to the first displacement member or the second displacement member, and the other end side is the base member. A gaming machine F3 characterized by being coaxially and rotatably supported on the same axis.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effects of the game machine F2, the first connecting member and the second connecting member are formed to have substantially the same length, and one end side is the first displacement member or the second displacement member. Since the first displacement member and the second displacement member are connected to the member and the other end side is coaxially rotatably supported by the base member, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are caused to reciprocate in the same direction while their opposing sides are in contact with each other. In fact, even when the bias of the support mode is used, it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the opposing sides are in contact with each other.

In the game machine F3, at least one of the first connecting member and the second connecting member is provided with an elastic body formed of a rubber-like elastic material, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are arranged on opposite sides. a gaming machine F4, wherein the elastic body is interposed between the first connecting member and the second connecting member in an elastically compressed state when the two are in contact with each other.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects of the game machine F3, at least one of the first connecting member and the second connecting member is provided with an elastic body formed of a rubber-like elastic material, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other, the elastic body is interposed between the first connecting member and the second connecting member in an elastically compressed state. When the second displacement member is caused to reciprocate in the same direction while the opposing sides are in contact with each other, it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the opposing sides are in contact with each other even when the bias of the support mode is used.

In any one of the game machines F1 to F4, the first support mechanism includes first driving means for generating a driving force, and is driven by the first driving means and connects the first displacement member to the base member. The second support mechanism includes a pair of first connecting members, and a first one-side biasing member and a first other-side biasing member that apply different biasing forces to the pair of first connecting members, respectively. a second driving means for generating a force; a pair of second connecting members driven by the second driving means and connecting the second displacement member to the base member; A game machine F5 comprising a second one-side biasing member and a second other-side biasing member that apply a biasing force.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the first support mechanism includes the first driving means for generating the driving force, and the first driving means driven by the first driving means. a pair of first connecting members for connecting the displacement member to the base member, and a first one-side biasing member and a first other-side biasing member for applying different biasing forces to the pair of first connecting members, The second support mechanism includes second driving means for generating a driving force, a pair of second connecting members driven by the second driving means and connecting the second displacement member to the base member, and a pair of second Since the second one-side biasing member and the second other-side biasing member that apply different biasing forces to the two connecting members are provided, the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, It is possible to suppress the formation of gaps between the opposing sides.

That is, in a state in which the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other, each of the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism pushes (moves forward) the other on the side where the biasing force is large, for example. ), the side with a smaller biasing force can form a state of accepting (retreating) the opponent. As a result, the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

The first one-side biasing member and the first other-side biasing member may have the same configuration. That is, the biasing forces applied to the pair of first connecting members may be different by different positions at which the biasing forces are applied or by different amounts of elastic deformation. The same applies to the second one-side biasing member and the second other-side biasing member.

In any one of the game machines F1 to F4, the first support mechanism includes first driving means for generating a driving force, and is driven by the first driving means and connects the first displacement member to the base member. The second support mechanism includes a pair of first connecting members and a first biasing member that applies a biasing force to one of the pair of first connecting members. a pair of second connecting members that are driven by the second driving means and connect the second displacement member to the base member; 2. A game machine F6, characterized by comprising 2 urging members.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines F1 to F4, the first support mechanism includes the first driving means for generating the driving force, and the first driving means driven by the first driving means. The second support mechanism includes a pair of first connecting members that connect the displacement member to the base member, and a first biasing member that applies a biasing force to one of the pair of first connecting members. a pair of second connecting members driven by the second driving means and connecting the second displacement member to the base member; and attached to one of the pair of second connecting members. Since the second biasing member that applies a force is provided, the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

That is, when the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other, each of the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism, for example, pushes the other on the side to which the biasing force is applied ( advance), and the side on which the biasing force is not applied can form a state of accepting (retreating) the opponent. As a result, the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

In the game machine F3 or F4, one leg is formed as a torsion spring and the other leg is connected to the first connecting member and the other leg is connected to the base member to move the first displacement member closer to the second displacement member. a first torsion spring that imparts a biasing force in a direction to bring the first displacement member closer to the second displacement member as the first connection member is rotated, one of the first torsion springs A game machine F7 characterized in that at least one of a connecting position between the leg of the first torsion spring and the first connecting member or a connecting position between the other leg of the first torsion spring and the base member is separated from the winding portion.

According to the game machine F7, in addition to the effects of the game machine F3 or F4, one leg is connected to the first connecting member and the other leg is connected to the base member, and the first displacement member is formed as a torsion spring. is provided with a first torsion spring that exerts an urging force in the direction of approaching the second displacement member. The driving force of the first driving means required for the movement can be assisted by the biasing force of the first torsion spring. Therefore, for example, when the first displacement member is displaced from the rest position to the abutment position where the first displacement member is in contact with the second displacement member from the retracted position away from the second displacement member, the displacement can be smoothly started. can.

In this case, as the first connecting member rotates in the direction in which the first displacement member approaches the second displacement member, the connecting position between one leg of the first torsion spring and the first connecting member or the position of the first torsion spring Since at least one of the connection positions between the other leg and the base member is separated from the winding portion, the distance from the winding portion to the position where the force is applied increases, and the first displacement member is brought closer to the second displacement member. It is possible to weaken the urging force in the direction to make it move. Therefore, for example, when stopping the first displacement member brought close to the second displacement member, the displacement can be reliably stopped, so damage due to collision can be suppressed. Further, when the first displacement member and the second displacement member are reciprocally displaced in the same direction with the opposing sides in contact with each other, the driving force required for the reciprocating displacement can be suppressed, so the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement can be reduced. can be increased, and the production effect can be improved.

In the gaming machine F7, a direction in which one leg formed as a torsion spring is connected to the second connecting member and the other leg is connected to the base member, and the second displacement member approaches the first displacement member one leg of the second torsion spring as the second connecting member is rotated in a direction to bring the second displacement member closer to the first displacement member. and the second connecting member or at least one of the connecting position between the other leg of the second torsion spring and the base member is separated from the winding portion.

According to the game machine F8, the second torsion spring has the same effect as the first torsion spring in the game machine F7. In particular, when the first displacement member and the second displacement member are reciprocally displaced in the same direction with their opposing sides in contact with each other, the driving force required for the reciprocating displacement can be suppressed in both, which is particularly effective. Become. In addition, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are at the same height (positioned in the direction of gravity), and the contact position between the two is the highest position (or the lowest position) in the direction of gravity, and the distance between the two is the highest (or the lowest position) in the direction of gravity. The configuration of the game machine F8 is particularly effective when the position (retreat position) is the lowest position (or the highest position) in the direction of gravity.

A game machine F9 characterized in that, in the game machine F7, the first displacement member is displaced upward in the direction of gravity so as to approach the second displacement member.

According to the game machine F9, in addition to the effects of the game machine F7, the first displacement member is displaced upward in the direction of gravity to bring it closer to the second displacement member, so that the first displacement member moves downward in the direction of gravity. The biasing force in the direction of displacing the first displacement member upward in the gravitational direction can be increased as the position of the first displacement member increases (that is, the higher the position of the first displacement member in the gravitational direction, the greater the biasing force in the direction of displacing the first displacement member upward in the gravitational direction. can weaken the urging force).

Therefore, when displacing (raising) the first displacement member upward in the gravitational direction from a stopped state, the displacement (raising) can be smoothly started, and the raised first displacement member is stopped. In some cases, the displacement can be reliably stopped not only by the action of gravity but also by weakening the urging force. As a result, damage due to collision with the second displacement member can be suppressed. On the other hand, when stopping the first displacement member that has been displaced (lowered) downward in the direction of gravity, the biasing force is strengthened so that the biasing force is made to oppose the action of gravity that attempts to continue the descent. be able to. As a result, it is possible to reliably stop the first displacement member.

In the game machine F9, one leg formed as a torsion spring is connected to the second connecting member and the other leg is connected to the base member, and the direction in which the second displacement member is separated from the first displacement member The second displacement member is separated from the first displacement member by upward displacement in the direction of gravity, and the second displacement member is moved by the first displacement member As the second connecting member is rotated in the direction of approaching the second connecting member, the connecting position between one leg of the second torsion spring and the second connecting member or the connection position between the other leg of the second torsion spring and the base member A game machine F10 characterized in that at least one of the connection positions of is separated from the winding portion.

According to the game machine F10, in addition to the effects of the game machine F9, one leg formed as a torsion spring is connected to the second connecting member, the other leg is connected to the base member, and the second displacement member is moved to the second position. The second displacement member is provided with a second torsion spring that exerts a biasing force in a direction to move away from the first displacement member, and the second displacement member is displaced upward in the direction of gravity to be separated from the first displacement member. in a direction away from the first displacement member, i.e., when it is necessary to displace (raise) the second displacement member against the direction of gravity, the first coupling member required to rotate The driving force of the second driving means can be assisted by the biasing force of the second torsion spring. Therefore, the displacement can be performed smoothly.

In this case, as the second connecting member is rotated in a direction to bring the second displacement member closer to the first displacement member, the connecting position of one leg of the second torsion spring and the second connecting member or the position of the second torsion spring Since at least one of the connection positions between the other leg and the base member is separated from the winding portion, the second displacement member is separated from the first displacement member by the distance from the winding portion to the force acting position. It is possible to weaken the urging force in the direction of increasing the weight (the direction of lifting upward in the direction of gravity). Therefore, for example, when the first displacement member and the second displacement member are reciprocally displaced in the same direction with their opposing sides in contact with each other, the driving force required for the reciprocating displacement can be suppressed. The displacement speed can be increased, and the production effect can be improved.

A game machine K1, wherein the game machine is a slot machine in any one of the game machines A1 to A10, B1 to B8, C1 to C6, D1 to D6, E1 to E4 and F1 to F10. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

A gaming machine K2, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B8, C1 to C6, D1 to D6, E1 to E4 and F1 to F10. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.
Any one of the game machines A1 to A10, B1 to B8, C1 to C6, D1 to D6, E1 to E4 and F1 to F10 is a combination of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. Characteristic game machine K3. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 Game board 140 2nd prize-winning entrance (ball entrance)
15065 variable winning device (guide member)
15065a side (guide surface)
15065b bulging portion (protruding portion)
15065c bulging portion (protruding portion)
65a Specific winning port 510 Base member 511b2 Engagement portion (restriction portion)
511b1 standing portion (intervening wall)
520 first electric accessory (guide member)
520L Feather member 520R Feather member 524L Bulging portion (protruding portion)
524R bulging portion (protruding portion)
526L side (guide surface)
526R side (guide surface)
531 solenoid (driving means)
532 second projection (restriction means)
532, 8532 Sliding member (slide transmission member)
532d engagement groove (sliding groove)
8532e third projection (projection)
533, 7533, 8533, 9533 Rotating member (rotation transmitting member)
533a connecting portion (engaging portion)
533b projection (sliding projection)
8533e Second projection (limiting means)
621 light transmission member (transmission member, decoration member)
624 base member (base)
624a LED (light emitting means)
625 reflective member 625a1 reflective surface (connected surface)
625b recess (partition plane)
660 base member 672U displacement member (first displacement member)
672D displacement member (second displacement member)
680U drive means (first support mechanism)
680D drive means (second support mechanism)
684U first link member (first one-side transmission member)
684D first link member (second one-side transmission member)
686U second link member (first other side transmission member)
686U second link member (second other side transmission member)
800 decorative pattern display device (rotating)
810 inner reel unit (second reel)
811 inner reel (second outer peripheral wall)
812 hub (second side wall)
812a1 Protrusion (upright portion)
812c spoke (second supporting wall)
812c1 inner opening (opening)
5813a projection (upright portion)
820 outer reel unit (first reel)
821 outer reel (first outer peripheral wall)
822 spokes (first supporting wall)
824 edge (first side wall)
3824a projection (upright part)
825 outer opening (aperture)
SP1 torsion spring (biasing member, first torsion spring)
SP2 torsion spring (biasing member, second torsion spring)

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine, comprising a ball entrance into which a game ball can be entered, and a guide member having a guide surface for guiding the game ball to the ball entrance and formed to be displaceable. Gaming machines are known. Examples of the guide member include a pair of feather members having a guide surface that guides the game ball to the ball entrance, is disposed across the ball entrance, and is rotatably pivoted at the base end side. Patent Literature 1 discloses a technique in which a first groove is provided on the entire guide surface of one blade member and a second groove is provided on the entire guide surface of the other blade member.

JP-A-2003-164598

However, the gaming machine described above has a problem that the game ball cannot be sufficiently biased.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of biasing a game ball.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has a ball entrance into which a game ball can be entered, and a guide surface for guiding the game ball to the ball entrance and is formed displaceably. The guide member comprises a pair of protruding portions protruding from the guide surface and formed so as to come into contact with a game ball rolling on the guide surface; A pair of protruding portions are arranged at different positions in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface.

According to the game machine of claim 1, the game ball can be biased.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an exploded perspective front view of the game board. It is a perspective front view of an operation unit. 4 is an exploded perspective front view of the operation unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; (a) is a front view of the winning opening unit, and (b) is a back view of the winning opening unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of the prize winning opening unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the prize winning opening unit. 4 is an exploded perspective view of a base member and a first electric accessory; FIG. It is an exploded perspective front view of a drive unit. (a) and (b) are side views of a drive unit and a first electric accessory. (a) and (b) are front views of a drive unit and a first electric accessory. 10(a) and 10(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500 taken along line XVII-XVII of FIG. 10(a). (a) and (b) are front views of the prize winning unit. (a) and (b) are side views of a first electric accessory and a drive unit. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit along line XXa-XXa of FIG. 18(a), and FIG. 20(b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit along line XXb-XXb of FIG. 18(b). be. (a) and (b) are side views of a first electric accessory and a drive unit. (a) is a partially enlarged side view of the drive unit in range XXIIa of FIG. 21(a), and (b) is a partially enlarged side view of the drive unit in range XXIIb of FIG. 21(b). (a) is a front perspective view of the left wing member, and (b) is a front perspective view of the right wing member. (a) is a front view of the winning opening unit, and (b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along line XXIVb-XXIVb of FIG. 24(a). (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit. (a) is a top view of the winning opening unit, and (b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along line XXVIIb-XXVIIb of FIG. 27(a). 27(a) and 27(b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit in range XXVIII of FIG. 27(b). 3 is a partially enlarged view of the game board in range XXIX of FIG. 2; FIG. (a) is a front view of the decorative design display device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the decorative design display device taken along line XXXb-XXXb of FIG. 30(a). It is an exploded perspective front view of a decorative pattern display device. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the decorative pattern display device. (a) is a front view with the inner reel deployed, and (b) is a front view with the outer reel deployed. FIG. 31 is a cross-sectional view of the decorative design display device taken along line XXXIV-XXXIV of FIG. 30(a); 35 is a partially enlarged view of the decorative design display device in range XXXV of FIG. 34; FIG. (a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member taken along line XXXVIb-XXXVIb of FIG. 36(a). It is a front view of a segment display device. 1 is an exploded view of a segment display device; FIG. (a) is a front view of a vertical displacement unit, and (b) is a side view of the vertical displacement unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective front view of the vertical displacement unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective rear view of the vertical displacement unit; (a) is a front view of the second segment unit, and (b) is a rear view of the second segment unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective front view of a second segment unit; FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective rear view of the second segment unit; FIG. 42B is a cross-sectional view of the second segment unit taken along line XLV-XLV in FIG. 42(a); It is a side view of a base member. FIG. 43 is a cross-sectional view of the second segment unit taken along line XLVII-XLVII in FIG. 42(a); It is a front view of a vertical displacement unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective front view of the vertical displacement unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective rear view of the vertical displacement unit; (a) is a front view of a displacement member, and (b) is a side view of the displacement member. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective front view of a displacement member; FIG. 51(a) is a cross-sectional view of the displacement member taken along line LIII-LIII of FIG. 51(a); It is a front view of a displacement member. It is a front view of a segment display device and a decorative pattern display device. It is a schematic diagram of a segment display device and a decorative pattern display device. (a) to (c) are front views of the vertical displacement unit. (a) is a side view of the vertical displacement unit, and (b) is a sectional view of the vertical displacement unit along line LVIIIb-LVIIIb of FIG. 57(a). (a) is a side view of the vertical displacement unit, and (b) is a sectional view of the vertical displacement unit along line LVIIIb-LVIIIb of FIG. 57(a). (a) is a side view of the vertical displacement unit, and (b) is a sectional view of the vertical displacement unit along line LVIIIb-LVIIIb of FIG. 57(a). It is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit. It is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit. It is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit. 64(a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member in the second embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member taken along line LXIVb-LXIVb of FIG. 64(a). It is a sectional view of a decorative design display device in a 3rd embodiment. (a) is a partially enlarged view of the outer reel unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the outer reel unit taken along line LXVIb-LXVIb of FIG. 66(a). It is a sectional view of a decorative design display device in a 4th embodiment. (a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member taken along line LXVIIIb-LXVIIIb of FIG. 68(a). It is a sectional view of a decorative design display device in a 5th embodiment. (a) is a partially enlarged view of the annular member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the annular member taken along line LXXb-LXXb of FIG. 70(a). It is a sectional view of a decorative design display device in a 6th embodiment. (a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member taken along line LXXIIb-LXXIIb of FIG. 72(a). (a) is a partially enlarged view of the outer reel unit, and (b) is a sectional view of the outer reel unit taken along line LXXIIIb-LXXIIIb of FIG. 73(a). (a) is a front view of a rotating member in a seventh embodiment, and (b) is a side view of the rotating member. (a) to (c) are side views of a drive unit and a first electric accessory. (a) to (c) are front views of a drive unit and a first electric accessory. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit. FIG. 21 is an exploded perspective front view of a drive unit in an eighth embodiment; (a) and (b) are side views of a first electric accessory and a drive unit. (a) and (b) are front views of a first electric accessory and a drive unit. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit. FIG. 21 is an exploded perspective front view of a drive unit according to a ninth embodiment; (a) and (b) are side views of a first electric accessory and a drive unit. (a) and (b) are front views of a first electric accessory and a drive unit. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit. (a) is a front view of a displacement member in a tenth embodiment, and (b) is a side view of the displacement member. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective front view of a displacement member; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of a vertical displacement unit; 91 (a) and (b) are partially enlarged views of the vertical displacement unit in the range XCI of FIG. 90. FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit in the eleventh embodiment; It is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit. It is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit. 95(a) is a top view of the winning opening unit in the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along line XCVb-XCVb of FIG. 95(a). 96(a) is a top view of the winning opening unit in the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along line XCVIb-XCVIb of FIG. 96(a). (a) is a perspective front view of a left wing member in a fourteenth embodiment, and (b) is a perspective front view of a right wing member. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the prize-winning unit, (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the left wing member taken along line XCVIIIb-XCVIIIb in FIG. 98(a), and (c) is FIG. 98(b). is a schematic cross-sectional view of the right wing member taken along line XCVIIIc-XCVIIIc of FIG. (a) is a partially enlarged view of the game board in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board along line XCIXb-XCIXb in FIG. (a) is a partially enlarged view of the game board, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board taken along line Cb-Cb in FIG. 100(a). (a) is a front view of the first electric accessory and the drive unit in the sixteenth embodiment, and (b) is a cross section of the first electric accessory and the drive unit 8530 along line CIb-CIb of FIG. 101(a). FIG. 101(c) is a cross-sectional view of the first electric accessory and drive unit taken along line CIc-CIc of FIG. 101(b); (a) and (b) are side views of a first electric accessory and a drive unit according to the seventeenth embodiment. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit. 105(a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member in the eighteenth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member taken along line CVb-CVb of FIG. 105(a). (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of a decorative design display device according to an eighteenth embodiment.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, referring to FIGS. 1 to 63, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 2 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 2 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 2. and an inner frame 4 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 2 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 4, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided serves as an opening and closing axis. A frame 4 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 4 from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 4 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1). 5 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported on the front side so that they can be opened and closed. The locking of the inner frame 4 and the locking of the front door 5 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front door 5 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and has a window portion 5c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheets of plate glass 8 is arranged on the back side of the front door 5, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

An upper tray 17 for storing balls projects forward from the front door 5 and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . This frame button 22 is used, for example, to change the aspect of the effect displayed on the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 (see FIG. 2), or to change the content of the Super Reach effect. operated by a person.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front door 5 (for example, at corners). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illumination parts 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window part 5c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, an indicator lamp 34 is provided at the upper left portion of the front door 5 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The indicator lamp 34 has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and is capable of indicating whether prize balls are being dispensed and when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front door 5 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right side electric decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 5c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball while the pressing operation is being performed, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electric resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is thereby hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 which is cut into a substantially square shape in a front view. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). attached to the back side of the The base plate 60 is made of wood by pasting together thin plate materials, and is formed so that various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 cannot be seen from the front side of the base plate 60 by the player. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side.

The central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5c of the front door 5 (see FIG. 1). Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

An outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 77 is placed inside the outer rail 77. An arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 76 and 77 and a resin-made outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a prize-winning opening, etc. area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 76 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B provided with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged in the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 140.例文帳に追加Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball enters the second winning hole 140, the first The pattern display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability, the time saving mode, or the normal mode by the lighting state, or whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state by the lighting state. Whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state, and the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates the round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and by combining the emission colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

Incidentally, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a prize is won in either the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 140.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 4R probability variable jackpot, and a 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. .

Here, the “15R probability variable jackpot” is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the “4R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and a time-saving state during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special game state It is the state of The high-probability state (during variable probability) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of winning a second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 140 . "Low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains as it is, only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second winning port 140 It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is likely to win a prize. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it means that the game is in a state of neither variable probability nor time reduction (state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the second pattern winning probability is increased).

During the probability change or the time reduction, not only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, but also the time during which the first electric accessory 520 attached to the second prize winning opening 140 is opened is changed, which is longer than during normal. Time is set. When the first electric accessory 520 is in the open state (open state), compared to the case where the first electric accessory 520 is in the closed state (closed state), to the second winning port 140 The ball will be in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 140, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the first electric accessory 520 associated with the second winning opening 140 during the probability change or during the time saving, or in addition to changing the opening time, one hit , the number of times the first electric accessary product 520 is opened may be increased more than during normal operation. In addition, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the first electric role product 520 associated with the second winning opening 140 is opened and the first electric role product 520 is opened once. At least one of the number of times 520 opens may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time in which the first electric accessory 520 attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened and the number of times the first electric accessory 520 is opened per hit are not changed. Only the winning probability of the second symbol may be changed so as to be increased as compared with the normal state.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, with the winning of either the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140 (start winning) as a trigger, the third A second pattern display device (not shown) composed of a segment display device 600 and a decorative pattern display device 800 that perform variable display of patterns, and an LED that variably displays the second pattern triggered by the passage of the ball through the first through gate 66 ) are provided.

A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 . The segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 can be visually recognized from the opening opened in the center of the center frame 86 .

In the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. , decorative display and displacement operation according to the display of the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B. Instead of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800, for example, a liquid crystal display may be used to display the game state.

The second symbol display device alternately displays a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the first through gate 66. This is to perform a variable display that lights up. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the first electric role product 520 associated with the second winning hole 140 It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the variable probability or during the time saving than during the normal gaming state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability change and the time reduction, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during normal times. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player more chances to open the first electric accessory 520 of the second winning opening 140 . Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 140 during the probability variation and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, other methods such as increasing the probability of winning, increasing the opening time and the number of openings of the first electric accessory 520 for one hit, etc. The second winning opening during the probability change or time reduction When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the ball to 140, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during the variable probability or during the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and one winning The opening time and the number of openings of the first electric accessory 520 may be constant regardless of the game state.

The first through gate 66 is attached to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display unit 80 . The first through gate 66 is configured so that a part of the balls flowing down the game board among the balls shot to the game board can pass through. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the first through gate 66 is reserved up to four times in total, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and the second symbol reservation lamp (not shown) is displayed. ) is also illuminated. Four second design reservation lamps are provided for the maximum number of reservations, and are arranged symmetrically below the segment display device 600 and the decorative design display device 800 .

The variable display of the second pattern may be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 may be used. Similarly, the segment display device 600 and a part of the decorative pattern display device 800 may light up the second symbol reservation lamp. Also, the maximum number of held balls for passage of the ball through the first through gate 66 is not limited to 4, and may be set to 3 or less or 5 or more times (e.g., 8 times). . Also, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Also, the mounting position of the through gate is not limited to the right and left sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be below the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning hole 64 through which balls can win is arranged. When a ball enters the first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the first winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the right side of the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front, a second winning hole 140 through which a ball can win is arranged. When a ball enters the second winning hole 140, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 ( 4), a lottery for a big win is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the first symbol display device 37B.

Also, the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 140 are also one of the prize winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 140 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 140 are different numbers, for example, the number of balls to the first prize winning port 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball wins may be set to three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball enters the second prize winning port 140 may be set to five.

A first electric accessory 520 is attached to the second prize winning port 140 . The first electric accessory 520 is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the first electric accessory 520 is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 140. there is On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the first through gate 66, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the first electric accessory 520 is displayed. It becomes an open state (expanded state), and the state is such that the ball can easily enter the second winning port 140 .

As described above, during the variable probability and during the time saving, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so in the variable display of the second symbol "○ , and the number of times the first electric accessory 520 is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the first electric accessory 520 is opened is also longer during the variable probability or the shorter working hours than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning port 140 during the variable probability or the shorter working hours compared to the normal time.

Here, when the ball enters the first prize winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second prize winning port 140, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of the 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning port 140 than when the ball enters the first winning port 64. is set. On the other hand, the first prize winning port 64 does not have the first electric accessory 520 like the second prize winning port 140, and is in a state where balls can always win prizes.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessory attached to the second prize winning port 140 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second prize winning port 140. Then, a ball is shot so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by winning the first prize-winning port 64, many chances of a big winning lottery are obtained, and a big win is achieved. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 520 attached to the second winning opening 140 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning opening 140 is won. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is shot toward the second prize winning opening 140 so that the ball passes through the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “right hitting”), and is passed through the first through gate 66. It is more advantageous for the player to open the first electric accessory 520 by pressing and aiming for a 15R probability variable jackpot by winning the second prize winning port 140.例文帳に追加

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment shoots balls to the player according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is variable probability, short time, or normal). It is possible to change the way of hitting to "left hitting" and "right hitting". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

A variable prize winning device 65 is provided on the right side of the first prize winning port 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific prize winning port (large open port) 65a is provided in the substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of either the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 140 results in a jackpot, the jackpot is stopped after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is lit so as to become a symbol, and the stop symbol corresponding to the big win is displayed on the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800 to indicate the occurrence of the big win. be After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Specifically, the variable prize winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific prize winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. and The specific prize winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to enter the specific prize winning port 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state are formed. It operates to alternate between states.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. You may make it form as a state. In addition, the number of specific winning holes 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged. It may be on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 .

An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided through the first out hole 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The first out port 71 is arranged below the first winning port 64 .

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

Main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, display controller 114, payout controller 111, launch controller 112, power supply 115, and card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100-104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover unopenably by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side of the case rail 132; ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main controller 110, the MPU 201 controls the pachinko machine 10 such as the jackpot lottery, the setting of the display in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800, and the lottery of the display results in the second pattern display device. perform the main processing of

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected. to send.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 .

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effects. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like. Other devices 228 include drive motors KM1, KM2, and KM3.

Sound lamp control device 113, based on the various commands received from the main control device 110 (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.), determines the display mode of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800, has been determined The display mode is notified to the display control device 114 by a command (variation pattern command for display, stop type command for display, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the mode displayed on the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800. or to change the contents of the effect at the time of super reach to the display controller 114. When the displayed mode is changed, in order to display the decoration corresponding to the changed displayed mode on the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800, the information on the changed displayed mode is included. A back image change command is sent to the display controller 114 . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image displayed on the segment display device 600 and the decorative design display device 800 . The display control device 114 displays various decorations on the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

Also, the audio lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display contents of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, according to the display content of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800, the audio corresponding to the display content is output from the audio output device 226 Also, it controls the lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 corresponding to the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113, the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800, and based on the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 It controls the display such as the variable effect of the third pattern. Moreover, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 and the audio from the audio output device 226 output can be matched.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, a schematic configuration of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective front view of the game board 13. FIG. Note that FIG. 13 shows a state in which the winning port unit 500 is disassembled from the game board 13 .

As shown in FIG. 5, the prize winning unit 500 is a game board formed by partitioning two rails 76 and 77 planted on the front surface of the game board 13 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails. It is inserted from the front side into an opening 13a formed below the region. A detailed configuration of the prize winning unit 500 will be described later.

Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 9. FIG. FIG. 6 is a perspective front view of the operation unit 300. FIG. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective front view of the operation unit 300. FIG. 8 and 9 are front views of the operation unit 300. FIG.

8 shows a state in which the displacement members 670 arranged in a pair above and below the segment display device 600 are respectively retracted to both upper and lower sides, in FIG. A state in which the provided displacement member 670 protrudes to the upper and lower central positions is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the operation unit 300 includes a box-shaped rear case 400, and the interior space of the rear case 400 contains a decorative pattern display device 800, a segment display device 600, and a decorative unit 700. is accommodated.

The rear case 400 includes a bottom wall portion 401 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and an outer wall portion 402 that stands upright from the outer edges of four sides of the bottom wall portion 401 toward the front. It is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open. A rectangular opening 401a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 401, and the segment display device 600 is arranged from the rear side of the rear case 400 through the opening 401a.

Three decorative pattern display devices 800 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction in the opening 401a of the bottom wall portion 401 of the rear case 400. As shown in FIG. The decorative pattern display device 800 is provided with an inner reel unit 810 and an outer reel unit 820 (see FIG. 31) that rotate and displace in the vertical direction. It is configured so that the player can visually recognize the manner in which the symbols fluctuate (rotate). A detailed description of the decorative pattern display device 800 will be given later.

The segment display device 600 is arranged on the bottom wall portion 401 of the rear case 400 and covers the decorative pattern display device 800 . A predetermined gap is formed between the opposing base members 660 (see FIG. 49) of the decorative pattern display device 800, and by disposing the decorative pattern display device 800 in the gap, , the decorative pattern display device 800 can be visually recognized.

Further, the segment display device 600 is provided with a displacement member 670 (see FIG. 49) that can be displaced in front of the gap between the facing base members 660 described above. By displacing it forward, it is possible to form an effect form in which the decorative symbol display device 800 cannot be visually recognized from the player side. A detailed description of the segment display device 600 will be given later.

The decorative units 700 are formed in a horizontally long rectangular box shape when viewed from the front, and are arranged in pairs above and below the segment display device 600 . The decoration unit 700 is made of a transparent resin material and has a shape that imitates the logo, title, etc. of the pachinko machine 10 . In addition, an LED board that emits light is disposed inside the decoration unit 700 so as to be able to emit light to the player side.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 10 to 29, a detailed description of the prize winning port unit 500 will be given. First, with reference to FIGS. 10 to 13, the structure of the prize winning port unit 500 will be described.

10(a) is a front view of the prize winning unit 500, and FIG. 10(b) is a rear view of the prize winning unit 500. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective front view of the winning opening unit 500, and FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective rear view of the winning opening unit 500. FIG. 13 is an exploded perspective view of the base member 510 and the first electric accessory 520. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 10 to 13, the prize winning unit 500 includes a base member 510 arranged on the front surface of the game board 13 (see FIG. 5) and a rotatable shaft inside the base member 510. It mainly includes a first electric accessory 520 to be supported and a drive unit 530 for applying a driving force to the first electric accessory 520 .

The base member 510 is formed by fastening a front base 511 arranged on the front side and a rear base 512 arranged at a predetermined interval from the front base 511 .

The front base 511 is formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and is formed of a transparent resin material. The front base 511 includes a first projecting portion 511a projecting rearward from the upper end of the central portion in the horizontal direction, a second projecting portion 511b projecting rearward from the lower end of the central portion in the horizontal direction, and the second projecting portion 511b. 511b and a third protrusion 511c that protrudes at a position separated by a predetermined gap in the left-right direction.

Also. The front base 511 is arranged at a position where the front surface thereof can be visually recognized from the player side, and a pattern is formed on the front surface side by unevenness.

The first protruding portion 511a is attached to the rear base 512 when the first electric accessory 520, which will be described later, is in a closed state (a state in which the tips of the feather members 520L and 520R are positioned above the rotation shaft (shaft member JB1)). It is a plate member for preventing the game ball from being thrown into the formed second winning hole 140 .

That is, the first projecting portion 511a is formed in the upper portion between the pair of feather members 520L and 520R facing each other in the closed state, and the distance between the first electric accessory 520 and the first projecting portion 511a is equal to the diameter of the game ball. is set smaller than

Further, the upper surface of the first projecting portion 511a is formed so as to be inclined downward from a substantially central position in the left-right direction toward both left and right end portions. As a result, the game ball thrown to the upper portion of the first projecting portion 511a can roll on its upper surface and drop (flow down) downward.

The second protruding portion 511b is formed to protrude from the rear side of the front base 511 in a horizontally long rectangular shape, and the position of the upper end surface in the vertical direction is lower than the bottom surface of the second prize winning opening 140 of the rear base 512. set. The second protruding portion 511b includes a standing portion 511b1 standing in front of the second prize winning opening 140 of the rear base 512, engaging portions 511b2 protruding from both left and right ends of the standing portion 511b1, and a bottom portion. It is mainly formed with a recessed portion 511b3 that is recessed in the .

A base member 511f including an LED for emitting light is arranged on the second projecting portion 511b below the standing portion 511b1. The LEDs of the base member 511f are arranged so as to emit light upward. Therefore, the surroundings of the second prize winning opening 140 can be illuminated by the LED.

The standing portion 511b1 is formed to stand upward from the upper end of the second protruding portion 511b, and two of them are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and the leading ends of the standing portions 511b1 are connected to each other. The upright portion 511b1 is formed so that its upper surface is inclined downward toward the second winning opening 140 (back side), and the vertical position of the end on the second winning opening 140 side is the second winning opening 140. is set to a height that coincides with the bottom of the Therefore, the game ball thrown to the upper portion of the standing portion 511b1 can roll toward the second winning hole 140 side. Therefore, the game ball thrown to the upper part of the erected portion 511b1 can enter the second winning hole 140. As shown in FIG.

In addition, the connection portion of the standing portions 511b1 arranged side by side is formed in a shape in which the central position in the circumferential direction is recessed downward. As a result, the game ball thrown to the upper portion of the standing portion 511b1 can be easily retained at the central position in the left-right direction of the standing portion 511b1. Therefore, the rolling direction of the game ball thrown to the upper portion of the standing portion 511b1 can be quickly switched to the second winning hole 140 side. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game ball thrown to the upper part of the standing portion 511b1 from colliding with the game ball thrown later and being pushed out, and the game ball is easily made to enter the second winning hole 140. can.

The engaging portions 511b2 are portions that engage left and right feather members 520L and 520R, which will be described later, and project from both left and right sides of the base end portion of the standing portion 511b1 toward the center of the shaft support portion 511d, which will be described later.

The recessed portion 511b3 is a recess for forming a space for inserting a driver when fastening the front base 511 and the rear base 512 together. Thereby, the screw can be inserted through the through-hole 511b4 that is formed through the side surface of the recessed portion 511b3 on the back side.

The third protruding portion 511c is a plate member that rolls the game ball to the first out port 71 formed in the back base 512, and is formed in two places on the back base 512 with the second winning port 140 interposed therebetween. It is formed adjacent to both laterally outer sides of the 1-out port 71 . In other words, the third projecting portion 511c is formed at a position separated in the horizontal direction by the dimension of the second projecting portion 511b and the first out port 71 in the horizontal direction.

The bottom surfaces of the third protruding portions 511c are inclined downward toward the respective adjacent first outlets 71 (toward the center of the front base 511 in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 10(a))), The lowest position is set higher than the bottom surface of the first out port 71 . Therefore, the game ball thrown to the upper part of the 3rd protrusion part 511c can be rolled toward the 1st out port 71, and can be made to enter the 1st out port 71. FIG.

The shaft supporting portion 511d is formed so as to protrude from the back side of the front base 511 in an annular shape, and two shaft supporting portions 511d are formed at the same height in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 10(a)) with the standing portion 511b1 interposed therebetween. . The inner diameter of the shaft support portion 511d is formed to be larger than the diameter of the shaft member JB1, which will be described later. Therefore, the shaft member JB1 can be inserted inside the shaft support portion 511d.

The rear base 512 is formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body that is larger than the front base 511 in front view. Therefore, the player can directly see the front surface of the rear base 512 that does not overlap the front base 511 in the front-rear direction.

In addition, since the front base 511 is made of a transparent material, the rear base 512 can be seen through the front base 511 in the portion where the front base 511 overlaps in front. Furthermore, the player can visually recognize game balls thrown between the rear base 512 and the front base 511 through the front base 511 .

The rear base 512 includes a first prize winning port 64 formed at the upper end of the front side, a second prize winning port 140 formed below the first prize winning port 64, and formed on both sides of the second prize winning port 140. and a general winning hole 63 formed above the first out hole 71 on the right side in front view.

The first prize winning opening 64 is recessed downward from the upper end portion of the front base 511 in the lateral direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 10(a)) at a substantially central position, and protrudes in both the front and rear directions along the recessed edge portion. It is formed. In addition, the projecting tip on the front side (the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 10A) is closed by a plate member.

The concave shape of the first winning hole 64 is formed with a size that allows a game ball to pass through the inside thereof, and the bottom surface (the inner surface on the lower side in the direction of gravity) is inclined toward the back side. Thereby, the game ball entering the first winning hole 64 can be thrown to the back side of the game board 13. - 特許庁

The second prize winning port 140 is formed through the first prize winning port 64 on the lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 10(a)). The second prize winning opening 140 is formed in a square shape having a dimension larger than the diameter of the game ball when viewed from the front. Therefore, the game ball can be thrown to the back side of the game board 13 through the second winning hole 140.例文帳に追加In addition, the second prize winning port 140 includes recesses 140a recessed on the left and right inner side surfaces.

The recess 140a is curved around the axis of the shaft hole 512a. Thereby, projections 523L and 523R of left and right blade members 520L and 520R, which will be described later, can be accommodated inside. That is, inside the second winning hole 140, the game ball is allowed to pass through, and the protrusions 523L and 523R are inserted therethrough.

The shaft holes 512a are recessed from the front side to the back side on both left and right sides of the second prize winning opening 140 of the back base 512 . The shaft hole 512a is a groove for inserting therein a shaft member JB1, which will be described later, and is formed in a circular shape with a diameter larger than the diameter of the shaft member JB1.

The first out port 71 is formed through both left and right sides of the second prize winning port 140 . The first out port 71 is a hole for collecting game balls that have flowed down the game area formed on the front surface of the game board 13. The first out port 71 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a width in the vertical direction (lateral direction). The size is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the first outlet 71 is formed such that its bottom surface (the inner surface on the lower side in the direction of gravity) is inclined toward the back side. Therefore, the game ball entering the first out port 71 can be thrown to the back side of the game board 13. - 特許庁

The first outlet 71 is formed with a guide wall 512b that connects with the bottom surface and protrudes toward the front side. The guide wall 512b is a member for receiving a game ball flowing down the game area on its upper surface and throwing the ball to the first out port 71, and its upper surface is formed so as to slope downward toward the back side.

In addition, a plurality of ribs extending in the front-rear direction are arranged side by side on the bottom surface (lower surface) of the guide wall 512b. Thereby, the rigidity of the guide wall 512b can be improved. As a result, it is possible to prevent the guide wall 512b from being damaged when the game ball flowing down the game area collides with the upper surface of the guide wall 512b.

The fastening between the front base 511 and the rear base 512 is performed by the above-described through hole 511b4 and a fastening hole 512c formed through the rear base 512 at a position corresponding to the through hole 511b4. That is, in a state in which the front base 511 and the rear base 512 are combined in the front-rear direction, a screwdriver is inserted into the concave portion 511b3 from the lower side of the front base 511, and the screw is fastened to the fastening hole 512c through the through hole 511b4. can be done by

The first electric accessory 520 is formed as one unit of a left wing member 520L arranged on the left side of the second prize winning opening 140 in front view and a right wing member 520R arranged on the right side in front view.

The left wing member 520L and the right wing member 520R are different only in the positions of bulging portions 524L and 524R, which will be described later. Except for the projecting portions 524L and 524R, only the left wing member 520L will be described, and the detailed description of the right wing member 520R will be omitted.

The left wing member 520L and the right wing member 520R are driven by a solenoid 531 of the drive unit 530, which will be described later. It can be displaced between a second state (open state) in which the corner portion on the far side from the through hole 521L is displaced to a position spaced outward in the left-right direction of the second prize winning opening 140, and the first state unless otherwise specified. shall be explained. Also, in the first state, the side surfaces of the left and right feather members 520L and 520R facing each other will be described with reference numerals of side surfaces 526L and 526R.

The left wing member 520L is formed in a generally triangular shape in a front view, and is formed in a dimension larger than the diameter of the game ball in the front-rear direction. The left wing member 520L has a through hole 521L penetrating in the front-rear direction at the lower end portion in the direction of gravity, a recess 522L recessed from the front side to the back side around the through hole 521L, and a back surface from the vicinity of the through hole 521L. a protrusion 523L protruding to the side, a recessed portion 525L recessed in the radial direction of the through-hole 521L on the end face of the through-hole 521L, a bulging portion 524L protruding from the side surface 526L, and the interior of the through-hole 521L. It mainly includes a shaft member JB1 that is inserted into the . A detailed description of the bulging portion 524L will be given later.

The shaft member JB1 is a columnar rod member made of a metal material. The shaft member JB1 is a shaft that rotatably holds the left and right feather members 520L and 520R, and has an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 521L.

Further, the axial length of the shaft member JB1 is substantially the same as or slightly shorter than the separation distance from the recessed front end surface of the shaft hole 512a to the rear side of the front base 511. As shown in FIG. Therefore, when assembling the front base 511 and the rear base 512, one end of the shaft member JB1 (the end on the rear base 512 side) is inserted into the shaft hole 512a, and the other end (the end on the front base 511 side) is inserted into the shaft hole 512a. ) inside the shaft support portion 511d, the shaft member JB1 can be held between the front base 511 and the rear base 512. As shown in FIG.

The dimension of the left wing member 520L in the front-rear direction is set to be smaller than the dimension of the distance between the front base 511 and the rear base 512 facing each other. Therefore, when the front base 511 and the rear base 512 are assembled, by inserting the shaft member JB1 into the through hole 521L, the feather member 520L can be rotatably held between the front base 511 and the rear base 512. .

The recessed portion 522L is recessed from the front side around the axis of the through hole 521L, and the dimension of the recessed portion is set smaller than the projection distance of the shaft support portion 511d. Also, the distance dimension from the axis of the through hole 521L of the recess 522L to the inner peripheral surface is set to be larger than the radial dimension from the axis of the shaft support portion 511d to the outer peripheral surface.

Therefore, when the blade member 520L is arranged between the front base 511 and the rear base 512, the front surface of the blade member 520L and the rear surface of the front base 511 can be prevented from coming into contact with each other, and the blade member 520L and the front surface can be prevented from contacting each other. The contact portion with the base 511 can be the recessed portion 522L and the pivot portion 511d. Therefore, the blade member 520L and the front base 511 can be partially grounded. As a result, when the blade member 520L is rotated by driving a solenoid 531, which will be described later, the resistance acting on the blade member 520L can be reduced, making it easier to rotate the blade member 520L.

In addition, since the shaft support portion 511d can be accommodated inside the recess 522L, the distance between the front base 511 and the rear base 512 facing each other can be reduced. As a result, the distance dimension in the front-rear direction of the winning opening unit 500 can be reduced.

Here, conventionally, there has been a game machine in which the shaft member JB1 is internally fitted into the through hole 521L of the feather member 520L.

However, in the conventional game machine, since the shaft member JB1 is fitted into the through hole 521L, when the feather member 520L is damaged, it is necessary to replace the feather member 520L and the shaft member JB1 when replacing parts. be. Therefore, there is a problem that the parts cost is high.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the shaft member JB1 is only inserted into the through hole 521L formed in the feather member 520L, and the feather member 520L and the shaft member JB1 are separated into the winning opening unit 500. can be arranged. Therefore, when the feather member 520L is damaged, only the feather member 520L can be replaced. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in component cost.

Further, as described above, the fastening of the front base 511 to the rear base 512 can be performed from the front side of the front base 511 . Therefore, when the feather member 520L is damaged, the front base 511 can be removed from the back base 512 while the prize winning unit 500 is attached to the game board 13.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to easily replace the parts of the feather member 520L.

That is, when the front base 511 is removed from the rear side of the rear base 512, it is necessary to remove the winning slot unit 500 from the game board 13 and then remove the front base 511 from the rear base 512. Since it is formed to be removable from the side, the front base 511 can be easily removed. As a result, it is possible to easily replace the parts of the feather member 520L.

Here, if the front base 511 is made removable from the front side of the rear base 512, the heads of the screws or the like that fasten the front base 511 and the rear base 512 can be visually recognized from the player side (front side), and the player can , the player's interest may be spoiled by visually recognizing the head of the screw that fastens the front base 511 and the rear base 512 .

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the fastening between the front base 511 and the rear base 512 is performed using the space of the concave portion 511b3 formed in the front base 511 . That is, by obliquely inserting a screwdriver into the concave portion 511b3 from the lower side of the front base 511, a screw can be fastened to the fastening hole 512c through the through hole 511b4. Therefore, even when the front base 511 is located on the front side of the through hole 511b4, the front base 511 and the rear base 512 can be fastened by inserting a screwdriver obliquely into the recessed portion 511b3. Therefore, the head of the screw or the like that fastens the front base 511 and the rear base 512 can be made difficult to see from the player's side (front side). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being spoiled by visually recognizing the head of the screw that fastens the front base 511 and the rear base 512 .

Also, usually, the decorative symbol display device 800 and the segment display device 600 that can be visually recognized through an opening formed in the center of the game board 13 are set at the eye level of the player. Therefore, the prize-winning unit 500 is arranged below the line-of-sight height of the player. As a result, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the heads of the screws that fasten the front base 511 and the rear base 512, and the player can visually recognize the heads of the screws that fasten the front base 511 and the rear base 512. can be suppressed from being damaged.

Since the front base 511 is made of a transparent resin material, the screw heads can be seen through the front base 511. However, as described above, the front base 511 has unevenness on the front side. Since the pattern is formed, light can be emitted in other directions due to the difference in the thickness of the plate. This obscures the screw heads that are visible through the front base 511 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest.

A detailed description of the drive unit 530 will now be provided with reference to FIGS. 14-16. 14 is an exploded perspective front view of the drive unit 530. FIG. 15(a) and 15(b) are side views of the drive unit 530 and the first electric accessory 520. FIG. 16(a) and 16(b) are front views of the drive unit 530 and the first electric accessory 520. FIG.

15(a) and 16(a) show the first electric accessory 520 in the first state, and FIGS. 15(b) and 16(b) show the first electric A state in which the accessory 520 is positioned in the second state is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 14, the drive unit 530 includes a solenoid 531, a sliding member 532 connected to the solenoid 531, a rotating member 533 connected to the sliding member 532, the rotating member 533 and the sliding member. It mainly comprises a first case member 534 in which the member 532 is displaceably arranged, and a second case member 536 attached to the rear side of the first case member 534 .

The solenoid 531 includes a main body portion 531a that has an electric wire inside and generates an electromagnetic force when electric power flows through the electric wire, a movable body 531b that is slidably disposed inside the main body portion, and the movable body. and an engaging portion 531c attached to the tip of the .

The main body portion 531a is formed in a prism shape elongated in the front-rear direction, and an electric wire is arranged inside. A concave portion is formed on the front side of the main body portion 531a, and a movable body 531b formed in a cylindrical shape is disposed inside the concave portion.

The movable body 531b is made of a metal material, and can slide to the rear side (inside the body 531a) by generating an electromagnetic force when electric power is applied to the wires of the body 531a.

The engaging portion 531c is attached to the end of the movable body 531b opposite to the body portion 531a. The engaging portion 531c is formed in the shape of a disk having an outer diameter larger than that of the movable body 531b, and is arranged so that its axis is positioned substantially on the same line as that of the movable body 531b.

The engaging portion 531c is inserted into an engaging groove 532a2 of the sliding member 532, which will be described later. As a result, the sliding member 532 can be displaced in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 15(a)) as the movable body 531b is displaced.

The sliding member 532 is formed in a substantially E-shape when viewed from above, and includes a connecting portion 532a extending in the left-right direction and two first sliding members 532a projecting from the left and right ends of the connecting portion 532a toward the front side. It mainly includes a protrusion 532b and a second protrusion 532c located between the two first protrusions 532b and protruding on the front side.

The sliding member 532 is formed so that the lateral dimension of the connecting portion 532a is smaller than the lateral dimension of the inner circumferential surface of the first case member 534, which will be described later. Thereby, the sliding member 532 can be accommodated and arranged inside the first case member 534 .

The connecting portion 532a is formed on both sides of the proximal end of the second protrusion 532c, a recess 532a1 recessed on the back side, an engaging groove 532a2 recessed from the top side connected to the front side of the recess 532a1, and the second projection 532c. The cut portion 532a3 is mainly provided with the cut portion 532a3.

As described above, the recessed portion 532a1 is a recess that prevents the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 from coming into contact with the connecting portion 532a when the engaging portion 531c of the solenoid 531 is inserted into the engaging groove 532a2. That is, the concave portion 532a1 is formed in an arcuate shape whose concave surface is larger than the outer diameter of the movable body 531b. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 from coming into contact with the connecting portion 532a.

The engagement groove 532a2 is formed so as to be connected to the front side of the recess 532a1, and the depth of the recess in the direction of gravity from the upper surface side is set larger than the diameter of the engagement portion 531c. The engagement groove 532a2 has a lateral width larger than the diameter of the engaging portion 531c and a longitudinal width substantially equal to or engaged with the longitudinal thickness of the engaging portion 531c. It is formed to be larger than the thickness dimension in the front-rear direction of the portion 531c. Therefore, the engaging portion 531c can be inserted inside the engaging groove 532a2.

The cut portion 532a3 is a cut for facilitating elastic deformation of the sliding member 532 when connecting the first projection 532b described later to the rotating member 533. It is formed on both sides and cut toward the rear side.

The first projection 532b has an engagement hole 532d penetrating in the left-right direction. 532 d of engagement holes are formed in the shape of an elongated hole elongated in the front-back direction. It is mainly formed with a recessed second opening 532d2. A detailed description of the first opening 532d1 and the second opening 532d2 will be given later.

The engagement hole 532d is set so that the vertical width of the central portion in the front-rear direction (the portion other than the first opening 532d1 and the second opening 532d2) is larger than the vertical width of the projection 533b of the rotating member 533, which will be described later. be done. Thereby, the projection 533b can be arranged inside the engaging hole 532d.

The second protrusion 532c is formed between the two first protrusions 532b as described above and protrudes toward the front side. In addition, the second projection 532c has an upright wall 532c1 erected downward on the distal end side opposite to the connecting portion 532a. A detailed description of the standing wall 532c1 will be given later.

The rotary member 533 is formed by arranging two plate-like bodies that are substantially L-shaped in a side view side by side with a predetermined width therebetween in the left-right direction, and is formed by connecting the opposed portions on one end side thereof with a connecting portion 533a. be. The gap between the two plate-shaped bodies of the rotating member 533 is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball can pass through the inside of the rotating member 533 (between the two plate-shaped bodies facing each other).

In addition, the width dimension of the rotating member 533 in the left-right direction (the dimension between the outer surfaces of the two plate-like bodies facing each other) is set smaller than the dimension between the inner facing sides of the two first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 532. be. As a result, the rotating member 533 can be arranged between the opposing first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 532 .

The rotating member 533 includes a rotating shaft 533c that protrudes to both sides in the left-right direction from a bent portion that is substantially L-shaped when viewed from the side; It is mainly formed with a driving portion 533d that is recessed at the tip of the other end of the L shape.

The rotating shaft 533c is formed to protrude from both the left and right outer sides of the rotating member 533, and the distance dimension between the protruding end surfaces thereof is set substantially equal to the width dimension of the first case member 534 in the left-right direction. Also, the projection dimension of the rotating shaft 533c is set larger than the thickness dimension of the first case member 534 in the left-right direction. Therefore, by receiving the rotating shaft 533c inside a recessed portion 534a of the first case member 534, which will be described later, and by assembling the second case member 535 to the first case member 534, the rotating member 533 can be configured as the first case member 534 and the second case member 534. 2 It can be held in a rotatable state with respect to the case member 535 .

The protrusions 533b are formed to protrude from both left and right outer sides of the rotating member 533, and the distance between the protruding tip surfaces of the protrusions 533b is equal to the distance between the left and right outer side surfaces of the two first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 532. It is set to be approximately the same as the dimension. Also, the projection dimension of the projection 533b is set larger than the width dimension of the first projection 532b in the horizontal direction. Therefore, by inserting the projection 533b into the engaging hole 532d of the first projection 532b, the sliding member 532 and the rotating member 533 can be connected.

The connection between the sliding member 532 and the rotating member 533 can be performed by elastically deforming the two first projections 532b of the sliding member 532 to the left and right to widen the space between the two first projections 532b. can. In this case, as described above, the cut portion 532a3 is formed in the sliding member 532, so that the space between the two first protrusions 532b can be easily widened. As a result, the rotary member 533 and the sliding member 532 can be easily connected.

Further, the distance dimension between the opposing inner side surfaces of the first case member 534 in the left-right direction is substantially the same as the distance dimension between the opposing outer side surfaces of the first protrusions 532b, or the outer side surfaces of the first protrusions 532b are opposed to each other. It is set slightly larger than the distance dimension between them. Accordingly, in a state in which the rotating member 533 and the sliding member 532 are arranged inside the first case member 534, it is possible to suppress elastic deformation of the first protrusion 532b outward in the left-right direction. As a result, disconnection between the rotating member 533 and the sliding member 532 can be suppressed.

The driving portion 533d is formed by recessing from the front side toward the back side. The driving portion 533d can accommodate the projections 523L and 523R of the feather member 520L inside. That is, the driving portion 533d is set to have a dimension larger in the vertical direction than the protrusions 523L and 523R. By housing the protrusions 523L and 523R in the driving portion 533d, the first electric accessory 520 can be displaced between the first state and the second state as the driving portion 533d is displaced. A detailed description of the displacement of the first electric accessory 520 will be given later.

The first case member 534 is formed to have a substantially square shape with an open interior when viewed from the front, and is formed to extend in the front-rear direction. The first case member 534 has a cutout formed on the lower side of the back side, and the second case member 535 can be arranged in the cutout portion.

The first case member 534 mainly includes a concave portion 534a recessed on the front side in the notch portion on the back side, and a standing portion 534b erected on the bottom surface on the inner peripheral side.

As described above, the recess 534a is a recess for accommodating the rotating shaft 533c of the rotating member 533 inside, and is recessed to have a shape larger than the diameter of the rotating shaft 533c. Therefore, by assembling the second case member 535 to the first case member 534 with the rotating shaft 533 c housed inside, the rotating member 533 can be arranged inside the first case member 534 .

The erected portion 534b is formed such that the lower inner peripheral surface of the second prize winning opening 140 of the back base 512 and the erected leading end surface thereof are set at the same height, and the erected portion 534b extends toward the back side and is inclined downward. be done. As a result, in a state where the drive unit 530 is arranged on the back surface of the back base 512, the game ball entering the second winning hole 140 can be thrown to the second case member 535 by rolling the upper surface of the standing portion 534b. .

The second case member 535 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed with a predetermined thickness on the back side. The second case member 535 is provided with a through hole 535a penetrating therethrough in the vertical direction.

The through hole 535a has an inner diameter larger than the diameter of the game ball. You can throw the ball downwards through As a result, the game ball that has flowed down the game area and entered the second winning hole 140 can be recovered.

Next, displacement of the first electric accessory 520 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 15A and 16A, when the first electric accessory 520 is in the first state, the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is arranged around the movable body 531b. At the same time, it projects to the front side (left side in FIG. 15A) by the biasing force of a biasing spring (not shown) interposed between the body portion 531a and the connecting portion 532a.

In this case, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533 is positioned on the rear side of the engagement hole 532d (the side of the second opening 532d2). Further, the center of gravity of the rotating member 533 in a side view is positioned between the driving portion 533d and the rotating shaft 533c. In other words, the rotating member 533 is constantly applied with a rotating force around the rotating shaft 533c in the direction of pushing down the driving portion 533d.

Therefore, even when the projection 533b of the rotating member 533 is located on the back side of the engagement hole 532d (the side of the second opening 533d2), the projection 533b is positioned inside the second opening 533d2 (below the engagement hole 532d (see FIG. 15(a)). ) underside)) can stagnate above it without being guided by it.

Further, since the driving portion 533d is pushed downward, the protrusions 523L and 523R of the left and right feather members 520L and 520R accommodated inside the driving portion 533d are pushed downward. As a result, the left and right feather members 520L and 520R are placed in a state (first state (see FIG. 16A)) in which the corners on the far side from the through holes 521L and 521R are located above the through holes 521L and 521R. be.

As shown in FIGS. 15B and 16B, when power is applied to the main body 531a of the solenoid 531, the electromagnetic force generated in the main body 531a pulls the movable body 531b into the main body 531a. be

Therefore, with the displacement of the movable body 531b, the sliding member 532 connected to the tip side of the movable body 531b is slid rearward (to the right in FIG. 15(b)). As described above, the rotating member 533 is always in a state in which a rotating force is applied around the rotating shaft 533c in the direction of pushing down the driving portion 533d. The protrusion 533b accommodated inside the second opening 533d2 slides inside without being caught by the base end portion of the second opening 533d2.

The protrusion 533b that slides inside the second opening 533d2 abuts on the end of the engagement hole 532d on the front side (first opening 532d1 side) at the displacement end position of the movable body 531b, (b) to the right); In this case, the protrusion 533b can be accommodated inside the first opening 532d1 because the protrusion 533b is rotationally displaced about the rotation shaft 533c. That is, the first opening 532d1 is formed in a shape corresponding to the displacement of the protrusion 533b.

Further, since the rotating member 533 rotates around the rotating shaft 533c, the driving portion 533d can be displaced upward (upward in FIG. 15(b)). As a result, the feather member 520L is rotated about the axes of the through holes 521L and 521R, and the corners on the far side from the through holes 521L and 521R are displaced left and right (the second state (see FIG. 16(b)). ) See))).

On the other hand, the transition from the second state to the first state is performed by cutting off the power supply to the body portion 531a of the solenoid 531. FIG. As a result, the electromagnetic force generated in the body portion 531a disappears, so that the biasing spring (not shown) disposed around the movable body 531b and interposed between the body portion 531a and the connecting portion 532a is activated. The biasing force causes the movable body 531b to protrude toward the front side (left side in FIG. 15(a)). As a result, the first electric accessory 520 can be displaced to the position of the first state.

As described above, since the first opening 532d1 is formed in a shape corresponding to the displacement of the projection 533b, the depth of the recess toward the lower side in the direction of gravity (the lower side in FIG. 15(b)) of the first opening 532d1 is It is formed deeper toward the rear side (the right side in FIG. 15(b)).

As a result, when displacing the first electric accessory 520 from the second state to the first state, the base end portion of the first opening 532d1 collides with the projection 533b of the rotating member 533, and the projection 533b moves in the direction of gravity. can be easily displaced.

Next, referring to FIG. 17, the operation of the second projection 532c will be described. 17(a) and 17(b) are cross-sectional views of the prize winning port unit 500 along line XVII-XVII of FIG. 10(a). 17(a) shows the first electric accessory 520 in the first state, and FIG. 17(b) shows the state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state. .

As shown in FIG. 17(a), when the first electric accessory 520 is placed in the first state, the far corners of the through holes 521L and 521R of the left and right feather members 520L and 520R are aligned with the first protrusions 511a. placed in the vicinity. Thereby, when the first electric accessory 520 is in the first state, it is possible to suppress the game ball from flowing down between the left and right feather members 520L and 520R facing each other.

Further, as described above, the solenoid 531 is in a state in which the movable body 531b protrudes from the inside of the body portion 531a. Therefore, the sliding member 532 connected to the movable body 531b (engagement portion 531c) is positioned on the front side (left side in FIG. 17(a)). That is, the erected wall 532c1 of the second projection 532c is arranged near the second winning opening 140. As shown in FIG.

In this case, the distance dimension from the upright tip of the upright wall 532c1 (the lower end in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 17A)) to the upper end face of the upright portion 534b formed in the first case member 534 L1 is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

As a result, even if the first electric accessory 520 is damaged and the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is projected forward, the game ball can flow between the left and right feather members 520L and 520R. In this case, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the second winning hole 140 and rolling. That is, the game ball rolling on the standing portion 534b of the first case member 534 is caused to collide with the standing wall 532c1 of the sliding member 532, thereby stopping the rolling of the game ball. As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is damaged, even if the player continues playing the game, it is possible to prevent the store from being disadvantaged.

In this embodiment, a sensor device SE1 for detecting that a game ball has entered the second winning hole 140 is arranged in the second case member 535 along the game ball flow-down path. Therefore, in order to detect that the game ball has passed through the inside of the second winning hole 140, it is necessary to roll the game ball up to the second case member 535. Therefore, by stopping the rolling of the game ball inside the first case member 534 , it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from detecting that the game ball has entered the second winning hole 140 .

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 17(b), when the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state, the far corners of the through holes 521L and 521R of the left and right feather members 520L and 520R are more inclined than in the first state. is also separated from the first projecting portion 511a, and the separated distance is made larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the game area can be received by the side surfaces 526L, 526R of the left and right feather members 520L, 520R and rolled to the second winning hole 140. - 特許庁That is, when the first electric accessory 520 is set to the second state, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second winning hole 140 .

Further, as described above, the solenoid 531 is in a state in which the movable body 531b is pulled inside the main body 531a. Therefore, the sliding member 532 connected to the movable body 531b (engagement portion 531c) is positioned on the rear side (right side in FIG. 17(b)). That is, the erected wall 532c1 of the second projection 532c is arranged at a position farther from the second winning opening 140 than in the first state.

In this case, the distance dimension from the upright tip of the upright wall 532c1 (the lower end in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 17B)) to the upper end surface of the upright portion 534b formed in the first case member 534 L2 is set larger than the diameter of the game ball.

As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state, the left and right feather members 520L and 520R are displaced so that the game ball flowing down the game area is easily entered into the second winning hole 140. At the same time, the game ball entering the second winning hole 140 can be thrown to the second case member 535 by rolling the standing portion 534b formed in the first case member 534.

Furthermore, the displacement direction of the standing wall 532c1 can be slidably displaced in a direction substantially coinciding with the rolling direction of the game ball entered into the second winning hole 140, so that the feather member 520L, When the 520R is damaged (or due to fraud) and released, the game ball that collides with the standing wall 532c1 and stops is pushed out in the direction opposite to the rolling direction due to the displacement of the standing wall 532c1. can be suppressed. As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is opened by driving the solenoid 531 to allow the game ball to enter the second prize winning port 140, clogging of the game ball in the second prize winning port 140 is suppressed. can. As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is opened, the game ball can be smoothly guided to the inside of the second winning hole.

Next, the case where the first electric accessory 520 is displaced from the first state to the second state due to the player's cheating will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19. FIG. 18(a) and 18(b) are front views of the winning opening unit 500. FIG. 19(a) and 19(b) are side views of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530. FIG.

In addition, in FIGS. 18A and 18B, the front base 511 is shown transparently for easy understanding. 19(a) shows the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530 in the first state, and FIG. 19(b) shows the case where only the first electric accessory 520 is displaced from the first state. is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, when only the first electric role product 520 in the first state is forcibly displaced to the second state due to the player's fraudulent act. Then, the projections 523L, 523R of the left and right feather members 520L, 520R are displaced inside the second opening 532d2 of the engagement hole 532d. That is, since a space is formed in which the projections 523L and 523R can be displaced, it is possible to suppress damage to the first electric accessory 520 when the first electric accessory 520 is forcibly displaced.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 20(a) and 11(b), the displacement of the standing portion 523c1 when the first electric accessory 520 is displaced due to the player's cheating will be described. 20(a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 along the line XXa-XXa of FIG. 18(a), and FIG. 20(b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 along the line XXb-XXb of FIG. 18(b). is a cross-sectional view of.

As shown in FIGS. 20(a) and 20(b), when the first electric accessory 520 in the first state is forcibly rotated by the player's urging action, the solenoid of the drive unit 530 The positions of 531 and sliding member 532 are not displaced, and only the first electric accessory 520 and rotating member 533 are rotationally displaced.

As described above, when the first electric accessory 520 is positioned in the first state, from the upright tip of the upright wall 532c1 (the bottom end in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 20(a))) to the first The distance dimension L1 to the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b formed in the one case member 534 is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

Here, conventionally, a second winning hole 140 formed so that a game ball can enter, a pair of feather members 520L and 520R arranged across the second winning hole 140, and a pair of feather members Driving means (solenoid 531) for opening or closing by applying driving force to 520L and 520R, and when the pair of feather members 520L and 520R are opened by the driving force of the driving means (solenoid 531), the second winning opening 140 When the pair of feather members 520L and 520R are closed by the driving force of the drive means (solenoid 531) while the game ball is placed in the allowable position to allow the game ball to enter the second winning port 140, the game ball enters the second winning port 140. A gaming machine is known that includes a regulating means arranged at a regulating position for regulating a ball.

However, in the conventional game machine described above, since the displacement of the restricting means is not restricted, for example, the pair of feather members 520L and 520R are forcibly opened from the outside, and then the restricting means is displaced from the restricted position to the allowable position. Therefore, there is a problem that the effect of regulating illegal entry of game balls into the second winning hole 140 is insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the standing wall 532c1 is maintained at the restricted position when the pair of feather members 520L and 520R are closed or when the pair of feather members 520L and 520R are opened from the outside. Since the vertical wall 532c1 is formed to be flexible, it is possible to suppress the upright wall 532c1 from being displaced to the permissible position. Therefore, illegal entry of a game ball into the second winning hole 140 can be easily regulated.

That is, in a state in which the pair of feather members 520L and 520R are closed or a state in which the pair of feather members 520L and 520R are opened from the outside, the sliding member 532 is operated to move the standing tip of the standing wall 532c1 (gravitational force). The distance dimension L3 from the direction lower side (the end of FIG. 20(b) lower side) to the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b formed in the first case member 534 is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball. . Therefore, even if the first electric accessory 520 is allowed to throw the game ball to the second prize winning port 140 due to the player's fraudulent act, the game ball enters the second prize winning port 140 and rolls. can be suppressed. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the standing portion 534b of the first case member 534 collides with the standing wall 532c1 of the sliding member 532, and the rolling of the game ball can be stopped. As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is put into the second state (the game ball can be thrown to the second winning port 140) by the player's fraudulent act, the game ball is illegally sent to the second winning port 140. It is easy to regulate being entered.

Also, in this case, the standing wall 532c1 that prevents the game ball from entering the second winning hole 140 can be formed continuously with the sliding member 532 that displaces the pair of feather members 520L and 520R. A separate member for regulating illegal entry of a ball into the winning hole 140 is not required. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced by that amount, so an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22, the case where the second projection 532c is further pushed into the rear side when the first electric accessory 520 is brought into the second state by the player's cheating will be described. . 21(a) and 21(b) are side views of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530. FIG. 22(a) is a partially enlarged side view of drive unit 530 in range XXIIa of FIG. 21(a), and FIG. 22(b) is a partially enlarged side view of drive unit 530 in range XXIIb of FIG. 21(b). It is a diagram.

As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, a protrusion 532d3 is formed inside the second opening 532d2 so as to protrude from the inner surface on the front side (left side in FIG. 22(a)). A notch portion 533b1 is formed in the projection 533b of the rotating member 533 by cutting the outer peripheral surface in a side view.

The protrusion 532d3 and the notch 533b1 are formed in a shape corresponding to their outer diameters. That is, the projecting shape of the projection 532d3 and the cut shape of the notch portion 533b1 in side view are substantially the same.

Therefore, from the state shown in FIGS. 21(a) and 22(a) in which only the first electric accessory 520 is put into the second state due to fraud, the standing wall 532c1 (sliding member 532) is pushed toward the rear side. Then, the protrusion 532d3 is accommodated inside the notch portion 533b1, and the displacement of the erected wall 532c1 (sliding member 532) toward the rear side is restricted. As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is put into the second state due to the player's cheating, the game ball enters the second winning hole 140, and the standing portion 534b of the first case member 534 It can be suppressed that the ball is thrown by rolling.

Further, in the present embodiment, one of the side surfaces of the protrusion 532d3 is formed so as to incline upward toward the back side (see FIG. 22(a)). This makes it difficult for the projection 532d3 to come out of the notch 533b1 when the projection 532d3 is inserted inside the notch 533b1.

That is, since the side surface of the protrusion 532d3 is inclined upward toward the back side, the standing wall 532c1 (sliding member 532) is further inclined toward the back side while the protrusion 532d3 is inserted into the notch 532b1. The direction of the force acting on the contact surface between the projection 532d3 and the notch 532b1 when a pushing force acts on the projection 532d3 can be the direction in which the projection 532d3 enters the inside of the notch 532b1. Therefore, when the protrusion 532d3 is inserted inside the notch 533b1, the protrusion 532d3 can be made difficult to come out of the notch 533b1. As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is put into the second state due to the player's cheating, the game ball enters the second winning hole 140 and pushes the standing portion 534b of the first case member 534. Rolling and throwing can be reliably suppressed.

In other words, a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving means (solenoid 531) to the pair of blade members 520L and 520R is provided. b)) and the closing slide position (the position shown in FIG. 17(a)), and the sliding member 532 is slid to the open slide position for opening rotation. a rotary member 533 rotated to the position to open the pair of blade members 520L and 520R and to be rotated to the closing rotation position by sliding displacement of the sliding member 532 to the closing slide position to close the pair of blade members 520L and 520R; A standing wall 532c1 is disposed on the sliding member 532, and when the sliding member 532 is slid to the open slide position, the standing wall 532c1 is placed at the allowable position and the sliding member 532 is closed. When the vertical wall 532c1 is slid to the slide position, the vertical wall 532c1 is placed at the regulated position. By engaging with the sliding member 532, the sliding displacement of the sliding member 532 to the open slide position is regulated, so that the game ball is illegally entered into the second winning hole 140. can be done easily.

That is, when the closed pair of feather members 520L and 520R are illegally opened from the outside, the rotating member 533 rotates to the open rotating position while the sliding member 532 is arranged at the closing slide position. be done. In such a state, the rotating member 533 and the sliding member 532 are engaged with each other, thereby restricting the sliding displacement of the sliding member 532 to the open slide position. can be suppressed from being illegally forcibly displaced from the outside to the allowable position). As a result, after the pair of feather members 520L and 520R are forcibly opened from the outside, even if the game ball is passed through between the pair of feather members 520L and 520R, the game ball enters the second winning hole 140. Playing the ball can be regulated by a regulating means.

Further, one of the sliding member 532 and the rotating member 533 has an engaging hole 532d extending therefrom and a protrusion 533b protruding from the other. The sliding displacement of the member 532 is transmitted to rotate the rotating member 533, and the projection 533b is engaged with the inner wall surface of the engaging hole 532d, thereby restricting the sliding displacement of the sliding member 532 to the open slide position. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the regulation to be lifted while achieving miniaturization.

That is, means for restricting the sliding displacement of the sliding member 532 to the open slide position by utilizing the engagement hole 532d and the projection 533b for transmitting the sliding displacement of the sliding member 532 to the rotating member 533 to rotate it. Since it is not necessary to separately provide such means at another location, it is possible to reduce the size accordingly. In addition, by adopting a structure in which the projection 533b is engaged with the inner wall surface of the engagement hole 532d, unauthorized access to the engagement portion from the outside can be made difficult, and the regulation (engagement) can be released accordingly. It can be difficult.

Next, the bulging portions 524L and 524R of the left and right blade members 520L and 520R will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24. FIG. FIG. 23(a) is a front perspective view of the left wing member 520L, and FIG. 23(b) is a front perspective view of the right wing member 520R. 24(a) is a front view of the prize winning unit 500, and FIG. 24(b) is a sectional view of the prize winning port unit 500 taken along the line XXIVb-XXIVb of FIG. 24(a).

23(a) and 23(b), the left and right direction when viewed obliquely is reversed between FIG. 23(a) and FIG. 23(b). In addition, in FIG. 24(a), the front base 511 is shown transparently. Furthermore, in FIG. 24(b), the front base 511 that was seen transparent in FIG. 24(a) is illustrated as being opaque. In addition, in FIG. 24(b), the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the side surfaces 526L and 526R is indicated by the two-dot chain line together with the symbol of the virtual line KS1. Furthermore, the front direction of the imaginary line KS1 is illustrated by arrow F, and the back direction is illustrated by arrow B. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the bulging portion 524L formed on the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L is formed at the end on the through hole 521L side, and is formed on the front side (FIG. 24(b) arrow F side). On the other hand, the bulging portion 524R formed on the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R is formed at the end on the through-hole 521R side, and is continuous with the end face on the rear side (arrow B side in FIG. 24(b)). be done.

That is, the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L and the bulging portion 524R of the right wing member 520R are formed at different positions in the longitudinal direction (see FIG. 24(b)).

Further, the side surfaces 526L, 526R are formed with first regions that are continuous from the tip end side to the base end side of the feather members 520L, 520R, and are sized so as not to contact the game balls guided in the first regions. Bulging portions 524L and 524R are formed, and the first regions of side surfaces 526L and 526R of one blade member (one of the blade members 520L and 520R) of the pair of blade members 520L and 520R and the other blade are formed. The first regions of the side surfaces 526L and 526R of the members (the other of the feather members 520L and 520R) are arranged at different positions in the direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surfaces 526L and 526R. be.

In addition, the end portion of the bulging portion 524L on the far side from the through hole 521L is inclined toward the through hole 521L from the front side (lower side in FIG. 24(b)) to the rear side (upper side in FIG. 24(b)). formed by On the other hand, the bulging portion 524R is formed such that the end on the far side from the through hole 521R is inclined toward the through hole 521R side from the back side toward the front side.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26, the case where the game ball is thrown to the side surfaces 526L, 526R of the left and right feather members 520L, 520R will be described. 25(a) and 25(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. FIG. 26(a) and 26(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. FIG.

25(a), 25(b), 26(a) and 26(b) correspond to the sectional view of the prize winning port unit 500 in Fig. 24(b). 25(a) and 25(b), transition states of the game ball when the game ball is thrown from both sides of the first electric accessory 520 are illustrated in order. FIGS. 26(a) and 26(b) sequentially show transition states of the game ball when the game ball is thrown only to the left wing member 520L.

As shown in FIGS. 25(a) and 25(b), when the game ball is thrown to both sides of the first electric accessory 520, it rolls on the side surfaces 526L and 526R of the left and right feather members 520L and 520R. The game ball to be played can be rolled to different positions in the front-rear direction by the bulging portions 524L and 524R.

More specifically, as described above, the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L is formed so as to be connected to the end face on the front side. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L rolls on the side surface 526L while contacting the bulging portion 524L, thereby rolling to the back side.

In this case, the end of the bulging portion 524L on the far side from the through hole 521L extends toward the through hole 521L from the front side (lower side in FIG. 25(b)) to the rear side (upper side in FIG. 25(b)). Since it is formed to be inclined, when the game ball rolling on the side surface 526L comes into contact with the bulging portion 524L, it is possible to prevent the game ball from stopping due to increased resistance in the rolling direction.

On the other hand, the bulging portion 524R of the right wing member 520R is formed so as to be connected to the end face on the back side. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R rolls on the side surface 526R while contacting the bulging portion 524R, thereby rolling toward the front side.

In this case, the end of the bulging portion 524R on the far side from the through hole 521R extends from the rear side (upper side in FIG. 25(b)) toward the front side (lower side in FIG. 25(b)) toward the through hole 521R. Since it is formed to be inclined, when the game ball rolling on the side surface 526R comes into contact with the bulging portion 524R, it is possible to prevent the rolling of the game ball from being stopped due to an increase in resistance in the rolling direction.

Therefore, while the game ball rolling on the left wing member 520L side can be moved to the rear side, the game ball rolling on the right wing member 520R side can be moved to the front side. As a result, when the game balls are thrown from both the left and right sides, it is possible to prevent the game balls thrown from the left and right from colliding head-on.

Here, conventionally, it has a ball entrance (second winning hole 140) formed so that a game ball can enter, and a guide surface (side surfaces 526L, 526R) that guides the game ball to the ball entrance and is displaceable. A gaming machine is known that includes a guide member (first electric accessory 520) that can be formed. As the guide member, for example, a pair of feather members (feather members 520L, 520R ) are exemplified.

In addition, a first groove is provided on the entire guide surface (side surfaces 526L, 526R) of one blade member (one of the blade members 520L, 520R), and the guide surface (side surfaces 526L, 526R) of the other blade member is provided. A technique is disclosed in which a second groove is provided on each of the entire surfaces of the . According to this technique, since the first groove and the second groove are inclined in different directions, the guide surfaces (side surfaces 526L, 526R) of one blade member (one of the blade members 520L, 520R) And even if the game balls are guided (rolled) on the guide surfaces (side surfaces 526L, 526R) of one of the wing members (the other of the wing members 520L, 520R) at the same time, the game balls are guided (rolled) in different directions ( One side is the glass plate side and the other side is the game board side). Therefore, each game ball can enter the second winning hole 140 smoothly.

However, the conventional technique described above has a problem that the game ball cannot be sufficiently biased. In addition, the game ball entering from one side of the guide member (one of the feather members 520L and 520R) passes through the guide surface (side surfaces 526L and 526R) and passes through the other side of the guide member (one of the feather members 520L and 520R). In this case, the game ball is not entered into the ball entrance (second prize winning entrance 140), which impairs the interest of the player.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the first electric accessory 520 is a pair of bulging portions that protrude from the side surfaces 526L and 526R and are formed to be able to come into contact with the game balls rolling on the side surfaces 526L and 526R. 524L, 524R, and the pair of bulging portions 524L, 524R are arranged at different positions in the direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surfaces 526L, 526R. By bringing the game ball guided (rolled) into contact with the bulging portions 524L and 524R, the game ball can be reliably biased. As a result, the ball can be smoothly entered into the entrance.

In addition, the pair of bulging portions 524L, 524R are arranged at different positions in a direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surfaces 526L, 526R, so that the pair of feather members 520L, 520R A game ball entering from one side can be brought into contact with the bulging portions 524L and 524R. Therefore, the game ball entering from one side of the pair of feather members 520L and 520R (one of the feather members 520L and 520R) passes through the pair of feather members 520L and 520R (to the other of the feather members 520L and 520R). can be suppressed. As a result, the game ball is made to enter the ball entrance, and the interest of the player can be improved.

Further, the first electric accessory 520 is formed as a pair of feather members 520L, 520R arranged on both sides of the second prize winning port 140 and rotatably supported at the proximal end side, and a pair of bulging portions 524L, 524R. are projected from the side surfaces 526L and 526R of the pair of blade members 520L and 520R, respectively, and the bulge portions 524L and 524R of one blade member 520L and 520R of the pair of blade members 520L and 520R and the other blade member Since the bulging portions 524L and 524R in 520L and 520R are arranged in different positions in a direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surfaces 526L and 526R, the side surfaces 526L and 526R are guided (rolled). By bringing the game ball to be moved into contact with the bulging portions 524L and 524R, the game ball can be reliably biased. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enter the ball into the second winning hole 140 and to suppress ball clogging.

In addition, the bulging portions 524L, 524R of the wing members 520L, 520R on one side and the bulging portions 524L, 524R of the wing members 520L, 520R on the other side are arranged along the side surfaces 526L, 526R in the direction in which the game ball is guided (wings By arranging the positions of the members 520L and 520R in different positions in a direction orthogonal to the direction from the tip side to the base end side of the members 520L and 520R, the game ball that has entered the side surfaces 526L and 526R of one feather member 520L and 520R When reaching the side surfaces 5.26L, 526R of the feather members 520L, 520R, the game ball can be brought into contact with the bulging portions 524L, 524R of the other feather members 520L, 520R. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the game ball that has entered the side surfaces 526L and 526R of one feather member 520L and 520R from passing through the side surfaces 526L and 526R of the other feather member. As a result, the game ball is made to enter the second winning hole 140, and the interest of the player can be improved.

In other words, the left and right feather members 520L, 520R are formed with the bulging portions 524L, 524R at different positions in the front-rear direction, respectively, so that the game ball rolling from the left and right can be rolled at different positions in the front-rear direction. can be moved. Therefore, when the game ball is thrown from both the left and right sides, it is possible to prevent the game balls thrown from the left and right from colliding head-on. As a result, it is possible to suppress the time it takes for the game ball to enter the second winning hole 140 .

That is, by making the collision positions of the game balls different in the front-rear direction on the left and right, as shown in FIG. 25(b) upper side). On the other hand, the game ball on the right side, which has been brought to the front side, tends to rebound to the front side (lower side in FIG. 25(b)) due to the collision.

Therefore, one (in the present embodiment, rolling the left wing member 520L) game ball can be easily entered into the second winning hole 140, and the other game ball is bounced back to the front side, so that a collision It is possible to suppress the game ball from being too far away from the second winning hole 140 when the game ball is played. Therefore, it is possible to speed up the entry of the second game ball into the second winning hole 140 later. As a result, when the game balls are thrown to the left and right sides of the first electric accessory 520, the time required for the game balls on both sides to enter the second prize winning opening 140 can be shortened, and the progress of the game can be made smooth. can proceed.

In addition, since the bulging portions 524L and 524R protrude from the side surfaces 526L and 526R at positions closer to the proximal side (through hole 521 side) than the tip side of the feather members 520L and 520R, they are guided to the side surfaces 526L and 526R. A rolling area can be secured until the game ball to be played contacts the bulging portions 524L and 524R. Therefore, the decrease in rolling speed of the game ball can be suppressed accordingly, and the ball can enter the second winning hole 140 smoothly.

Furthermore, the bulging portions 524L and 524R protrude from the side surfaces 526L and 526R at positions closer to the proximal side than the tip side of the blade members 520L and 520R, so that the bulging portions 524L and 524R are abutted and biased. It is possible to prevent the course of the game ball from returning to the course before deviation until it reaches the front of the ball entrance (end of the guide surface). That is, it is possible to easily throw the game ball from the side surfaces 526L, 526R to the ball entrance in the biased state.

In addition, as described above, the side surfaces 526L and 526R are formed with the first regions that are continuous from the tip side to the base end side of the feather members 520L and 520R, and the game balls guided in the first regions do not come into contact with each other. Since the bulging portions 524L and 524R are formed with the size of It can be avoided, and the ball can be smoothly entered into the second winning hole 140.例文帳に追加

In this case, the first region of the side surface 526L, 526R of one of the pair of feather members 520L, 520R (one of the feather members 520L, 520R) and the other feather member (either of the feather members 520L, 520R) or the other) and the first region of the side surfaces 526L and 526R are arranged in different positions in a direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surfaces 526L and 526R, so that one feather member (feather The game ball simultaneously guides the first areas of the side surfaces 526L and 526R of the member 520L and 520R) and the side surfaces 526L and 526R of the other feather member (the other of the feather members 520L and 520R). Even when (rolling), the game balls can be biased in mutually different directions, and the balls can enter the second winning hole 140 smoothly.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 26(a) and 26(b), when the game ball is thrown to one of the left and right feather members 520L and 520R, the other left and right feather members 520L and 520R By bringing the game ball into contact with the bulging part 524L or the bulging part 524R, the game ball rolls on the side surfaces 526L, 526R of the other left and right feather members 520L, 520R and is suppressed from falling from the tip. can.

More specifically, as described above, the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L is formed so as to be connected to the end face on the front side. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L rolls on the side surface 526L while contacting the bulging portion 524L, thereby rolling to the back side. As a result, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L can be moved toward the bulging portion 524R formed in the right wing member 520R.

In other words, the bulging portions 524L and 524R formed on the left and right wing members 520L and 520R are formed at different positions in the front-rear direction. The game ball rolling to the winning opening side can be rolled (pulled) to a position coinciding in the longitudinal direction with the bulging portions 524L and 524R formed on either the left wing member 520L or the right wing member 520R. .

Therefore, when the game ball rolls on the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L, the game ball is rolled to the back side (pulled together), and substantially coincides with the bulging portion 524R of the right wing member 520R in the front-rear direction. can be positioned. On the other hand, when the game ball rolls on the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R, the game ball rolls (pulls) to the front side and substantially coincides with the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L in the front-rear direction. can be positioned.

As a result, when the rolling speed of the game ball rolling on either the side surface 526L or the side surface 526R is fast, the game ball is prevented from riding on the side surfaces 526L, 526R of the other left wing member 520L or the right wing member 520R. can be suppressed.

Here, in the conventional winning port unit 500, since the side surfaces 526L and 526R of the first electric role object 520 are formed as smooth surfaces, a game ball thrown from one of the first electric role objects 520 is thrown from the other side. There is a problem that the ball rides on the feather members 520L and 520R and is thrown from the tip of the other feather member 520L and 520R to the flow-down region.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the bulging portions 524L and 524R are formed at different positions in the front-rear direction on the first electric accessory 520, so that the game ball rolling from one feather member is It can be rolled to a position substantially coinciding with the bulging portions 524L and 524R formed on the other blade member in the front-rear direction. Therefore, by making the game ball rolling on one of the feather members 520L and 520R collide with the bulging portions 524L and 524R of the other feather member 520L and 520R, the game ball rolls on the side surfaces 526L and 526L of the other feather member 520L and 520R. It is possible to prevent the ball from running on the 526R and being thrown from the tips of the feather members 520L and 520R to the game area.

Next, the concave portion 525L and the engaging portion 511b2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. FIG. 27(a) is a top view of the winning opening unit 500, and FIG. 27(b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 along line XXVIIb-XXVIIb of FIG. 27(a). Figures 28(a) and 28(b) are partial enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500 in the range XXVIII of Figure 27(b). 28(a) shows the first electric accessory 520 in the first state, and FIG. 28(b) shows the state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state.

As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the engaging portions 511b2 formed on the second projecting portion 511b of the front base 511 are arranged inside the concave portions 525L and 525R of the left and right feather members 520L and 520R, respectively. .

In the first state, the engaging portion 511b2 and the ends of the recessed portions 525L and 525R on the side of the bulging portions 524L and 524R (side surfaces 526L and 526R) are in contact (see FIG. 28A). In the second state, the engaging portion 511b2 and the ends of the recessed portions 525L and 525R opposite to the bulging portions 524L and 524R (side surfaces 526L and 526R) are in contact with each other.

That is, when the first electric accessory 520 is displaced from the first state to the second state or from the second state to the first state, the engaging portion 511b2 contacts the ends of the concave portions 525L and 525R. By doing so, the amount of displacement can be regulated.

Furthermore, in the first state, the rotational force acting around the axis of the through holes 521L and 521R causes the corners far from the through holes 521L and 521R of the feather members 520L and 520R to move toward the second winning opening 140 due to their own weight. direction of rotation. Therefore, when the engaging portion 511b2 and the ends of the recessed portions 525L and 525R on the bulging portions 524L and 524R (side surfaces 526L and 526R) come into contact with each other, the feather members 520L and 520R rotate under their own weight. can be suppressed, and the feather members 520L and 520R can be held in the first state.

In addition, in the first state, the ends of the bulging portions 524L and 524R (side surfaces 526L and 526R) of the recessed portions 525L and 525R are brought into contact with the engaging portion 511b2. The side surfaces of 524L and 524R can be brought into contact with the engaging portion 511b2. Therefore, since the rigidity of the abutting portions can be increased by the amount of the bulging portions 524L and 524R, it is possible to prevent the blade members 520L and 520R from coming into contact with the engaging portion 511b2 and being damaged.

That is, in this embodiment, the base member 510 that rotatably supports the blade members 520L and 520R is provided, and the base member 510 contacts the blade members 520L and 520R to rotate the blade members 520L and 520R. Since the regulating engaging portion 511b2 is provided and the bulging portions 524L and 524R of the feather members 520L and 520R are brought into contact with the engaging portion 511b2 of the base member 510, damage to the feather members 520L and 520R can be suppressed. That is, since the bulging portions 524L and 524R are portions protruding from the blade members 520L and 520R (side surfaces 526L and 526R), the portions of the blade members 520L and 520R whose rigidity is relatively high are replaced by the base member 510. Since it can be used as a stopper to be brought into contact with the engaging portion 511b2, damage to the feather members 520L and 520R can be suppressed accordingly.

Furthermore, the bulging portions 524L and 524R have side surfaces substantially flush with the proximal side surfaces of the blade members 520L and 520R, and in the closed state, substantially flush with the proximal side surfaces of the blade members 520L and 520R. Since the side surfaces of the bulging portions 524L and 524R formed on one side are in contact with at least the engaging portion 511b2 of the base member 510, the portion (the bulging portion 524L) far from the rotation shaft (through holes 521L and 521R) , 524R) can be brought into contact with the engaging portion 511b2 of the base member 510, the reaction force input from the engaging portion 511b2 to the feather members 520L and 520R can be reduced. Therefore, damage to the feather members 520L and 520R can be suppressed. Further, for example, the engaging portion 511b2 of the base member 510 is separated from the second winning opening 140 as compared with the case where the projecting tip surfaces of the bulging portions 524L and 524R are brought into contact with the engaging portion 511b2 of the base member 510. , and a space that serves as a flow path to the second winning port 140 can be secured. In addition to the side surfaces of the bulging portions 524L and 524R, the proximal side surfaces of the feather members 520L and 520R may also be brought into contact with the engaging portion 511b2 of the base member 510 . In this case, the surface pressure can be reduced, and damage to the feather members 520L and 520R can be further suppressed.

When the feather members 520L and 520R are closed, the bulging portions 524L and 524R are arranged below the standing portion 511b1 formed on the front base 511 (lower in FIG. 28(a)). In other words, the erected portion 511b1 is arranged between the opposing bulging portions 524L and 524R.

Here, the pair of feather members 520L and 520R are arranged at positions where the facing distance between the side surfaces 526L and 526R in the closed state is larger than the diameter of the game ball so as not to sandwich the game ball. In this case, if the bulging portions 524L and 524R project from the side surfaces 526L and 526R, the projection height of the bulging portions 524L and 524R is increased so that the game ball is not caught between the bulging portions 524L and 524R. The pair of feather members 520L and 520R need to be spaced apart further, and the space required for arranging the pair of feather members 520L and 520R increases.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the erected portion 511b1 is positioned between the opposed bulging portions 524L and 524R in the closed state, and the pair of feather members 520L and 520R are arranged so that the bulging portion 524L is positioned as viewed in the direction of the rotation shaft. , 524R are not formed, the interval between the side surfaces 526L and 526R is made larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the interval between the bulging portions 524L and 524R is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. The space required for arranging the pair of feather members 520L and 520R can be suppressed.

That is, even if the pair of feather members 520L and 520R begin to close (even if they start to shift to the closed state) while the game ball is being guided (rolled) on the side surfaces 526L and 526R, the bulging portions 524L and 524L By locating the standing portion 511b1 between the facing portions 524R, it is possible to discharge the game ball from the facing portion between the expanded portions 524L and 524R and prevent the game ball from being caught between the expanded portions 524L and 524R. . The game ball ejected from between the opposing bulging portions 524L and 524R by the standing portion 511b1 is positioned between the opposing sides 526L and 526R in the area where the bulging portions 524L and 524R are not formed, Since the facing distance at such a position is made larger than the diameter of the game ball, the game ball is not caught (see FIG. 27(a)). As a result, the facing interval between the bulging portions 524L and 524R can be made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the space required for disposing the pair of feather members 520L and 520R can be suppressed. In other words, the pair of feather members 520L, 520R can be arranged in a space equivalent to the space required for arrangement of conventional products that do not protrude the bulging portions 524L, 524R from the side surfaces 526L, 526R.

On the other hand, in the second state, the rotational force acting around the axis of the through holes 521L521R rotates the corners of the blade members 520L, 520R far from the through holes 521L, 521R downward in the gravity direction due to their own weight. be done. Therefore, by abutting the engaging portion 511b2 and the ends of the bulging portions 524L, 524R (side surfaces 526L, 526R) of the recessed portions 525L, 525R on the opposite side, the feather members 520L, 520R are moved by their own weight. Rotation can be suppressed, and the feather members 520L and 520R can be held in the second state.

Therefore, the restriction of displacement of the feather members 520L and 520R can be performed at locations other than the driving portion 533d and the protrusions 523L and 523R described above, so that damage to the driving portion 533d and the protrusions 523L and 523R can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the size of the rotating member 533 because there is no need to increase the size of the parts in order to increase the rigidity of the rotating member 533 . As a result, the size of the drive unit 530 can be reduced.

In the open state, the upper surface of the standing portion 511b1 is positioned below the lower ends of the side surfaces 526L and 526R in the direction of gravity and above the lower end of the second prize winning opening 140 in the direction of gravity. The game ball guided to 526R can be thrown to the upper surface of the standing portion 511b1, and by rolling the upper surface of the standing portion 511b1, the ball can enter the second winning hole 140 (FIG. 28(b)). )reference).

Furthermore, as described above, the base member 511f including an LED that emits light toward the feather members 520L and 520R (the second winning opening 140) is arranged on the second projecting portion 511b. As shown in FIG. 28(a), in the first state, the concave portions 525L and 525R are positioned downward in the direction of gravity. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED of the base member 511f can be easily made incident on the inside of the feather members 520L and 520R.

That is, by irradiating the recessed portions of the recessed portions 525L and 525R with the light of the LED, it is possible to suppress the reflection of the light of the LED on the outer surfaces of the feather members 520L and 520R. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for light to enter the interior of the feather members 520L and 520R. Therefore, it is possible to increase the amount of light emitted from the inside of the feather members 520L and 520R to the player side. As a result, it is possible to make the feather members 520L and 520R easily visible to the player even when the front base 511 made of a transparent material is interposed.

Further, when the feather members 520L and 520R are in the second state shown in FIG. 28(b), the concave portions 525L and 525R are positioned substantially at the same position in the vertical direction of the through holes 521L and 521R. . Therefore, the game ball thrown to the front side of the second winning hole 140 can be easily illuminated by the LED of the base member 511f.

That is, the recessed portions of the recessed portions 525L and 525R are positioned substantially at the same position in the vertical direction of the through holes 521L and 521R, so that the gap between the opposed first electric accessories 520 can be increased. . Therefore, the game ball thrown to the front side of the second winning hole can be easily illuminated by the LED of the base member 511f. As a result, the player can easily see the game ball entering the second winning hole 140 even through the front base 511 made of a transparent material.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the manner in which the winning opening unit 500 is arranged on the game board 13 will be described. FIG. 29 is a partially enlarged view of the game board 13 in the range XXIX of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 29, the prize winning unit 500 is arranged with a predetermined gap from the inner edge of the inner rail 76 .

Inside the lower end portion of the inner rail 76, a first out port 71 is formed for recovering game balls flowing down the conventional game area. Therefore, the lower end portion of the inner rail 76 is formed with a curved portion 76a curved with a curvature larger than the curvature of the entire inner rail 76 in order to facilitate gathering of game balls.

Therefore, the gap between the prize winning port unit 500 and the inner rail 76 is increased at the lower end portion of the inner reel (the portion where the curved portion 76a is formed). As described above, the fastening between the front base 511 and the back base 512 of the prize winning opening unit 500 is performed by obliquely inserting a screwdriver or the like into the concave portion 511b3 from below the front base 511 .

The through-hole 511b4 is formed in the second protruding portion 511b that is formed substantially in the center of the front base 511 in the left-right direction. Therefore, the through hole 511b4 can be positioned above the curved portion 76a (upper in FIG. 29). Therefore, when inserting a driver or the like obliquely into the recessed portion 511b3 from below the front base 511, the gap between the winning opening unit 500 formed by the curved portion 76a can be used, so that the front base can be inserted from the front side of the game board 13. 511 can be easily detached from the rear base 512.例文帳に追加

In addition, since the inner rail 76 makes it difficult for the player to see the inside of the recessed portion 511b3, the player's interest is reduced when the player sees the screw or the like that fastens the front base 511 and the rear base 512. can be suppressed.

Next, the decorative design display device 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 36. FIG.

First, the configuration of the decorative pattern display device 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 33. FIG. 30(a) is a front view of the decorative design display device 800, and FIG. 30(b) is a cross-sectional view of the decorative design display device 800 along line XXXb-XXXb of FIG. 30(a). 31 is an exploded perspective front view of the decorative design display device 800, and FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective rear view of the decorative design display device 800. FIG. 33(a) is a front view with the inner reel 811 deployed, and FIG. 33(b) is a front view with the outer reel 821 deployed.

As shown in FIGS. 30 to 33, the decorative pattern display device 800 includes a rotatable inner reel unit 810, an outer reel unit 820 accommodating part of the inner reel unit 810, and an inner reel unit 810. and an accommodation unit 880 that accommodates the outer reel unit 820 therein; a drive motor KM1 that is attached to the accommodation unit 880 and drives the inner reel unit 810 to rotate; It mainly includes a driving motor KM2 for rotational driving and a backlight unit 830 disposed inside the inner reel unit 810. As shown in FIG.

The inner reel unit 810 includes a substantially cylindrical inner reel 811 penetrating left and right, a rotating member 812 disposed on one end side of the opening of the inner reel 811 (left side in FIG. 30(a)), and an annular member 813 arranged on the other end side of the opening (on the right side in FIG. 30(a)).

The inner reel 811 is formed by winding a strip-shaped sheet made of transparent resin along the circumferential direction. As shown in FIG. 33(a), the inner reel 811 has its longitudinal direction oriented vertically, and decorative patterns are arranged at regular intervals. The inner reels 811 of the three decorative pattern display devices 800 arranged side by side have different decorative patterns.

The rotating member 812 includes a hub 812a formed in a substantially disk shape, a rim 812b formed in a substantially annular shape having a larger diameter than the hub 812a, and connecting the outer peripheral surface of the hub 812a and the inner peripheral surface of the rim 812b. It is formed primarily with spokes 812c that engage.

The hub 812a and the rim 812b have their axes formed in the same straight line, and are arranged at different positions in the axial direction. Therefore, the spokes 812c are axially inclined toward the radially outer side of the hub 812a.

The rim 812 b is a portion to which one end side of the inner reel 811 is attached on its outer peripheral surface, and is formed to have an outer diameter substantially equal to the inner diameter of the inner reel 811 . In other words, the circumferential dimension of the outer peripheral portion of the rim 812b is set substantially equal to the longitudinal dimension of the unfolded inner reel 811 . Therefore, the inner reel 811 can be disposed (attached) to the outer peripheral surface of the rim 812b without gaps.

The hub 812a is arranged inside the inner reel 811 . That is, the spokes 812c that connect the hub 812a and the rim 812b are formed so as to incline toward the other end of the opening of the inner reel 811 (annular member 813, which will be described later) as they go radially inward. This allows the hub 812 a to be arranged inside the inner reel 811 . The spokes 812c are formed from a plurality of rod-shaped bodies extending from the rim 812b to the hub 812a, and have inner openings 812c1 that open between adjacent spokes 812c in the circumferential direction.

The position of the hub 812a in the axial direction is substantially the same as the center position of the inner reel 811 in the left-right direction. Thereby, a space on the side of the annular member 813 can be secured from the hub 812a. A driving motor KM1 that imparts rotational driving force to the inner reel unit 810 is connected to the hub 812a.

The drive motor KM1 has a thickness dimension in the axial direction of the inner reel 811 that is approximately half the axial dimension of the inner reel 811 . As described above, the hub 812a is located at substantially the same position in the axial direction as the center position of the inner reel 811 in the left-right direction. Since the space is formed, most of the drive motor KM1 can be arranged inside the inner reel 811 . As a result, the dimensions of the inner reel unit 810 and the drive motor KM1 in the left-right direction (the axial direction of the inner reel 811) can be reduced.

Further, the drive motor KM1 has a rotary shaft arranged in a straight line coaxial with the shaft of the hub 812a. That is, the shaft of the hub 812a is connected to the rotation shaft of the drive motor KM1. As described above, since the axis of the hub 812a and the axis of the rim 812b are arranged on the same straight line, the inner reel 811 can be rotated around the axis of the inner reel 811 by the rotation of the drive motor KM1. As a result, the pattern decorated on the inner reel 811 can be visually recognized by the player as being displaced in the vertical direction.

The annular member 813 is formed in an annular shape with an outer diameter substantially equal to the outer diameter of the rim 812b. The inner peripheral surface of the annular member 813 on the other end side of the opening of the inner reel 811 (the right side in FIG. 30(a)) is attached to the outer peripheral surface thereof.

Here, since the inner reel 811 is formed from a transparent resin sheet as described above, its rigidity is relatively low. Therefore, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotationally displaced, it may be deformed by the centrifugal force, wind pressure, etc. of the rotation, and the player may not be able to accurately recognize the patterns decorated around it.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the inner reel 811 has one end connected to the rim 812b of the rotating member 812 and the other end connected to the annular member 813, so that the inner reel unit 810 rotates. At that time, it becomes difficult to displace due to the centrifugal force and wind pressure. As a result, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotationally displaced, it is possible for the player to accurately recognize the pattern decorated around the inner reel 811 .

Also, since the inner reel 811 can be formed from a sheet, the load on the inner reel 811 can be reduced accordingly. Therefore, the load applied to the drive motor KM1 when rotating the inner reel unit 810 can be reduced. As a result, the rotation of the inner reel unit 810 can be started smoothly.

The outer reel unit 820 includes a cylindrical outer reel 821, a disk-shaped hub 823 having a smaller diameter than the outer reel 821, and one end of the opening of the outer reel 821 (Fig. 30(a)). ) and the spokes 822 connecting the inner peripheral surface of the left side) and the outer peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 .

The outer reel 821 has an inner diameter larger than the outer shape of the inner reel 811 and a width dimension in the axial direction larger than the axial dimension of the inner reel 811 . The inner reel 811 is made of a transparent resin material and has a predetermined thickness in the radial direction. The outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 is decorated with a pattern, and the description of the decoration mode will be given later.

The hub 823 has its axis arranged coaxially with the outer reel 821 and is arranged at a substantially central position in the axial direction of the outer reel 821 . Further, the hub 823 is connected with a driving motor KM2 that imparts rotational driving force to the outer reel unit 820 .

The spokes 822 are formed to be inclined in the axial direction of the outer reel 821 toward the radially outer side of the hub 823, so that the spokes 822 and one end side of the opening of the outer reel 821 (the left side in FIG. 30(a)) are inclined. A space can be formed between The spokes 822 are formed from a plurality of rod-shaped bodies extending from the hub 823 to the edge 824, and have openings 822a between adjacent spokes 822 in the circumferential direction.

The drive motor KM2 has a thickness dimension in the axial direction of the outer reel 821 that is approximately half the axial dimension of the outer reel 821 . As described above, the axial position of the hub 823 is substantially the same as the center of the outer reel 821 in the left-right direction, and a space is provided at one end of the opening of the outer reel 821 (left in the left-right direction in FIG. 30(a)). is formed, most of the drive motor KM2 can be arranged inside the outer reel 821. As a result, the dimensions of the outer reel unit 820 and the drive motor KM2 in the lateral direction (the axial direction of the outer reel 821) can be reduced.

The accommodation unit 880 is formed in a box-like body with an open front side, and can accommodate the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 therein. The housing unit 880 mainly includes a pair of left and right side wall portions 881, and an upper wall portion 882, a lower wall portion 883, and a rear wall portion 884 arranged at the edges between the pair of side wall portions 881 facing each other. It is formed.

The side wall portion 881 is formed of a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the side. lateral direction) is smaller than the outer diameter of the outer drum.

In the side wall portion 881, a drive motor KM2 for driving the outer reel unit 820 is arranged on the right side (inner surface) of the side wall portion 881 on the left side in front view (left side in FIG. 30(a)). A driving motor KM1 for driving the inner reel unit 810 is disposed on the left surface (inner surface) of the side wall portion 881 on the right side. That is, the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 are rotationally displaced with respect to the side wall portion 881 .

Further, the side wall portion 881 has a bulging portion 881 a that bulges in a curved shape corresponding to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 on the side surface on the front side. As a result, light emitted from a backlight unit 830 (to be described later) can be prevented from escaping from the left and right outer sides of the inner reel 811 .

Moreover, the side wall portion 881 is formed of a metal material. Thereby, the rigidity of the housing unit 880 can be increased. In addition, the heat generated inside the housing unit 880 can be discharged to the outside of the housing unit 880 by forming the housing unit 880 from a metal material that generally has a higher thermal conductivity than a resin material. As a result, it is possible to suppress breakage of components due to heat accumulation inside the housing unit 880 .

The upper wall portion 882 and the lower wall portion 883 are plate members that form the upper and lower side surfaces of the housing unit 880. The upper portion (FIG. 30(b) upper portion) of the side wall portion 881 and the lower portion (FIG. 30(b) bottom) edge and along each edge.

The width dimension of the upper wall portion 882 and the lower wall portion in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 30(a)) is formed smaller than the width dimension of the outer reel 821 in the left-right direction (axial direction). As a result, the distance dimension between the opposed side wall portions 881 can be ensured, and the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 can be arranged between the opposed sides.

In addition, a plurality of through holes are formed in the upper wall portion 882 and the lower wall portion 883 so as to penetrate in the radial direction with respect to the axis of the outer reel 821 . Thereby, the fluidity of air between the inside and the outside of the housing unit 880 can be enhanced. As a result, it is possible to prevent heat from accumulating inside the housing unit 880 and to prevent the parts from being damaged by the heat of the housing unit 880 .

The rear wall portion 884 is a plate member that forms the side surface of the accommodation unit 880 on the rear side, and is arranged along the edge of the side wall portion 881 on the rear side (the right side in FIG. 30(b)).

The rear wall portion 884 has an opening 884a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position that intersects the axis of the outer reel 821 in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 30(b)). and a standing portion 884b that is bent and erected toward the front side.

The width of the opening 884a in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 30(a)) is larger than the width of the outer reel 821 in the axial direction. This can prevent the outer reel 821 from colliding with the rear wall portion 884 when the outer reel 821 moves (rocks) in the front-rear direction due to the inertial force of the rotational motion, vibration, or the like.

That is, when the outer reel 821 is moved (swayed) in the front-rear direction due to the inertial force of the rotational motion, vibration, etc., a part of the rear side (the right side in FIG. 30(b)) of the outer reel 821 is opened 884a can be inserted inside the As a result, the outer reel 821 can be prevented from colliding with the rear wall portion 884 .

In addition, the opening 884a can increase air flow between the inside and the outside of the storage unit 880 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the heat from remaining inside the housing unit 880 and to prevent the parts from being damaged by the heat of the housing unit 880 .

Here, if an opening 884a larger than the axial width of the outer reel 821 is formed in the rear wall portion 884, the rigidity of the rear wall portions 884 on both sides of the opening 884a is reduced. As a result, the rear wall portion 884 may bend.

In this case, it is conceivable to increase the rigidity of the rear wall portions 884 on the left and right sides of the opening 884a by increasing the distance between the side wall portions 881 facing each other. There is a problem that the unit itself of the device 800 becomes large.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, standing portions 884b are formed on both left and right sides of the rear wall portion 884 at the position where the opening 884a is formed. Thereby, the rigidity of the rear wall portion 884 can be increased. As a result, bending of the rear wall portion 884 can be suppressed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the rear wall portion 884 is made of a metal material, and the distance dimension from the left and right ends of the opening 884a to the left and right ends of the rear wall portion 884 is sufficiently small. Therefore, it is possible to increase the rate of plastic deformation when forming the left and right ends of the rear wall portion 884 . As a result, rigidity can be increased.

The backlight unit 830 is a unit that emits light from the inside of the inner reel 811 so that the player can easily recognize the pattern of the inner reel 811 , and is arranged inside the front of the inner reel 811 .

The backlight unit 830 is formed in an arc shape when viewed from the side, and the axis of the arc is arranged coaxially with the axis of the inner reel 811 . Further, the axial width dimension of the backlight unit 830 is set to be substantially the same as the axial width dimension of the inner reel 811 .

In addition, the length dimension L4 in the circumferential direction of the backlight unit 830 on the inner reel 811 side is formed to have a length corresponding to three patterns to be decorated on the inner reel 811, which will be described later.

Further, the backlight unit 830 has three concave portions 831 arranged in parallel in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral surface thereof. Therefore, partition plates 832 are formed between the concave portions 831 so as to stand radially outward of the backlight unit 830 .

A base member 833 having an LED that emits light is disposed on the radially inner side surface of each concave portion 831 , and the LED can emit light outward in the radial direction of the backlight unit 830 .

Power can be supplied to each base member 833 independently, and the inner reel 811 can partially emit light. In this case, each base member 833 is arranged in an area (recessed portion 831) surrounded on four sides, so that the light emitted from the LED of the base member 833 enters the area on the front surface of the other base member 833. can be suppressed. Therefore, the inner reel 811 can be made easier to partially emit light.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, patterns to be decorated on the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 will be described. 33(a) is a front view with the inner reel 811 deployed, and FIG. 33(b) is a front view with the outer reel 821 deployed.

As shown in FIG. 33(a), the inner reel 811 is provided with a plurality of patterns drawn at regular intervals in the circumferential direction (vertical direction in FIG. 33). As described above, the circumferential dimension L5 of one pattern is set to one third of the circumferential dimension L4 of the backlight unit 830 (L5×3=L4).

In addition, the inner reel 811 is made of a material that can transmit light as a whole. In particular, the pattern portion (for example, the display of "7") has a higher light transmittance than the surrounding blank portion. Therefore, by irradiating light from the LED of the backlight unit 830 arranged inside the inner reel 811, the light of the LED can be transmitted through the inner reel 811 and the pattern portion can be highlighted. Therefore, if the LED of the backlight unit 830 is in a light-emitting state, the inner reel 811 is illuminated even if the inner reel 811 is not irradiated with outside light (light inside the store or light from other LEDs arranged in the pachinko machine 10). The pattern can be visually recognized by the player.

In this embodiment, 10 patterns of 5 types are continuously drawn in the circumferential direction, and up to 3 patterns can be visually recognized from the player side by the segment display device 600, which will be described later. As described above, each decorative pattern display device 800 is decorated with different patterns, and the player can see up to nine patterns.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 displays 3×3 symbols on the inner reel 811, thereby setting a total of 5 jackpot effective lines, 3 parallel in the horizontal direction and 2 crossed in the diagonal direction. be done. By stopping the inner reel 811 so that three "7" symbols are aligned on any of the activated lines, the player can be informed of the occurrence of a big win state.

As shown in FIG. 33(b), the outer reel 821 has a non-decorated surface 821a that is not decorated and a non-transmissive surface 821b that is decorated so as not to transmit light.

The non-decorated surface 821a is not decorated, so that light can be transmitted therethrough. That is, by forming the outer reel 821 from a transparent material (a transparent resin material in this embodiment), a non-decorative surface 821a that allows light to pass through is formed. In addition, the non-decorative surface 821a may be formed so as to be able to transmit light, and for example, it may be provided with a translucent decoration capable of transmitting light.

The decorative symbol display device 800 rotates the outer reel unit 820 to turn the non-decorative surface 821a toward the player, thereby allowing the player to visually recognize the symbols of the inner reel 811 arranged inside the outer reel 821. can. That is, the player can visually recognize the pattern of the inner reel 811 through the non-decorative surface 821a of the outer reel 821. FIG.

The non-transmissive surface 821b is made non-transmissive to light by applying a black decoration to the outer peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 33(b)). The non-transmissive surface 821b is formed such that its length in the circumferential direction (the length in the vertical direction in FIG. 33(b)) is equal to or greater than three patterns decorated on the inner reel 811. As shown in FIG.

As described above, in this embodiment, three symbols of the inner reel 811 can be displayed on the player side. Therefore, the length in the circumferential direction of the non-transmissive surface 821b is equal to or more than three patterns to be decorated on the inner reel 811, so that the outer reel unit 820 is rotated and the non-transmissive surface of the outer reel 821 is moved by the player. By arranging it on the side, the inner reel 811 can be made invisible from the player side.

In addition, the length in the circumferential direction of the non-transmitting surface 821b is not limited to three or more symbols decorated on the inner reel 811, and the decoration of the inner reel 811 can be made invisible from the player side. It is sufficient if the length is formed. That is, it is sufficient that the non-transmissive surface 821b is formed for the circumferential length of the inner reel 811 that can be visually recognized from the player side.

In addition, the non-transmissive surface 821b includes a transmissive area 821b1 that can partially transmit light, and a pattern 821b2 decorated with a pattern.

The transmissive region 821b1 is formed in a rectangular shape elongated in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 33) when viewed from the front. The transmissive area 821b1 is a part that performs 7-segment display by being combined with a segment display device 600, which will be described later, and can partially transmit light passing through the inner reel 811 to the player side. This can form part of a 7-segment display, which will be described later.

The pattern 821b2 is formed with a length in the circumferential direction corresponding to three patterns to be decorated on the inner reel 811, and each pattern 821b2 of each decorative pattern display device 800 is horizontally aligned in parallel with the outer reel. By stopping 821, the player can be taught that a jackpot condition has occurred.

Further, as described above, since the periphery of the pattern 821b2 is non-transmissive, it is possible to make the inner reel 811 invisible to the player. Therefore, it is possible to stop the symbols of the inner reel 811 on the effective line while providing an effect in which three symbols of the symbols 821b2 are aligned. Therefore, after the player gazes at the outer reel 821 by the rotating effect of the outer reel 821, the player can be made to gaze at the inner reel 811 almost at the same time when the effect of the outer reel 821 ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest.

Next, the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. FIG. FIG. 34 is a cross-sectional view of the decorative design display device 800 taken along line XXXIV-XXXIV of FIG. 30(a). FIG. 35 is a partially enlarged view of the decorative design display device 800 in the range XXXV of FIG. 36(a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member 812, and FIG. 36(b) is a sectional view of the rotating member 812 taken along line XXXVIb-XXXVIb of FIG. 36(a).

As shown in FIGS. 34 to 36, a predetermined gap is formed between the inner reel 811 of the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel 821 of the outer reel unit 820 facing each other. In addition, the distance between the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810 and the edge 824 protruding radially at one end of the opening of the outer reel 821 of the outer reel unit 820 (left side in FIG. 34) is a predetermined distance. A gap is formed.

A hub 812 a of the rotating member 812 is formed with a protrusion 812 a 1 protruding toward the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820 . The protrusions 812a1 are formed at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the hub 812a (in this embodiment, they are formed on extensions of the spokes 812c (see FIG. 36)). The protrusion 812a1 is formed in a mountain shape with both sides inclined in the circumferential direction of the hub 812a. Therefore, by rotating the inner reel unit 810, wind can be generated by the projection 812a1.

Here, conventionally, a rotatably formed first reel (outer reel unit 820) and a rotatably formed first reel (outer reel unit 820) are arranged substantially concentrically inside the first reel (outer reel unit 820). A gaming machine with a second reel (inner reel unit 810) (that is, with a double reel structure) is known. Also known is a technique for removing and cleaning dust adhering to the display surface of the reel by bringing a rotating brush into contact with the outer peripheral surface (display surface) of the reel and causing the rotating member to follow the rotation of the reel. there is

However, the double reel structure has the problem of being difficult to clean. That is, in the double reel structure, a space for disposing the rotating brush described above is provided between the outer reel (first reel (outer reel unit 820)) and the inner reel (second reel (inner reel unit 810)). cannot be secured, the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel and the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel (second reel) cannot be cleaned.

That is, since the opposing space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 is narrowly formed, in order to remove the dust that has entered and adhered to the opposing space, it is necessary to remove the decorative pattern display. Cleaning is difficult because the device 800 must be disassembled.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, the projection 812a1 can push out air to generate wind. The pushed air (wind) collides with the edge 824 of the opposing outer reel 821 and flows into the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 .

In this case, the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 facing each other is narrower than the space on the inner peripheral side of the edge 824 and the hub 812a. 824 and the space on the inner peripheral side of the hub 812a to the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 facing each other. As a result, dust (dust) sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and dust that is about to stick can be blown off. As a result, it is possible to prevent dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 .

That is, in this embodiment, the outer reel unit 820 includes a cylindrical outer reel 821 and an edge portion 824 projecting radially inward from one axial side of the outer reel 821. 810 includes an inner reel 811 which is formed in a cylindrical shape and whose outer surface faces the inner surface of the outer reel 821 at a predetermined interval; The hub 812a has an outer surface facing the inner surface of the edge portion 824 with a predetermined distance therebetween. The protrusion 812a1 is circumferentially displaced between the hub 812a and the outer surface of the hub 812a to generate wind pressure. be able to. As a result, dust can be removed by air flow, and the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral surface can be cleaned.

Here, if an opening is formed in at least one of the edge portion 824 or the hub 812a, or if a part of the circumferential direction is partially divided, the inner surface of the edge portion 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a are separated. The wind pressure generated by the displacement of the projection 812a1 in the circumferential direction escapes through the openings and the divided portions, weakening the wind pressure and causing the air between the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 to flow accordingly. difficult to let go.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the edge portion 824 and the hub 812a are formed in an annular shape when viewed in the axial direction and have surfaces that are continuous in the circumferential direction. The wind pressure generated by the protrusion 812a1 being displaced in the circumferential direction between the can be increased. Therefore, the air between the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 can be made to flow more easily. As a result, the wind pressure generated by the circumferential displacement of the protrusion 812a1 between the inner surface of the edge portion 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a is utilized to increase the pressure between the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811. can make it easier to flow the air.

In addition, the distance between the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810 and the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820 is partially narrowed in the circumferential direction of the inner reel 811 by the projection 812a1. Therefore, the projection 812a1 can easily change the atmospheric pressure between the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810 and the edge portion 824 of the outer reel unit 820 facing each other. Therefore, the change in atmospheric pressure can be used to facilitate the generation of wind, and the wind is caused to flow into the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 facing each other. Dust (dust) sticking to the outer peripheral surface or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and dust that is about to stick can be blown off. As a result, it is possible to prevent dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 .

More specifically, air has the property of flowing from high pressure to low pressure, and by narrowing the space between the protruding tip of the protrusion 812a1 and the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820, the pressure is partially increased. be able to. Therefore, the air pressure in the space between the opposing outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821, in which the change in air pressure is unlikely to occur, is increased by lower than the atmospheric pressure of As a result, the air can be easily sent to the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821, and the adhesion of dust to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 can be suppressed. can.

Furthermore, since the atmospheric pressure between the projecting tip of the projection 812a1 and the edge 824 can be increased, displacement (wobble) of the projection 812a1 toward the edge 824 or toward the projection 812a1 can be prevented. can be suppressed.

Further, since the outer opening 825 and the inner opening 812c1 are formed in the spokes 822 that support the edge 824 and the spokes 812c that support the hub 812a, the outer opening 825 and the inner opening 812c1 allow the outer opening 825 and the inner opening 812c1. Air between the inner surface of portion 824 and the outer surface of hub 812a can be exhausted to the outside (or air can be drawn from the outside between the inner surface of edge 824 and the outer surface of hub 812a). That is, the air flow resistance is reduced, and the air between the inner surface of the edge portion 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a can be easily flowed (outflow or inflow) accordingly. As a result, the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 are brought into contact with each other by utilizing the wind pressure generated by the circumferential displacement of the standing portion between the inner surface of the edge portion 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a. Allows air to flow easily.

Furthermore, a protrusion 812a1 is erected on the hub 812a (the crotch edge portion 824) of the inner reel unit 810 (or the outer reel unit 820), and the spokes 822 (or the spokes 812c) of the outer reel unit 820 (or the inner reel unit 810) are provided. Since at least the outer opening 825 (or the inner opening 812c1) is formed in the outer opening 825, the effect of reducing the flow resistance by sucking (or exhausting) air through the outer opening 825 can be easily exhibited. That is, when rotating one of the outer reel unit 820 and the inner reel unit 810 in which the protrusion 812a1 is erected, the other in which the outer opening 825 or the inner opening 812c1 is formed is stopped. , the air flow (exhaust or intake) resistance through the outer opening 825 or the inner opening 812c1 can be reduced.

The outer reel 821 is formed slightly radially outwardly inclined (expanded in diameter) from the edge portion 824 (one end) side to which the spokes 822 are connected toward the other end side. Therefore, it is possible to easily send the air that has flowed from one end side to the opposite end side between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the flow of air flowing between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 from being stopped. sticking can be suppressed.

Further, the radially outward inclination angle θ1 of the spokes 812c from the axis of the inner reel 811 is made larger than the radially outward inclination angle θ2 of the spokes 822 from the axis of the outer reel 821 (θ1>θ2). Therefore, when the spokes 812c and the spokes 822 are rotationally displaced to a position (for example, the position shown in FIG. 34) that overlaps in the axial direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 34), they face outward in the radial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 34). The dimension in between is increased.

Therefore, by rotationally displacing one or both of the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820, the difference in the distance between the spokes 812c and the spokes 822 causes the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 to rotate. It is possible to easily generate the wind toward the space facing the inner peripheral surface of the.

More specifically, the distance between the spokes 812 c and the spokes 822 facing each other increases toward the radially outer side of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 . Therefore, when the spokes 812c and the spokes 822 are rotationally displaced to a position where they overlap in the axial direction, the atmospheric pressure is higher between the spokes 812c and the spokes 822 in the radially inner portions of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821. made high.

As described above, air has the property of flowing from high pressure to low pressure. Therefore, it is possible to form an air flow from the radially inner portion toward the radially outer portion. That is, an air flow can be formed from the axial side of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 toward the side between the hub 812a and the edge portion 824 facing each other. Therefore, it is possible to easily supply air to the space between the opposing outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 . As a result, it is possible to prevent dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 .

In addition, since at least a part of the outer reel 821 of the outer reel unit 820 is formed to have optical transparency, and a plurality of patterns are arranged along the circumferential direction on the inner reel 811 of the inner reel unit 810, Via the outer reel unit 820, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the variation of the symbols accompanying the rotation of the inner reel unit 810. - 特許庁In this case, the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810 is provided with the projection 812a1. In the performance by rotating the outer reel unit 820 or the inner reel unit 810, the chances of cleaning the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 can be increased. That is, the double reel structure can be easily cleaned.

By rotating the inner reel unit 810, the timing of cleaning the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 is not operated by the player (the game ball is not launched into the game area). , preferably when the pachinko machine 10 is in a standby state. In this case, since the inner reel unit 810 is rotated at high speed to generate wind, the switching of the symbols of the inner reel 811 can attract the interest of the player.

Further, the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 may be cleaned while performing the effect of rotationally displacing the non-transmissive surface 821b of the outer reel 821 toward the player side. In this case, since the inner reel 811 is invisible to the player, cleaning can be performed without the player visually confirming the cleaning state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest. In addition, since it can be done during the game state, even when the game continues for a predetermined time, the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 can be cleaned. Therefore, it is possible to prevent dust such as dust from accumulating on the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 during the game.

Next, the segment display device 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 63. FIG. First, the configuration of the segment display device 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. 37 is a front view of the segment display device 600, and FIG. 38 is an exploded view of the segment display device 600. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the segment display device 600 includes a vertical displacement unit 600L arranged on the left side in front view, a vertical displacement unit 600R arranged on the right side in front view, and left and right vertical displacement units 600L. , 600R are arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction, and a connecting member 601 is fastened and fixed from the rear side.

Since the vertical displacement units 600L, 600C, and 600R have substantially the same configuration, only the vertical displacement unit 600L disposed on the left side in the front view will be described below, and the vertical displacement units 600C and 600R will be described. A detailed explanation is omitted.

Next, the vertical displacement unit 600L will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41. FIG. FIG. 39(a) is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 600L, and FIG. 39(b) is a side view of the vertical displacement unit 600C. 40 is an exploded perspective front view of the vertical displacement unit 600L, and FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective rear view of the vertical displacement unit 600L.

40 and 41 illustrate a mode in which the first segment unit 610, the second segment unit 620, and the displacement unit 650 are disassembled.

As shown in FIGS. 39 to 41, the vertical displacement unit 600L includes a displacement unit 650 configured to be displaceable, and a first segment unit 610 and a second segment unit 620 arranged on the left and right sides of the displacement unit 650. is arranged with

The first segment unit 610 is a unit capable of displaying one segment in the horizontal direction, and the second segment unit 620 is a unit capable of displaying two segments in the horizontal direction. be. In addition, since the first segment unit 610 is formed only by halving the second segment unit 620 in the left-right direction, only the second segment unit 620 will be described below. A code is similarly assigned to the first segment unit 610 .

Each of the vertical displacement units 600L, 600C, and 600R is formed with a different arrangement of the first segment unit 610 and the second segment unit 620, and the vertical displacement unit 610C has the second segment unit 620 only on the right side in front view. The second segment unit 620 is arranged on the right side of the vertical displacement unit 610R in the front view.

Therefore, the vertical displacement unit 600L can display one segment on the left side when viewed from the front and two segments on the right side when viewed from the front. In addition, the vertical displacement unit 600C can display two segments only on the right side when viewed from the front. Furthermore, the vertical displacement unit 600L can display a single segment only on the right side when viewed from the front. That is, it is possible to adopt a mode in which one segment is formed on both left and right sides of each of the vertical displacement units 600L, 600C, and 600R.

Next, the second segment unit 620 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 44. FIG. 42(a) is a front view of the second segment unit 620, and FIG. 42(b) is a rear view of the second segment unit 620. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective front view of the second segment unit 620, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective rear view of the second segment unit 620. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 42 to 44, the second segment unit 620 includes a light transmission member 621 arranged on the front side, a partition member 622 arranged on the rear surface of the light transmission member 621, and a partition member 622 , a base member 624 disposed between the plurality of diffusion members 623, and reflection members 625 disposed on both sides of the base member 624. formed by

The light transmitting member 621 is made of a translucent light transmitting resin material through which light can pass. The light-transmitting member 621 mainly includes a light-transmitting portion 621a formed in an arcuate plate-like shape that protrudes toward the front side, and a planar portion 621b that is continuously formed above and below the light-transmitting portion 621a. be.

The light-transmitting portion 621a includes standing walls 621a1 standing on the back side from the left and right ends, fastening portions 621a2 projecting annularly from the top and bottom ends to the back side, and vertical direction at the center position on the front side. and a decorative portion 621a3 continuously recessed on the back side.

The erected walls 621a1 are erected from the left and right ends of the light transmitting portion 621a toward the back side. The dimension between the standing walls 621a1 facing each other is set to be substantially the same as the width dimension in the left-right direction of the partition member 622, which will be described later. Therefore, when the partition member 622 is arranged on the back side of the light transmitting portion 621a, the partition member 622 can be restricted from moving left and right.

The fastening portion 621a2 is a projection that forms a hole for fastening a reflective member 625, which will be described later, with a screw, and is annularly projected from the back side of the light transmission portion 621a. Therefore, the reflection member 625 can be fastened by screwing the tip of the screw into the inner edge of the fastening portion 621a2.

As described above, the decoration portion 621a3 is recessed continuously in the vertical direction at the center position of the light transmission portion 621a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the light transmitted through the left side in front view from being reflected inside the decorative portion 621a3 and emitted from the right side in front view. A detailed description of the light transmitted through the decorative portion 621a3 will be given later.

The plane portion 621b is a plate member for fastening with a base member 660 of a displacement unit 650, which will be described later. The plane portion 621b is formed in a plate-like body that has substantially the same shape as the base member 660 when viewed from the front. can do.

In addition, elastic pieces 621b1 projecting to the opposite side are formed on the flat portion 621b. The elastic pieces 621b1 are formed so as to protrude from opposite side surfaces of the pair of upper and lower flat portions 621b, and protrude in a curved shape that is convex toward the front side. In addition, the elastic piece 621b1 is formed in a curved shape with a radius smaller than that of the light transmitting portion 621a, and the protruding tip of the elastic piece 621b1 is the upper wall portion 882 or the lower wall of the decorative design display device 800 disposed inside the displacement unit 650. It is configured to be in contact with the portion 883 . Thereby, when the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 of the decorative symbol display device 800 are rotationally driven, the vibration of the decorative symbol display device 800 can be suppressed.

The partition member 622 is made of a resin material that does not easily transmit light, and is shaped like a curved plate when viewed from the side. The radius of the curved outer peripheral surface of the partition member 622 is set to be substantially the same as the radius of the inner peripheral surface of the light transmitting portion 621a, and the width in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 42) is the width in the vertical direction of the light transmitting portion 621a. is set smaller than Therefore, the outer peripheral surface of the partition member 622 can be placed in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the light transmitting portion 621a.

In front view, the partition member 622 has first recessed portions 622a recessed toward the center from both left and right (left and right in FIG. 42) and recessed toward the center from upper and lower (up and down in FIG. 42) end faces. It mainly includes a second recessed portion 622b provided and a projecting portion 622c projecting from the left-right central position on the back side.

Two first recessed portions 622a are formed on both sides of the left and right sides in the vertical direction. That is, four first recessed portions 622 a are formed in the partition member 622 .

The second recessed portion 622b is recessed from both upper and lower ends. The dimension between the opposed ends of the second recessed portion 622b is set to be substantially the same as the distance between the fastening portions 621a2 formed in the light transmitting member 621 in the vertical direction. Therefore, when the partition member 622 is arranged on the back side of the light transmission member 621, the vertical movement of the partition member 622 can be suppressed by inserting the fastening portion 621a2 inside the second concave portion 622b. .

The projecting portion 622c is formed at the center position of the partition member 622 in the left-right direction so as to extend in the vertical direction. In addition, the projecting portion 622c has a recessed portion 622c1 recessed in the projecting distal end surface thereof. The recessed portion 622c1 is formed so that the width dimension in the left-right direction is larger than the thickness dimension of the base member 624 described later. Therefore, when disposing the base member 624 in the partition member 622, the tip side of the base member 624 can be inserted inside the recess 622c1. As a result, when arranging the base member 624, the base member 624 can be positioned, and movement of the base member 624 in the left-right direction can be suppressed.

The diffusion member 623 is made of a cloudy resin material, and can diffuse the light that enters inside. The diffusion member 623 is formed in a curved plate shape when viewed from the side, and the radius of its outer peripheral portion (front side) is set substantially equal to the radius of the inner peripheral portion (back side) of the partition member 622 . Therefore, the diffusion member 623 can be placed on the rear side of the partition member 622 in a grounded state.

Two diffusing members 623 are vertically arranged side by side, and two diffusing members 623 are horizontally spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance. That is, four diffusion members 623 are arranged on the rear side of the partition member 622 .

The width dimension of the diffusion member 623 in the left-right direction is set to be substantially the same as the dimension between the standing wall 621a1 of the light transmission member 621 and the projecting portion 622c of the partition member 622 facing each other. As a result, when the diffusing member 623 is arranged on the rear side of the partition member 622, the diffusing member 623 can be prevented from moving to the left or right.

Further, the diffusion member 623 is formed with a projecting portion 623a projecting to the front side and a recessed portion 623b recessed on the rear side of the projecting portion 623a.

The protruding portion 623a is protrudingly formed at a position corresponding to the first recessed portion 622a of the partition member 622 disposed on the front side of the diffusion member 623, and is disposed in a state of being inserted inside the first recessed portion 622a. is set. As a result, when the diffusion member 623 is arranged on the back side of the partition member 622, the partition member 622 can be prevented from being displaced in the horizontal and vertical directions.

Also, the projection distance of the projecting portion 623 a is set smaller than the thickness dimension of the partition member 622 . That is, it is arranged in a state in which a predetermined gap is formed between the projecting tip surface of the projecting portion 623a and the rear surface of the light transmitting member 621 (see FIG. 45).

The recessed portion 623b is recessed in a shape slightly smaller than the front view shape of the projecting portion 623a on the side opposite to the projecting portion 623a (the rear side of the diffusion member 623). is formed. As a result, the plate thickness of the diffusion member 623 can be made substantially constant, and distortion when the diffusion member 623 is molded can be suppressed. In addition, the concave portion 623b is formed in a shape slightly smaller than the projecting portion 623a, so that the area of the rear side of the end portion of the projecting portion 623a can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to increase the amount of light incident on the diffusion member 623 from the LEDs 624a, which will be described later, at the ends of the projecting portions 623a. As a result, the form of the light visually recognized by the player through the diffusing member 623 can be made clearer, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest.

The base member 624 is formed of a crescent-shaped plate having a curved front side, and includes an LED 624a that emits light to the side surface. The radius of the arc of the base member 624 is set to be substantially the same as the radius of the recessed tip surface of the recess 622c1 formed in the partition member 622 . Therefore, when disposing the base member 624 on the back surface of the partition member 622, the base member 624 is inserted into the recess 622c1 of the partition member 622, thereby suppressing the displacement of the base member 624 in the left-right direction. can.

A plurality of LEDs 624 a are arranged on both left and right side surfaces of the base member 624 , and their irradiation directions are perpendicular to the side surfaces of the base member 624 . That is, the irradiation direction of the light from the LED 624a is the horizontal direction. A detailed description of the irradiation of light from the LED 624a will be given later.

One reflecting member 625 is arranged on each of the left and right sides of the base member 624 . The reflecting member 625 is made of a white resin material and formed in an arcuate shape convex to the front side. Also, the radius of the arc of the reflecting member 625 is set to be substantially the same as the radius of the inner peripheral surface of the diffusing member 623 . As a result, when the reflecting member 625 is arranged on the rear side of the diffusing member 623, the reflecting member 625 and the diffusing member 623 can be grounded.

The reflecting member 625 is formed in a plate-like body that is separated from the base member 624 in the left-right direction from the back side to the front side, and has an inclined portion 625a that is inclined from the back side to the front side. A plurality of recessed portions 625b are formed in the front side of the body in a row in the vertical direction, and wall portions 625c are formed so as to protrude toward the front side from the upper end portion, the lower end portion and the intermediate portion of the recessed portion 625b. formed by

The front side of the inclined portion 625 a is a reflecting surface 625 a 1 that reflects the light from the LED 624 a of the base member 624 toward the front side, and is formed at an angle of approximately 60 degrees with respect to the side surface of the base member 624 . As described above, the light irradiation direction of the LEDs 624a is perpendicular to the side surfaces of the base member 624. Therefore, the reflecting surfaces 625a1 are formed to be inclined with respect to the side surfaces of the base member 624, so that the LEDs 624a The light emitted from can be reflected to the front side. The mode in which the light from the LED 624a travels will be described later.

The concave portion 625b is formed by concavely forming a convex curved shape on the back side. In addition, the concave portion 625b is formed at a position corresponding to the LED 624a of the base member 624, so that the amount of light from the LED 624a that is visually recognized by the player through the diffusion member 623 can be made uniform. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, progress of light emitted from the LED 624a of the second segment unit 620 will be described in detail. FIG. 45 is a cross-sectional view of the second segment unit 620 taken along line XLV-XLV in FIG. 42(a). In addition, in FIG. 45, a part of the mode of the light emitted from the LED 624a is illustrated by a chain double-dashed line. In addition, the outer shape of the decorative design display device 800 arranged on the left and right rear sides of the second segment unit 620 is illustrated by two-dot chain lines.

As shown in FIG. 45, the reflective surface 625a1 is inclined at an obtuse angle with respect to the side surface of the base member 624 (that is, the light emitted from the LED 624a intersects the reflective surface 625a1 at an acute angle). can be reflected in the outside direction. In this case, since the reflecting member 625 is formed of a plate member having a substantially constant thickness, the space on the side opposite to the reflecting surface 625a1 (the back side of the reflecting member 625) can be increased. Thereby, the end portion of the decorative pattern display device 800 can be arranged on the back side of the second segment unit 620 .

Here, a rotation (decorative pattern display device 800) that is rotatably formed and arranged side by side at a predetermined interval (decorative pattern display device 800), and at least one A decorative member (light-transmitting member 621) having a light-transmitting part, and a substrate (base member 624) disposed on the back side of the decorative member and having a plurality of light-emitting means (LEDs 624a) mounted thereon. A game machine is known in which a substrate is arranged in such a manner that the surface on which means is mounted is substantially orthogonal to the back surface of the decorative member. According to this gaming machine, the decorative member not only shields the space between the spinning drums from the player, but also forms (displays) a pattern on the surface of the decorative member by the light of the light-emitting means that has passed through the decorative member. It is possible to perform an effect in which the pattern of the decorative member is visually recognized by the player integrally with the pattern displayed on the outer peripheral surface of the spinning drum.

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the board is arranged so that the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is orthogonal to the back surface of the decorative member, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means is sufficiently transmitted to the back surface of the decorative member. Therefore, the pattern formed (displayed) by the light from the light emitting means cannot be made sufficiently large. Therefore, there is a problem that the performance effect is insufficient. On the other hand, if the pattern formed (displayed) by the light from the light-emitting means is kept small and the decorative member (area excluding the pattern) is enlarged, the sense of unity between the decorative member and the reel is impaired.

On the other hand, according to this embodiment, since the reflecting member 625 for reflecting the light emitted from the LED 624a to the back surface of the light transmitting member 621 is provided, the surface on which the LED 624a is mounted is perpendicular to the back surface of the light transmitting member 621. Even when the base member 624 is arranged in this posture, the irradiation range of the light emitted from the LED 624a to the rear surface of the light transmitting member 621 can be widened. Therefore, the pattern formed (displayed) by the light from the LED 624a can be enlarged accordingly, and the presentation effect can be enhanced. In addition, since the pattern formed (displayed) by the light of the LED 624a can be enlarged, the area excluding the pattern can be reduced, so that the light transmitting member 621 and the decorative pattern display device 800 can form a sense of unity.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 45, the light transmitting member 621 is located on the front side of the outer peripheral surface of the decorative design display device 800, and extends the outer edge to a position overlapping the outer peripheral surface of the decorative design display device 800 in a front view. Since it is formed to extend, the axial end face of the decorative pattern display device 800 can be easily shielded (difficult to be visually recognized) from the player. In addition, since the design of the light transmission member 621 formed (displayed) by the light emitted from the LED 624a and the design displayed on the outer peripheral surface of the decorative design display device 800 can be made closer, the light transmission member 621 and the decorative pattern display device 800 can easily form a sense of unity.

Furthermore, the reflection member 625 connects the surface of the base member 624 on which the LEDs 624a are mounted and the back surface of the light transmission member 621, so that the area of the base member 624 on which the LEDs 624a are mounted and the pattern of the light transmission member 621 are formed. , and the back surface of the reflecting member 625 is inclined in a direction away from the axial end surface of the decorative design display device 800 as it goes from the light transmitting member 621 toward the base member 624, so that the light emitted from the LED 624a While securing the size of the pattern formed (displayed) by, the back surface of the light transmitting member 621 is brought close to the outer peripheral surface of the decorative pattern display device 800, and the decorative pattern display device 800 is positioned on the back surface of the light transmitting member 621. It can be made to enter the back side (the decorative design display device 800 can be brought close to the base member 624). As a result, the axial end face of the decorative pattern display device 800 can be easily shielded (difficult to be visually recognized) from the player, and a sense of unity between the light transmission member 621 and the decorative pattern display device 800 can be easily formed.

In addition, since the LEDs 624a are mounted on both one side surface and the other side surface of the base member 624, the light emitted from the LEDs 624a mounted on one side surface and the light emitted from the LEDs 624a mounted on the other side surface Different patterns can be independently formed (displayed) on the light transmission member 621 depending on the light emitted from the LED 624a.

In this case, the number of base members 624 arranged between the decorative pattern display devices 800 arranged side by side can be one. Therefore, since the space required for arranging the base member 624 can be reduced, the decorative pattern display device 800 is moved into the back of the light transmitting member 621 (the decorative pattern display device 800 is brought closer to the base member 624). can be made). As a result, the axial end face of the decorative pattern display device 800 can be easily shielded (difficult to be visually recognized) from the player, and a sense of unity between the light transmission member 621 and the decorative pattern display device 800 can be easily formed.

Furthermore, as described above, the reflective surface 625a1 is inclined at an obtuse angle with respect to the side surface of the base member 624 (that is, the light emitted from the LED 624a intersects the reflective surface 625a1 at an acute angle). can be reflected in the outside direction. As a result, the size of the reflecting member 625 can be reduced (compared to the case where the reflecting surface 625a1 is inclined at an acute angle with respect to the side surface of the base member 624). Therefore, the space on the back side of the second segment unit 620 can be secured accordingly. As a result, the second segment unit 620 and the decorative pattern display device 800 can be arranged close to each other, so that the sense of unity between the light transmission member 621 and the decorative pattern display device 800 can be easily formed.

Next, the relationship between the LED 624a and the recess 625b will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 and 47. FIG. 46 is a side view of base member 624. FIG. FIG. 47 is a cross-sectional view of the second segment unit 620 along line XLVII-XLVII in FIG. 42(a).

As shown in FIG. 46, the LED 624a is formed in a square shape when viewed from the side, and can irradiate light from the entire area of the square. The LEDs 624a are arranged at intervals of an inclination angle .theta.1 in the circumferential direction around an axis that is substantially the same as the curved axis on the front side of the base member 624. As shown in FIG. Thereby, the heat accumulated in the base member 624 due to the irradiation of the LED 624a can be dispersed. As a result, it is possible to suppress damage to the LEDs 624a due to partial heating of the base member 624 .

In this embodiment, eight LEDs 624a are distributed in the circumferential direction. Also, the LED 624 a is disposed in such a direction that one side of the square light emitting surface is aligned with the tangential direction of the curved shape of the base member 624 .

Here, conventionally, a substrate (base member 624) on which a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs 624a) are mounted and a transmitting member (light transmitting member 621) that transmits light emitted from the light emitting means are provided. A gaming machine is known in which a light transmitting portion 621a) of a transmitting member 621 is curved and a plurality of light emitting means are arranged along the curve of the transmitting member. In this case, the plurality of light emitting means are arranged at regular intervals when the transmissive member is viewed from the front. That is, they are equally spaced along the direction of a line segment (chord) connecting both ends of a curved line (arc) formed by a plurality of light emitting means. However, in the game machine described above, since the distance between adjacent light emitting means is narrow in some of the plurality of light emitting means, there is a problem that the distribution of heat emitted by the light emitting means is uneven. As a result, heat tends to concentrate on a part of the light emitting means, which tends to shorten the life of the light emitting means.

On the other hand, according to this embodiment, since the LEDs 624a are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction, the intervals between the LEDs 624a adjacent to each other can be made constant, and the heat generated by the LEDs 624a can be uniformly distributed. As a result, it is possible to prevent heat from concentrating on some of the LEDs 624a, thereby extending the life of each LED 624a.

As shown in FIG. 47, one concave portion 625b is formed on the back side (right side in FIG. 47) of each LED 624a. In addition, the separation distance X1 from one end (lower end) to the other end (upper end) in the vertical direction of one concave portion 625b is set to be the same.

Here, as described above, the LEDs 624a are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction at the inclination angle θ1. Therefore, the vertical interval between the LEDs 624a is narrower on the central side in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 46) than on the outer side in the vertical direction. Therefore, the amount of light reflected by the reflecting member 625 and irradiated to the player side increases toward the center in the vertical direction (the center side in the vertical direction becomes darker), and the light is uniformly visible to the player. I had a problem that I couldn't.

In other words, when a plurality of LEDs 624a are arranged at equal intervals (that is, at equal intervals in the circumferential direction) along the curvature of the light transmitting portion 621a, the plurality of LEDs 624a are arranged at unequal intervals when the light transmitting portion 621a is viewed from the front. will be arranged in That is, in the front view of the light transmitting portion 621a, a narrow area and a wide area are formed between the LEDs 624a. Therefore, the distribution of the amount of light becomes uneven along the arrangement direction of the plurality of LEDs 624a.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a reflecting member 625 for reflecting the light emitted from the LED 624a toward the light transmitting portion 621a is provided, and the reflecting member 625 includes a plurality of concave portions 625b partitioned corresponding to the plurality of LEDs 624a. , and the division widths of the light transmitting portions 621a of the plurality of recesses 625b in a front view are set to be substantially the same. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light along the arrangement direction of the plurality of LEDs 624a can be made uniform.

That is, since the separation distance X1 from one end side (lower end portion) to the other end side (upper end portion) in the vertical direction of one concave portion 625b is set to be the same, the illumination of one LED 624a causes the player to The area of the light emitted to the side can be substantially the same in the vertical direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the amount of light emitted toward the player from increasing toward the center in the vertical direction. As a result, the light can be uniformly viewed by the player.

In addition, since the light-emitting surface of the LED 624a is formed in a rectangular (square) shape when viewed from the front, it is possible to ensure the diffusion of light (light is emitted at a wider angle) than when the light-emitting surface is circular. ), the distribution of the amount of light can be made uniform in one concave portion 625b.

In addition, the light emitting surface means the front surface of the encapsulating resin that encloses the LED chip. Therefore, the light-emitting surface having a rectangular shape in front view means that the shape of the encapsulating resin (the shape of the internal space of the reflector surrounding the encapsulating resin in front view) is rectangular.

Furthermore, at least some of the plurality of LEDs 624a are arranged so that one side of the light emitting surface is aligned with the tangential direction of the curved shape of the light transmitting portion 621a. can be easily diffused uniformly along the curvature of the As a result, the distribution of the amount of light that is visually recognized through the light transmitting portion 621a can be made uniform.

Further, the concave portion 625b is formed as a curved surface that faces the back surface of the light transmitting portion 621a and is recessed on the side away from the back surface of the light transmitting portion 621a. , the base member 624 can be disposed in a posture orthogonal to the light transmitting portion 621a. That is, the degree of freedom in arranging the unit composed of the light transmission portion 621a, the base member 624 and the reflection member 625 can be increased. In this case, the concave portion 625b is arranged so as to surround the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the LED 624a from the direction perpendicular to the traveling direction of the light. can be uniformly incident on the As a result, the distribution of the amount of light that is visually recognized through the light transmitting portion 621a can be made uniform.

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the mode of light emitted by the LED 624a will be described. FIG. 48 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 600L. In FIG. 48, the light emitted by the LED 624a is indicated by a chain double-dashed line, and the reference numeral of the irradiation region SR1 is attached.

As shown in FIG. 48, by emitting light from the LED 624a, the first segment unit 610 is irradiated with light from two irradiation regions SR1 aligned in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 48). Further, the second segment unit 620 is irradiated with light from the irradiation regions SR1 arranged vertically and horizontally in 2×2. In addition, the irradiation region SR1 of the second segment unit 620 is formed on the left and right sides of the decorative portion 621a3 of the light transmitting member 621. As shown in FIG.

Therefore, both the left and right sides of the number can be displayed by the 7-segment display by the irradiation area SR1 of the first segment unit 610 and the left side of the irradiation area SR1 of the second segment unit 620. FIG. Note that the top, bottom, and center of numbers in the 7-segment display will be described later.

Next, the configuration of the displacement unit 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50. FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective front view of the vertical displacement unit 600L, and FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective rear view of the vertical displacement unit 600L. 49 and 50 show a disassembled state of the displacement unit 650 of the vertical displacement unit 600L.

As shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the displacement unit 650 includes a pair of left and right base members 660, a displacement member 670 pivotally supported by the base member 660 and rotationally displaceable, and a displacement member 670 provided on the base member 660. and a drive means 680 for transmitting the rotational drive of the drive motor KM3 to the displacement member 670.

The base member 660 is formed of a pair of right and left plate members having a space in the center larger than that of the decorative pattern display device 800 described above. The first segment unit 610 is arranged on the front side of the base member 660 on the left side in front view, and the second segment unit 620 is arranged on the front side of the base member 660 on the right side in front view. Note that the base members 660 are arranged upside down and left to right, and in this embodiment, only the left base member 660 in front view will be described, and the description of the left base member 660 in front view will be omitted.

The base member 660 is formed in a rectangular shape that is long in the vertical direction when viewed from the side, and has a protruding portion 661 that protrudes in a convex shape from the side surface on the front side to the front side. The base member 660 also includes a through hole 662 provided at one end (upper end) in the vertical direction, through which the shaft of the drive motor KM3 is inserted, and coupling holes 662 provided at both ends (lower end) in the vertical direction. An insertion hole 663 through which the rod 681 is inserted, a recess 664 in which a displacement member 670 (to be described later) is pivotally supported, a sliding groove 665 formed in an arcuate opening around the axis of the recess 664, and upper and lower sides of the recess 664. and an engaging portion 666 protruding into the venue.

The protruding portion 661 has a radius of the protruding tip set smaller than the radius of the inner peripheral surface of the reflecting member 625 described above, and its curved axis is set substantially on the same straight line as the curved axis of the reflecting member 625 . Therefore, when the first segment unit 610 and the second segment unit 620 are arranged on the base member 660, it is possible to suppress contact between the projecting portion 661 and the reflecting member 625, and the heat of the base member 624 is It is possible to suppress intrusion between the opposing base members 660 . As a result, the temperature of the decorative pattern display device 800 arranged inside the opposing base member 660 rises, and the drive motors KM1 and KM2 that drive the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 to rotate can be prevented from being broken.

The through hole 662 is a hole through which the shaft of the drive motor KM3 and a gear 682 connected to the shaft are inserted, and the inner diameter thereof is formed larger than the outer shape of the gear 682 and smaller than the main body of the drive motor KM3. set. Therefore, the driving motor KM3 can be arranged on the base member 660 while the gear 682 is connected to the driving motor KM3. In addition, the drive motor KM3 is attached to the base member 660 from the opposite side of the base member 660 arranged to face each other.

The through-holes 662 are holes into which connecting rods 681 of the driving means 680 described later are inserted, are formed larger than the external shape of the connecting rods 681 , and are formed at both upper and lower ends of the base member 660 .

The concave portion 664 is formed by recessing in a circular shape outward from the opposing side of the base member 660 . The concave portion 664 is formed slightly larger than the outer diameter of a connecting projection 671b of a displacement member 670, which will be described later. As a result, the connecting projection 671b can be inserted and arranged inside the recess 664 .

By inserting the connecting protrusion 671 b of the displacement member 670 into the sliding groove 665 , the displacement member 670 and the driving means 680 arranged outside the pair of base members 660 can be connected. Further, by inserting the connecting projection 671b into the sliding groove 665, the displacement of the displacement member 670 can be guided. Therefore, the displacement member 670 can be displaced smoothly.

The engaging portion 666 is formed on the opposing side of the base member 660 so that the tip thereof has a clearance larger than the diameter of the opposing side surface of the base member 660 and one end of the torsion spring SP1, which will be described later. As a result, one end of the torsion spring SP1 can be engaged with the engaging portion 666 .

The displacement members 670 are arranged in a pair of upper and lower parts in opposite directions. The displacement member 670 is formed of an extension member 671 whose one end is pivotally supported by the base member 660 and a decoration unit 672 connected to the other end of the extension member 671 .

The extension members 671 are formed in a substantially L-shaped plate shape and arranged in pairs in opposite directions. The extension member 671 has a shaft support hole 671a penetrating in the left-right direction at one end on the long side, a connecting projection 671b protruding left and right outward at a substantially central position in the longitudinal direction of the long side, and a shaft support hole 671a extending from the side surface of the long side. and an elastic member 671f made of an elastic material and arranged on the side surface of the extension member 671. As shown in FIG.

The shaft support hole 671a is a hole into which the collar C is inserted, and its inner diameter is formed larger than the outer diameter of the collar C. As shown in FIG. Therefore, by inserting the collar C into the shaft support hole 671a and fastening and fixing the collar C to the inside of the recess 664 of the base member 660 with screws, the displacement member 670 is rotatably connected to the base member 660. can.

Further, by arranging the shaft support holes 671a of the pair of displacement members 670 coaxially, and inserting the collar C into the shaft support holes 671a of the pair of displacement members 670 and fastening and fixing it to the base member 660, the upper and lower A displacement member 670 is coaxially rotatably arranged.

Further, the left and right extension members 671 are formed with a bulging portion 671a1 that bulges outward in the left-right direction around one shaft support hole 671a. The bulging portion 671 a 1 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the recess 664 of the base member 660 . The bulging portions 671 a 1 are arranged on the left and right outer sides of the pair of displacement members 670 .

That is, in the present embodiment, the bulging portion 671a1 is formed in the right shaft support hole 671a of the upper displacement member 670, so that the right shaft support hole 671a of the lower displacement member 670 is expanded. , is arranged inside the bulging portion 671a1. On the other hand, the left shaft support hole 671a has a bulging portion 671a1 formed in the left shaft support hole 671a of the lower displacement member 670, so that the left shaft support of the upper displacement member 670 is formed. The hole 671a is arranged inside the bulging portion 671a1 (see FIG. 49).

Accordingly, when disposing the displacement member 670 on the base member 660 , the collar C allows the bulging portion 671 a 1 to be inserted into the recess 664 . As a result, when a force acts in the radial direction of the shaft of the shaft support hole 671a of the displacement member 670, the outer peripheral surface of the bulging portion 671a1 and the inner peripheral surface of the recess 664 come into contact with each other. Damage to the collar C can be suppressed.

That is, in the present embodiment, the pair of displacement members 670 are coaxially arranged on the base member 660, so the axial length of the collar C is increased accordingly. Therefore, when a force acts on the rotating shaft of the displacement member 670 in the radial direction, a large force tends to act on the rotating shaft. For this reason, where the shaft support hole 671a or the collar C is likely to be damaged, the contact between the bulging portion 671a1 and the recessed portion 664 maintains the force acting on the rotating shaft of the displacement member 670 in the radial direction. can do. As a result, damage to the shaft support hole 671a or the collar C can be suppressed.

A through-hole 671d1 is formed in the projection 671d so as to extend through the extension member 671 in the longitudinal direction. The through-hole 671d1 is a hole through which torsion springs SP1 and SP2, which will be described later, are inserted therein, and is formed larger than the outer diameter of the torsion springs SP1 and SP2.

The elastic member 671f is arranged on the side surface of the extension member 671 on the side of the displacing member 670, which is arranged as a pair of upper and lower members to be described later, in the direction in which they approach each other. In addition, when the upper and lower extension members 671 are arranged at positions close to each other, the size is set so that the side surfaces of the elastic members 671f contact each other. This makes it possible to absorb the impact when the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670 are displaced to the adjacent positions.

The drive means 680 is means for transmitting the power of the drive motor KM3 to the displacement member 670. As shown in FIG. The drive means 680 includes a gear 682 connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM3, a large-diameter gear 683 meshing with the gear 682, and a rod-shaped body having one end connected to the side surface of the large-diameter gear 683 and the other end. A first link member 684 connected to the displacement member 670, a connecting rod 681 transmitting power to the opposite side via the base member 660, a cam member 685 connected to the connecting rod 681 and rotating, It mainly includes a second link member 686 formed in a rod-like body, one end of which is rotatably connected to the cam member 685 and the other end of which is connected to the displacement member 670 .

The gear 682 is connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM3 as described above, and is rotated by the rotation of the drive motor KM3.

The large-diameter gear 683 is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the side, and includes a gear surface 683a formed on a tooth surface that meshes with the gear 682, and a projection 683b that protrudes annularly from the side surface in the rotation axis direction. formed by Since the gear surface 683a meshes with the gear 682, the large-diameter gear 683 is rotated when the gear 682 is rotated. That is, it is rotated by the drive motor KM3 being rotationally driven.

The protrusion 683 b is formed to protrude in an annular shape, and its axis is arranged at a position different from the rotation axis of the large-diameter gear 683 . Therefore, when the large-diameter gear 683 is rotationally displaced, the projection 683b is rotationally displaced on a circle centered on the rotation axis.

The first link member 684 is formed in a rod-like body, and through holes 684a and 684b are formed in both ends thereof so as to penetrate in the left-right direction.

The insertion hole 684a is a hole into which the protrusion 683b of the large-diameter gear 683 is inserted, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the protrusion 683b. A protrusion 683b is inserted into the insertion hole 684a, and the tip of the protrusion 683b is fastened with a screw having a larger outer diameter of the head than the inner diameter of the insertion hole 684a. state can be connected.

The insertion hole 684b is a hole into which the connecting protrusion 671b of the displacement member 670 is inserted, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the connecting protrusion 671b. The connecting projection 671b is inserted into the insertion hole 684b, and the tip of the connecting projection 671b is fastened with a screw having a larger outer diameter of the head than the inner diameter of the insertion hole 684b, so that the first link member 684 can be rotated to the displacement member 670. can be connected in good condition.

Therefore, when the large-diameter gear 683 is rotated via the gear 682, the projection 683b is rotationally displaced about the rotational axis of the large-diameter gear 683 as the large-diameter gear 683 is rotated. The first link member 684, to which one end is connected, is displaced, and the displacement member 670, which is connected to the other end of the first link member 684, is displaced.

One end of the connecting rod 681 is inserted through an insertion hole 663 of a base member 660 arranged on the left side in front view, and is internally fitted to the rotating shaft portion of the large-diameter gear 683 . On the other hand, the other end of connecting rod 681 is connected to cam member 685 . Therefore, the rotational drive of the drive motor KM3 rotates the connecting rod 681 and the cam member 685. As shown in FIG.

The cam member 685 is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the side, and the connecting rod 681 is internally fitted to the shaft portion thereof. The cam member 685 also has a projection 685a that protrudes outward from its axial side surface in an annular shape. The protrusion 685 a is formed to protrude in an annular shape, and its axis is arranged at a position different from the rotation axis of the cam member 685 . Therefore, when the cam member 685 is rotationally displaced, the projection 685a is rotationally displaced on a circle centered on the rotation axis.

The second link member 686 is formed in the same shape as that of the first link member 684 that is left-right reversed. The second link member 686 has insertion holes 686a and 686b at both longitudinal ends thereof.

The insertion hole 686a is a hole into which the projection 685a of the cam member 685 is inserted, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the projection 685a. The protrusion 685a is inserted into the insertion hole 686a, and the tip of the protrusion 685a is fastened with a screw having a larger outer diameter of the head than the inner diameter of the insertion hole 686a. can be concatenated with

The insertion hole 686b is a hole into which the connecting projection 671b of the displacement member 670 is inserted, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the connecting projection 671b. The connecting projection 671b is inserted into the insertion hole 686b, and the tip of the connecting projection 671b is fastened with a screw having a larger outer diameter of the head than the inner diameter of the insertion hole 684b, so that the second link member 686 can be rotated to the displacement member 670. can be connected in good condition.

Therefore, when the cam member 685 is rotated via the connecting rod 681, the projection 685a is rotationally displaced around the rotational axis of the cam member 685 as the cam member 685 is rotationally displaced. The connected second link member 686 is displaced, and the displacement member 670 connected to the other end of the second link member 686 is displaced.

That is, the displacement member 670, the first link member 684 and the second link member 686 are displaced. Here, since the operation of the first link member 684 and the operation of the second link member 686 are synchronized via the connecting rod 681, tilting of the displacement member 670 during displacement can be suppressed. As a result, the displacement member 670 can be smoothly displaced.

A detailed description of displacement member 670 will now be provided with reference to FIGS. 51-53. 51(a) is a front view of the displacement member 670, and FIG. 51(b) is a side view of the displacement member 670. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective front view of the displacement member 670. FIG. FIG. 53 is a cross-sectional view of displacement member 670 taken along line LIII--LIII of 51(a).

The displacement member 670 is formed including the extension member 671 rotatably supported by the base member 660 and the decoration unit 672 connected to the extension member 671, as described above.

As shown in FIGS. 51 to 53, the extension member 671 has a plate-like connecting portion 671c on the short side (connecting side of the decorative unit 672). A stepped portion 671c1 that partially protrudes stepwise is formed on the surfaces of the extending members 671 arranged in a pair on the left and right sides, on which the connecting portions 671c face each other. The stepped portions 671c1 are alternately formed on the left and right, and the stepped portions 671c1 are engaged with each other with a predetermined gap therebetween. As a result, dimensional errors can be absorbed when the extension member 671 is molded.

The decoration unit 672 is a unit that includes an LED that emits light inside and that irradiates the player side with light. The decoration unit 672 includes a back cover 673 arranged on the back side, a front cover 676 covering the back cover 673 and arranged on the front side of the back cover 673 , the back cover 673 and the front cover 676 . and a diffusion member 675 and a lens member 677 disposed between the base member 674 and the front cover 676 .

The rear cover 673 is formed as a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and the connecting portion 671c of the extension member 671 is fastened to the rear side. Thereby, the decoration unit 672 and the extension member 671 can be fastened.

Further, the rear cover 673 is formed of a resin material that hardly transmits light (impermeable). The rear cover 673 includes a reflecting portion 673a recessed on the rear side at a position facing a diffusion member 675, which will be described later.

The reflecting portion 673a is formed along the lower edge of the back cover 673 in the left-right direction, and the inner surface thereof is coated with a white paint having a high light reflectance. As a result, the light irradiated to the inside of the reflecting portion 673a can be reflected inside the reflecting portion 673a and irradiated to the diffusion member 675 side.

The front cover 676 is formed to have substantially the same shape as the rear cover 673 when viewed from the front, and is arranged in a manner to cover the front side of the rear cover 673 . The front cover 676 is made of a resin material that can transmit light, and can emit light emitted from a first LED 674a and a second LED, which will be described later, to the front side (player side).

The base member 674 is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular plate-like body that is smaller than the back cover 673 when viewed from the front. On the front side of the base member 674 , a first LED 674 a is arranged side by side in the left-right direction on the lower edge of the base member 674 and emits light toward the diffusion member 675 . and a second LED 674b for illuminating.

The first LED 674a is arranged at a position facing the upper end portion of the diffusion member 675 and is arranged so as to emit light downward to the base member 674 . As a result, the light emitted from the first LED 674a can be prevented from entering the lens member 677, which will be described later. As a result, it becomes easier for the player to distinguish between the light emitted to the front side through the diffusing member 675 and the light emitted to the front side through the lens member 677, which impairs the interest of the player. can be suppressed.

The second LED 674b is arranged above the first LED 674a. Therefore, the light of the second LED 674b can be made incident on the lens member 677 arranged above the diffusion member 675 .

The diffusion member 675 is formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and is arranged at the lower end portion of the front cover 676 on the back side. The diffusion member 675 is made of a cloudy-white resin material capable of diffusing the incident light. As a result, the light emitted from the first LED 674a and incident on the diffusion member 675 can be diffused to make the light uniform and emitted to the front side (player side).

The lens member 677 is formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and is arranged at the upper end portion of the front cover 676 on the back side. The lens member 677 is made of a transparent resin material, and has a plurality of protrusions (not shown) formed on the back side thereof. This makes it easier for the light emitted from the second LED 674b to enter the interior through the projection on the rear surface side. As a result, even if the amount of light emitted from the second LED 674b is reduced, the light can be incident on the lens member 677, and the light can be emitted to the front side (player side) of the front cover 676.

Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the mode of light emitted from the first LED 674a to the front side (player side) of the front cover 676 will be described. 54 is a front view of the displacement member 670. FIG. In FIG. 54, the area of the light emitted toward the player by the first LED 674a is indicated by a chain double-dashed line, and is indicated by the reference numeral of the irradiation area SR2.

As shown in FIG. 54, the region of the light emitted to the player side by the first LED 674a has a rectangular shape elongated in the horizontal direction at the lower end of the decoration unit 672 (front cover 676). Since the displacement members 670 are arranged at the upper and lower ends of the vertical displacement unit 600L, the displacement members 670 form the irradiation regions SR2 at positions separated by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. Therefore, the upper and lower numbers can be displayed by the 7-segment display using the irradiation areas SR2 of the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670 .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56, the 7-segment display displayed by the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 will be described. FIG. 55 is a front view of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800. FIG. FIG. 56 is a schematic diagram of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800. FIG. 55 and 56 show a state in which the transmissive area 821b1 of the outer reel 821 is rotated toward the player, and the irradiation area SR1, the irradiation area SR2 and the transmissive area 821b1 are shown by two-dot chain lines. be.

As shown in FIG. 55, two irradiation regions SR1 formed by the first segment unit 610 and the second segment unit 620 of the segment display device 600 are arranged vertically, and six irradiation regions are arranged horizontally. state.

The irradiation area SR1 is formed as one set of four with the decorative pattern display device 800 interposed therebetween, and three sets of the sets are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. Between a pair of irradiation regions SR1, irradiation regions SR2 are arranged above and below, and a transmissive region 821b1 is arranged at a vertical middle position. Therefore, the seven irradiation areas SR1 and SR2 and the transmissive area 821b1 can display the number by the 7-segment display.

As described above, since three sets of four irradiation regions SR1 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, each set forms a seven-segment display. That is, three 7-segment displays are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction.

Therefore, the 7-segment displays arranged side by side in the left-right direction can be displayed with numbers as effective lines for the jackpot lottery of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, all the 7-segment displays can be made to display the segment "7"). ) Thereby, not only the big win display by the above-described decorative pattern display device 800 but also the big win display by the 7-segment display can be performed. As a result, it is possible to allow the player to visually recognize a plurality of display modes, thereby enhancing the interest of the player.

Here, since the light transmitting portions 621a of the first segment unit 610 and the second segment unit 620 of the segment display device 600 are curved in a convex shape toward the front side, the player can visually recognize the display of the seven segments. When the game is played, the display at the center in the vertical direction closer to the player becomes larger, and the display at both ends in the vertical direction farther from the player becomes smaller. Therefore, there is a problem that the number display by the 7 segments cannot be visually recognized clearly by the player.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, the 7-segment display is formed such that the width dimension in the horizontal direction is gradually increased from the vertical center position toward the upper and lower ends. As a result, the 7-segment display at the upper and lower ends and the upper and lower central positions can be made uniform as a whole. As a result, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the display of numbers by 7 segments clearly.

Furthermore, the 7-segment display formed on both the left and right sides is formed such that the central portion in the vertical direction is inclined toward the central side in the horizontal direction. As a result, the player can clearly view the 7-segment display formed on the left and right sides.

That is, the player's viewpoint is normally positioned at the center position of the pachinko machine 10 in the left-right direction. Also, the segment display device 600 is arranged at the center position of the pachinko machine 10 in the left-right direction. Therefore, the player's viewpoint is positioned in front of the seven segments displayed in the center. Therefore, the 7-segment display is visually recognized by the player in a curved manner due to the curved shapes of the light transmitting portions 621a of the first segment unit 610 and the second segment unit 620, as it is left and right away from the player's viewpoint. Since the center portion of the 7-segment display is inclined toward the center in the horizontal direction, the 7-segment display is less likely to be viewed in a curved manner from the player's viewpoint. As a result, the player can clearly see the 7-segment display.

Next, the displacement mode of the displacement member 670 will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60. FIG. 57(a) to G01(c) are front views of the vertical displacement unit 600L. 58(a), 59(a) and 60(a) are side views of the vertical displacement unit 600L, and FIGS. FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 600L taken along line LVIIIb-LVIIIb of (a);

57(a), 58(a), and 58(b) show a state in which the displacement member 670 is disposed in the retracted state, and FIGS. 57(b), 59(a), and 59 57(c), 60(a), and 60(b), the displacement member 670 is arranged in an overhanging state. The states are illustrated.

The retracted state of the displacement members 670 is a state in which the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670 are separated from each other, and the protruding state of the displacement members 670 is a state in which the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670 are displaced. A state in which the member 670 abuts at an intermediate position in the vertical direction, and the intermediate state of the displacement member 670 is a state in which the displacement member 670 is arranged between the retracted state and the extended state.

As shown in FIGS. 57(a) and 58, in the position where the displacement member 670 is in the retracted state, the displacement member 670 arranged at the upper side (upper side in FIG. 57) of the pair of upper and lower members is the first displacement member. By positioning the link member 684 and the second link member 686 upward, the decorative unit 672 is positioned upward with the shaft support hole 671a as the rotation axis.

In addition, the torsion spring SP1 inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 disposed above has an engagement position with the through hole 671d1 that is the base end portion on the other end side (the side inserted into the through hole 671d1). It is said that Therefore, the biasing force exerted by the torsion spring SP1 can be increased. As a result, the displacement member 670 can easily maintain the state in which the decoration unit 672 is arranged on the upper side in the direction of gravity.

On the other hand, the displacement member 670 arranged at the lower side (lower side in FIG. 57) of the pair of upper and lower members is arranged with the first link member 684 and the second link member 686 positioned downward, so that the shaft support hole 671a is displaced. The state is such that the decoration unit 672 is positioned downward as the rotating shaft.

In addition, the torsion spring SP2 inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 disposed below has a base end portion on the other end side (the side inserted into the through hole 671d1) that engages with the through hole 671d1. It is said that Therefore, the biasing force exerted by the torsion spring SP2 can be increased. As a result, the displacement member 670 can easily displace the decoration unit 672 upward in the gravity direction.

In the retracted state, an opening is formed between the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670 facing the decorative units 762, and the decorative pattern display device 800 arranged inside the vertical displacement unit 600L can be visually recognized. In this case, as described above, three symbols to be decorated on the inner reel 811 of the decorative symbol display device 800 can be displayed on the player side in the vertical direction.

From the state shown in FIGS. 57(a) and 58, when a rotational driving force is applied to the driving motor KM3, the large diameter gear 683 and the cam member 685 are rotated. As a result, the first link member 684 and the second link member 686 are displaced to the substantially central position in the vertical direction of the vertical displacement unit 600L. Therefore, the displacement member 670 connected to the insertion holes 684b and 686b of the first link member 684 and the second link member 686 is rotationally displaced about the shaft support hole 671a, resulting in the states shown in FIGS. 57(b) and 59. to the state shown in FIGS. 57(c) and 60.

As shown in FIGS. 57(b) and 59, when the displacement member 670 is displaced to the position of the intermediate state, the torsion spring SP1 inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 disposed above passes through. The engagement position with the hole 671d1 is the intermediate position on the other end side (the side inserted into the through hole 671d1). Therefore, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 can be increased by the amount of deformation of the torsion spring SP1, and the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 can be made smaller than the engagement position in the retracted state by the amount of changing the engagement position.

Similarly to the torsion spring SP2 inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 arranged on the lower side, the engagement position with the through hole 671d1 is the other end side (inserted into the through hole 671d1). side). Therefore, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 can be reduced by the amount of deformation of the torsion spring SP2, and the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 can be reduced by the amount of change in the engagement position.

In the intermediate state, an opening smaller than that in the retracted state is formed between the facing decoration units 762 of the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670, and the decorative pattern display device 800 arranged inside the vertical displacement unit 600L can be visually recognized. . In this case, one symbol to be decorated on the inner reel 811 of the decorative symbol display device 800 can be displayed on the player side.

Therefore, by displacing the displacement member 670 from the retracted state in which three symbols decorated on the inner reel 811 are displayed in the vertical direction to the intermediate state in which one symbol decorated on the inner reel 811 is displayed in the vertical direction. , a plurality of presentation modes can be formed, and the amusement of the player can be improved. In addition, by adopting a mode in which one figure side decorated on the inner reel 811 is displayed in the vertical direction, one symbol can be focused on by the player. Therefore, since it is possible to clarify the part to be noticed, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest.

As shown in FIGS. 57(c) and 60, when the displacement member 670 is displaced to the retracted position, the torsion spring SP1 inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 disposed above passes through. The position of engagement with the hole 671d1 is the tip position of the other end side (the side inserted into the through hole 671d1). Therefore, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 can be increased by the amount of deformation of the torsion spring SP1, and the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 can be made smaller than the engagement position in the intermediate state by the amount of changing the engagement position.

Similarly to the torsion spring SP1, the torsion spring SP2 inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 arranged on the lower side also has an engagement position with the through hole 671d1 that side). Therefore, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 can be increased by the amount of deformation of the torsion spring SP2, and the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 can be made smaller than the engagement position in the intermediate state by the amount of changing the engagement position.

That is, the urging forces of the torsion springs SP1 and SP2 can be made non-linear according to the displacement of the displacement member 670. FIG. Accordingly, depending on the displacement position of the displacement member 670, the necessary biasing force can be easily applied from the torsion springs SP1 and SP2. As a result, the energy required to drive the drive motor KM3 can be minimized.

In the overhanging state, the decoration unit 672 of the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670 is in contact with the vertical displacement unit 600L at the middle position in the vertical direction. In this case, the decorative unit 672 is arranged on the front side of the decorative design display device 800, and the display of the decorative design display device 800 can be made invisible from the player side (front side).

Therefore, by setting the displacement member 670 to the extended state, rotationally displacing the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820, and then displacing the displacement member 670 to the intermediate state or the retracted state, the symbols are arranged for the player ( It is possible to make it easier to have expectations. As a result, the interest of the player can be enhanced.

In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the displacement members 670 arranged in a pair on the upper and lower sides are displaced by the same amount. It is also possible to displace only one side of the displacement members 670 arranged in a pair up and down to the position of the intermediate state or the extended state.

Also, the maximum amount of displacement of the displacement members 670 arranged in a pair of upper and lower members is not set at the intermediate position, but can be displaced beyond the position shown in FIG. That is, it can be vertically displaced while the pair of displacement members 670 are in contact with each other.

Next, the operation of the vertical displacement unit 600L will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63. FIG. 61 to 63 are schematic diagrams of the vertical displacement unit 600L. 61 to 63, transition states of the displacement member 670 are illustrated in order.

61 to 63, the displacement member 670 arranged above the vertical displacement unit 600L and the drive means for driving the displacement member 670 are added with U at the end of the reference numerals, and the vertical displacement unit 600L The displacement member 670 disposed on the side and the driving means for driving the displacement member 670 will be described with D added to the end of the reference numerals.

As shown in FIG. 61, in the vertical displacement unit 600L, extension members 671 of the displacement member 670 are arranged on both left and right sides. The pair of extension members 671 are divided into a driven side to which the driving force of the driving motor KM3 is transmitted via the connecting rod 681 and a driving side to which the driving force of the driving motor KM3 is transmitted by the projection 683b of the large diameter gear 683. connected to each other.

As shown in FIG. 62, when the vertically arranged displacement members 670 are displaced, the side surfaces of the decoration units 672 are brought into contact with each other at the vertical center position of the vertical displacement unit 600L.

As shown in FIG. 63, by displacing both of the displacement members 670 in the same direction from the state shown in FIG. 62, the decoration units 672 can be vertically displaced while the sides of the decoration units 672 are in contact with each other. .

Here, the first displacement member (decorative unit 672U) and the first displacement member (decorative unit 672U) and the first displacement member (decoration unit 672U) and the first displacement member (decoration unit 672U) formed to be displaceable in the direction of approaching or separating from each other and displaceable in the same direction while the opposing sides are in contact with each other. A gaming machine with two displacement members (decoration unit 672D) is known. According to such a game machine, by bringing the first displacement member and the second displacement member close to the position where the opposing sides abut against each other, an object (for example, , a liquid crystal display device and a production member), and by displacing the first displacement member and the second displacement member in a direction away from each other, the shielding is released along with the displacement, and the object can be viewed. You can perform a production to do. Further, by displacing the first displacement member and the second displacement member in the same direction (for example, reciprocating displacement in one direction and the other direction) while the opposing sides are in contact with each other, the shielding of the target is maintained. , it is also possible to perform an effect before the shielding is released (an effect to focus on the action of releasing the shielding).

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, it is difficult to bring the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member into close contact due to dimensional tolerances and assembly tolerances of the constituent members. There is a problem that a gap may be formed in the If a gap is formed between the opposing sides, the player can visually recognize the object on the back side through the gap, and the presentation effect is hindered.

On the other hand, according to this embodiment, the base member 660 and the drive means 680U and the drive means 680D that displaceably support the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are provided on the base member 660, and the drive means 680U is supported. The facing side of the decoration unit 672D is biased toward one side of the facing side of the decoration unit 672U, and is opposite to the other side of the facing side of the decoration unit 672D that contacts one side of the facing side of the decoration unit 672U. Since the supporting mode of the driving means 680D is biased to one side, when the opposing sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are brought into contact with each other, the supporting mode of the driving means 680U and the supporting mode of the driving means 680D are displaced. They can be biased to opposite sides (sides rotated 180° around the center of one side and the other side of the opposing sides). As a result, the facing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and the formation of a gap between the facing sides can be suppressed (see FIG. 63).

In this embodiment, since the number of constituent members arranged differs between one side and the other side (both sides in the left-right direction), the driving forces transmitted to the left and right of the decoration unit 672 are different. , one's own rigid side (low side) can face the opponent's low rigid side (high side). Therefore, when the facing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are in contact with each other, the driving means 680U and the driving means 680D push (advance) the other on the side with high rigidity and move forward on the side with low rigidity. can form a state of accepting (retreating) the other party. As a result, the opposing sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

The driving means 680U includes a driving motor KM3U that generates a driving force, a pair of extension members 671U that connect the decoration unit 672U to the base member, and transmits the driving force of the driving motor KM3U to the pair of extension members 671U. The drive means 680D includes a drive motor KM3D that generates drive force and a pair of extensions that connect the decoration unit 672D to the base member 660. and a second link member 686D and a first link member 684D, which transmit the driving force of the drive motor KM3U to the pair of extension members 671U, respectively, and have different configurations. The opposing sides of the decoration unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and the formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

That is, when the opposing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are in contact with each other, the driving means 680U and the driving means 680D each operate, for example, on the side where the driving force is large or on the side where the driving force is transmitted first. It is possible to form a state in which the opponent is pushed (advance) and the opponent is accepted (retreat) on the side where the driving force is small or on the side where the transmission timing of the driving force is later. As a result, the opposing sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

The extension member 671U and the extension member 671D are formed to have substantially the same length, and one end side is connected to the decoration unit 672U or the decoration unit 672D, and the other end side rotates coaxially with the base member 660. Since the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are reciprocatingly moved in the same direction while their opposing sides are in contact with each other, the opposing sides are in contact with each other even when the deviation of the support mode is used. It is easy to maintain the contact state.

Furthermore, the extension member 671U or the extension member 671D is provided with an elastic member 671f made of a rubber-like elastic material. Since the body is interposed between the extension member 671U and the extension member 671D in an elastically compressed state, the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are reciprocated in the same direction while their opposing sides are in contact with each other. Even in the case of using the bias of the support mode, it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the opposing sides are in contact with each other.

Further, as described above, the driving means 680U includes a driving motor KM3U that generates a driving force, a pair of extending members 671U that are driven by the driving motor KM3U and connect the decoration unit 672U to the base member 660, and Equipped with two torsion springs SP1 that apply different urging forces to the pair of extension members 671U, the driving means 680D includes a driving motor KM3D that generates driving force and a decoration unit 672D that is driven by the driving motor KM3D. to the base member 660, and two torsion springs SP2 for applying different biasing forces to the pair of extension members 671D. The sides can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

That is, when the facing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are in contact with each other, the drive means 680U and the drive means 680D each push (advance) the other on the side where the biasing force is large, for example. A side with less power can form a state of accepting (retreating) the opponent. As a result, the opposing sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

Note that the two torsion springs SP1 may have the same configuration. In other words, the biasing forces applied to the pair of extension members 671U may be different because the positions at which the biasing forces are applied are different from each other or the amounts of elastic deformation are different from each other. The same is true for the two torsion springs SP2.

Further, the drive means 680U includes a drive motor KM3U that generates a driving force, a pair of extension members 671U that are driven by the drive motor KM3U and connect the decoration unit 672U to the base member 660, and a pair of extension members 671U. The driving means 680D includes a driving motor KM3D that generates a driving force and a driving motor KM3D that drives the decoration unit 672D to the base member. A pair of extension members 671D connected to 660 and a second biasing member that applies a biasing force to one of the pair of extension members 671D are provided. can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

That is, when the facing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are in contact with each other, each of the driving means 680U and the driving means 680D pushes (advances) the other on the side to which the biasing force is applied. , the side on which the biasing force is not applied can form a state of accepting (retreating) the opponent. As a result, the opposing sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

As described above, it is formed as a torsion spring, one leg is connected to the extension member 671U and the other leg is connected to the base member 660, and biases the decoration unit 672U toward the decoration unit 672D. Since the torsion spring SP1 is provided, when the decoration unit 672U is displaced in the direction of approaching the decoration unit 672D, the driving force of the drive motor KM3U required to rotate the extension member 671U is applied to the torsion spring SP1. It can be assisted by a biasing force. Therefore, for example, when the decoration unit 672U is displaced from the stop position to the abutment position where it abuts on the decoration unit 672D from the retracted position separated from the decoration unit 672D, the displacement can be started smoothly.

In this case, as the extension member 671U is rotated in the direction in which the decoration unit 672U approaches the decoration unit 672D, the connection position between one leg of the torsion spring SP1 and the extension member 671U or the connection position between the other leg of the torsion spring SP1 and the extension member 671U is rotated. Since at least one of the connection positions with the base member 660 is separated from the winding portion, the distance from the winding portion to the position where the force is applied is longer, and the decoration unit 672U is attached in the direction of approaching the decoration unit 672D. power can be weakened. Therefore, for example, when the decoration unit 672U brought close to the decoration unit 672D is to be stopped, the displacement can be reliably stopped, so damage due to collision can be suppressed. Further, when the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are reciprocated in the same direction with their opposing sides in contact with each other, the driving force required for the reciprocation can be suppressed, so the displacement speed of the reciprocation can be increased. It is possible to improve the performance effect.

On the other hand, it is formed as a torsion spring, one leg is connected to the extension member 671D and the other leg is connected to the base member, and a torsional force is applied in a direction to bring the decoration unit 672D closer to the decoration unit 672U. Equipped with a spring SP2, as the extension member 671D rotates in the direction in which the decoration unit 672D approaches the decoration unit 672U, the connection position between one leg of the torsion spring SP2 and the extension member 671D or the other position of the torsion spring SP2 is changed. Since at least one of the connection positions between the leg and the base member is separated from the winding portion, the torsion spring SP2 exhibits the same effect as the torsion spring SP1. In particular, when the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are reciprocatingly displaced in the same direction with their opposing sides in contact with each other, the drive force required for the reciprocating displacement can be suppressed, which is particularly effective. Also, the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are arranged at the same height (positioned in the direction of gravity), and the position where they abut is the highest position (or the lowest position) in the direction of gravity, and the position where they are separated from each other. The configuration of the torsion spring SP1 and the torsion spring SP2 is particularly effective when the (retracted position) is the lowest position (or highest position) in the gravitational direction.

Since the decoration unit 672U is displaced upward in the gravitational direction to come close to the decoration unit 672D, the lower the decoration unit 672U is positioned in the gravity direction, the more the urging force in the direction of displacing the decoration unit 672U upward in the gravitational direction is applied. The biasing force in the direction of displacing the decoration unit 672U upward in the gravitational direction can be weakened as the decoration unit 672U is positioned upward in the gravitational direction.

Therefore, when displacing (raising) the decoration unit 672U from the stopped state upward in the direction of gravity, the displacement (raising) can be smoothly started, and when the raised decoration unit 672U is stopped, can reliably stop the displacement not only by the action of gravity but also by weakening the biasing force. As a result, damage due to collision with the decoration unit 672D can be suppressed. On the other hand, when stopping the decoration unit 672U that has been displaced (lowered) downward in the direction of gravity, the urging force is strengthened so that the urging force is made to oppose the action of gravity that attempts to continue the descent. can be done. As a result, it is possible to reliably stop the decoration unit 672U.

A torsion spring SP2, which is formed as a torsion spring and has one leg connected to the extension member 671D and the other leg connected to the base member 660, imparts a biasing force in the direction of separating the decoration unit 672D from the decoration unit 672U. , and the decoration unit 672D is separated from the decoration unit 672U by displacement upward in the direction of gravity. The driving force of the drive motor KM3D required to rotate the extension member 671U can be assisted by the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 when the extension member 671U needs to be displaced (raised) against the . Therefore, the displacement can be performed smoothly.

In this case, as the extension member 671D is rotated in the direction in which the decoration unit 672D approaches the decoration unit 672U, the connection position between one leg of the torsion spring SP2 and the extension member 671D or the other leg of the torsion spring SP2 is connected. Since at least one of the connection positions with the base member 660 is separated from the winding portion, the distance from the winding portion to the position where the force is applied increases, and the direction in which the decoration unit 672D is separated from the decoration unit 672U (the direction of gravity) is increased. It is possible to weaken the urging force in the upward direction). Therefore, for example, when the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are reciprocally displaced in the same direction with their opposing sides in contact with each other, the driving force required for the reciprocating displacement can be suppressed. can be increased, and the production effect can be improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 64, a rotating member 2812 of the second embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment described above, the projection 812a1 formed on the rotating member 812 is formed in a chevron shape inclined to both sides along the circumferential direction of the hub 812a. The formed protrusion 2812a is formed in a curved hemispherical shape. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the part same as 1st Embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 64(a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member 2812 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 64(b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member 2812 along line LXIVb-LXIVb of FIG. 64(a). Note that FIG. 64(a) corresponds to FIG. 36(a).

As shown in FIG. 64, the hub 812a of the rotating member 2812 is formed with a protrusion 2812a1 that protrudes toward the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820. As shown in FIG. The protrusions 2812a1 are formed at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the hub 812a.

The protrusion 2812a1 is curved in a bowl shape. As a result, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, air can be pushed out to generate wind. Also, the pushed air (wind) collides with the edge 824 of the opposing outer reel 821 to flow into the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel. As a result, dust (dust) sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and dust that is about to stick can be blown off. As a result, it is possible to prevent dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 .

Moreover, since the projection 2812a1 of the second embodiment is curved in a bowl shape, it can have higher rigidity than the projection 812a1 of the first embodiment. As a result, when the inner reel unit 810 or the outer reel unit 820 is rotationally driven and the tip of the protrusion 2812a1 comes into contact with the spoke 822 of the outer reel unit 820, the protrusion 2812a can be prevented from being damaged.

Next, an outer reel unit 820 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66. FIG. In the first embodiment, the projection 812a1 is formed on the rotating member 812, but in the second embodiment, the projection 3824a is formed on the edge 824. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

65 is a cross-sectional view of a decorative design display device 800 in the third embodiment, FIG. 66(a) is a partially enlarged view of an outer reel unit 820, and FIG. 66(b) is FIG. 66(a). is a cross-sectional view of the outer reel unit 820 along line LXVIb-LXVIb of FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66 , projections 3824 a projecting toward the rotating member 812 of the inner reel unit 810 are formed on edge portions 824 on extension lines of the spokes 3822 of the outer reel unit 820 . A protrusion 3824 a is formed at the outer (outer reel 821 side) end of each spoke 3822 .

The protrusion 3824a is formed in a shape in which both sides are inclined along the circumferential direction of the outer reel 821 . Therefore, by rotating the outer reel unit 820, air can be pushed out to generate wind. In addition, the pushed air (wind) collides with the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810 facing the inner reel unit 810, and flows into the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel. As a result, dust (dust) sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and dust that is about to stick can be blown off. As a result, it is possible to prevent dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 .

Next, a rotating member 4812 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. In the first embodiment described above, the projection 812a1 formed on the rotating member 812 is formed in a mountain shape with both sides inclined along the circumferential direction of the hub 812a. The protrusion 4812a formed on the 1 is inclined with respect to the radial direction of the hub 812a. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 67 is a cross-sectional view of a decorative design display device 800 according to the fourth embodiment, FIG. 68(a) is a partially enlarged view of a rotating member 4812, and FIG. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of a rotating member 4812 taken along line LXVIIIb-LXVIIIb;

As shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, the hub 812a of the rotating member 4812 is formed with a protrusion 4812a1 protruding toward the edge 824 of the outer reel unit. The protrusions 4812a1 are formed at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the hub 812a.

The protrusion 4812a1 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the side, and is formed so that its longitudinal direction intersects with the radial direction of the hub 812a. That is, the projection 4812a1 is formed to be inclined in the circumferential direction from the radially outer end portion of the hub 812a toward the radially inner end portion thereof. In addition, the direction of inclination is inclined toward the normal rotation direction of the inner reel unit 810 .

Therefore, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, air can be pushed out to generate wind. Also, the pushed air (wind) collides with the edge 824 of the opposing outer reel 821 and flows into the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 . As a result, dust (dust) sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and dust that is about to stick can be blown off. As a result, it is possible to prevent dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 .

In addition, the protrusion 4812a1 of the fourth embodiment is formed so as to be inclined in the circumferential direction from the radially outer end portion of the hub 812a toward the radially inner end portion thereof, and the direction of inclination thereof coincides with the normal rotation of the inner reel unit 810. Since it is on the direction side, the rotation of the inner reel unit 810 can easily generate wind. As a result, it is possible to prevent dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 .

That is, at least a part of the outer reel 821 of the outer reel unit 820 is formed to have a light transmittance, and a plurality of patterns are arranged along the circumferential direction on the inner reel 811 of the inner reel unit 810. Via the outer reel unit 820, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the variation of the symbols accompanying the rotation of the inner reel unit 810. - 特許庁In this case, the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810 is provided with the projection 4812a1. In the performance by rotating the outer reel unit 820 or the inner reel unit 810, the chances of cleaning the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 can be increased.

Next, the inner reel unit 5810 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. FIG. In the first embodiment described above, the spokes 812c of the inner reel unit 810 are formed in such a manner that they are inclined toward the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820 as they extend radially outward. , the spokes 5812c of the inner reel unit 5810 are formed in such a manner that the spokes 5812c of the inner reel unit 5810 are inclined to the side opposite to the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820 as they go radially outward. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 69 is a cross-sectional view of a decorative design display device 800 according to the fifth embodiment. 70(a) is a partially enlarged view of the annular member 813, and FIG. 70(b) is a cross-sectional view of the annular member 813 taken along line LXXb-LXXb of FIG. 70(a). It should be noted that the backlight unit 830 is removed from the decorative pattern display device 800 in the fifth embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, in the inner reel unit 5810 of the fifth embodiment, the spokes 812c of the rotating member 5812 are inclined to the side opposite to the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820 as they go radially outward. formed by Therefore, the inclination direction of the spokes 822 of the outer reel unit 820 and the inclination direction of the spokes 812c of the inner reel unit 810 are symmetrical.

A projection 5813a is formed on the surface of the annular member 813 of the inner reel unit 5810 facing the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820 (see FIG. 70). A plurality of protrusions 5813a are formed at regular intervals in the circumferential direction of the annular member 813 .

The protrusion 5813a is formed in a chevron shape inclined to both sides along the circumferential direction of the annular member 813 . As a result, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, air can be pushed out to generate wind. Also, the pushed air (wind) collides with the edge 824 of the opposing outer reel 821 to flow into the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel. As a result, dust (dust) sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and dust that is about to stick can be blown off. As a result, it is possible to prevent dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 .

Here, when the spokes 822 of the outer reel unit 820 and the spokes 812c of the inner reel unit 810 are arranged on the left and right sides of the decorative pattern display device 800, the space between them (between the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820) Since air cannot be sufficiently sent to the space between the reel units 810 and 820, the drive motors KM1 and KM2 that drive the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 cannot be sufficiently cooled, and the drive motors KM1 and KM2 break down. I was afraid.

In contrast, in the fifth embodiment, the projection 5813a can generate an air flow that flows in between the opposing outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel. As a result, air can be easily drawn from both the left and right sides of the decorative pattern display device 800.例文帳に追加Therefore, air can be sent to the space between the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 . As a result, the drive motors KM1 and KM2 can be cooled, so that failure of the drive motors KM1 and KM2 can be suppressed.

Next, an inner reel unit 810 and an outer reel unit 820 of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 73. FIG. In the first embodiment, the projections 812a1 are formed only on the inner reel unit 810, but in the sixth embodiment, the projections 6812a1 and 6824a are formed on the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820. . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 71 is a cross-sectional view of a decorative design display device 800 according to the sixth embodiment. 72(a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member 6812, and FIG. 72(b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member 6812 along line LXXIIb-LXXIIb of FIG. 72(a). 73(a) is a partially enlarged view of the outer reel unit 820, and FIG. 73(b) is a sectional view of the outer reel unit 820 along line LXXIIIb-LXXIIIb of FIG. 73(a).

As shown in FIGS. 71 to 73, the hub 812a of the rotating member 6812 is formed with a projection 6812a1 projecting toward the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820. As shown in FIGS. The protrusions 2812a1 are formed at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the hub 812a. Also, the protrusion 6812a1 is formed in a mountain shape with both sides inclined along the circumferential direction of the hub 812a.

The edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820 is formed with a projection 6824a projecting toward the hub 812a of the rotating member 6812 . The protrusions 6824a are formed at regular intervals in the circumferential direction of the outer reel 821 . Also, the protrusion 6824a is formed in a mountain shape with both sides inclined along the circumferential direction of the outer reel 821 .

The protrusion 6812a1 is formed radially inward of the rotating member 6812 from the protrusion 6824a. As a result, when the inner reel unit 810 or the outer reel unit 820 is rotated, the projection 6812a1 can be prevented from colliding with the projection 6824a.

Therefore, when the inner reel unit 810 or the outer reel unit 820 is rotated, wind can be generated by the protrusions 6812a1 and 6824a. That is, wind can be generated by rotating either the inner reel unit 810 or the outer reel unit 820 .

Further, in this case, the air pushed out to either the protrusion 6812a1 or the protrusion 6824a can collide with the other of the protrusion 6812a1 or the protrusion 6824a, so that the air flow can be further restricted. Therefore, it is possible to speed up the flow of air flowing into the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel. As a result, dust (dust) sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and dust that is about to stick can be blown off. As a result, it is possible to prevent dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 .

That is, in the sixth embodiment, since the protrusions 8624a and 6812a are provided on the inner surface of the edge portion 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a at different positions in the radial direction, the outer reel unit 820 or the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, the protrusions 8624a and 6812a can be circumferentially displaced between the inner surface of the rim 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a to generate wind pressure. Therefore, in the performance by rotating the outer reel unit 820 or the inner reel unit 810, the chances of cleaning the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 can be increased.

An inclined surface is formed between the surfaces of the protrusion 6812a1 and the protrusion 6824a that face each other in the radial direction. This can reduce the air resistance when the air flows in the radial direction. As a result, it is possible to easily blow off the dust (dirt) sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and the dust that is about to stick.

Furthermore, the arrangement intervals of the projections 6812a1 in the circumferential direction and the arrangement intervals of the projections 6824a in the circumferential direction are different. As a result, the position where the protrusion 6812a1 and the protrusion 6824a overlap in the radial direction can be shifted. Therefore, the projections 6812a1 and the projections 6824a overlap in the radial direction, so that the positions at which the air is compressed can be divided into a plurality of positions. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rotation speed of the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 from being slowed down due to the protrusions 6812a1 and 6824a overlapping in the radial direction and the air being compressed.

Next, a rotation member 7533 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 77. FIG. In the first embodiment, the first electric accessory 520 is symmetrically driven in the same manner, but in the seventh embodiment, the left and right first electric accessories 520 are driven differently. be. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 74, a detailed description of the rotating member 7533 in the seventh embodiment will be given. 74(a) is a front view of the rotating member 7533 in the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 74(b) is a side view of the rotating member 7533. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 74, the rotating member 7533 is formed by arranging two plate-like bodies which are substantially L-shaped when viewed from the side side by side with a predetermined width in the left-right direction. is formed by connecting by In addition, the plate-shaped bodies arranged at both the left and right ends are arranged so that the bending angles of the substantially L-shaped bends in the side view shape are different on the left and right sides. In the seventh embodiment, the bending angle of the L-shaped plate formed on the left side in front view is set larger than the bending angle of the L-shaped plate formed on the right side in front view.

Therefore, the driving portions 7533d formed by being recessed on the other end side (the left side in FIG. 74(b)) of the rotating member 7533 are formed at different positions in the vertical direction on the left and right sides. In addition, the driving portion 7533d has a recessed width (vertical width on the left side of FIG. 74(b)) that is larger than the outer shape of the projection 523 formed on the first electric accessory 520, and the inside of the driving portion 7533d A projection 523 is slidably formed.

In addition, the width dimension of the rotating member 7533 in the left-right direction in the front view (the dimension between the outer surfaces of the two plate-like bodies facing each other) is smaller than the dimension between the inner facing sides of the two first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 532. set. As a result, the rotating member 533 can be arranged between the opposing first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 532 .

Also, in the front view, the rotation member 7533 is set so that the dimension between the left and right plate members facing each other is larger than the diameter of the game ball. This allows the game ball to pass through the inside of the rotating member 7533 (between the two plate members facing each other).

The rotating member 7533 includes a rotating shaft 533c that protrudes to both sides in the left-right direction from a bent portion that is approximately L-shaped when viewed from the side; It mainly includes a driving portion 7533d that is recessed at the tip of the other end of the L shape.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 75 to 76, the driving mode of the first electric accessory 520 of the seventh embodiment will be described. 75(a) to 75(c) are side views of the drive unit 530 and the first electric accessory 520. FIG. 76(a) to 76(c) are front views of the drive unit 530 and the first electric accessory 520. FIG.

75(a) and 76(a) show the first state of the first electric accessory 520, and FIGS. 75(c) and 76(c) show the second state of the first electric accessory 520. FIGS. 75(b) and 76(b) respectively illustrate states in which the first electric accessory 520 is positioned between the first state and the second state. 75 and 76 show a state in which the first case member 534 and the second case member 535 are transparent.

As shown in FIGS. 75(a) and 76(a), when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 protrudes from the inside of the main body 531a, the projection 533b of the rotary member 533 is positioned on the front side (FIG. 75(a)). left side) to position the driving portion 7533d downward. As a result, the projection 523 of the first electric accessory 520 is pushed downward, and the first electric accessory 520 is brought into the first state.

In this case, a gap is formed between the inner side of the right driving portion 7533d and the upper side of the projection 523R of the right wing member 520R (the upper side in FIG. 75(a)). This is because the center of gravity of the right wing member 520R is switched to the left side of the rotation axis (through hole 521R) in front view while the projection 523R is pushed down to a certain position by the driving portion 7533d to bring the right wing member 520R into the first state. , is formed by rotating the right wing member 520R to the first state by its own weight.

Also, a gap is formed between the inner side of the left driving portion 7533d and the lower side of the projection 523L of the left wing member 520L (the lower side in FIG. 75(a)).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 75(b) and 76(b), when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is pulled into the main body 531a, the projection 533b of the rotary member 533 is pulled toward the back side (FIG. 75(b)). ) to the right), and the driving portion 7533d is lifted upward. As a result, the first electric accessory 520 is rotated by pushing the projection 523 upward.

In this case, as described above, in the first state, a gap is formed between the inner side of the left driving portion 7533d and the lower side of the projection 523L of the left wing member 520L (lower side in FIG. 75(a)). , when the rotating member 533 is rotated (the driving portion 533d is lifted), the engagement between the left driving portion 7533d and the projection 523L is delayed by the gap. Therefore, the start of the displacement of the right blade member 520R to the second state is made earlier.

75(b) and 76(b), the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is further drawn into the main body 531a, and the rotary member 533 is rotated to the rotation end position. Therefore, the driving portion 7533d of the rotating member 533 is lifted upward, and the first electric accessory 520 is brought into the second state shown in FIGS. 76(c) and 76(c).

In this case, a gap is formed between the inner side of the left driving portion 7533d and the lower side of the projection 523R of the right wing member 520R (the lower side in FIG. 75(c)). This is because the center of gravity of the left wing member 520L is switched to the left side of the rotation shaft (through hole 521L) in the front view while the projection 523L is pushed up to a certain position by the driving portion 7533d to bring the left wing member 520L into the second state. , by rotating the left wing member 520L to the first state by its own weight.

Also, a gap is formed between the inner side of the right driving portion 7533d and the lower side of the projection 523R of the right wing member 520R (the lower side in FIG. 75(a)).

Therefore, when displacing the first electric accessory 520 from the first state to the second state, the right wing member 520R can be started first, and the left wing member 520L can be displaced to the second state. It can be after the right wing member 520R.

The displacement from the second state shown in FIGS. 75(c) and 76(c) to the first state shown in FIGS. 75(a) and 76(c) is the displacement from the above-described first state to the second state. Since it is only the opposite of , the detailed explanation is omitted.

Therefore, when displacing the first electric accessory 520 from the second state to the first state, the left wing member 520L can be started first, and the right wing member 520R can be displaced to the first state. It can precede the left wing member 520L.

Next, with reference to FIG. 77, the case where a game ball enters the winning hole unit 500 of the seventh embodiment will be described. 77(a) and 77(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. FIG.

77(a) and 77(b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 of FIG. 24(b). Also, FIGS. 77(a) and 77(b) illustrate a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is being displaced from the second state to the first state.

As shown in FIGS. 77(a) and 77(b), when the first electric accessory 520 is displaced from the second state to the first state, the left wing member 520L is first started and , the displacement of the right wing member 520R to the first state is slower than that of the left wing member 520L.

That is, a state in which only the right wing member 520R of the first electric accessory 520 is opened can be instantaneously formed. At this time, when the game ball is entered from the right wing member 520R side, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R is moved to the front side (lower side in FIG. 77(a)) by the bulging portion 524R. be guided to Therefore, the game ball can be easily made to collide with the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L.

Since the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L is formed at the end on the front side, it is easy to bounce the game ball collided with the bulging portion 524L to the back side. Therefore, the game ball entered from the right wing member 520R can be easily entered into the second winning hole 140.例文帳に追加

That is, in the seventh embodiment, when displacing the first electric accessory 520 to the first state, the left wing member 520L on the side where the bulging portion 524L is formed on the front side and the right wing member 520R on the opposite side are displaced. By displacing after the left wing member 520L, a game ball entered during the displacement to the first state can be smoothly thrown to the second winning hole 140. - 特許庁

Further, in the seventh embodiment, the timing at which one of the pair of feather members 520L and 520R (one of the feather members 520L and 520R) is positioned to form the closed state and the other feather member (The other of the feather members 520L and 520R) is different from the timing at which it is arranged at the position forming the closed state, so it is difficult to pinch the game ball between the pair of feather members 520L and 520R (side surfaces 526L and 526R). , the interval between the pair of feather members 520L and 520R can be narrowed accordingly. Therefore, the space required for disposing the pair of feather members 520L and 520R can be suppressed.

Next, a rotating member 8533 of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 82. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the sliding member 532 is formed with the second protrusion 532c for restricting the entry of the game ball is described. A restricting second protrusion 8533e is formed. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 78, the configuration of the drive unit 8530 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 78 is an exploded perspective front view of the drive unit 8530 in the eighth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 78, the drive unit 8530 of the eighth embodiment includes a solenoid 531, a sliding member 8532 connected to the solenoid 531, a rotating member 8533 connected to the sliding member 8532, and a rotating member 8533 connected to the sliding member 8532. It mainly comprises a first case member 534 in which the member 8533 and the sliding member 8532 are displaceably arranged, and a second case member 536 attached to the rear side of the first case member 534. It is formed.

The sliding member 8532 is formed in a substantially E-shape when viewed from the top, and includes a connecting portion 532a extending in the left-right direction and two first sliding members 8532 protruding from the left and right ends of the connecting portion 532a toward the front side. It mainly includes a protrusion 532b and a third protrusion 532e located between the two first protrusions 532b and protruding on the front side.

The sliding member 8532 is formed such that the lateral dimension of the connecting portion 532a is smaller than the lateral dimension of the inner peripheral surface of the first case member 534 between the opposing sides. Thereby, the sliding member 8532 can be accommodated and arranged inside the first case member 534 .

The third protrusion 8532e is positioned above a connecting portion 533a of the rotating member 8533, which will be described later, so that it can restrict the rotational displacement of the rotating member 8533 when displacing the first electric accessory 520 to the second state. That is, the third protrusion 8532e has a lower end surface formed above the connecting portion 533a when the first electric accessory 520 is in the first state.

The rotating member 8533 is formed by arranging two plate-like bodies which are substantially L-shaped when viewed from the side, side by side with a predetermined width in the left-right direction, and is formed by connecting the opposite ends on one end side by a connecting portion 533a. be. The gap between the opposing two plate-like bodies of the rotating member 8533 is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. This allows the game ball to pass through the inside of the rotating member 8533 (between the two plate-like bodies facing each other).

In addition, the width dimension of the rotating member 8533 in the left-right direction (the dimension between the outer surfaces of the two plate-like bodies facing each other) is set smaller than the dimension between the inner facing sides of the two first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 8532. be. Thereby, the rotating member 8533 can be arranged between the first projections 532b of the sliding member 8532 facing each other.

The rotating member 8533 includes a rotating shaft 533c that protrudes to both sides in the left-right direction from a bent portion that is approximately L-shaped when viewed from the side; It mainly includes a drive portion 533d recessed at the tip of the other end of the L-shape and a second projection 8533e projecting from the center position in the left-right direction of the connecting portion 533a toward the front side. .

The second protrusion 8533e is formed in a rod shape extending toward the front side, and has an upright wall 8533e1 that is bent downward and erected at the tip of the protrusion. The erected wall 8533 e 1 is curved in a convex shape toward the front side when viewed from the side, and the curved axis is set coaxially with the axis of the rotating member 8533 .

Next, the operation of drive unit 530 will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81. FIG. 79(a) and 79(b) are side views of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530. FIG. 80(a) and 80(b) are front views of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530. FIG. 81(a) and 81(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. FIG.

79 and 80 show a state in which the first case member 534 and the second case member 535 are transparent. 79(a), 80(a) and 81(a), the state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the first state is shown in FIGS. 79(b), 80(b) and 81. (b) shows a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state. Furthermore, FIGS. 81(a) and 81(b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 79 to 81, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 protrudes from the main body 531a, the protrusion 533b of the rotary member 8533 is pushed forward (left side in FIG. 79(a)). , the driving portion 533d is positioned downward. As a result, the projection 523 of the first electric accessory 520 is pushed downward to enter the first state.

In addition, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 protrudes from the body portion 531a, the tip of the standing wall 8533e1 of the second projection 8533e is positioned downward. In this case, the distance dimension L6 (see FIG. 82(a)) from the tip of the standing wall 8533e1 to the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b of the first case member 534 is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the standing wall 8533 e 1 can prevent the game ball from rolling on the upper end surface of the standing portion 534 b and being thrown to the second case member 535 .

Furthermore, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 protrudes from the body portion 531a, the third projection 8532e of the sliding member 8532 is positioned above the connecting portion 533a of the rotating member 8533. As shown in FIG. Therefore, when the first electric accessory 520 is operated to be displaced to the second state, the rotation of the rotating member 8533 is restricted by the third projection 8532e.

In other words, a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving means (solenoid 531) to the pair of blade members 520L and 520R is provided. The sliding member 8532 is slidably displaced between the position shown in b)) and the closed slide position (the position shown in FIG. 79(a)), and the sliding displacement of the sliding member 8532 to the open slide position causes the opening rotation. position to open the pair of blade members 520L and 520R, and the sliding member 8532 is rotated to the closing rotation position by sliding displacement to the closing slide position so that the pair of blade members 520L and 520R can at least be closed. A standing wall 8533e1 is disposed on the rotating member 8533, and when the rotating member 8533 is rotated to the open rotation position, the standing wall 8533e1 is disposed at the allowable position and the rotating member 8533 is rotated to close. When rotated to the position, the erected wall 8533e1 is arranged at the regulated position, and when the sliding member 8532 is arranged at the closed slide position and the rotary member 8533 is arranged at the closed rotation position, it slides with the rotary member 8533. Since the rotation of the rotating member 8533 to the open rotation position is restricted by engaging with the member 8532, it is possible to easily restrict illegal entry of the game ball into the second winning hole.

That is, from the state in which the pair of blade members 520L and 520R are closed, for example, the pair of blade members 520L and 520R are illegally forcibly opened from the outside, or by directly operating the rotary member 8533, the rotary member Even if an attempt is made to rotate the 8533 to the open position, the engagement of the rotating member 8533 and the sliding member 8532 restricts the rotation of the rotating member 8533 to the open rotating position. The position can be maintained (that is, the standing wall 8533e1 can be prevented from being illegally forcedly displaced to the allowable position from the outside). As a result, the standing wall 8533e1 can prevent the game ball from being illegally entered into the ball entrance.

Further, a third projection 8532e projecting from the sliding member 8532 (or the rotating member 8533), and a connecting portion 533a formed on the sliding member 8532 (or the rotating member 8533) so as to be able to engage with the third projection 8532e. , and the third projection 8532e protrudes along the direction of sliding displacement of the sliding member 8532, so that the sliding displacement of the sliding member 8532 is used to engage and engage the third projection 8532e and the connecting portion 533a. It is possible to switch between disengagement and disengagement, thereby simplifying the structure.

The engaging portion may be a surface with which the third projection 8532e can abut (the other outer surface of the sliding member 8532 or the rotating member 8533), or a hole or recess into which the third projection 8532e can be inserted ( It may be a hole drilled in one of the sliding member 8532 or the rotating member 8533 or a concave portion provided therein. That is, it is sufficient that the rotation of the rotating member 8533 to the open rotation position can be restricted by the contact of the third projection 8532e with the connecting portion 533a. In this case, it is preferable that the connecting portion 533a be a hole or a concave portion. Since the third projection 8532e is inserted into the connecting portion 533a, the space required for arranging the third projection 8532e can be reduced, and the size can be reduced. This is because the third projection 8532e can be shielded from the outside, and unauthorized access to the third projection 8532e from the outside can be made difficult.

On the other hand, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is retracted into the main body 531a, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 8533 is retracted toward the rear side (right side in FIG. 79(b)), and the driving section 533d is moved upward. displaced. As a result, the first electric accessory 520 is brought into a second state in which the projection 533b is pushed upward.

In addition, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is retracted into the body portion 531a, the third projection 8532e of the sliding member 8532 is positioned on the rear side of the connecting portion 533a of the rotating member 8533. Therefore, the regulation of rotation of the rotating member 8533 is released. As a result, the first electric accessory 520 can be displaced by rotating the rotating member 8533 .

Therefore, when the driving portion 533d of the rotating member 8533 is rotated toward the open rotation position, the opening side contact portion 8533d1 that contacts and opens the pair of feather members 520L and 520R rotates toward the closing rotation position. Since it is provided with the closing side contact portion 8533d2 that abuts on and closes the pair of feather members 520L and 520R when it is closed, it is possible to suppress the pair of feather members 520L and 520R from being illegally forcibly opened from the outside. Unauthorized access to the member 8533 or the sliding member 8532 from the outside can be made difficult.

That is, when the pair of blade members 520L and 520R are displaced from the outside in the direction of forced opening, the closing side contact portion 8533d2 of the rotary member 8533 is pressed by the blade members 520L and 520R, and the rotary member 8533 is moved to the open rotation position. try to rotate it. In this case, according to the present invention, the engagement between the rotating member 8533 and the sliding member 8532 can restrict the rotation of the rotating member 8533 to the open rotation position, so that the displacement of the blade member is prevented by the closing side contact of the rotating member 8533. It can be regulated by the contact portion 8533d2. That is, it is possible to restrict the wing member from being displaced from the outside in the direction of forced opening. As a result, it is possible to prevent the pair of feather members 520L and 520R from being illegally forcibly opened from the outside, making it difficult to illegally access the rotating member 8533 or the sliding member 8532 from the outside.

When the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is pulled into the main body 531a, the rotating member 8533 is rotated to move the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b of the first case member 534 from the tip of the standing wall 8533e1. The distance dimension L7 to (see FIG. 82(b)) is made larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball that has entered the second winning hole 140 can be thrown to the second case member 535 by rolling the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b.

Next, with reference to FIG. 82, a case where the first electric accessory 520 is damaged will be described. 82(a) and 82(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. FIG. 82(a) and 82(b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 14(a) shows a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the first state, and FIG. 14(b) shows a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state. .

As shown in FIGS. 82(a) and 82(b), the protrusions 534L and 534R of the first electric role product 520 are broken from the proximal ends due to fraudulent activity, deterioration over time, etc., and the first electric role product 520 moves to the first position. When the state is changed to the second state, the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 protrudes from the body portion 531a, so that the tip of the standing wall 8533e1 of the second projection 8533e is positioned downward. be. Therefore, the standing wall 8533 e 1 can prevent the game ball from rolling on the upper end surface of the standing portion 534 b and being thrown to the second case member 535 .

Therefore, in a state in which the pair of feather members 520L and 520R are closed or in a state in which the pair of feather members 520L and 520R are opened from the outside, the arrangement of the standing wall 8533e1 is formed so as to be able to be maintained at the regulated position. It is possible to suppress the wall 8533e1 from being displaced to the permissible position. Therefore, illegal entry of a game ball into the second winning hole 140 can be easily regulated.

That is, in a state in which the pair of feather members 520L and 520R are closed or a state in which the pair of feather members 520L and 520R are opened from the outside, the sliding member 8532 is operated to move the standing tip of the standing wall 8533e1 (gravitational force). The distance dimension L6 from the direction lower side (the end of FIG. 20(b) lower side) to the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b formed in the first case member 534 is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball. . Therefore, even if the first electric accessory 520 is allowed to throw the game ball to the second prize winning port 140 due to the player's fraudulent act, the game ball enters the second prize winning port 140 and rolls. can be suppressed. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the standing portion 534b of the first case member 534 collides with the standing wall 8533e1 of the sliding member 8532, and the rolling of the game ball can be stopped. As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is put into the second state (the game ball can be thrown to the second winning port 140) by the player's fraudulent act, the game ball is illegally sent to the second winning port 140. It is easy to regulate being entered.

Also, in this case, the standing wall 8533e1 that makes it impossible to enter the game ball into the second winning hole 140 can be formed continuously with the sliding member 8532 that displaces the pair of feather members 520L and 520R. A separate member for regulating illegal entry of a ball into the winning hole 140 is not required. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced by that amount, so an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the eighth embodiment, the second projection 8533e that restricts the entry of the game ball and the third projection 8532e that suppresses the displacement of the second projection are integrated with the rotating member 8533 and the sliding member 8532. Since it is formed, the number of parts of the drive unit 8530 can be reduced. As a result, the manufacturing cost of drive unit 8530 can be reduced.

Next, a drive unit 9530 of the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 87. FIG. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is restricted from moving the first electric accessory 520 when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 protrudes from the main body 531a was described. The first electric accessory 520 is movable when the movable body 531b of 531 is projected from the main body 531a. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 83, the configuration of the drive unit 9530 in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 83 is an exploded perspective front view of the drive unit 9530 in the ninth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 83, the drive unit 8530 of the ninth embodiment includes a solenoid 531, a sliding member 8532 connected to the solenoid 531, a rotating member 9533 connected to the sliding member 8532, and a rotating member 9533 connected to the sliding member 8532. It mainly comprises a first case member 534 in which the member 9533 and the sliding member 8532 are displaceably arranged, and a second case member 536 attached to the rear side of the first case member 534. It is formed.

The rotating member 9533 is formed by arranging two plate-like bodies which are substantially L-shaped when viewed from the side, side by side with a predetermined width in the left-right direction, and is formed by connecting the opposed portions at one end with a connecting portion 533a. be. The gap between the opposing two plate-like bodies of the rotating member 9533 is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. This allows the game ball to pass through the inside of the rotating member 9533 (between the two plate-like bodies facing each other).

In addition, the width dimension of the rotating member 9533 in the left-right direction (the dimension between the outer surfaces of the two plate-like bodies opposed to each other) is set smaller than the dimension between the inner sides of the two first projections 532b of the sliding member 8532 opposed to each other. be. As a result, the rotating member 9533 can be arranged between the opposing first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 8532 .

The rotating member 9533 includes a rotating shaft 533c that protrudes to both sides in the left-right direction from a bent portion that is approximately L-shaped when viewed from the side; It mainly includes a projecting portion 9533d that projects to the front side at the tip of the other end of the L shape, and a second projection 8533e that projects to the front side from the central position in the left-right direction of the connecting portion 533a.

The projecting portion 9533d is formed so as to project from the end on the front side, and has a length that allows the projections 523L and 523R of the feather members 520L and 520R to abut on the side surface of the upper portion (the upper portion in FIG. 84(a)). is set to

Next, the operation of drive unit 530 will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 86. FIG. 84(a) and 84(b) are side views of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530. FIG. 85(a) and 85(b) are front views of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530. FIG. 86(a) and 86(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. FIG.

84 and 85 show a state in which the first case member 534 and the second case member 535 are transparent. 84(a), 85(a) and 86(a), the state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the first state is shown in FIGS. 84(b), 85(b) and 86. (b) shows a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state. Furthermore, FIGS. 86(a) and 86(b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 84 to 86, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 protrudes from the main body 531a, the protrusion 533b of the rotary member 8533 is pushed forward (left side in FIG. 84(a)). , the projecting portion 9533f is positioned downward. As a result, the projection 523 of the first electric accessory 520 is pushed downward to enter the first state.

In the ninth embodiment, an urging spring (not shown) is arranged on the rotating shaft of the first electric accessory 520, and the urging force of the urging spring causes the first electric accessory 520 to move to the first state side. An urging force for rotational displacement is always applied. Thereby, when the first electric accessory 520 is displaced to the second state by a force other than the driving of the solenoid 531 (for example, shaking of the pachinko machine), it is possible to prevent the first electric accessory 520 from remaining in the second state.

On the other hand, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is retracted into the main body 531a, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 8533 is retracted toward the rear side (the right side in FIG. 79(b)), and the protrusion 9533f is moved upward. is displaced to As a result, the first electric accessory 520 is brought into a second state in which the projection 533b is pushed upward.

In this case, the projecting portion 9533f and the projections 523L and 523R of the first electric accessory 520 are always in contact with each other, so that the first electric accessory 520 can be maintained in the second state.

In addition, by extending the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 from the second state from the main body portion 531a and displacing the protruding portion 9533f downward, the first electric accessory 520 is rotated by the biasing force of the biasing spring to the first position. It is displaced to the 1 state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the case where the first electric accessory 520 is illegally operated will be described. 87(a) and 87(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. FIG. 87(a) and 87(b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG. Also, FIG. 87(a) shows a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the first state, and FIG. 87(b) shows a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state. .

As shown in FIGS. 87(a) and 87(b), when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 protrudes from the main body 531a, the first electric accessory 520 is operated by the player's fraudulent act. When the state is changed from the first state to the second state, only the first electric accessory 520 is rotationally displaced.

Therefore, since the tip of the erected wall 8533e1 of the second projection 8533e is positioned downward, the game ball rolls on the upper end surface of the erected portion 534b by the erected wall 8533e1, thereby moving the second case member. It is possible to suppress throwing to 535.

In this case (where the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 protrudes from the body portion 531a), the third projection 8532e of the sliding member 8532 is positioned above the connecting portion 533a of the rotating member 8533, as described above. . Therefore, the rotational displacement of the rotating member 8533 can be restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from operating the standing wall 8533e1. As a result, it is possible to prevent the store from being disadvantaged by the player's fraudulent act.

In addition, in the ninth embodiment, the second projection 8533e that restricts the entry of the game ball and the third projection 8532e that suppresses the displacement of the second projection are integrated with the rotating member 9533 and the sliding member 8532. Since it is formed, the number of parts of the drive unit 9530 can be reduced. As a result, the manufacturing cost of the drive unit 9530 can be reduced.

Furthermore, in the ninth embodiment, it is possible to prevent the first electric accessory 520 from being broken due to the player's cheating. As a result, it is possible to suppress losses on the side of the store due to fraudulent acts of the players.

That is, in the ninth embodiment, an urging spring that urges the pair of feather members 520L and 520R in the closing direction is provided, and the rotating member 9533 rotates the pair of feather members 520L and 520R toward the open rotation position. 520R, and when the rotating member 9533 is rotated toward the closed rotation position, the pair of blade members 520L and 520R are closed by the biasing force of the biasing spring. When the blade members 520L and 520R are illegally forcibly opened from the outside, the pair of blade members 520L and 520R are not brought into contact with the rotating member 9533, and the external force due to such forced opening is avoided from acting on the rotating member 9533. can. As a result, damage to the pair of feather members 520L, 520R, rotating member 9533, or sliding member 8532 can be suppressed.

As a biasing means for constantly applying a biasing force for rotationally displacing the first electric accessory 520 to the first state side, a spring (torsion) biases the pair of feather members 520L and 520R in the closing direction by elastic recovery force. Springs and coil springs) as well as magnets that urge the pair of feather members 520L and 520R in the closing direction with an attractive force are exemplified.

Next, the displacement member 10670 of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 91. FIG. In the first embodiment, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 is reduced (or increased) in a non-linear manner as the displacement member 670 is displaced. , the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 is changed. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

First, the configuration of the displacement member 10670 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89. FIG. 88(a) is a front view of the displacement member 10670 in the tenth embodiment, and FIG. 88(b) is a side view of the displacement member 10670. FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective front view of displacement member 10670. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 88 and 89, the displacement member 10670 of the tenth embodiment includes an extension member 671, an extension member 10671 arranged to face the extension member 671, and an extension member 10671. and a decoration unit 672 connected to the extension member 671, and a rotary member 10678 rotatably disposed on the extension member.

The extension member 10671 is formed in a substantially L-shape when viewed from the front, and has a shaft support hole 671a penetrating in the left-right direction when viewed from the front at the end on the long side, and protrudes left and right outward at a substantially central position on the long side in the longitudinal direction. and a rotary shaft 10671e formed to project in a cylindrical shape from the connecting projection 671b toward the shaft support hole 671a.

The rotary member 10678 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the side, and is disposed on the extended member 10671 such that its longitudinal direction intersects the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal side of the extended member 10671 at a substantially right angle when viewed from the side.

The rotating member 10678 has a shaft support hole 10678a penetrating in the left-right direction, a through hole 10678b formed circumferentially through the shaft support hole 10671a of the extension member 10671 at one end in the longitudinal direction, and a through hole 10678b formed at the other end in the longitudinal direction. , and an inclined surface 10678c formed by notching the side surface of the .

The shaft support hole 10678a is a hole into which the rotating shaft 10671e of the extension member 10671 is inserted, and has an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the rotating shaft 10671e. Therefore, by inserting the rotating shaft 10671e into the shaft support hole 10677a and screwing it to the rotating shaft 10671e, the rotating member 10678 can be rotatably disposed on the extension member 10671.

The through hole 10678b is a hole into which the torsion spring SP2 is inserted, and is formed larger than the outer diameter of the torsion spring SP2.

90 and 91, the operation of rotating member 10678 will now be described. FIG. 90 is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 600L. 91(a) and 91(b) are partially enlarged views of the vertical displacement unit 600L in the range XCI of FIG. 90. FIG.

Note that FIG. 90 corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 58(b). 91(a) and 91(b) show the state when the displacement members 670 and 10670 are displaced. is shown.

As shown in FIG. 90, in the vertical displacement unit 600L of the tenth embodiment, a displacement member 670 is arranged on the upper side and a displacement member 10670 is arranged on the lower side. The axis of the support hole 671a is arranged coaxially. That is, in the first embodiment, of the pair of displacement members 670 arranged upside down, the lower displacement member 670 is changed to the displacement member 10670 . The driving means for the displacement member 10670 is the same as the means for driving the displacement member 670 of the first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91, when the decorative units 672 of the displaceable members 670 and 10670 arranged vertically are displaced in a direction toward each other, the extension members 671 and 10671 are brought closer to each other.

In the state shown in FIG. 91(b) in which the side surfaces of the decorative unit 672 are in contact with each other, the inclined surface 10678c of the rotating member 10678 is in contact with the side surface of the extension member 671. As shown in FIG. As a result, the rotating member 10678 is rotated around the shaft support hole 10678a so that the inclined surface 10678c is substantially parallel to the side surface of the extension member 671 (in FIG. 91(b), the rotating member 10678 is supported counterclockwise about hole 10678a).

Accordingly, the through hole 10678b formed on the opposite side of the inclined surface 10678c and the pivot hole 10678a is similarly rotated. By displacing the position of the through-hole 10678b, the position where the through-hole 10678b engages with the torsion spring SP2 is changed.

In the ninth embodiment, the position of the through hole 10678b is displaced from the end side of the torsion spring SP2 to the base end side. Therefore, the biasing force acting on the displacement member 10670 from the torsion spring SP2 can be increased.

Therefore, when the side surfaces of the decoration unit 672 are brought into contact with each other, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 acting on the displacement member 10670 arranged below the vertical displacement unit 600L can be increased. As a result, when the displacement members 670 and 10670 are displaced while the side surfaces of the decoration unit 672 are in contact with each other, it is possible to prevent the side surfaces of the decoration unit 672 from contacting each other.

Further, since the extension member 10671 on which the rotating member 10678 is arranged is the driven side (the side operated via the connecting rod 681) of the driving means 680 that drives the displacement member 10670, it is driven by the driving motor KM3. When the driving force is smaller than that on the driving side (the side connected to the protrusion 683b of the large diameter gear 683), the displacement of the rotary member 10678 increases the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2, thereby increasing the driving force. It can make up for the lack of strength. As a result, it is possible to prevent the side surfaces of the decoration unit 672 from contacting each other.

Next, the vertical displacement unit 11600L of the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94. FIG. In the first embodiment, the displacement member 670 transmits driving force from both the left and right sides, but in the eleventh embodiment, the driving force is transmitted from only one side of the displacement member 11670 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

92 to 94, similarly to FIGS. 61 to 63, a displacement member 670 arranged on the upper side of the vertical displacement unit 600L and a driving means for driving the displacement member 670 are denoted by U at the end of their reference numerals. In addition, a displacement member 670 disposed below the vertical displacement unit 600L and a drive means for driving the displacement member 670 will be described with a D suffix.

The operation of the vertical displacement unit 11600L will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94. FIG. 92 to 94 are schematic diagrams of the vertical displacement unit 11600L in the eleventh embodiment. 92 to 94, transition states of the displacement member 11670 are illustrated in order.

As shown in FIG. 92, in the vertical displacement unit 11600L in the eleventh embodiment, the extension member 671 of the displacement member 11670 is arranged only on one side. That is, in the first embodiment, a pair of extension members 671 are arranged symmetrically on the displacement member 670, whereas in the eleventh embodiment, the extension members 671 are arranged on only one of them. be.

In the eleventh embodiment, the driving means 680 is formed only on the driving side (the side connected to the protrusion 683b of the large-diameter gear 683), and the extension member 671 is connected to the driving means on the driving side. Therefore, the extension members 671 of the displacement members 11670 arranged in a pair vertically in the vertical displacement unit 11600L are arranged in opposite directions.

As shown in FIG. 93, when the vertically arranged displacement members 11670 are displaced, the side surfaces of the decoration units 672 are brought into contact with each other at the vertical central position of the vertical displacement unit 11600L.

As shown in FIG. 94, by displacing both in the same direction from the state of FIG. 93, the side surfaces of the decoration units 672 can be displaced in the vertical direction while being in contact with each other.

In the case of the eleventh embodiment, since the extension member 671 of the displacement member 11670 is arranged on one side, the driving of the decoration unit 672 on the side opposite to the drive side is slowed down, and there is a possibility that a gap is formed between the two decoration units 672. However, since the extension members 671 are arranged on opposite sides in the vertical direction, the end of one decoration unit 672 on the side opposite to the drive side is pushed by the end of the other decoration unit 672 on the drive side. be able to. As a result, the formation of a gap between the two decoration units 672 can be suppressed.

In this case, it is preferable to delay the driving timing of the displacement member 11670 on the displacement direction side of the decoration unit 672 . By delaying the driving timing of the displacement member 11670 on the displacement direction side of the decoration unit 672, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the two decoration units 672. FIG.

More specifically, by advancing the driving timing of the displacement member 11670 on the side opposite to the displacement direction of the decoration unit 672, the decoration unit 672 driven first is driven later. The end opposite the drive side of 672 can be extruded. On the other hand, the end opposite to the driving side of the decoration unit 672 that is driven first comes into contact with the driving side end of the decoration unit 672 that is driven later with a stronger force. As a result, when displacing the two displacement members 11670 with the side surfaces of the decoration units 672 in contact with each other, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the two decoration units 672 .

Further, in the case of the eleventh embodiment, the extension member 671 of the displacement member 11670 is on one side, so that the displacement member 11670 (extension member 671) can be easily deformed. Therefore, by accelerating the driving timing of the displacement members 11670 on the side opposite to the displacement direction of the decoration unit 672, the displacement members 11670 (extending members 671) are deformed and the elastic force when the displacement returns can be used to suppress the formation of a gap between the two decoration units 672 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 95, a winning opening unit 500 of the twelfth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the front base 511 and the rear base 512 of the prize-winning unit 500 have a substantially constant thickness. partially modified. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 95(a) is a top view of the winning opening unit 500 in the twelfth embodiment, and FIG. 95(b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 along line XCVb-XCVb of FIG. 95(a). In addition, in FIG. 95(a), the front base 511 is shown transparently, and in FIG. 95(b), the front base 511 is shown opaquely. Also, in FIG. 95(b), the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the side surfaces 526L and 526R is indicated by the two-dot chain line together with the symbol of the virtual line KS1, as in FIG. 24(b). Furthermore, the front direction of the imaginary line KS1 is illustrated by arrow F, and the back direction is illustrated by arrow B. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 95, the front base 511 is formed to have partially different thicknesses in the front-rear direction (up-down direction in FIG. 95(b)) on the left and right sides of the second prize winning opening 140 . That is, the upper right portion of the second winning hole 140 is provided with a front-side bulging portion 12511f that bulges toward the back side.

In addition, the back base 512 is formed so that the thickness in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 95(b)) is partially different on the right and left sides of the second prize winning opening 140 . That is, the upper left portion of the second prize winning opening 140 is provided with a back side bulging portion 12512d that bulges to the back side.

The front-side swelling portion 12511f and the rear-side swelling portion 12512d are formed outside the displacement region of the pair of feather members 520L and 520R. This suppresses the collision between the pair of feather members 520L and 520R and the front-side swelling portion 12511f and the rear-side swelling portion 12512d.

In addition, the ends of the front-side bulging portion 12511f and the rear-side bulging portion 12512d are arranged so that their ends extend in the horizontal direction (Fig. direction) outside. As a result, the game ball which may flow down from the upstream side of the first electric accessory 520 and may be thrown to the side surfaces 526L and 526R is surely made to collide with the front-side swelling part 12511f and the back-side swelling part 12512d. can be done.

The front-side bulging portion 12511f is formed on the side surface facing the formation position of the bulging portion 524R of the right wing member 520R in the front-rear direction. In other words, the front-side swelling portion 12511f is formed on the side surface located in the front-rear direction opposite to the formation position of the swelling portion 524R in the front-rear direction.

On the other hand, the back-side bulging portion 12512d is formed on the side surface facing the formation position of the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L in the front-rear direction. In other words, the back-side swelling portion 12512d is formed on the side surface positioned in the front-rear direction opposite to the formation position of the swelling portion 524L in the front-rear direction.

As a result, the game ball flowing down the upper right side of the first electric accessory 520 can collide with the front-side swelling portion 12511f and be guided to the back side. Therefore, when the game ball flowing down the upper right side of the first electric accessory 520 is thrown to the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R, it can be moved to the rear side. As a result, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526R can easily collide with the bulging portion 524R.

On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the upper left side of the first electric accessory 520 can be made to collide with the back side bulging portion 12512d and can be guided to the front side. Therefore, when the game ball flowing down the upper left side of the first electric accessory 520 is thrown to the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L, it can be moved to the front side. As a result, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526L can easily collide with the bulging portion 524L.

Therefore, by bringing the game ball guided (rolled) along the guide surfaces (side surfaces 526L, 526R) into contact with the bulging portions 524L, 524R, the game ball can be reliably biased. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enter the ball into the second winning hole 140 and to suppress ball clogging.

Also, when the game ball that has entered the guide surface of one feather member (one of the feather members 520L and 520R) reaches the guide surface of one feather member (the other of the feather members 520L and 520R) , such a game ball can be brought into contact with the projecting portion of the other feather member. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the game ball that has entered the guide surface of one feather member (one of the feather members 520L and 520R) from passing through the guide surface of the other feather member. As a result, the game ball is made to enter the ball entrance, and the interest of the player can be improved.

Furthermore, in the twelfth embodiment, the game ball thrown by the feather members 520L and 520R collides with the front-side swelling portion 12511f and the back-side swelling portion 12512d, thereby slowing down the throwing speed. Therefore, the rolling speed of the game ball rolling on the side surfaces 526L, 526R of the feather members 520L, 520R can be slowed down. As a result, the impact when colliding with the bulging portions 524L and 524R can be reduced, and the damage of the feather members 520L and 520R can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 96, a winning opening unit 500 of the thirteenth embodiment will be described. The prize winning unit 500 of the thirteenth embodiment is formed with a projection projecting between the front base 511 and the rear base 512 of the first embodiment. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 96(a) is a top view of a winning opening unit 500 in the thirteenth embodiment, and FIG. 96(b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 taken along line XCVIb-XCVIb of FIG. 96(a). In addition, in FIG. 96(a), the front base 511 is shown transparently, and in FIG. 96(b), the front base 511 is shown opaquely. In addition, in FIG. 96(b), the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the side surfaces 526L and 526R is illustrated by the two-dot chain line together with the symbol of the imaginary line KS1 in the same manner as in FIG. 24(b). Furthermore, the front direction of the imaginary line KS1 is illustrated by arrow F, and the back direction is illustrated by arrow B. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 96, the front base 511 is formed with a protrusion 13511g projecting toward the rear base 512 on the left side of the second prize winning opening 140 . In addition, the rear base 512 is formed with a protrusion 13512e protruding toward the front base 511 on the right side of the second prize winning opening 140 .

The protrusions 13511g and 13512e are formed outside the displacement regions of the pair of feather members 520L and 520R. Thereby, collision between the pair of feather members 520L and 520R and the protrusions 13511g and 13512e is suppressed.

The protrusion 13511g is formed on the side surface of the right wing member 520R on the same side as the formation position of the bulging portion 524R in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, the protrusion 13512e is formed on the side surface facing the formation position of the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L in the front-rear direction.

As a result, the game ball flowing down the upper right side of the first electric accessory 520 can collide with the projection 13511g and be guided to the front side. Therefore, when the game ball flowing down the upper right side of the first electric accessory 520 is thrown to the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R, the game ball can be brought closer to the front side. As a result, when the game ball flowing down on the upper right side of the first electric accessory 520 is thrown to the side surface 526R, it is less likely to collide with the bulging portion 524R. As a result, damage to the feather member 520R can be suppressed.

Also, the game ball thrown from the right side of the first electric accessory 520 to the side surface 526R of the feather member 520R is thrown to the side surface 526R without colliding with the projection 13511g formed above the feather member 520R. . The game ball in this case can be guided to the rear side by colliding with the bulging portion 524R when rolling the side surface 526R.

On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the upper left side of the first electric accessory 520 can collide with the protrusion 13512e and can be guided to the rear side. Therefore, when the game ball flowing down the upper left side of the first electric accessory 520 is thrown to the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L, the game ball can be brought to the rear side. As a result, when the game ball flowing down the upper left side of the first electric accessory 520 is thrown to the side surface 526L, it can be made less likely to collide with the bulging portion 524L. As a result, damage to the feather member 520L can be suppressed.

Also, the game ball thrown from the left side of the first electric accessory 520 to the side surface 526L of the feather member 520L is thrown to the side surface 526L without colliding with the projection 13512e formed above the feather member 520L. . The game ball in this case can be guided to the front side by colliding with the bulging portion 524L when rolling the side surface 526L.

Therefore, by bringing the game ball guided (rolled) along the guide surfaces (side surfaces 526L, 526R) into contact with the bulging portions 524L, 524R, the game ball can be reliably biased. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enter the ball into the second winning hole 140 and to suppress ball clogging.

Also, when the game ball that has entered the guide surface of one feather member (one of the feather members 520L and 520R) reaches the guide surface of one feather member (the other of the feather members 520L and 520R) , such a game ball can be brought into contact with the projecting portion of the other feather member. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the game ball that has entered the guide surface of one feather member (one of the feather members 520L and 520R) from passing through the guide surface of the other feather member. As a result, the game ball is made to enter the ball entrance, and the interest of the player can be improved.

Furthermore, since the projections 13511g and 13512e can reduce the number of game balls that collide with the bulging portions 524L and 524R of the feather members 520L and 520R, the durability of the feather members 520L and 520R can be improved.

Next, feather members 14520L and 14520R (first variable device 14520) of the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. FIG. The feather members 14520L and 14520R of the fourteenth embodiment are formed so that the bulging portions 524L and 524R have different width dimensions in the front-rear direction from those of the first embodiment. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 97(a) is a perspective front view of the left wing member 520L in the fourteenth embodiment, and FIG. 97(b) is a perspective front view of the right wing member 520R. 98(a) is a cross-sectional view of the prize-winning unit 500, FIG. 98(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the left wing member 520L taken along line XCVIIIb-XCVIIIb in FIG. 98(a), and FIG. 98(c). ) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the right wing member 520R along line XCVIIIc-XCVIIIc in FIG. 98(b).

In addition, in FIGS. 97(a) and 97(b), the oblique direction in the left-right direction is shown in the opposite direction. Also, the cross-sectional view of FIG. 98(b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 24(b). In FIG. 98(a), as in FIG. 24(b), the rolling directions of the game balls rolling on the side surfaces 14526L and 14526R are indicated by two-dot chain lines together with the symbol of the virtual line KS1. Furthermore, the front direction of the imaginary line KS1 is illustrated by arrow F, and the back direction is illustrated by arrow B. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, the left wing member 14520L has a generally triangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a dimension larger than the diameter of the game ball in the front-rear direction. The left wing member 14520L has a through hole 521L penetrating in the front-rear direction at the lower end portion in the direction of gravity, a concave portion 522L recessed from the front side to the back side around the through hole 521L, and a rear side from the vicinity of the through hole 521L. a protrusion 523L protruding to the side, a recessed portion 525L recessed in the radial direction of the through hole 521L in the end face on the side of the through hole 521L, and the side faces of the pair of feather members 14520L and 14520R facing each other in the closed state. 14526L and a bulging portion 14524L protruding from the side surface 14526L.

The side surface 14526L includes an inclined surface 14526L1 that is inclined upward from the approximate center position in the front-rear direction toward the back side, and a smooth surface 14526L2 that is formed on the front side from the approximate center position in the front-rear direction.

The inclined surface 14526L1 is formed so as to be inclined downward from the rear surface side (the left side in FIG. 98(b)) toward the smooth surface 14526L2 side. As a result, among the game balls thrown to the side surface 14256L, the game balls thrown to the inclined surface 14526L1 can be guided toward the smooth surface 1452L2 by the downward inclination.

Also, the bulging portion 14524L is formed on the base end side of the inclined surface 14526L1 (the back side of the paper in FIG. 98(b)). The bulging portion 14524L is formed such that its width in the front-rear direction is smaller than half the width in the front-rear direction of the feather member 14520L. That is, the front-rear width of the bulging portion 15254L is made smaller than the front-rear width of the bulging portion 14524L.

As described above, of the game balls rolling on the side surface 14526L of the left wing member 14520L, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 14526L1 is rolled on the smooth surface 14526L2 side, so the game ball rolling on the side surface 14526L It is possible to reduce the probability that the ball will collide with the bulging portion 14524L.

On the other hand, the right wing member 14520R is formed in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed to have a dimension larger than the diameter of the game ball in the front-rear direction. The right wing member 14520R has a through hole 521R that penetrates the lower end portion in the direction of gravity in the front-rear direction, a concave portion 522L that is recessed from the front side to the back side around the through hole 521R, and a back side from the vicinity of the through hole 521R. a recessed portion 525R recessed in the axial direction of the through hole 521R in the end face on the side of the through hole 521R; and a bulging portion 14524R protruding from the side surface 14526R.

The side surface 14526R includes an inclined surface 14526R1 that is inclined upward from the approximately center position in the front-rear direction toward the rear side, and a smooth surface 14526R2 that is formed toward the front side from the approximately center position in the front-rear direction.

The inclined surface 14526R1 is formed so as to be inclined downward from the rear side (the right side in FIG. 98(c)) toward the smooth surface 14526R2. As a result, among the game balls thrown to the side surface 14256R, the game balls thrown to the inclined surface 14526R1 can be guided toward the smooth surface 1452R2 by the downward inclination.

Also, the bulging portion 14524R is formed on the base end side of the inclined surface 14526R1 (the back side of the paper in FIG. 98(b)). The bulging portion 14524L is formed such that its width in the front-rear direction is larger than half the width in the front-rear direction of the feather member 14520L. That is, the width of the inclined surface 14526R1 in the front-rear direction is larger than the width of the bulging portion 14524L in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the longitudinal width of the bulging portion 14524R of the right wing member 14520R is formed larger than the longitudinal width of the bulging portion 14524L of the left wing member 14520L.

As described above, among the game balls rolling on the side surface 14526R of the right wing member 14520R, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 14526R1 rolls on the smooth surface 14526R2 side, so the game ball rolling on the side surface 14526R It is possible to reduce the probability that the ball will collide with the bulging portion 14524R.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment is formed in a form in which game balls flow down from the left side of the first electric accessory 520 and are easily thrown to the side surfaces 526L and 526R of the feather members 520L and 520R in the open state. be. More specifically, in the pachinko machine 10, a first through gate 66 for opening a pair of feather members 520L and 520R is arranged on the left side of the center frame 86, and a game ball is passed through the center frame 86 during time saving and variable probability. It is configured to be launched towards the left. As a result, the game ball flowing down the game board 13 flows down the left side of the game board 13 as a whole, and is thrown from the left side of the first variable device 14520 (the pair of feather members 14520L, 14520R) to the side surfaces 14526L, 14526R. easier.

Therefore, compared to the right wing member 14520R, more game balls are thrown to the side surface 14526L of the left wing member 14520L, the wear of the swelling part 14524L of the left wing member 14520L is accelerated, and the left wing member 14520L is easily broken. there was a point

On the other hand, in the fourteenth embodiment, inclined surfaces 14526L1 and 14526R1 are formed on the side surfaces 14526L and 14526R, and bulged portions 14524L and 14524R are formed on the inclined surfaces 14526L1 and 14526R1, so that a large number of game balls are thrown. Since the bulging portions 14524L and 14524R are formed small in the front-rear direction, by reducing the probability that the game ball collides with the bulging portion 14524L of the feather member 14520L on the side where the ball is thrown more, the wear of the bulging portion 14524L is reduced. It can be suppressed to be done early. As a result, it is possible to prevent the feather members 14520L and 14520R on the side to which a large number of game balls are thrown from becoming fragile.

Next, the variable winning device 15065 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the pair of feather members 520L and 520R are formed with the bulging portions 524L and 524R has been described. be done. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

99(a) is a partially enlarged view of the game board 13 in the fifteenth embodiment, and FIG. 99(b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 along line XCIXb-XCIXb in FIG. 100(a) is a partially enlarged view of the game board 13, and FIG. 100(b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 taken along line Cb-Cb in FIG. 100(a).

99(a) and 100(a) correspond to the partially enlarged view of FIG. 99 shows the closed state of the variable winning device 15065, and FIG. 100 shows the open state of the variable winning device 15065. As shown in FIG. In addition, in FIG. 100(b), the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the side surface 15065a is illustrated by the two-dot chain line together with the symbol of the imaginary line KS1 in the same manner as in FIG. 24(b). Furthermore, the front direction of the imaginary line KS1 is illustrated by arrow F, and the back direction is illustrated by arrow B. As shown in FIG.

In addition, the closed state of the variable winning device 15065 means that the plane of the variable winning device 15065 formed in a plate state is positioned substantially parallel to the plane on the front side of the game board 13, and the game ball flowing down the game area is a specific winning state. This is a state in which a ball cannot be entered into the mouth (large open mouth) 65a. On the other hand, the open state of the variable winning device 15065 means that the plane of the variable winning device 15065 is positioned substantially perpendicular to the plane of the front side of the game board 13, and the game balls flowing down the game area ) 65a.

As shown in FIGS. 99 and 100, the variable prize winning device 15065 is formed in a plate-like body elongated in the left and right direction, and is arranged rotatably with respect to the game board 13 with one end on the back side as an axis. In addition, the variable winning device 15065 is connected to a driving device (not shown) on the back side, and by applying a driving force to the driving device, the variable winning device 15065 is displaced between a closed position and an open position. It is possible.

In addition, the variable winning device 15065 has two protrusions 15065b and 15065c protruding from the side surface 15065a on the upper surface side in the open state. Further, the side surfaces 15065a of the variable winning device 15065 are inclined downward from the left and right sides toward the center. As a result, the game ball thrown to the side surface 15065a rolls toward the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, and enters the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a.

The bulging portion 15065b is located on the left side of the specific prize winning opening (large open opening) 65a when viewed from the front, and is connected to the end face on the front side in the open state (state shown in FIG. 100(b)). The bulging portion 15065c is located on the right side of the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a when viewed from the front, and is formed to be connected to the end face on the back side in the alveolar state (state shown in FIG. 100(b)).

That is, the bulging portion 15065b and the bulging portion 15065c are formed on both left and right sides with the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a interposed therebetween, and are formed at different positions in the front-rear direction. As a result, when a game ball is thrown to both the left and right sides of the variable winning device 15065 in the open state, it is possible to prevent the game ball from colliding in front of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a and rebounding to both the left and right sides. .

More specifically, a game ball thrown to the left side of the side surface 15065a in front view collides with the bulging portion 15065b when rolling toward the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, and is guided to the rear side. be. On the other hand, the game ball thrown to the right side of the side surface 15065a in front view collides with the bulging portion 15065c when rolling toward the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a and is guided to the front side.

Therefore, the front-rear direction position of the game ball thrown from both the left and right sides of the side surface 15065a can be displaced by the bulging portion 15065b and the bulging portion 15065c. Therefore, when the game balls are thrown to the left and right sides of the side surface 15065a, and the left and right game balls collide in front of the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a, the rebound (rebound) direction can be set in the front-rear direction. can. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enter the game ball into the specific winning hole (large open hole) 65a.

In addition, when the game ball is thrown from one of the left and right sides of the side surface 15065a, the game ball collides with one of the bulging portion 15065b or the bulging portion 15065c to displace the position in the front-rear direction. The game ball can collide with the other of the swelling portion 15065b or the swelling portion 15065c when the front side of the ball rolls in the left-right direction. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball thrown from one side of the side surface 15065a from rolling in front of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a and exiting to the other side of the side surface 15065a.

A side surface 15065a of the variable prize winning device 15065 is formed to have a width equal to or larger than the width of the specific prize winning opening (large opening) 65a, and has a pair of swelling portions. 15065b and 15065c are arranged at positions sandwiching the ball entrance when viewed from the front, and are arranged at different positions in a direction orthogonal to the width direction (the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surface 15065a). Therefore, by bringing the game ball guided (rolled) along the side surface 15065a into contact with the bulging portions 15065b and 15065c, the game ball can be reliably biased. As a result, the ball can be smoothly entered into the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a.

Also, one bulging portion 15065b, 15065c and the other bulging portion 15065b, 15065c are positioned in a direction perpendicular to the width direction of the variable winning device 15065 (the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surface 15065a). By arranging them differently, when a game ball enters the side surface 15065a of the variable winning device 15065 from one side (or the other side) in the width direction, the game ball is pushed into either of the pair of bulging portions 15065b and 15065c. can be abutted on either side. Therefore, the game ball that has entered from one side (or the other side) in the width direction to the side surface 15065a of the variable winning device 15065 passes through the side surface 15065a of the variable winning device 15065 and flows out from the other side in the width direction of the side surface 15065a of the variable winning device 15065. can be suppressed. As a result, the game ball can be entered into the specific winning hole (large open hole) 65a to enhance the interest of the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 101, engagement between the sliding member 8532 and the rotating member 8533 in the sixteenth embodiment will be described. In the eighth embodiment, the engagement between the rotating member 8533 and the sliding member 8532 is made possible by the contact between the upper surface of the connecting portion 533a and the third projection 8532e. This is done by inserting the third projection 16532e into the recess of the portion 533a. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 101(a) is a front view of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 8530 in the sixteenth embodiment, and FIG. 101(b) is the first electric accessory along line CIb-CIb of FIG. 101(a). 101(c) is a cross-sectional view of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 8530 along line CIc-CIc in FIG. 101(b).

As shown in FIG. 101, the connecting portion 533a of the rotating member 8533 of the sixteenth embodiment is formed with a recessed portion 16533a1 recessed from the back side toward the front side at a substantially central position in the left-right direction. The recessed portion 16533a1 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the rear.

In addition, the third projection 16532e of the sliding member 8532 is formed so as to protrude at a position opposed to the recessed portion 16533a1 described above in the front-rear direction. The shape of the third projection 16532e when viewed from the front is a horizontally long rectangle slightly smaller than the concave portion 16533a1, and the tip thereof is tapered.

Thereby, when the pair of feather members 520L and 520R are closed, the third protrusion 16532e can be accommodated inside the concave portion 16533a1. As a result, the rotating member 8533 and the sliding member 8532 can be engaged.

In this case, since the recessed portion 16533a1 is used as the engaging portion, the space required for arranging the third projection 16532e can be reduced by the amount of the insertion of the third projection 16532e into the recessed portion 16533a1. In addition, by being inserted into the concave portion 16533a1, the third projection 16532e can be shielded from the outside, and unauthorized access to the third projection 16532e from the outside can be made difficult.

Next, the sliding member 15732 in the seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 104. FIG. In the above-described first embodiment, the standing wall 532c1 is positioned upstream of the sensor device SE1 arranged on the flow path of the game ball entering the second winning hole 140. In the seventeenth embodiment, a case where the standing wall 17532c1 is arranged downstream of the sensor device SE1 will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

First, the configuration of the sliding member 17532 will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 and 103. FIG. 102(a) and 102(b) are side views of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 17530 in the seventeenth embodiment. 103(a) and 103(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. FIG.

102, the first case member 534 and the second case member 535 are shown transparently. Also, in FIGS. 102(a) and 103(a), the first electric accessory 520 is in the closed state, and in FIGS. 102(b) and 102(b), the first electric accessory 520 is in the open state. Each state is illustrated. Also, FIGS. 102(a) and 102(b) correspond to the cross sections of FIGS. 17(a) and 17(b), respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 102 and 103, the sliding member 17532 in the seventeenth embodiment has an upright wall 17532c1 projecting from the lower side of the connecting portion 532a (lower side in FIG. 102(a)). The erected wall 17532c1 is provided with an erected wall 17532c1 whose tip is set at a position exceeding the lower end surface of the second case member 535 and whose tip is bent toward the front side.

The erected length of the erected wall 17532c1 toward the front side is such that when the first electric accessory 520 is closed, the upper and lower side surfaces are below the sensor device SE1 arranged in the second case member 535. Set to length located.

Further, an opening 17535b is formed through the second case member 535 in the vertical direction (see FIG. 103(a)). The second projection 17532c is arranged in a state of being inserted inside the opening 17535b.

Further, the opening width of the opening 17535b in the front-rear direction is set larger than the sliding width of the sliding member 17532 that slides in the front-rear direction (driving width of the solenoid 531). Thereby, the sliding member 17532 can be slid in the front-rear direction while the second projection 17532c is inserted inside the opening 17535b.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 103(a) and 103(b), when the first electric accessory 520 is closed, the standing wall 17532c1 is positioned downstream of the sensor device SE1 and the game is played. Ball penetration can be regulated. On the other hand, when the first electric accessory 520 is in the open state, the standing wall 17532c1 is arranged on the rear side of the opening of the sensor device SE1 (the hole for detecting the passage of the game ball). Thereby, when the first electric accessory 520 is in the open state, it is possible to insert the game ball.

Next, with reference to FIG. 104, the case where the first electric accessory is forced into the second state due to fraud by the player will be described. 104(a) and 104(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. FIG. 104(a) and 104(b) correspond to the cross sections of FIGS. 20(a) and 20(b), respectively. Also, FIG. 104(a) illustrates a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in a closed state, and FIG. 104(b) illustrates a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in an open state.

As shown in FIGS. 104(a) and 104(b), when the first electric accessory 520 is closed, the pair of feather members 520L and 520R are forcibly opened by the player's fraud. , When the first electric accessory 520 is in the open state, the front-rear position of the sliding member 17532 is the same as in the closed state, as in the first embodiment.

Therefore, when the first electric accessory 520 is forcibly opened, the standing wall 17532c1 is arranged downstream of the sensor device SE1. Therefore, the game ball entered from the second winning hole 140 is stagnated on the upper surface of the standing wall 17532c1.

In this case, the distance from the sensor device SE1 to the upper surface of the standing wall 17532c1 is set to a dimension that substantially matches the radius of the game ball. As a result, the game ball caught on the upper surface of the standing wall 17532c1 is always detected by the sensor device SE1. Therefore, when the sensor device SE1 detects the game ball for a predetermined time, the pachinko machine 10 can detect that the first electric accessory 520 has been illegally released. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from cheating and to notify the store manager of the player's cheating.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventeenth embodiment includes the sensor device SE1 for detecting a game ball entered into the second winning hole 140, and the upright wall 17532c1 is positioned downstream of the sensor device SE1. In addition, since the game ball is restricted at a position where it can be detected by the sensor device SE1, for example, when the feather members 520L and 520R are forcibly opened and the game ball illegally flows in from the ball entrance, the sensor device The state in which SE1 has detected the game ball can be continued. Therefore, by judging whether or not the detection by the sensor device SE1 has continued beyond a predetermined time, it is possible to detect that game balls have entered illegally.

Next, referring to FIG. 105, the rotating member 18812 of the eighteenth embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, the protrusion 2812a1 formed on the rotating member 2812 is formed at a constant radial distance from the axis of the hub 812a. They are formed at different radial spacings from the axis of 812a. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

105(a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member 18812 in the eighteenth embodiment, and FIG. 105(b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member 18812 along line CVb-CVb of FIG. 105(a).

As shown in FIG. 105, the hub 812a of the rotating member 18812 in the eighteenth embodiment has projections 18812a1 that protrude in a hemispherical shape toward the edge 824 side (see FIG. 35) of the outer reel unit 820 arranged oppositely. Have several.

The protrusions 18812a1 are formed with different radial distances from the axis of the adjacent protrusions 18812a and the hub 812a. As a result, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, the airflow generated by the first projection 18812a1 (located on the rotation side) is directed to the second projection 18812a1 (rotation rear side of the projection 18812a1). It can easily collide. Therefore, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, the airflow can be easily generated. As a result, air can be sent between the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 to clean the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 106, the relationship between the housing unit 880, the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 in the nineteenth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the side wall portion 881 of the housing unit 880 is formed in a plate-like shape, but the side wall portion 881 in the nineteenth embodiment is formed with a plurality of openings. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

106(a) and 12(b) are cross-sectional views of a decorative design display device 800 according to the nineteenth embodiment. 106(a) and 106(b) each illustrate a state in which the outer reel unit 820 is shifted (rotationally displaced). In addition, in FIG. 106(b), the opening 19881d formed in the side wall portion 881 is illustrated with a dashed line.

As shown in FIG. 106(a), a side wall portion 881 (see FIG. 30(a)) disposed on the left side of the decorative pattern display device 800 in front view is provided with a plurality of openings 19881d penetrating in the horizontal direction. be done.

The openings 19881d are formed at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction around the rotation shafts of the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 . The formation angle of the adjacent openings 19881d is set to be substantially the same as the formation angle of the spokes 812c of the inner reel unit 810 and the spokes 822 of the outer reel unit 820. In addition, the opening dimension of the opening 19881d in the circumferential direction is set smaller than the width dimension of the spokes 812c and 822 in the circumferential direction. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 106(a), by rotating the outer reel unit 820 (or the inner reel unit 810) to a predetermined position, the spokes 822 (or the spokes 812c) can be arranged next to the opening 19881d. can. That is, the opening 19881d can be covered with the spokes 822 (or the spokes 812c) in a side view.

Thereby, it is possible to suppress the inflow of air from the opening 19812c when the inner reel unit 810 (or the outer reel unit 820) is rotated.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 106(b), by rotating the outer reel unit 820 (or inner reel unit 810) to a predetermined position, the spokes 822 (or spokes 812c) are arranged at circumferential positions different from the opening 19881d. be able to.

This allows air to flow in from the opening 19812c when the inner reel unit 810 (or the outer reel unit 820) is rotated. That is, by making the inflow path of air the shortest and reducing the air resistance, it is possible to make it easier for the air to flow into the decorative pattern display device 800 (accommodating unit 880).

Therefore, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated and other symbols decorated on the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 are visually recognized by the player, the inflow of air from the opening 19881 d is restricted so that the inner reel 811 can be seen. The display can be easily visually recognized by the player. On the other hand, when cleaning the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821, the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 are cleaned by allowing the intake air to flow in from the opening 19881d. can be done easily.

The present invention has been described above based on the above embodiments, but the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. can be easily guessed.

In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of another one or more embodiments.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the pair of left and right feather members 520L and 520R other than the bulging portions 524L and 524R are formed symmetrically, but the configuration is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the protrusions 523L and 523R of the blade members 520L and 520R may be formed on the rotating member 533 side so that the blade members 520L and 520R have the same shape. In this case, since the feather members 520L and 520R can be formed from the same parts, the production cost of the feather members 520L and 520R can be reduced by sharing the parts.

In the first embodiment, the case where the inclined portion 625a of the reflecting member 625 is formed on a smooth surface has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the inclined portion 625a may be curved so as to protrude toward the light transmission portion 621a. In this case, the light reflected by the inclined portion 625a can be easily dispersed, and the light can be uniformly incident on the rear surface of the light transmitting portion 621a. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light that is visually recognized through the light transmitting portion 621a can be made uniform.

In the above-described first and eleventh embodiments, as a mode in which the decorative member 752 is biased to one side, the number of components arranged is different, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one side and the other side (both sides of the decorative member) may have different rigidity (dimensions, materials, etc. of the constituent members), or the driving force transmitted between the one side and the other side (size, (transmission time, transmission timing, etc.) are different, the state of connection between components on one side and the other is different (for example, the number of connected parts, the amount of looseness of the connected parts, etc.), and the one side and the other side are different. The easiness of displacement to the other party (biasing force received from the biasing means, gravity, resistance during displacement (slide or rotation), etc.) may be different between the two, or a combination of these may be used.

As a result, when the support state is biased to one side by the rigidity of the constituent members, the drive means 680U and the drive means 680D shift their own high-rigidity side (low side) to the counterpart's low-rigidity side (high side). can face Therefore, when the facing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are in contact with each other, the driving means 680U and the driving means 680D push (advance) the other on the side with high rigidity and move forward on the side with low rigidity. can form a state of accepting (retreating) the other party. As a result, the opposing sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

In the ninth embodiment, the case where the biasing spring displaces the first electric accessory 520 to the closed state has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by arranging a magnetic body inside the first electric accessory 520 and arranging a magnet on the front base 511 or the back base 512, the magnetic force of the magnet displaces the first electric accessory 520 to the closed state. It may be something that causes

In the above-described first and eleventh embodiments, the case in which the number of components provided is different as a mode in which the decorative member 752 is biased to one side has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, as a mode in which the first link member 684U and the second link member 686U (the second link member 686D and the first link member 684D) are configured differently from each other, the rigidity of the constituent members (the dimensions of the constituent members, the number of , materials, etc.), the state of connection between constituent members (for example, the number of connecting portions, the amount of looseness of the connecting portions, etc.) may be different, or a combination of these may be used. Due to these differences in configuration, the magnitude of the driving force to be transmitted and the timing of transmission are different, and the supporting modes of the driving means 680U and the driving means 680D are each biased to one side.

In the above-described first embodiment, the standing wall 532c1 is slidably formed inside the first case member 534, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 protrudes from the inside of the main body 531a, the standing wall 532c1 may protrude from the inside of the second prize winning opening 140 to the front side. In this case, it is possible to suppress the game ball from entering inside the second winning hole 140, so even if the feather members 520L and 520R are opened by fraud, the inside of the second winning hole 140 (upright It is possible to suppress the game ball from being stagnated in front of the wall 532c1. As a result, fraud by the player can be prevented.

In the twelfth and thirteenth embodiments, the game ball is guided in the front-rear direction by changing the shape of the side surface between the front base 511 and the rear base 512, but the present invention is not limited to this. .

For example, magnets may be arranged inside the front base 511 and the back base 512, and the game ball may be guided forward and backward by the attracting force of the magnets. Since this eliminates the need to narrow the space between the front base 511 and the rear base 512, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being sandwiched between the front base 511 and the rear base 512. In this case, it is preferable that the attracting force of the magnet is such that the game ball cannot be held on the attracting surface of the magnet. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being attracted to the side surfaces of the front base 511 and the rear base 512 .

In the above-described second and eighteenth embodiments, the hub 812a of the rotating member 18812 is provided with a plurality of projections 2812a1, 18812a1, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of recessed grooves may be formed in the side surface facing the edge 824 of the hub 812a. Also in this case, an airflow can be generated by the uneven shape of the grooves as in the second and eighteenth embodiments. As a result, air can be sent between the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 to clean the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 .

In the fifteenth embodiment, the case where the variable winning device 15065 is rotatably displaceable with respect to the game board 13 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the variable winning device 15065 can be slidably displaced in the front-rear direction with respect to the game board 13, and in the closed state, the variable winning device 15065 is immersed in the game board 13 and a game ball is inserted into the specific winning opening 65a. is disabled, and in the open state, the variable winning device 15065 projects to the front side of the game board 13 so that a game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Winning Port Unit 500 as an Example>
In a gaming machine comprising a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and a guide member having a guide surface for guiding the game ball to the ball entrance and formed to be displaceable, the guide member is a pair of protruding portions protruding from the guide surface and formed so as to contact a game ball rolling on the guide surface; A game machine A1 characterized in that the game machine A1 is arranged at different positions in a direction perpendicular to the guiding direction.

A game machine is known which has a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and a guide member which has a guide surface for guiding the game ball to the ball entrance and is formed to be displaceable. ing. Examples of the guide member include a pair of feather members having a guide surface that guides the game ball to the ball entrance, is disposed across the ball entrance, and is rotatably pivoted at the base end side. In this case, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-164598 discloses a technique in which a first groove is provided on the entire guide surface of one blade member and a second groove is provided on the entire guide surface of the other blade member. disclosed. According to this technique, since the first groove and the second groove are inclined in different directions, the game ball is simultaneously guided (rolled) on the guide surface of one blade member and the guide surface of the other blade member. Even when the game balls are moved, the game balls can be biased in different directions (one side is the glass plate side and the other side is the game board side). Therefore, each of these game balls can be smoothly entered into the ball entrance. However, the conventional technique described above has a problem that the game ball cannot be sufficiently biased. Also, a game ball entering from one side of the guide member may pass through the guide surface and pass through from the other side of the guide member. There was a problem that interest was lost.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, the guide member has a pair of protruding portions protruding from the guide surface and formed so as to be able to come into contact with the game ball rolling on the guide surface. Since the setting portions are arranged at different positions in a direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface, the game ball guided (rolled) on the guide surface is brought into contact with the projecting portion. By doing so, the game ball can be reliably biased. As a result, the ball can be smoothly entered into the entrance.

In addition, the pair of protruding portions are arranged at different positions in a direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface, so that the game ball entering from one side of the guide member is protruded. can be brought into contact with the part. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a game ball entering from one side of the guide member from passing through the guide member. As a result, the game ball is made to enter the ball entrance, and the interest of the player can be improved.

In the gaming machine A1, the guide member is formed as a pair of feather members arranged on both sides of the ball entrance and rotatably pivoted at the base end side, and the pair of feather members approach or separate at the tip end side. By rotating in the direction to allow the game ball to pass through, a closed state through which the game ball cannot pass or an open state through which the game ball can pass is formed. The projecting portion of one of the pair of feather members and the projecting portion of the other feather member are in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface. A game machine A2 characterized in that it is arranged in different positions.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effects of the game machine A1, the guide member is formed as a pair of feather members arranged on both sides of the ball entrance and rotatably supported at the proximal end side, and a pair of protrusions. The protruding portion protrudes from the guide surface of each of the pair of wing members, and the protruding portion of one wing member and the protruding portion of the other wing member of the pair of wing members extend along the guide surface. Since the game balls are arranged at different positions in a direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls are guided, the game balls guided (rolled) on the guide surfaces are brought into contact with the protruding portions, so that the game balls can be reliably moved. can be biased to As a result, it is possible to smoothly enter the ball into the ball entrance and to suppress ball clogging.

In addition, the projecting portion of one feather member and the projecting portion of the other feather member are orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface (the direction from the tip side to the base end side of the feather member). When a game ball entering the guide surface of one wing member reaches the guide surface of the other wing member, the game ball is moved to the other wing member. It can be brought into contact with the projecting portion. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a game ball that has entered the guide surface of one feather member from passing through the guide surface of the other feather member. As a result, the game ball is made to enter the ball entrance, and the interest of the player can be improved.

In the game machine A2, the projecting portion projects from the guide surface at a position closer to the base end side than the tip end side of the feather member.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects of the game machine A2, the protruding part protrudes from the guide surface at a position closer to the base end side than the tip end side of the wing member, so that it is guided by the guide surface. A rolling area can be secured before the game ball comes into contact with the protruding part. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the rolling speed of the game ball by that amount, so that the ball can enter the ball entrance smoothly.

In addition, since the protruding part protrudes from the protruding surface at a position closer to the base end side than the tip end side of the feather member, the course of the game ball that is biased by contacting the protruding part is changed to the ball entrance. It is possible to suppress returning to the course before the deviation until reaching the front of (end of the guide surface). In other words, the game ball can be easily thrown from the guide surface to the ball entrance while being biased.

In the game machine A2 or A3, the guide surface is formed with a first region that is continuous from the tip end side to the base end side of the feather member, and the game ball guided in the first region is not in contact. The projecting portion is formed with a size, and the first region of the guide surface of one blade member of the pair of blade members and the first region of the guide surface of the other blade member A game machine A4 characterized in that the game balls are arranged at different positions in a direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls are guided along the guide surface.

According to the game machine A4, in the game machine A2 or A3, the guide surface is formed with a first region that is continuous from the tip end side to the base end side of the wing member, and the game ball guided in the first region is unaffected. Since the protruding portion is formed with a size that allows contact, when the game ball that has entered the guide surface rolls in the first region, the rolling speed of the game ball can be prevented from decreasing, You can smoothly enter the ball into the entrance.

In this case, the first area of the guide surface of one of the pair of feather members and the first area of the guide surface of the other feather member are orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface. When the game balls are simultaneously guided (rolled) on the first area of the guide surface of one feather member and the first area of the guide surface of the other feather member, respectively However, the game balls can be biased in mutually different directions, and can be smoothly entered into the ball entrance.

Any one of the game machines A2 to A4, comprising a base member that rotatably supports the wing member, the base member comprising a restricting portion that contacts the wing member and restricts the rotation of the wing member, The game machine A5 is characterized in that the projecting portion of the feather member abuts against the regulating portion of the base member.

According to the game machine A5, any one of the game machines A2 to A4 includes a base member that rotatably supports the wing member, and the base member comes into contact with the wing member to regulate the rotation of the wing member. Since the regulating portion is provided and the projecting portion of the wing member abuts against the regulating portion of the base member, damage to the wing member can be suppressed. That is, since the projecting portion is a portion projecting from the wing member (guide surface), the portion of the wing member whose rigidity is relatively high can be used as a stopper for contacting the restricting portion of the base member. Damage to the feather member can be suppressed accordingly.

In the gaming machine A5, the projecting portion has a side surface that is substantially flush with the side surface of the base end of the feather member, and is substantially flush with the side surface of the base end of the feather member in the closed state. A gaming machine A6, wherein a side surface of the protruding portion to be formed is in contact with at least the restricting portion of the base member.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effects of the game machine A5, the side surface of the projecting portion is formed substantially flush with the side surface of the base end side of the wing member, and in the closed state, the side surface of the base end side of the wing member Since the side surface of the protruding portion formed substantially flush with the side surface of the base member abuts at least the restricting portion of the base member, the portion far from the rotation axis (side surface of the protruding portion) is the restricting portion of the base member. , the reaction force input from the restricting portion to the blade member can be reduced. Therefore, damage to the blade member can be suppressed. Further, for example, compared to the case where the protruding tip surface of the projecting portion is brought into contact with the restricting portion of the base member, the restricting portion of the base member can be separated from the ball entrance, and the flow to the ball entrance can be prevented. You can secure a space for the road. In addition to the side surface of the projecting portion, the proximal side surface of the feather member may also be brought into contact with the restricting portion of the base member. In this case, the contact pressure can be reduced, and damage to the blade member can be further suppressed.

In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A6, an intervening wall positioned between the opposing projecting portions in the closed state is provided, and the pair of feather members are configured so that the projecting portion is not formed when viewed in the rotation shaft direction. A gaming machine A7 characterized in that the facing interval of the guide surfaces in the area where the guide surface is positioned is set larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the facing interval of the projecting portion is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

Here, the pair of feather members are arranged at a position where the facing distance between the guide surfaces in the closed state is larger than the diameter of the game ball so as not to pinch the game ball. In this case, when the protruding portion is protruded from the guide surface, the pair of feather members are further spaced apart by the protruding height of the protruding portion so that the game ball is not caught between the protruding portions. As a result, the space required for arranging the pair of wing members increases.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A2 to A6, it is provided with an intervening wall positioned between the opposing protruding portions in the closed state, and the pair of feather members are connected to the rotating shaft. When viewed from the direction, the interval between the guide surfaces facing each other in the area where the projecting portion is not formed is made larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the interval between the projecting portions facing each other is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. The space required for arranging the pair of feather members can be suppressed.

That is, even if the pair of feather members begin to close (even if the transition to the closed state starts) in a state where the game ball is guided (rolled) on the guide surface, the intervening wall will remain between the opposed projecting portions. By positioning, the game ball can be ejected from between the projecting portions facing each other, and the game ball can be prevented from being caught between the projecting portions. A game ball ejected from between the opposing projecting portions by the intervening wall is positioned between the opposing guide surfaces in the area where the projecting portion is not formed. , the game ball is not caught. As a result, the distance between the projecting portions facing each other can be made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the space required for arranging the pair of feather members can be suppressed. In other words, the pair of feather members can be arranged in a space equivalent to the space required for arranging a conventional product that does not protrude from the guide surface.

In the game machine A7, in the open state, the upper surface of the intervening wall is positioned below the lower end of the guide surface in the direction of gravity and above the lower end of the ball entrance in the direction of gravity. Game machine A8.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effects of the game machine A7, in the open state, the upper surface of the intervening wall is positioned below the lower end of the guide surface in the direction of gravity and above the lower end of the ball entrance in the direction of gravity. Because of this position, a game ball guided by the guide surface can be thrown to the upper surface of the intervening wall, and can be made to enter the ball entrance by rolling the upper surface of the intervening wall.

In any one of the game machines A2 to A8, the timing at which one of the pair of feather members is arranged at the position forming the closed state and the other feather member is arranged at the position forming the closed state A gaming machine A9 characterized in that the timing to be played is different.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A2 to A8, the timing at which one of the pair of wing members is arranged at the position where the wing member forms the closed state and the other wing member Since the timing to be arranged at the position forming the closed state is different, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to be caught between the pair of feather members (guide surfaces), so that the opposing interval between the pair of feather members can be narrowed accordingly. Therefore, the space required for arranging the pair of feather members can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine A1, the guide member has a closed position in which the guide surface faces the ball entrance, thereby making it impossible for a game ball to enter the ball entrance, and a posture in which the guide surface faces upward. The guide surface of the guide member is formed to be rotatable between an open position and an open position that allows a game ball that projects toward the front side of the ball entrance and rolls on the guide surface to enter the ball entrance. The pair of projecting portions are formed to have a width equal to or greater than the width of the ball entrance, and the pair of projecting portions are disposed at positions sandwiching the ball entrance when viewed from the front. Also, the game machine A10 is arranged at different positions in a direction orthogonal to the width direction (the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface).

In the game machine A1, the guide member has a closed position in which the game ball is retracted below the ball entrance to prevent the game ball from entering the ball entrance, and a posture in which the guide surface is an upper surface. The guide surface of the guide member is slidably displaceable between an open position and an open position that allows game balls rolling on the guide surface to enter the ball entrance. The pair of protruding portions are formed to have a width equal to or larger than the width of the ball entry opening, and the pair of projecting portions are disposed at positions sandwiching the ball entry opening in a front view. , a gaming machine A11 characterized in that they are arranged at different positions in a direction perpendicular to the width direction (the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface).

According to the game machine A10 or A11, in addition to the effects of the game machine A1, the guide member has a guide surface with a width equal to or greater than the width of the ball entrance. The pair of protruding portions are arranged at positions across the ball entrance when viewed from the front, and are positioned in a direction orthogonal to the width direction (the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface). Since they are arranged differently, the game ball can be reliably biased by bringing the game ball guided (rolled) on the guide surface into contact with the projecting portion. As a result, the ball can be smoothly entered into the entrance.

In addition, one projecting portion and the other projecting portion are arranged at different positions in a direction orthogonal to the width direction of the guide member (the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface). When a game ball enters the guide surface of the guide member from one side (or the other side) in the width direction, the game ball can be brought into contact with either one of the pair of projecting portions. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a game ball that has entered the guide surface of the guide member from one side (or the other side) in the width direction from passing through the guide surface of the guide member and flowing out from the other side in the width direction of the guide surface of the guide member. As a result, the game ball is made to enter the ball entrance, and the interest of the player can be improved.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Winning Port Unit 500 as an Example>
A ball entrance into which a game ball can be entered, a pair of feather members arranged on both sides of the ball entrance, and driving means for applying a driving force to the pair of feather members to open or close them. Then, when the pair of feather members are opened by the driving force of the driving means, they are arranged in the allowable position for permitting entry of the game ball into the ball entrance, and the driving force of the driving means causes the pair of feather members to a regulating means arranged at a regulating position for regulating entry of a game ball into the ball entrance when the wing members are closed, wherein the pair of wing members is closed or the pair of wing members is closed; A gaming machine B1 characterized in that the regulating means is formed so as to be able to be maintained at the regulating position in a state in which the wing members are released from the outside.

Here, a ball entrance formed so that a game ball can be entered, a pair of feather members disposed on both sides of the ball entrance, and a driving force applied to the pair of feather members to open or close. When the pair of wing members are opened by the driving force of the driving means, they are arranged at the allowable position for allowing the entry of the game ball into the ball entrance, and the driving force of the driving means causes the pair of wing members to be opened. A gaming machine is known that includes a restricting means arranged at a restricting position for restricting entry of a game ball into a ball entrance when the member is closed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-172833).

According to this gaming machine, when the pair of feather members are released by the driving force of the driving means, the restricting means is arranged at the allowable position, so that the game ball that has passed between the pair of feather members is inserted into the entrance. You can enter the ball. On the other hand, when the pair of feather members are closed by the driving force of the driving means, the restricting means is placed at the restricting position, so that when the pair of feather members are forcibly opened from the outside, the game ball enters the ball entrance. You can regulate what is entered.

However, in the conventional game machine described above, since the displacement of the restricting means is not restricted, the restricting means can be displaced from the restricted position to the allowable position after forcibly releasing the pair of feather members from the outside. Therefore, there is a problem that the effect of regulating illegal entry of game balls into the ball entrance is insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, the arrangement of the regulating means can be maintained at the regulating position when the pair of wing members are closed or when the pair of wing members are opened from the outside. Displacement of the means to the permissible position can be suppressed. Therefore, illegal entry of game balls into the ball entrance can be easily regulated.

It should be noted that the restriction position for restricting the entry of the game ball into the entrance means that it is sufficient if the game ball is stopped at a predetermined position. That is, in the case of providing a ball entrance and a passage through which a game ball flowing in from the ball entrance passes, the regulating position (the position where the game ball is stopped) by the regulating means is positioned closer to the ball entrance than the ball entrance. It may be upstream or downstream of the ball entrance (that is, in the middle of the path flowing in from the ball entrance and passing through the passage). In the latter case, the regulating position by the regulating means may be upstream of the detecting means (detection sensor) disposed in the middle of the passage for detecting the passage of the game ball. It may be downstream of.

The game machine B1 comprises a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the pair of blade members, and the transmission mechanism is slidably displaced between an open slide position and a closed slide position by the driving force of the driving means. and the slide transmission member is rotated to the open rotational position by sliding displacement to the open slide position to open the pair of blade members, and is closed by sliding displacement to the closed slide position of the slide transmission member. a rotation transmission member that is rotated to a rotation position to close the pair of blade members; the regulation means is disposed on the slide transmission member; When the means is placed at the allowable position and the slide transmission member is slidably displaced to the closed slide position, the regulating means is placed at the regulated position, and with the slide transmission member placed at the closed slide position, the When the rotation transmission member is arranged at the open rotation position, the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member are engaged to restrict the slide displacement of the slide transmission member to the open slide position. Gaming machine B2.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1, when the rotation transmission member is arranged at the open rotation position while the slide transmission member is arranged at the closed slide position, the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member are arranged. Since the slide displacement of the slide transmission member to the open slide position is regulated by the engagement of , it is possible to easily regulate that the game ball is illegally entered into the ball entrance.

That is, when the closed pair of feather members are illegally opened from the outside, the rotation transmission member is rotated to the open rotation position while the slide transmission member is arranged at the closed slide position. In this state, the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member are engaged to restrict the slide displacement of the slide transmission member to the open slide position. It is possible to suppress illegal forced displacement to the position from the outside). As a result, even if the pair of feather members are forcibly released from the outside and the game ball is passed through between the pair of feather members, the entry of the game ball into the ball entrance is restricted by the restricting means. can.

In the game machine B2, one of the slide transmission member and the rotation transmission member has a sliding groove extending therefrom and a sliding projection projecting from the other, and the sliding projection slides along the sliding groove. As a result, the slide displacement of the slide transmission member is transmitted to rotate the rotation transmission member, and the slide projection is engaged with the inner wall surface of the slide groove, thereby releasing the slide transmission member. A gaming machine B3 characterized in that sliding displacement to a sliding position is regulated.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effects of the game machine B2, one of the slide transmission member and the rotation transmission member is extended with a sliding groove and the other is provided with a sliding projection, and the sliding projection slides. By sliding along the drive groove, the slide displacement of the slide transmission member is transmitted to rotate the rotation transmission member. Since the sliding displacement of the member to the open slide position is restricted, it is possible to make it difficult to release the restriction while achieving a size reduction.

That is, means for restricting the slide displacement of the slide transmission member to the open slide position can be formed by utilizing the slide groove and the slide protrusion for transmitting the slide displacement of the slide transmission member to the rotation transmission member to rotate it. Since it is not necessary to separately provide such means at another location, it is possible to reduce the size accordingly. In addition, by adopting a structure in which the sliding projection is engaged with the inner wall surface of the sliding groove, unauthorized access to the engaging portion from the outside can be made difficult, and the regulation (engagement) can be canceled accordingly. It can be difficult.

The game machine B1 comprises a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the pair of blade members, and the transmission mechanism is slidably displaced between an open slide position and a closed slide position by the driving force of the driving means. and the slide transmission member is rotated to the open rotational position by sliding displacement to the open slide position to open the pair of blade members, and is closed by sliding displacement to the closed slide position of the slide transmission member. a rotation transmission member that can be rotated to a rotation position to at least close the pair of blade members, wherein the restricting means is disposed on the rotation transmission member, and when the rotation transmission member is rotated to the open rotation position; When the regulating means is placed at the allowable position and the rotation transmission member is rotated to the closed rotation position, the regulating means is placed at the regulating position, and the slide transmission member is placed at the closed slide position and the rotation. In a state in which the transmission member is arranged at the closed rotation position, the rotation transmission member is engaged with the slide transmission member, thereby restricting rotation of the rotation transmission member to the open rotation position. Game machine B4 to play.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1, when the slide transmission member is arranged at the closed slide position and the rotation transmission member is arranged at the closed rotation position, the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member By being engaged, the rotation of the rotation transmission member to the open rotation position is restricted, so that illegal entrance of the game ball into the entrance can be easily restricted.

That is, from a state in which the pair of blade members are closed, for example, the pair of blade members are illegally forcibly opened from the outside, or the rotation transmission member is directly operated to rotate the rotation transmission member to the open position. Even if the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member are engaged with each other, the rotation of the rotation transmission member to the open rotation position is restricted. can be suppressed from being illegally forcibly displaced from the outside to the allowable position). As a result, the restricting means can restrict illegal entry of the game ball into the ball entrance.

In the gaming machine B4, a projecting portion projecting from one of the slide transmission member and the rotation transmission member, and an engaging portion formed on the other of the slide transmission member and the rotation transmission member so as to be able to engage with the projection. A gaming machine B5, wherein the protrusion protrudes along the direction of slide displacement of the slide transmission member.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects of the game machine B4, the projecting portion projecting from one of the slide transmission member and the rotation transmission member and the other of the slide transmission member and the rotation transmission member are engaged with the projection portion. and the protrusion protrudes along the direction of the slide displacement of the slide transmission member. and disengagement thereof can be switched, and the structure can be simplified.

The engaging portion may be a surface (the other outer surface of the slide transmission member or the rotation transmission member) with which the projection can come into contact, or a hole or recess (the slide transmission member or the rotation transmission member) into which the projection can be inserted. It may be a hole drilled in one of the members or a recess formed in one of the members. That is, it is sufficient that the rotation of the rotation transmission member to the open rotation position can be restricted by the contact of the protrusion with the engagement portion. In this case, it is preferable that the engaging portion be a hole or a recess. Since the projection is inserted into the engaging portion, the space required for arranging the projection can be reduced, and the size can be reduced. This is because it can be shielded from the outside, making it difficult to illegally access such a protrusion from the outside.

In the game machine B4 or B5, the rotation transmission member includes an opening side contact portion that contacts and opens the pair of feather members when rotated toward the open rotation position, and a contact portion that rotates toward the closed rotation position. A game machine B6 characterized by comprising a closing side abutting portion that abuts against and closes the pair of feather members when the game machine B6 is closed.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects of the game machine B4 or B5, the rotation transmission member includes an open side contact portion that contacts and opens the pair of feather members when rotated toward the open rotation position. and a closing side abutting portion that abuts and closes the pair of blade members when rotated toward the closing rotation position, so that the pair of blade members can be prevented from being illegally forced open from the outside, Unauthorized access from the outside to the rotation transmission member or the slide transmission member can be made difficult.

That is, when the wing member is displaced from the outside in the direction of forced opening, the closing-side abutment portion of the rotation transmission member is pressed by the wing member, and the rotation transmission member tends to rotate toward the open rotation position. In this case, according to the present invention, the rotation of the rotation transmission member to the open rotation position can be restricted by the engagement between the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member. It can be regulated by the department. That is, it is possible to restrict the wing member from being displaced from the outside in the direction of forced opening. As a result, it is possible to prevent the pair of feather members from being illegally forcibly released from the outside, making it difficult to illegally access the rotation transmission member or the slide transmission member from the outside.

In game machine B4 or B5, biasing means for biasing the pair of blade members in the closing direction is provided, and the rotation transmission member contacts the pair of blade members when rotated toward the open rotation position. a game machine characterized by comprising an opening-side abutting portion for opening by pressing, wherein when the rotation transmission member is rotated toward the closing rotation position, the pair of feather members are closed by the biasing force of the biasing means. B7.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effects of the game machine B4 or B5, it is provided with biasing means for biasing the pair of feather members in the closing direction, and when the rotation transmission member is rotated toward the open rotation position is provided with an opening-side abutting portion for contacting and opening the pair of blade members, and when the rotation transmission member is rotated toward the closed rotation position, the pair of blade members are closed by the biasing force of the biasing means, When the pair of blade members are illegally forcibly released from the outside, the pair of blade members do not come into contact with the rotation transmission member, and the external force due to such forced release can be avoided from acting on the rotation transmission member. As a result, it is possible to suppress damage to the pair of blade members, the rotation transmission member, or the slide transmission member.

Examples of the urging means include a spring (torsion spring or coil spring) that urges the pair of wing members in the closing direction with an elastic recovery force, and a magnet that urges the pair of wing members in the closing direction with an attractive force. be done.

Any one of the game machines B1 to B7 is provided with detection means for detecting a game ball entered into the ball entrance, and the regulation position of the regulation means is located downstream of the detection means. A gaming machine B8 characterized by regulating a game ball at a position detectable by a detecting means.

According to the game machine B8, any one of the game machines B1 to B7 is provided with a detection means for detecting a game ball entered into the ball entrance, and the regulation position of the regulation means is downstream of the detection means. At the same time, since the game ball is regulated at a position where it can be detected by the detection means, for example, when the wing member is forcibly opened and the game ball illegally flows in from the ball entrance, the detection means detects the game ball. The state can be continued. Therefore, by judging whether or not the detection by the detection means has continued beyond a predetermined time, it is possible to detect that game balls have entered illegally.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Decorative Design Display Device 800 as an Example>
In a gaming machine comprising a rotatably formed first reel and a rotatably formed second reel disposed substantially concentrically inside the first reel, the first reel is a cylindrical reel. and a first side wall projecting radially inward from one axial side of the first outer peripheral wall. The second reel is cylindrically shaped and has an outer surface a second outer peripheral wall facing the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall at a predetermined interval, and projecting radially inward from one side in the axial direction of the second outer peripheral wall, the outer surface of which is the inner surface of the first side wall and a second side wall facing each other at a predetermined interval, and a standing portion is erected from at least one of the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall to the other side. Machine C1.

Here, a rotatably formed first reel and a second reel disposed substantially concentrically inside the first reel and rotatably formed are provided (that is, a double reel structure is employed). ) is known (for example, JP-A-2003-230693). Also known is a technique for removing and cleaning dust adhering to the display surface of the reel by bringing a rotating brush into contact with the outer peripheral surface (display surface) of the reel and causing the rotating member to follow the rotation of the reel. (for example, JP-A-2009-28241).

However, the double reel structure has the problem of being difficult to clean. That is, in the double reel structure, a space for disposing the above-mentioned rotating brush cannot be secured between the outer reel (first reel) and the inner reel (second reel). And the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel (second reel) cannot be cleaned.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the first reel has a first outer peripheral wall formed in a cylindrical shape and a first side wall projecting radially inward from one side of the first outer peripheral wall in the axial direction. a second outer peripheral wall formed in a cylindrical shape, the outer surface of which faces the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall at a predetermined interval; and a second side wall projecting inward and having an outer surface opposed to the inner surface of the first side wall at a predetermined interval, and extending from at least one of the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall to the other. Since the standing portion is erected, wind pressure is generated by displacing the standing portion in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall. Air can flow between the inner surface of the outer peripheral wall and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral wall. As a result, dust can be removed by air flow, and the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral wall can be cleaned. That is, the double reel structure can be easily cleaned.

In the game machine C1, the game machine C2 is characterized in that the first side wall and the second side wall are formed in an annular shape when viewed in the axial direction and have surfaces that are continuous in the circumferential direction.

Here, when at least one of the first side wall and the second side wall has an opening or is partially divided in the circumferential direction, the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall may be separated from each other. The wind pressure generated by the displacement of the standing portion in the circumferential direction escapes through the openings and the divided portions, weakening the wind pressure and correspondingly increasing the pressure between the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral wall. It becomes difficult to move the air between them.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C2, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1, the first side wall and the second side wall are formed in an annular shape when viewed in the axial direction and have surfaces that are continuous in the circumferential direction. , the wind pressure generated by displacing the standing portion in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall can be increased. Therefore, the air between the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral wall can be made to flow more easily. As a result, the inner surface of the first outer wall and the outer surface of the second outer wall are separated from each other by utilizing the wind pressure generated by the displacement of the standing portion in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the first outer wall and the outer surface of the second outer wall. The air between the outer surface can be easily made to flow.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the first reel is rotatably pivoted at its center and includes a first support wall that supports the first side wall, and the second reel is rotatably pivoted at its center. A gaming machine C3 comprising a second supporting wall that supports and supports the second side wall, wherein an opening is formed in at least one of the first supporting wall and the second supporting wall.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1 or C2, an opening is formed in at least one of the supporting wall that supports the first side wall or the second supporting wall that supports the second side wall. Through the opening, the air between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall is exhausted to the outside, or the air is introduced from the outside to between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall. can inhale. That is, the air flow resistance is reduced, and the air between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall can be made to flow (outflow or inflow) more easily. As a result, the inner surface of the first outer wall and the outer surface of the second outer wall are separated from each other by utilizing the wind pressure generated by the displacement of the standing portion in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the first outer wall and the outer surface of the second outer wall. The air between the outer surface can be easily made to flow.

In the gaming machine C3, when the standing portion is erected on the first side wall or the second side wall of one of the first reel or the second reel, the other of the first reel or the second reel A gaming machine C4 characterized in that at least the opening is formed in the first support wall or the second support wall.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C3, when the standing portion is erected on the first side wall or the second side wall of one of the first reel or the second reel, the first reel or the second reel Since the opening is formed at least in the other first support wall or the second support wall of the second reel, the effect of reducing the flow resistance by exhausting or sucking air through the opening can be easily exhibited. . That is, when one of the first reel and the second reel on which the erected portion is erected is rotated, the other reel on which the opening is formed is stopped, so that the air flow through the opening is stopped. Flow (exhaust or intake) resistance can be reduced.

In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the gaming machine is characterized in that the standing portions are erected on the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall at different positions in the radial direction. C5.

In the gaming machine C5, in any one of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the standing portions are erected on the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall at different positions in the radial direction. Alternatively, even when either of the second reels is rotated, wind pressure can be generated by circumferentially displacing the standing portion between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of cleaning the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral wall in the performance caused by the rotation of the first reel or the second reel.

In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, at least a part of the first outer peripheral wall of the first reel is formed to have a light transmissive property, and a plurality of symbols are formed on the second outer peripheral wall of the second reel. A gaming machine C6 characterized by being arranged along the circumferential direction and having the erected portion erected on the second side wall of the second reel.

According to the gaming machine C6, in any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, at least a part of the first outer peripheral wall of the first reel is formed to have light transmittance, and the second outer peripheral wall of the second reel is formed. Since a plurality of symbols are arranged in the circumferential direction, the player can visually recognize the variation of the symbols accompanying the rotation of the second reel through the first reel. In this case, the erected portion is erected on the second side wall of the second reel, that is, the erected portion is erected on the second side wall of the second reel that rotates more times than the first reel. , the chances of cleaning the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral wall can be increased in the performance by the rotation of the first reel or the second reel.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Segment Display Device 600 as an Example>
A substrate on which a plurality of light-emitting means are mounted, and a transparent member that transmits light emitted from the light-emitting means, the transparent member is formed in a curved shape, and the plurality of light-emitting means are connected to the transparent member. A gaming machine D1, wherein the plurality of light emitting means are arranged at approximately equal intervals in the circumferential direction in the gaming machine arranged along the curve.

Here, a substrate on which a plurality of light emitting means are mounted and a transmitting member that transmits light emitted from the light emitting means are provided, and the transmitting member is formed in a curved shape, and the plurality of light emitting means are formed by bending the transmitting member. A game machine arranged along is known (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2013-106672). In this case, the plurality of light emitting means are arranged at regular intervals when the transmissive member is viewed from the front. That is, they are equally spaced along the direction of a line segment (chord) connecting both ends of a curved line (arc) formed by a plurality of light emitting means. However, in the game machine described above, since the distance between adjacent light emitting means is narrow in some of the plurality of light emitting means, there is a problem that the distribution of heat emitted by the light emitting means is uneven. As a result, heat tends to concentrate on a part of the light emitting means, which tends to shorten the life of the light emitting means.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, since a plurality of light emitting means are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction, the distance between each light emitting means and the adjacent light emitting means can be made constant, and the heat emitted by the light emitting means can be distributed. can be equalized. As a result, it is possible to prevent heat from concentrating on a part of the light emitting means, and to extend the life of each light emitting means.

The game machine D1 includes a reflecting member that reflects the light emitted from the light emitting means toward the transmitting member, and the reflecting member includes a plurality of division surfaces that are divided corresponding to the plurality of light emitting means. , the game machine D2, wherein the division widths of the transparent members of the plurality of division surfaces are set to be substantially the same when viewed from the front.

Here, when a plurality of light emitting means are arranged at equal intervals (that is, at equal intervals in the circumferential direction) along the curvature of the transmissive member, the plurality of light emitting means are arranged at unequal intervals when the transmissive member is viewed from the front. The Rukoto. That is, when the transmissive member is viewed from the front, an area where the distance between the light emitting means is narrow and an area where the distance between the light emitting means is wide are formed. Therefore, the distribution of the amount of light becomes non-uniform along the direction in which the plurality of light emitting means are arranged.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, it has a reflecting member for reflecting the light emitted from the light emitting means toward the transmitting member, and the reflecting member corresponds to a plurality of light emitting means. Since a plurality of demarcation planes are provided, and the demarcation widths of the plurality of demarcation planes in the front view of the transparent member are set to be substantially the same, the light amount of each demarcation plane visually recognized in the front view of the transmission member is approximately can be the same. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light along the arrangement direction of the plurality of light emitting means can be made uniform.

The game machine D3 is characterized in that, in the game machine D2, the light emitting surface of the light emitting means is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effects of the game machine D2, the light emitting surface of the light emitting means is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front. Since diffusibility can be ensured (light can be emitted at a wider angle), the distribution of the amount of light can be made uniform in one section plane.

In addition, the light emitting surface means the front surface of the encapsulating resin that encloses the LED chip. Therefore, the light-emitting surface having a rectangular shape in front view means that the shape of the encapsulating resin (the shape of the internal space of the reflector surrounding the encapsulating resin in front view) is rectangular.

In the game machine D3, at least some of the plurality of light emitting means are arranged such that one side of the light emitting surface is arranged along a tangential direction of the curved shape of the transmission member.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D3, at least some of the plurality of light emitting means are arranged so that one side of the light emitting surface is oriented along the tangential direction of the curved shape of the transmissive member. The light emitted from the light emitting means can be easily diffused uniformly along the curvature of the transmissive member. As a result, it is possible to uniformize the distribution of the amount of light transmitted through the transmissive member and visually recognized.

In any one of the game machines D2 to D4, the partition surface is formed as a curved surface facing the rear surface of the transparent member and recessed on the side away from the rear surface of the transparent member, and the light emitting surface of the light emitting means is arranged to face the transparent member. The game machine D5 is characterized in that it faces the space between the member and the division surface.

According to the game machine D5, in any one of the game machines D2 to D4, the partition surface is formed as a curved surface that faces the rear surface of the transparent member and is recessed on the side away from the rear surface of the transparent member, and the light emitting surface of the light emitting means faces the space between the transmissive member and the partition plane, the substrate can be arranged in a posture orthogonal to the transmissive member. That is, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in arranging the unit composed of the transmissive member, the substrate and the reflective member. In this case, since the demarcation plane is arranged in such a manner as to surround the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the light emitting means in a direction perpendicular to the traveling direction of the light, the light reflected by the demarcation plane is directed to the back surface of the transmissive member. The light can be incident uniformly. As a result, it is possible to uniformize the distribution of the amount of light transmitted through the transmissive member and visually recognized.

In the gaming machine D5, the reflecting member has a connecting surface that is connected to the partition surface and faces the light emitting surface of the light emitting means, and the connecting surface projects toward the light emitting surface of the light emitting means. A game machine D6 characterized in that it is formed as a curved surface that becomes

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D5, the reflecting member has a continuous surface that is connected to the partition surface and faces the light emitting surface of the light emitting means. Since it is formed as a curved surface that is convex toward the light emitting surface of , the light reflected by the continuous surface can be uniformly incident on the rear surface of the transmissive member. As a result, it is possible to uniformize the distribution of the amount of light transmitted through the transmissive member and visually recognized.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Segment Display Device 600 as an Example>
a plurality of rotatably formed drums arranged side by side at predetermined intervals; and a decorative member disposed along between the plurality of drums and at least a portion of which is light-transmitting. a substrate disposed on the rear side of the decorative member and on which a plurality of light emitting means are mounted, wherein the substrate is arranged with the surface on which the light emitting means are mounted being substantially orthogonal to the rear surface of the decorative member; The game machine E1 is provided with a reflecting member for reflecting the light emitted from the light emitting means to the back surface of the decorative member.

Here, a plurality of rotating drums are formed rotatably and are arranged side by side at predetermined intervals; A decorative member and a substrate on which a plurality of light-emitting means are mounted are provided on the back side of the decorative member, and the substrate is arranged so that the surface on which the light-emitting means is mounted is substantially perpendicular to the back surface of the decorative member. A game machine provided with a game machine is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-5927). According to this gaming machine, the decorative member not only shields the space between the spinning drums from the player, but also forms (displays) a pattern on the surface of the decorative member by the light emitted by the light-emitting means transmitted through the decorative member. An effect can be performed in which the pattern of the decorative member is visually recognized by the player integrally with the pattern displayed on the outer peripheral surface of the spinning drum.

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the board is arranged so that the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is orthogonal to the back surface of the decorative member, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means is sufficiently transmitted to the back surface of the decorative member. Therefore, the pattern formed (displayed) by the light from the light emitting means cannot be made sufficiently large. Therefore, there is a problem that the performance effect is insufficient. On the other hand, if the pattern formed (displayed) by the light from the light-emitting means is kept small and the decorative member (area excluding the pattern) is enlarged, the sense of unity between the decorative member and the reel is impaired.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E1, since the reflecting member for reflecting the light emitted from the light emitting means to the back surface of the decorative member is provided, the posture in which the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is perpendicular to the back surface of the decorative member is adopted. Even in the case where the substrate is provided, it is possible to widen the irradiation range of the back surface of the decorative member with the light emitted from the light emitting means. Therefore, the pattern formed (displayed) by the light from the light emitting means can be enlarged accordingly, and the presentation effect can be enhanced. In addition, since the pattern formed (displayed) by the light from the light emitting means can be made larger, the area excluding the pattern can be made smaller, so that the decorative member and the reel can be united.

In the gaming machine E1, the decorative member is located on the front side of the outer peripheral surface of the spinning drum, and is formed by extending an outer edge to a position overlapping the outer peripheral surface of the spinning drum in a front view. Characterized game machine E2.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, the decorative member is positioned closer to the front than the outer peripheral surface of the spinning drum, and the outer edge extends to a position overlapping the outer peripheral surface of the spinning drum in a front view. Since it is formed to protrude, the axial end surface of the spinning drum can be easily shielded from the player (difficult to be visually recognized). In addition, since the design of the decorative member formed (displayed) by the light emitted from the light emitting means and the design displayed on the outer peripheral surface of the spinning drum can be brought closer, the decorative member and the spinning drum can be brought closer together. You can easily create a feeling.

In the game machine E2, the reflecting member connects the surface of the substrate on which the light emitting means is mounted and the back surface of the decorative member, so that the region of the substrate on which the light emitting means is mounted and the design of the decorative member are aligned. A gaming machine E3, wherein the rear surface of the reflecting member is inclined in a direction away from the axial end surface of the spinning drum as it goes from the decorative member toward the substrate.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2, the reflecting member connects the surface of the substrate on which the light emitting means is mounted and the back surface of the decorative member, thereby reducing the area of the substrate on which the light emitting means is mounted. and the region of the decorative member where the pattern is formed, and the back surface of the reflecting member is inclined in a direction away from the axial end face of the drum as it goes from the decorative member toward the substrate, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means While ensuring the size of the pattern formed (displayed) by, the back surface of the decorative member is brought close to the outer peripheral surface of the drum, and the drum is inserted deep into the back surface of the decorative member (the drum is placed on the substrate can be brought close to). As a result, the axial end face of the spinning drum can be easily shielded from the player (difficult to be visually recognized), and a sense of unity between the decorative member and the spinning drum can be easily formed.

A gaming machine E4 in which the light emitting means are mounted on both one side and the other side of the board in the gaming machine E2 or E3.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effects of the game machine E2 or E3, since the light emitting means are mounted on both one side and the other side of the board, the light emission mounted on one side is Different patterns can be independently formed (displayed) on the decorative member by the light emitted from the means and the light emitted from the light emitting means mounted on the other side.

In this case, the number of substrates arranged between the drums arranged side by side can be reduced to one. Therefore, the space required for arranging the substrate can be reduced, so that the spinning drum can be inserted into the rear side of the back surface of the decorative member (bringing the spinning drum closer to the substrate). As a result, the axial end face of the spinning drum can be easily shielded from the player (difficult to be visually recognized), and a sense of unity between the decorative member and the spinning drum can be easily formed.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Segment Display Device 600 as an Example>
A game machine comprising a first displacement member and a second displacement member which are arranged oppositely and displaceable in directions of approaching or separating, respectively, and displaceable in the same direction with the opposing sides in contact with each other. a base member; and a first support mechanism and a second support mechanism that displaceably support the first displacement member and the second displacement member on the base member, respectively; The second displacement that is biased to one side of the opposing side of the first displacement member and is on the side opposite to the other side of the opposing side of the second displacement member that is in contact with one side of the opposing side of the first displacement member. A game machine F1 characterized in that the support mode of the second support mechanism is biased to one side of the opposed side of the member.

Here, a first displacement member and a second displacement member are provided so as to be opposed to each other and displaceable in directions of approaching or separating, respectively, and displaceable in the same direction with the opposing sides in contact with each other. A game machine with a game machine is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-106844). According to such a game machine, by bringing the first displacement member and the second displacement member close to the position where the opposing sides abut against each other, an object (for example, , a liquid crystal display device and a production member), and by displacing the first displacement member and the second displacement member in a direction away from each other, the shielding is released along with the displacement, and the object can be viewed. You can perform a production to do. Further, by displacing the first displacement member and the second displacement member in the same direction (for example, reciprocating displacement in one direction and the other direction) while the opposing sides are in contact with each other, the shielding of the target is maintained. , it is also possible to perform an effect before the shielding is released (an effect to focus on the action of releasing the shielding).

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, it is difficult to bring the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member into close contact due to dimensional tolerances and assembly tolerances of the constituent members. There is a problem that a gap may be formed in the If a gap is formed between the opposing sides, the player can visually recognize the object on the back side through the gap, and the presentation effect is hindered.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F1, the base member is provided with a first support mechanism and a second support mechanism that displaceably support the first displacement member and the second displacement member, respectively. The support mode of the mechanism is biased to one side of the opposing side of the first displacement member, and is opposite to the other side of the opposing side of the second displacement member that abuts on one side of the opposing side of the first displacement member. Since the support mode of the second support mechanism is biased toward one side of the opposing side of the second displacement member, when the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other, the first support mechanism The support mode and the support mode of the second support mechanism can be biased to opposite sides (sides rotated by 180° around the center of one side and the other side of the opposing sides). As a result, the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

Here, as a mode in which the support state is biased to one side, for example, one side and the other side have different rigidity of the constituent members (the dimensions of the constituent members, the number of arranged members, the material, etc.), and the one side and the other side have different rigidity. The driving force transmitted between the two sides (e.g., magnitude, transmission time, transmission timing, etc.) is different, and the state of connection between components on one side and the other (e.g., the number of connecting parts, the number of connecting parts, etc.) The amount of slamming, etc.) differs between one side and the other, and the easiness of displacement to the other side (biasing force received from biasing means, gravity, resistance during displacement (slide or rotation), etc.) is different. , a combination thereof, and the like.

Therefore, when the support state is biased to one side due to the rigidity of the constituent members, the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism align their own higher rigidity side (lower side) with the opponent's lower rigidity side (higher side). ). Therefore, when the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other, each of the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism pushes (advances) the other on the high-rigidity side, On the side with low rigidity, it is possible to form a state of accepting (retreating) the opponent. As a result, the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine F1, the first support mechanism includes first driving means for generating driving force, a pair of first connecting members for connecting the first displacement member to the base member, and the pair of first connecting members. a first one-side transmission member and a first other-side transmission member configured differently from each other for respectively transmitting the driving force of the first driving means to the second support mechanism; 2 driving means, a pair of second connecting members for connecting the second displacement member to the base member, and a configuration different from each other while transmitting the driving force of the second driving means to the pair of second connecting members, respectively. A game machine F2 characterized by comprising a second one-side transmission member and a second other-side transmission member.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effects of the game machine F1, the first support mechanism includes the first driving means for generating the driving force and the pair of first connecting members for connecting the first displacement member to the base member. , a first one-side transmission member and a first other-side transmission member that transmit the driving force of the first driving means to the pair of first connecting members, respectively, and have different configurations, the second support mechanism is a second driving means for generating a driving force; a pair of second connecting members for connecting the second displacement member to the base member; Since the second one-side transmission member and the second other-side transmission member having different configurations are provided, the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact, and a gap can be formed between the opposing sides. It can be suppressed from being formed.

That is, in a state where the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other, the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism each have, for example, a large driving force side and a driving force transmission timing. A state can be formed in which the forward side pushes the opponent (advance), and the side where the driving force is smaller or the driving force transmission timing is later receives the opponent (retreats). As a result, the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

Here, as a mode in which the first one-side transmission member and the first other-side transmission means (the second one-side transmission member and the second other-side transmission means) are configured differently from each other, for example, the rigidity of the constituent members (configuration Examples include those with different member dimensions, number of arrangements, materials, etc.), those with different connection states between constituent members (e.g., the number of connecting parts, the amount of looseness at the connecting parts, etc.), and those with a combination of these. be done. That is, the magnitude of the driving force to be transmitted and the transmission timing are different due to the difference in configuration, and the support modes of the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism are each biased to one side.

In the game machine F2, the first connecting member and the second connecting member are formed to have substantially the same length, one end side is connected to the first displacement member or the second displacement member, and the other end side is the base member. A gaming machine F3 characterized by being coaxially rotatably supported on the same axis.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effects of the game machine F2, the first connecting member and the second connecting member are formed to have substantially the same length, and one end side is the first displacement member or the second displacement member. Since the first displacement member and the second displacement member are connected to the member and the other end side is coaxially rotatably supported by the base member, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are caused to reciprocate in the same direction while their opposing sides are in contact with each other. In fact, even when the bias of the support mode is used, it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the opposing sides are in contact with each other.

In the game machine F3, at least one of the first connecting member and the second connecting member is provided with an elastic body formed of a rubber-like elastic material, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are arranged on opposite sides. a gaming machine F4, wherein the elastic body is interposed between the first connecting member and the second connecting member in an elastically compressed state when the two are in contact with each other.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects of the game machine F3, at least one of the first connecting member and the second connecting member is provided with an elastic body formed of a rubber-like elastic material, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other, the elastic body is interposed between the first connecting member and the second connecting member in an elastically compressed state. When the second displacement member is caused to reciprocate in the same direction while the opposing sides are in contact with each other, it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the opposing sides are in contact with each other even when the bias of the support mode is used.

In any one of the game machines F1 to F4, the first support mechanism includes first driving means for generating a driving force, and is driven by the first driving means and connects the first displacement member to the base member. The second support mechanism includes a pair of first connecting members, and a first one-side biasing member and a first other-side biasing member that apply different biasing forces to the pair of first connecting members, respectively. a second driving means for generating a force; a pair of second connecting members driven by the second driving means and connecting the second displacement member to the base member; A game machine F5 comprising a second one-side biasing member and a second other-side biasing member that apply a biasing force.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the first support mechanism includes the first driving means for generating the driving force, and the first driving means driven by the first driving means. a pair of first connecting members for connecting the displacement member to the base member, and a first one-side biasing member and a first other-side biasing member for applying different biasing forces to the pair of first connecting members, The second support mechanism includes second driving means for generating a driving force, a pair of second connecting members driven by the second driving means and connecting the second displacement member to the base member, and a pair of second Since the second one-side biasing member and the second other-side biasing member that apply different biasing forces to the two connecting members are provided, the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, It is possible to suppress the formation of gaps between the opposing sides.

That is, in a state in which the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other, each of the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism pushes (moves forward) the other on the side where the biasing force is large, for example. ), the side with a smaller biasing force can form a state of accepting (retreating) the opponent. As a result, the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

The first one-side biasing member and the first other-side biasing member may have the same configuration. That is, the biasing forces applied to the pair of first connecting members may be different by different positions at which the biasing forces are applied or by different amounts of elastic deformation. The same applies to the second one-side biasing member and the second other-side biasing member.

In any one of the game machines F1 to F4, the first support mechanism includes first driving means for generating a driving force, and is driven by the first driving means and connects the first displacement member to the base member. The second support mechanism includes a pair of first connecting members and a first biasing member that applies a biasing force to one of the pair of first connecting members. a pair of second connecting members that are driven by the second driving means and connect the second displacement member to the base member; 2. A game machine F6, characterized by comprising 2 urging members.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines F1 to F4, the first support mechanism includes the first driving means for generating the driving force, and the first driving means driven by the first driving means. The second support mechanism includes a pair of first connecting members that connect the displacement member to the base member, and a first biasing member that applies a biasing force to one of the pair of first connecting members. a pair of second connecting members driven by the second driving means and connecting the second displacement member to the base member; and attached to one of the pair of second connecting members. Since the second biasing member that applies a force is provided, the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

That is, when the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other, each of the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism, for example, pushes the other on the side to which the biasing force is applied ( advance), and the side on which the biasing force is not applied can form a state of accepting (retreating) the opponent. As a result, the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

In the game machine F3 or F4, one leg is formed as a torsion spring and the other leg is connected to the first connecting member and the other leg is connected to the base member to bring the first displacement member closer to the second displacement member. a first torsion spring that applies a biasing force in a direction to move the first torsion spring, and one of the first torsion springs is rotated in a direction to bring the first displacement member closer to the second displacement member. A game machine F7 characterized in that at least one of a connecting position between the leg of the first torsion spring and the first connecting member or a connecting position between the other leg of the first torsion spring and the base member is separated from the winding portion.

According to the game machine F7, in addition to the effects of the game machine F3 or F4, one leg is connected to the first connecting member and the other leg is connected to the base member, and the first displacement member is formed as a torsion spring. is provided with a first torsion spring that exerts an urging force in the direction of approaching the second displacement member. The driving force of the first driving means required for the movement can be assisted by the biasing force of the first torsion spring. Therefore, for example, when the first displacement member is displaced from the resting state to the abutment position where the first displacement member is in contact with the second displacement member from the retracted position away from the second displacement member, the displacement can be smoothly started. can.

In this case, as the first connecting member rotates in the direction in which the first displacement member approaches the second displacement member, the connecting position between one leg of the first torsion spring and the first connecting member or the position of the first torsion spring Since at least one of the connection positions between the other leg and the base member is separated from the winding portion, the distance from the winding portion to the position where the force is applied increases, and the first displacement member is brought closer to the second displacement member. It is possible to weaken the urging force in the direction to make it move. Therefore, for example, when stopping the first displacement member brought close to the second displacement member, the displacement can be reliably stopped, so damage due to collision can be suppressed. Further, when the first displacement member and the second displacement member are reciprocally displaced in the same direction with the opposing sides in contact with each other, the driving force required for the reciprocating displacement can be suppressed, so the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement can be reduced. can be increased, and the production effect can be improved.

In the game machine F7, one leg formed as a torsion spring is connected to the second connecting member and the other leg is connected to the base member, and the direction in which the second displacement member approaches the first displacement member one leg of the second torsion spring as the second connecting member is rotated in a direction to bring the second displacement member closer to the first displacement member. and the second connecting member or at least one of the connecting position between the other leg of the second torsion spring and the base member is separated from the winding portion.

According to the game machine F8, the second torsion spring has the same effect as the first torsion spring in the game machine F7. In particular, when the first displacement member and the second displacement member are reciprocally displaced in the same direction with their opposing sides in contact with each other, the driving force required for the reciprocating displacement can be suppressed in both, which is particularly effective. Become. In addition, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are at the same height (positioned in the direction of gravity), and the contact position between the two is the highest position (or the lowest position) in the direction of gravity, and the distance between the two is the highest (or the lowest position) in the direction of gravity. The configuration of the game machine F8 is particularly effective when the position (retreat position) is the lowest position (or the highest position) in the direction of gravity.

A game machine F9 characterized in that, in the game machine F7, the first displacement member is displaced upward in the direction of gravity so as to approach the second displacement member.

According to the game machine F9, in addition to the effects of the game machine F7, the first displacement member is displaced upward in the direction of gravity to bring it closer to the second displacement member, so that the first displacement member moves downward in the direction of gravity. The biasing force in the direction of displacing the first displacement member upward in the gravitational direction can be increased as the position of the first displacement member increases (that is, the higher the position of the first displacement member in the gravitational direction, the greater the biasing force in the direction of displacing the first displacement member upward in the gravitational direction. can weaken the urging force).

Therefore, when displacing (raising) the first displacement member upward in the gravitational direction from a stopped state, the displacement (raising) can be smoothly started, and the raised first displacement member is stopped. In some cases, the displacement can be reliably stopped not only by the action of gravity but also by weakening the urging force. As a result, damage due to collision with the second displacement member can be suppressed. On the other hand, when stopping the first displacement member that has been displaced (lowered) downward in the direction of gravity, the biasing force is strengthened so that the biasing force is made to oppose the action of gravity that attempts to continue the descent. be able to. As a result, it is possible to reliably stop the first displacement member.

In the game machine F9, one leg formed as a torsion spring is connected to the second connecting member and the other leg is connected to the base member, and the direction in which the second displacement member is separated from the first displacement member The second displacement member is separated from the first displacement member by upward displacement in the direction of gravity, and the second displacement member is moved by the first displacement member As the second connecting member is rotated in the direction of approaching the second connecting member, the connecting position between one leg of the second torsion spring and the second connecting member or the connection position between the other leg of the second torsion spring and the base member A game machine F10 characterized in that at least one of the connection positions of is separated from the winding portion.

According to the game machine F10, in addition to the effects of the game machine F9, one leg formed as a torsion spring is connected to the second connecting member, the other leg is connected to the base member, and the second displacement member is moved to the second position. The second displacement member is provided with a second torsion spring that exerts a biasing force in a direction to move away from the first displacement member, and the second displacement member is displaced upward in the direction of gravity to be separated from the first displacement member. in a direction away from the first displacement member, i.e., when it is necessary to displace (raise) the second displacement member against the direction of gravity, the first coupling member required to rotate The driving force of the second driving means can be assisted by the biasing force of the second torsion spring. Therefore, the displacement can be performed smoothly.

In this case, as the second connecting member is rotated in the direction in which the second displacement member is brought closer to the first displacement member, the connecting position between one leg of the second torsion spring and the second connecting member or the position of the second torsion spring Since at least one of the connection positions between the other leg and the base member is separated from the winding portion, the second displacement member is separated from the first displacement member by the length of the distance from the winding portion to the force acting position. It is possible to weaken the urging force in the direction of increasing (the direction of increasing upward in the direction of gravity). Therefore, for example, when the first displacement member and the second displacement member are reciprocally displaced in the same direction with their opposing sides in contact with each other, the driving force required for the reciprocating displacement can be suppressed. The displacement speed can be increased, and the production effect can be improved.

A game machine K1, wherein the game machine is a slot machine in any one of the game machines A1 to A10, B1 to B8, C1 to C6, D1 to D6, E1 to E4 and F1 to F10. Above all, as a basic configuration of a slot machine, it is provided with variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then displaying the identification information in a fixed manner, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

A gaming machine K2, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B8, C1 to C6, D1 to D6, E1 to E4 and F1 to F10. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.
Any one of the game machines A1 to A10, B1 to B8, C1 to C6, D1 to D6, E1 to E4 and F1 to F10 is a combination of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. Characteristic game machine K3. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
A game machine such as a pachinko machine, comprising a ball entrance into which a game ball can be entered, and a guide member having a guide surface for guiding the game ball to the ball entrance and formed to be displaceable. Gaming machines are known (for example, Patent Document 1: JP-A-2003-164598). Examples of the guide member include a pair of feather members having a guide surface that guides the game ball to the ball entrance, is disposed across the ball entrance, and is rotatably pivoted at the base end side. Patent Literature 1 discloses a technique in which a first groove is provided on the entire guide surface of one blade member and a second groove is provided on the entire guide surface of the other blade member.
However, the gaming machine described above has a problem that the game ball cannot be sufficiently biased.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a game machine capable of biasing a game ball.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the game machine of Technical Concept 1 has a ball entrance into which a game ball can be entered, and a guide surface for guiding the game ball to the ball entrance, and is formed displaceably. The guide member comprises a pair of protruding portions protruding from the guide surface and formed so as to come into contact with a game ball rolling on the guide surface; A pair of protruding portions are arranged at different positions in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface.
The gaming machine according to Technical Idea 2 is the gaming machine according to Technical Idea 1, wherein the guide member is formed as a pair of wing members which are disposed across the ball entrance and whose base ends are rotatably supported. By rotating the pair of feather members in a direction in which the tip side approaches or separates, a closed state in which a game ball cannot pass or an open state in which a game ball can pass is formed, and the pair of projecting portions is projected from each guide surface of the pair of wing members, and the projecting portion of one wing member and the projecting portion of the other wing member of the pair of wing members are aligned with the guide surfaces are arranged at different positions in a direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along.
The gaming machine according to Technical Idea 3 is the gaming machine according to Technical Idea 2, wherein the protruding portion protrudes from the guide surface at a position closer to the base end side than the tip end side of the feather member.
<effect>
According to the game machine described in technical idea 1, the game ball can be biased.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, the game ball can be biased.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, it is possible to smoothly enter the ball into the ball entrance.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 Game board 140 2nd prize-winning entrance (ball entrance)
15065 variable winning device (guide member)
15065a side (guide surface)
15065b bulging portion (protruding portion)
15065c bulging portion (protruding portion)
65a Specific winning port 510 Base member 511b2 Engagement portion (restriction portion)
511b1 standing portion (intervening wall)
520 first electric accessory (guide member)
520L Feather member 520R Feather member 524L Bulging portion (protruding portion)
524R bulging portion (protruding portion)
526L side (guide surface)
526R side (guide surface)
531 solenoid (driving means)
532 second projection (restriction means)
532, 8532 Sliding member (slide transmission member)
532d engagement groove (sliding groove)
8532e third projection (projection)
533, 7533, 8533, 9533 Rotating member (rotation transmitting member)
533a connecting portion (engaging portion)
533b projection (sliding projection)
8533e Second projection (limiting means)
621 light transmission member (transmission member, decoration member)
624 base member (base)
624a LED (light emitting means)
625 reflective member 625a1 reflective surface (connected surface)
625b recess (partition plane)
660 base member 672U displacement member (first displacement member)
672D displacement member (second displacement member)
680U drive means (first support mechanism)
680D drive means (second support mechanism)
684U first link member (first one-side transmission member)
684D first link member (second one-side transmission member)
686U second link member (first other side transmission member)
686U second link member (second other side transmission member)
800 decorative pattern display device (rotating)
810 inner reel unit (second reel)
811 inner reel (second outer peripheral wall)
812 hub (second side wall)
812a1 Protrusion (upright portion)
812c spoke (second supporting wall)
812c1 inner opening (opening)
5813a projection (upright portion)
820 outer reel unit (first reel)
821 outer reel (first outer peripheral wall)
822 spokes (first supporting wall)
824 edge (first side wall)
3824a projection (upright portion)
825 outer opening (aperture)
SP1 torsion spring (biasing member, first torsion spring)
SP2 torsion spring (biasing member, second torsion spring)

Claims (3)

A gaming machine comprising a ball entry hole into which a game ball can enter, and a guide member having a guide surface for guiding the game ball to the ball entry hole and formed to be displaceable,
The guide member includes a pair of protruding portions that protrude from the guide surface and are formed to contact a game ball rolling on the guide surface,
A gaming machine characterized in that the pair of protrusions are arranged at different positions in a direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface. The guide member is formed as a pair of wing members arranged to sandwich the ball inlet and rotatably supported at the base end side, and the pair of wing members are rotated in a direction to bring the tip side closer to or away from the guide member. By doing so, a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass or an open state in which the game ball can pass is formed,
The pair of protruding portions protrude from the respective guide surfaces of the pair of wing members, and the protruding portion on one wing member and the protruding portion on the other wing member of the pair of wing members. 2. The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the positions are different in a direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface. 3. The game machine according to claim 2, wherein the protruding portion protrudes from the guide surface at a position closer to the base end side than the tip end side of the feather member.

Images